PHP Manual

Reviews
Shared by: Honey Singh
Categories
Tags
Stats
views:
2423
rating:
10(1)
reviews:
0
posted:
11/12/2007
language:
pages:
0
PHP Manual Stig Sæther Bakken Alexander Aulbach Egon Schmid Jim Winstead Lars Torben Wilson Rasmus Lerdorf Zeev Suraski Edited by Stig Sæther Bakken Egon Schmid PHP Manual by Stig Sæther Bakken, Alexander Aulbach, Egon Schmid, Jim Winstead, Lars Torben Wilson, Rasmus Lerdorf, and Zeev Suraski by Edited by Stig Sæther Bakken Edited by Egon Schmid Published Mon Jun 12 22:46:08 EEST 2000 Copyright © 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 by the PHP Documentation Group Copyright This manual is © Copyright 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 by the PHP Documentation Group. The members of this group are listed on the front page of this manual. This manual can be redistributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. Table of Contents Preface ............................................................................................................................................... 47 About this Manual..................................................................................................................... 47 I. Getting Started .............................................................................................................................. 48 1. Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 49 What is PHP?................................................................................................................... 49 What can PHP do?........................................................................................................... 49 A brief history of PHP..................................................................................................... 50 2. Installation............................................................................................................................. 51 Downloading the latest version ....................................................................................... 51 Installation on UNIX systems ......................................................................................... 51 Quick Installation Instructions (Apache Module Version) .................................... 51 Configuration ......................................................................................................... 52 Apache module ...................................................................................................... 52 fhttpd module ......................................................................................................... 52 CGI version............................................................................................................ 53 Database Support Options...................................................................................... 53 Adabas D ...................................................................................................... 53 dBase ............................................................................................................ 53 filePro ........................................................................................................... 53 mSQL ........................................................................................................... 53 MySQL......................................................................................................... 54 iODBC.......................................................................................................... 54 OpenLink ODBC.......................................................................................... 54 Oracle ........................................................................................................... 55 PostgreSQL .................................................................................................. 55 Solid ............................................................................................................. 55 Sybase........................................................................................................... 55 Sybase-CT .................................................................................................... 55 Velocis .......................................................................................................... 56 A custom ODBC library............................................................................... 56 Unified ODBC.............................................................................................. 56 LDAP............................................................................................................ 57 Other configure options.......................................................................................... 57 --with-mcrypt=DIR...................................................................................... 57 --enable-sysvsem .......................................................................................... 57 --enable-sysvshm.......................................................................................... 57 --with-xml..................................................................................................... 57 --enable-maintainer-mode ............................................................................ 58 --with-system-regex...................................................................................... 58 --with-config-file-path .................................................................................. 58 --with-exec-dir.............................................................................................. 58 4 --enable-debug.............................................................................................. 58 --enable-safe-mode....................................................................................... 59 --enable-track-vars........................................................................................ 59 --enable-magic-quotes .................................................................................. 59 --enable-debugger......................................................................................... 59 --enable-discard-path.................................................................................... 59 --enable-bcmath............................................................................................ 60 --enable-force-cgi-redirect ........................................................................... 60 --disable-short-tags....................................................................................... 60 --enable-url-includes .................................................................................... 61 --disable-syntax-hl........................................................................................ 61 CPPFLAGS and LDFLAGS......................................................................... 61 Building ................................................................................................................. 61 Testing.................................................................................................................... 61 Benchmarking ........................................................................................................ 61 Installation on Windows 95/98/NT systems.................................................................... 62 General Installation Steps ...................................................................................... 62 Windows 95/98/NT and PWS/IIS 3....................................................................... 63 Windows NT and IIS 4 .......................................................................................... 64 Windows 9x/NT and Apache 1.3.x ........................................................................ 64 Omni HTTPd 2.0b1 for Windows.......................................................................... 65 PHP Modules ......................................................................................................... 65 Problems? ........................................................................................................................ 66 Read the FAQ ......................................................................................................... 66 Bug reports............................................................................................................. 66 Other problems....................................................................................................... 66 3. Configuration ........................................................................................................................ 67 The configuration file ...................................................................................................... 67 General Configuration Directives .......................................................................... 67 Mail Configuration Directives ............................................................................... 71 Safe Mode Configuration Directives...................................................................... 72 Debugger Configuration Directives ....................................................................... 72 Extension Loading Directives................................................................................ 72 MySQL Configuration Directives.......................................................................... 73 mSQL Configuration Directives ............................................................................ 73 Postgres Configuration Directives ......................................................................... 73 Sybase Configuration Directives............................................................................ 74 Sybase-CT Configuration Directives ..................................................................... 74 Informix Configuration Directives......................................................................... 75 BC Math Configuration Directives ........................................................................ 76 Browser Capability Configuration Directives........................................................ 76 Unified ODBC Configuration Directives............................................................... 76 4. Security ................................................................................................................................. 78 CGI binary ....................................................................................................................... 78 5 Possible attacks ...................................................................................................... 78 Case 1: only public files served ............................................................................. 79 Case 2: using --enable-force-cgi-redirect............................................................... 79 Case 3: setting doc_root or user_dir ...................................................................... 79 Case 4: PHP parser outside of web tree ................................................................. 80 Apache module................................................................................................................ 80 II. Language Reference .................................................................................................................... 82 5. Basic syntax .......................................................................................................................... 83 Escaping from HTML ..................................................................................................... 83 Instruction separation ...................................................................................................... 83 Comments........................................................................................................................ 84 6. Types ..................................................................................................................................... 85 Integers ............................................................................................................................ 85 Floating point numbers.................................................................................................... 85 Strings.............................................................................................................................. 85 String conversion ................................................................................................... 87 Arrays .............................................................................................................................. 88 Single Dimension Arrays....................................................................................... 88 Multi-Dimensional Arrays ..................................................................................... 89 Objects............................................................................................................................. 91 Object Initialization ............................................................................................... 91 Type Juggling .................................................................................................................. 91 Type Casting .......................................................................................................... 92 7. Variables................................................................................................................................ 95 Basics............................................................................................................................... 95 Predefined variables......................................................................................................... 96 Apache variables .................................................................................................... 96 Environment variables ........................................................................................... 99 PHP variables......................................................................................................... 99 Variable scope................................................................................................................ 100 Variable variables .......................................................................................................... 102 Variables from outside PHP........................................................................................... 103 HTML Forms (GET and POST) .......................................................................... 103 IMAGE SUBMIT variable names.............................................................. 104 HTTP Cookies ..................................................................................................... 104 Environment variables ......................................................................................... 105 Dots in incoming variable names......................................................................... 105 Determining variable types .................................................................................. 106 8. Constants ............................................................................................................................. 107 9. Expressions ......................................................................................................................... 109 10. Operators ........................................................................................................................... 112 Arithmetic Operators ..................................................................................................... 112 Assignment Operators ................................................................................................... 112 Bitwise Operators .......................................................................................................... 113 6 Comparison Operators................................................................................................... 113 Error control Operators.................................................................................................. 114 Execution Operators ...................................................................................................... 114 Incrementing/Decrementing Operators ......................................................................... 115 Logical Operators .......................................................................................................... 116 Operator Precedence...................................................................................................... 116 String Operators............................................................................................................. 117 11. Control Structures ............................................................................................................. 118 if ................................................................................................................................... 118 else .............................................................................................................................. 118 elseif .......................................................................................................................... 119 Alternative syntax for control structures ....................................................................... 119 while ............................................................................................................................ 120 do..while .................................................................................................................... 121 for ................................................................................................................................. 122 foreach ........................................................................................................................ 124 break ............................................................................................................................ 125 continue ...................................................................................................................... 126 switch .......................................................................................................................... 127 require() ........................................................................................................................ 129 include() ........................................................................................................................ 131 12. Functions ........................................................................................................................... 134 User-defined functions................................................................................................... 134 Function arguments ....................................................................................................... 134 Making arguments be passed by reference .......................................................... 134 Default argument values ...................................................................................... 135 Variable-length argument lists ............................................................................. 136 Returning values ............................................................................................................ 137 old_function ............................................................................................................. 137 Variable functions.......................................................................................................... 137 13. Classes and Objects........................................................................................................... 139 class ............................................................................................................................ 139 III. Features ..................................................................................................................................... 142 14. Error handling ................................................................................................................... 143 15. Creating GIF images ......................................................................................................... 144 16. HTTP authentication with PHP......................................................................................... 145 17. Cookies.............................................................................................................................. 147 18. Handling file uploads ........................................................................................................ 148 POST method uploads................................................................................................... 148 Common Pitfalls ............................................................................................................ 149 Uploading multiple files ................................................................................................ 149 PUT method support...................................................................................................... 150 19. Using remote files ............................................................................................................. 152 20. Connection handling ......................................................................................................... 154 7 21. Persistent database connections ........................................................................................ 156 IV. Function Reference .................................................................................................................. 158 I. Apache-specific Functions................................................................................................... 159 apache_lookup_uri ........................................................................................................ 160 apache_note ................................................................................................................... 160 getallheaders .................................................................................................................. 161 virtual............................................................................................................................. 161 II. Arbitrary precision mathematics functions ........................................................................ 163 bcadd.............................................................................................................................. 164 bccomp .......................................................................................................................... 164 bcdiv .............................................................................................................................. 164 bcmod ............................................................................................................................ 164 bcmul ............................................................................................................................. 165 bcpow............................................................................................................................. 165 bcscale ........................................................................................................................... 165 bcsqrt ............................................................................................................................. 166 bcsub.............................................................................................................................. 166 III. Array functions ................................................................................................................. 167 array............................................................................................................................... 168 array_count_values........................................................................................................ 168 array_flip........................................................................................................................ 169 array_keys...................................................................................................................... 169 array_merge ................................................................................................................... 170 array_pad ....................................................................................................................... 170 array_pop....................................................................................................................... 171 array_push ..................................................................................................................... 171 array_reverse ................................................................................................................. 172 array_shift...................................................................................................................... 173 array_slice...................................................................................................................... 173 array_splice.................................................................................................................... 174 array_unshift.................................................................................................................. 175 array_values................................................................................................................... 176 array_walk ..................................................................................................................... 176 arsort .............................................................................................................................. 177 asort ............................................................................................................................... 178 compact.......................................................................................................................... 179 count .............................................................................................................................. 179 current............................................................................................................................ 180 each................................................................................................................................ 181 end ................................................................................................................................. 182 extract ............................................................................................................................ 182 in_array.......................................................................................................................... 184 key ................................................................................................................................. 184 krsort.............................................................................................................................. 184 8 ksort ............................................................................................................................... 185 list .................................................................................................................................. 186 next ................................................................................................................................ 186 pos.................................................................................................................................. 187 prev ................................................................................................................................ 187 range .............................................................................................................................. 188 reset................................................................................................................................ 188 rsort................................................................................................................................ 188 shuffle ............................................................................................................................ 189 sizeof.............................................................................................................................. 189 sort ................................................................................................................................. 190 uasort ............................................................................................................................. 190 uksort ............................................................................................................................. 191 usort ............................................................................................................................... 191 IV. Aspell functions ................................................................................................................ 193 aspell_new ..................................................................................................................... 194 aspell_check .................................................................................................................. 194 aspell_check-raw ........................................................................................................... 194 aspell_suggest................................................................................................................ 195 V. Calendar functions ............................................................................................................. 196 JDToGregorian .............................................................................................................. 197 GregorianToJD .............................................................................................................. 197 JDToJulian ..................................................................................................................... 197 JulianToJD ..................................................................................................................... 198 JDToJewish.................................................................................................................... 198 JewishToJD.................................................................................................................... 198 JDToFrench ................................................................................................................... 199 FrenchToJD ................................................................................................................... 199 JDMonthName .............................................................................................................. 199 JDDayOfWeek............................................................................................................... 200 easter_date ..................................................................................................................... 200 easter_days .................................................................................................................... 201 unixtojd.......................................................................................................................... 202 jdtounix.......................................................................................................................... 202 VI. COM support functions for Windows............................................................................... 203 com_load ....................................................................................................................... 204 com_invoke.................................................................................................................... 204 com_propget .................................................................................................................. 204 com_get ......................................................................................................................... 204 com_propput.................................................................................................................. 204 com_propset .................................................................................................................. 205 com_set.......................................................................................................................... 205 VII. Class/Object Functions .................................................................................................... 206 get_class_methods......................................................................................................... 207 9 get_class_vars................................................................................................................ 207 get_object_vars.............................................................................................................. 207 method_exists ................................................................................................................ 207 VIII. ClibPDF functions.......................................................................................................... 208 cpdf_global_set_document_limits................................................................................. 212 cpdf_set_creator ............................................................................................................ 212 cpdf_set_title ................................................................................................................. 212 cpdf_set_subject ............................................................................................................ 212 cpdf_set_keywords ........................................................................................................ 213 cpdf_open ...................................................................................................................... 213 cpdf_close...................................................................................................................... 213 cpdf_page_init ............................................................................................................... 214 cpdf_finalize_page......................................................................................................... 214 cpdf_finalize .................................................................................................................. 214 cpdf_output_buffer ........................................................................................................ 215 cpdf_save_to_file........................................................................................................... 215 cpdf_set_current_page................................................................................................... 215 cpdf_begin_text ............................................................................................................. 216 cpdf_end_text ................................................................................................................ 216 cpdf_show...................................................................................................................... 217 cpdf_show_xy................................................................................................................ 217 cpdf_text ........................................................................................................................ 217 cpdf_set_font ................................................................................................................. 218 cpdf_set_leading............................................................................................................ 218 cpdf_set_text_rendering ................................................................................................ 218 cpdf_set_horiz_scaling .................................................................................................. 219 cpdf_set_text_rise.......................................................................................................... 219 cpdf_set_text_matrix ..................................................................................................... 219 cpdf_set_text_pos .......................................................................................................... 219 cpdf_set_char_spacing .................................................................................................. 220 cpdf_set_word_spacing ................................................................................................. 220 cpdf_continue_text ........................................................................................................ 220 cpdf_stringwidth............................................................................................................ 221 cpdf_save ....................................................................................................................... 221 cpdf_restore ................................................................................................................... 221 cpdf_translate ................................................................................................................ 222 cpdf_scale ...................................................................................................................... 222 cpdf_rotate..................................................................................................................... 222 cpdf_setflat .................................................................................................................... 223 cpdf_setlinejoin ............................................................................................................. 223 cpdf_setlinecap .............................................................................................................. 223 cpdf_setmiterlimit.......................................................................................................... 223 cpdf_setlinewidth........................................................................................................... 224 cpdf_setdash .................................................................................................................. 224 10 cpdf_newpath................................................................................................................. 224 cpdf_moveto .................................................................................................................. 224 cpdf_rmoveto................................................................................................................. 225 cpdf_curveto .................................................................................................................. 225 cpdf_lineto..................................................................................................................... 226 cpdf_rlineto.................................................................................................................... 226 cpdf_circle ..................................................................................................................... 226 cpdf_arc ......................................................................................................................... 227 cpdf_rect ........................................................................................................................ 227 cpdf_closepath............................................................................................................... 228 cpdf_stroke .................................................................................................................... 228 cpdf_closepath_stroke ................................................................................................... 228 cpdf_fill.......................................................................................................................... 228 cpdf_fill_stroke.............................................................................................................. 229 cpdf_closepath_fill_stroke............................................................................................. 229 cpdf_clip ........................................................................................................................ 229 cpdf_setgray_fill ............................................................................................................ 230 cpdf_setgray_stroke....................................................................................................... 230 cpdf_setgray .................................................................................................................. 230 cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill...................................................................................................... 231 cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke ................................................................................................ 231 cpdf_setrgbcolor ............................................................................................................ 231 cpdf_add_outline ........................................................................................................... 231 cpdf_set_page_animation .............................................................................................. 232 cpdf_import_jpeg .......................................................................................................... 233 cpdf_place_inline_image............................................................................................... 233 cpdf_add_annotation ..................................................................................................... 233 IX. Cybercash payment functions ........................................................................................... 235 cybercash_encr .............................................................................................................. 236 cybercash_decr .............................................................................................................. 236 cybercash_base64_encode............................................................................................. 236 cybercash_base64_decode............................................................................................. 236 X. DOM XML functions......................................................................................................... 237 xmldoc ........................................................................................................................... 238 xmldocfile ...................................................................................................................... 238 xmltree........................................................................................................................... 238 XI. Compression functions ..................................................................................................... 239 gzclose ........................................................................................................................... 240 gzeof .............................................................................................................................. 240 gzfile .............................................................................................................................. 240 gzgetc............................................................................................................................. 240 gzgets............................................................................................................................. 241 gzgetss ........................................................................................................................... 241 gzopen............................................................................................................................ 241 11 gzpassthru ...................................................................................................................... 242 gzputs............................................................................................................................. 242 gzread ............................................................................................................................ 243 gzrewind ........................................................................................................................ 243 gzseek ............................................................................................................................ 244 gztell .............................................................................................................................. 244 gzwrite ........................................................................................................................... 244 readgzfile ....................................................................................................................... 245 gzcompress .................................................................................................................... 245 gzuncompress ................................................................................................................ 245 XII. Database (dbm-style) abstraction layer functions ........................................................... 247 dba_close ....................................................................................................................... 249 dba_delete...................................................................................................................... 249 dba_exists ...................................................................................................................... 249 dba_fetch ....................................................................................................................... 250 dba_firstkey ................................................................................................................... 250 dba_insert ...................................................................................................................... 250 dba_nextkey................................................................................................................... 251 dba_popen...................................................................................................................... 251 dba_open........................................................................................................................ 252 dba_optimize ................................................................................................................. 252 dba_replace.................................................................................................................... 252 dba_sync ........................................................................................................................ 253 XIII. Date and Time functions ................................................................................................ 254 checkdate ....................................................................................................................... 255 date ................................................................................................................................ 255 getdate............................................................................................................................ 256 gettimeofday .................................................................................................................. 257 gmdate ........................................................................................................................... 257 gmmktime...................................................................................................................... 258 gmstrftime...................................................................................................................... 258 localtime ........................................................................................................................ 259 microtime....................................................................................................................... 259 mktime........................................................................................................................... 260 strftime........................................................................................................................... 261 time ................................................................................................................................ 263 strtotime......................................................................................................................... 263 XIV. dBase functions .............................................................................................................. 264 dbase_create .................................................................................................................. 265 dbase_open .................................................................................................................... 266 dbase_close.................................................................................................................... 266 dbase_pack .................................................................................................................... 266 dbase_add_record .......................................................................................................... 266 dbase_replace_record .................................................................................................... 267 12 dbase_delete_record ...................................................................................................... 267 dbase_get_record........................................................................................................... 267 dbase_get_record_with_names...................................................................................... 268 dbase_numfields ............................................................................................................ 268 dbase_numrecords ......................................................................................................... 268 XV. dbm functions .................................................................................................................. 270 dbmopen ........................................................................................................................ 271 dbmclose........................................................................................................................ 271 dbmexists ....................................................................................................................... 271 dbmfetch ........................................................................................................................ 271 dbminsert ....................................................................................................................... 272 dbmreplace .................................................................................................................... 272 dbmdelete ...................................................................................................................... 272 dbmfirstkey .................................................................................................................... 273 dbmnextkey ................................................................................................................... 273 dblist .............................................................................................................................. 273 XVI. Directory functions ........................................................................................................ 274 chdir............................................................................................................................... 275 dir................................................................................................................................... 275 closedir .......................................................................................................................... 275 opendir........................................................................................................................... 276 readdir............................................................................................................................ 276 rewinddir........................................................................................................................ 277 XVII. Dynamic Loading functions ......................................................................................... 278 dl .................................................................................................................................... 279 XVIII. Encryption functions ................................................................................................... 280 mcrypt_get_cipher_name .............................................................................................. 282 mcrypt_get_block_size.................................................................................................. 282 mcrypt_get_key_size ..................................................................................................... 282 mcrypt_create_iv ........................................................................................................... 283 mcrypt_cbc .................................................................................................................... 283 mcrypt_cfb..................................................................................................................... 284 mcrypt_ecb .................................................................................................................... 284 mcrypt_ofb .................................................................................................................... 285 XIX. filePro functions ............................................................................................................. 286 filepro............................................................................................................................. 287 filepro_fieldname........................................................................................................... 287 filepro_fieldtype............................................................................................................. 287 filepro_fieldwidth .......................................................................................................... 287 filepro_retrieve............................................................................................................... 287 filepro_fieldcount........................................................................................................... 288 filepro_rowcount............................................................................................................ 288 XX. Filesystem functions........................................................................................................ 289 basename ....................................................................................................................... 290 13 chgrp .............................................................................................................................. 290 chmod ............................................................................................................................ 290 chown............................................................................................................................. 291 clearstatcache................................................................................................................. 291 copy ............................................................................................................................... 292 delete.............................................................................................................................. 292 dirname .......................................................................................................................... 292 diskfreespace ................................................................................................................. 293 fclose.............................................................................................................................. 293 feof................................................................................................................................. 294 fgetc ............................................................................................................................... 294 fgetcsv............................................................................................................................ 294 fgets ............................................................................................................................... 295 fgetss.............................................................................................................................. 296 file .................................................................................................................................. 296 file_exists ....................................................................................................................... 297 fileatime ......................................................................................................................... 297 filectime ......................................................................................................................... 298 filegroup......................................................................................................................... 298 fileinode ......................................................................................................................... 298 filemtime........................................................................................................................ 299 fileowner ........................................................................................................................ 299 fileperms ........................................................................................................................ 299 filesize............................................................................................................................ 300 filetype ........................................................................................................................... 300 flock ............................................................................................................................... 300 fopen .............................................................................................................................. 301 fpassthru ........................................................................................................................ 302 fputs ............................................................................................................................... 303 fread............................................................................................................................... 303 fseek............................................................................................................................... 303 ftell................................................................................................................................. 304 ftruncate......................................................................................................................... 304 fwrite.............................................................................................................................. 305 set_file_buffer ................................................................................................................ 305 is_dir .............................................................................................................................. 305 is_executable ................................................................................................................. 306 is_file ............................................................................................................................. 306 is_link ............................................................................................................................ 306 is_readable..................................................................................................................... 307 is_writeable.................................................................................................................... 307 link................................................................................................................................. 307 linkinfo .......................................................................................................................... 308 mkdir.............................................................................................................................. 308 14 pclose............................................................................................................................. 309 popen ............................................................................................................................. 309 readfile ........................................................................................................................... 309 readlink .......................................................................................................................... 310 rename ........................................................................................................................... 310 rewind ............................................................................................................................ 311 rmdir .............................................................................................................................. 311 stat.................................................................................................................................. 311 lstat ................................................................................................................................ 312 symlink .......................................................................................................................... 313 tempnam ........................................................................................................................ 313 touch .............................................................................................................................. 314 umask............................................................................................................................. 314 unlink............................................................................................................................. 315 XXI. Forms Data Format functions ........................................................................................ 316 fdf_open......................................................................................................................... 318 fdf_close ........................................................................................................................ 318 fdf_create....................................................................................................................... 318 fdf_save ......................................................................................................................... 319 fdf_get_value ................................................................................................................. 319 fdf_set_value ................................................................................................................. 320 fdf_next_field_name...................................................................................................... 320 fdf_set_ap ...................................................................................................................... 320 fdf_set_status................................................................................................................. 321 fdf_get_status ................................................................................................................ 321 fdf_set_file..................................................................................................................... 321 fdf_get_file .................................................................................................................... 321 XXII. FTP functions ............................................................................................................... 323 ftp_connect .................................................................................................................... 324 ftp_login ........................................................................................................................ 324 ftp_pwd.......................................................................................................................... 324 ftp_cdup......................................................................................................................... 324 ftp_chdir ........................................................................................................................ 325 ftp_mkdir ....................................................................................................................... 325 ftp_rmdir........................................................................................................................ 325 ftp_nlist.......................................................................................................................... 325 ftp_rawlist...................................................................................................................... 326 ftp_systype..................................................................................................................... 326 ftp_pasv ......................................................................................................................... 326 ftp_get............................................................................................................................ 327 ftp_fget .......................................................................................................................... 327 ftp_put............................................................................................................................ 327 ftp_fput .......................................................................................................................... 327 ftp_size .......................................................................................................................... 328 15 ftp_mdtm ....................................................................................................................... 328 ftp_rename..................................................................................................................... 328 ftp_delete ....................................................................................................................... 329 ftp_site ........................................................................................................................... 329 ftp_quit .......................................................................................................................... 329 XXIII. GNU Gettext................................................................................................................ 330 bindtextdomain .............................................................................................................. 331 dcgettext ........................................................................................................................ 331 dgettext .......................................................................................................................... 331 gettext ............................................................................................................................ 331 textdomain ..................................................................................................................... 332 XXIV. Hash functions............................................................................................................. 333 mhash_get_hash_name.................................................................................................. 335 mhash_get_block_size................................................................................................... 335 mhash_count.................................................................................................................. 335 mhash............................................................................................................................. 336 XXV. HTTP functions ............................................................................................................ 337 header ............................................................................................................................ 338 setcookie ........................................................................................................................ 339 XXVI. Hyperwave functions................................................................................................... 341 hw_Array2Objrec .......................................................................................................... 346 hw_Children .................................................................................................................. 346 hw_ChildrenObj ............................................................................................................ 346 hw_Close ....................................................................................................................... 346 hw_Connect................................................................................................................... 347 hw_Cp............................................................................................................................ 347 hw_Deleteobject ............................................................................................................ 347 hw_DocByAnchor......................................................................................................... 348 hw_DocByAnchorObj................................................................................................... 348 hw_DocumentAttributes................................................................................................ 348 hw_DocumentBodyTag ................................................................................................. 348 hw_DocumentContent................................................................................................... 349 hw_DocumentSetContent.............................................................................................. 349 hw_DocumentSize......................................................................................................... 349 hw_ErrorMsg................................................................................................................. 350 hw_EditText................................................................................................................... 350 hw_Error........................................................................................................................ 350 hw_Free_Document ...................................................................................................... 351 hw_GetParents............................................................................................................... 351 hw_GetParentsObj......................................................................................................... 351 hw_GetChildColl........................................................................................................... 351 hw_GetChildCollObj..................................................................................................... 352 hw_GetRemote .............................................................................................................. 352 hw_GetRemoteChildren ................................................................................................ 352 16 hw_GetSrcByDestObj ................................................................................................... 353 hw_GetObject................................................................................................................ 353 hw_GetAndLock ........................................................................................................... 354 hw_GetText ................................................................................................................... 354 hw_GetObjectByQuery ................................................................................................. 355 hw_GetObjectByQueryObj ........................................................................................... 355 hw_GetObjectByQueryColl .......................................................................................... 356 hw_GetObjectByQueryCollObj .................................................................................... 356 hw_GetChildDocColl .................................................................................................... 357 hw_GetChildDocCollObj .............................................................................................. 357 hw_GetAnchors............................................................................................................. 357 hw_GetAnchorsObj....................................................................................................... 357 hw_Mv........................................................................................................................... 358 hw_Identify.................................................................................................................... 358 hw_InCollections........................................................................................................... 358 hw_Info.......................................................................................................................... 359 hw_InsColl .................................................................................................................... 359 hw_InsDoc..................................................................................................................... 359 hw_InsertDocument ...................................................................................................... 360 hw_InsertObject ............................................................................................................ 360 hw_mapid ...................................................................................................................... 360 hw_Modifyobject .......................................................................................................... 361 hw_New_Document ...................................................................................................... 363 hw_Objrec2Array .......................................................................................................... 364 hw_OutputDocument .................................................................................................... 364 hw_pConnect................................................................................................................. 364 hw_PipeDocument ........................................................................................................ 365 hw_Root ........................................................................................................................ 365 hw_Unlock .................................................................................................................... 365 hw_Who ........................................................................................................................ 366 hw_Username ................................................................................................................ 366 XXVII. Image functions ......................................................................................................... 367 GetImageSize ................................................................................................................ 368 ImageArc ....................................................................................................................... 368 ImageChar ..................................................................................................................... 369 ImageCharUp ................................................................................................................ 369 ImageColorAllocate ...................................................................................................... 369 ImageColorDeAllocate.................................................................................................. 370 ImageColorAt ................................................................................................................ 370 ImageColorClosest ........................................................................................................ 370 ImageColorExact........................................................................................................... 371 ImageColorResolve ....................................................................................................... 371 ImageGammaCorrect .................................................................................................... 371 ImageColorSet............................................................................................................... 372 17 ImageColorsForIndex.................................................................................................... 372 ImageColorsTotal .......................................................................................................... 372 ImageColorTransparent ................................................................................................. 373 ImageCopy .................................................................................................................... 373 ImageCopyResized........................................................................................................ 373 ImageCreate................................................................................................................... 374 ImageCreateFromGif..................................................................................................... 374 ImageCreateFromJPEG................................................................................................. 375 ImageCreateFromPNG .................................................................................................. 375 ImageDashedLine.......................................................................................................... 376 ImageDestroy ................................................................................................................ 376 ImageFill........................................................................................................................ 377 ImageFilledPolygon ...................................................................................................... 377 ImageFilledRectangle.................................................................................................... 377 ImageFillToBorder ........................................................................................................ 377 ImageFontHeight ........................................................................................................... 378 ImageFontWidth ............................................................................................................ 378 ImageGIF....................................................................................................................... 378 ImagePng....................................................................................................................... 379 ImageJPEG .................................................................................................................... 379 ImageInterlace ............................................................................................................... 380 ImageLine...................................................................................................................... 380 ImageLoadFont.............................................................................................................. 380 ImagePolygon................................................................................................................ 381 ImagePSBBox ............................................................................................................... 381 ImagePSEncodeFont ..................................................................................................... 382 ImagePSFreeFont .......................................................................................................... 382 ImagePSLoadFont ......................................................................................................... 383 ImagePsExtendFont....................................................................................................... 383 ImagePsSlantFont.......................................................................................................... 383 ImagePSText.................................................................................................................. 383 ImageRectangle ............................................................................................................. 384 ImageSetPixel................................................................................................................ 385 ImageString ................................................................................................................... 385 ImageStringUp .............................................................................................................. 385 ImageSX ........................................................................................................................ 386 ImageSY ........................................................................................................................ 386 ImageTTFBBox............................................................................................................. 386 ImageTTFText ............................................................................................................... 387 XXVIII. IMAP, POP3 and NNTP functions ........................................................................... 389 imap_append.................................................................................................................. 390 imap_base64 .................................................................................................................. 390 imap_body ..................................................................................................................... 391 imap_check.................................................................................................................... 391 18 imap_close..................................................................................................................... 392 imap_createmailbox ...................................................................................................... 392 imap_delete.................................................................................................................... 394 imap_deletemailbox ...................................................................................................... 394 imap_expunge................................................................................................................ 394 imap_fetchbody ............................................................................................................. 395 imap_fetchstructure ....................................................................................................... 395 imap_header .................................................................................................................. 397 imap_rfc822_parse_headers .......................................................................................... 399 imap_headers................................................................................................................. 399 imap_listmailbox ........................................................................................................... 400 imap_getmailboxes........................................................................................................ 400 imap_listsubscribed ....................................................................................................... 401 imap_getsubscribed ....................................................................................................... 402 imap_mail_copy ............................................................................................................ 402 imap_mail_move ........................................................................................................... 402 imap_num_msg ............................................................................................................. 403 imap_num_recent .......................................................................................................... 403 imap_open ..................................................................................................................... 403 imap_ping ...................................................................................................................... 405 imap_renamemailbox .................................................................................................... 405 imap_reopen .................................................................................................................. 406 imap_subscribe .............................................................................................................. 406 imap_undelete................................................................................................................ 407 imap_unsubscribe .......................................................................................................... 407 imap_qprint.................................................................................................................... 407 imap_8bit....................................................................................................................... 407 imap_binary................................................................................................................... 408 imap_scanmailbox......................................................................................................... 408 imap_mailboxmsginfo................................................................................................... 408 imap_rfc822_write_address .......................................................................................... 409 imap_rfc822_parse_adrlist ............................................................................................ 409 imap_setflag_full ........................................................................................................... 410 imap_clearflag_full........................................................................................................ 411 imap_sort ....................................................................................................................... 411 imap_fetchheader .......................................................................................................... 412 imap_uid ........................................................................................................................ 413 imap_msgno .................................................................................................................. 413 imap_search................................................................................................................... 413 imap_last_error.............................................................................................................. 414 imap_errors.................................................................................................................... 415 imap_alerts .................................................................................................................... 415 imap_status .................................................................................................................... 415 imap_utf7_decode ......................................................................................................... 416 19 imap_utf7_encode ......................................................................................................... 417 imap_utf8....................................................................................................................... 417 imap_fetch_overview .................................................................................................... 417 imap_mime_header_decode .......................................................................................... 418 imap_mail_compose...................................................................................................... 419 imap_mail ...................................................................................................................... 419 XXIX. Informix functions....................................................................................................... 421 ifx_connect .................................................................................................................... 423 ifx_pconnect .................................................................................................................. 423 ifx_close ........................................................................................................................ 424 ifx_query........................................................................................................................ 424 ifx_prepare..................................................................................................................... 426 ifx_do............................................................................................................................. 427 ifx_error......................................................................................................................... 427 ifx_errormsg .................................................................................................................. 428 ifx_affected_rows .......................................................................................................... 428 ifx_getsqlca.................................................................................................................... 429 ifx_fetch_row................................................................................................................. 430 ifx_htmltbl_result .......................................................................................................... 431 ifx_fieldtypes ................................................................................................................. 431 ifx_fieldproperties.......................................................................................................... 432 ifx_num_fields............................................................................................................... 433 ifx_num_rows................................................................................................................ 433 ifx_free_result................................................................................................................ 433 ifx_create_char .............................................................................................................. 433 ifx_free_char.................................................................................................................. 434 ifx_update_char ............................................................................................................. 434 ifx_get_char................................................................................................................... 434 ifx_create_blob .............................................................................................................. 434 ifx_copy_blob................................................................................................................ 435 ifx_free_blob ................................................................................................................. 435 ifx_get_blob................................................................................................................... 435 ifx_update_blob............................................................................................................. 436 ifx_blobinfile_mode ...................................................................................................... 436 ifx_textasvarchar ........................................................................................................... 436 ifx_byteasvarchar........................................................................................................... 436 ifx_nullformat................................................................................................................ 437 ifxus_create_slob........................................................................................................... 437 ifx_free_slob.................................................................................................................. 437 ifxus_close_slob ............................................................................................................ 438 ifxus_open_slob............................................................................................................. 438 ifxus_tell_slob ............................................................................................................... 438 ifxus_seek_slob ............................................................................................................. 438 ifxus_read_slob.............................................................................................................. 439 20 ifxus_write_slob ............................................................................................................ 439 XXX. InterBase functions....................................................................................................... 440 ibase_connect ................................................................................................................ 441 ibase_pconnect .............................................................................................................. 442 ibase_close..................................................................................................................... 442 ibase_query.................................................................................................................... 442 ibase_fetch_row............................................................................................................. 443 ibase_fetch_object ......................................................................................................... 443 ibase_free_result............................................................................................................ 443 ibase_prepare................................................................................................................. 444 ibase_execute................................................................................................................. 444 ibase_free_query............................................................................................................ 445 ibase_timefmt ................................................................................................................ 445 ibase_num_fields ........................................................................................................... 445 XXXI. LDAP functions........................................................................................................... 447 ldap_add ........................................................................................................................ 450 ldap_mod_add ............................................................................................................... 450 ldap_mod_del ................................................................................................................ 451 ldap_mod_replace.......................................................................................................... 451 ldap_bind ....................................................................................................................... 451 ldap_close ...................................................................................................................... 452 ldap_connect.................................................................................................................. 452 ldap_count_entries......................................................................................................... 452 ldap_delete..................................................................................................................... 453 ldap_dn2ufn................................................................................................................... 453 ldap_explode_dn............................................................................................................ 453 ldap_first_attribute......................................................................................................... 453 ldap_first_entry.............................................................................................................. 454 ldap_free_result ............................................................................................................. 454 ldap_get_attributes......................................................................................................... 455 ldap_get_dn ................................................................................................................... 456 ldap_get_entries............................................................................................................. 456 ldap_get_values ............................................................................................................. 457 ldap_get_values_len ...................................................................................................... 458 ldap_list ......................................................................................................................... 458 ldap_modify................................................................................................................... 459 ldap_next_attribute ........................................................................................................ 459 ldap_next_entry ............................................................................................................. 460 ldap_read ....................................................................................................................... 460 ldap_search .................................................................................................................... 461 ldap_unbind ................................................................................................................... 462 ldap_err2str.................................................................................................................... 462 ldap_errno...................................................................................................................... 463 ldap_error ...................................................................................................................... 463 21 XXXII. Mail functions ............................................................................................................ 465 mail ................................................................................................................................ 466 XXXIII. Mathematical functions ............................................................................................ 467 Abs................................................................................................................................. 468 Acos............................................................................................................................... 468 Asin................................................................................................................................ 468 Atan ............................................................................................................................... 468 Atan2 ............................................................................................................................. 469 base_convert .................................................................................................................. 469 BinDec........................................................................................................................... 469 Ceil ................................................................................................................................ 470 Cos................................................................................................................................. 470 DecBin........................................................................................................................... 470 DecHex .......................................................................................................................... 471 DecOct........................................................................................................................... 471 deg2rad .......................................................................................................................... 471 Exp................................................................................................................................. 471 Floor .............................................................................................................................. 472 getrandmax .................................................................................................................... 472 HexDec .......................................................................................................................... 472 Log................................................................................................................................. 473 Log10............................................................................................................................. 473 max ................................................................................................................................ 473 min................................................................................................................................. 474 mt_rand.......................................................................................................................... 474 mt_srand ........................................................................................................................ 475 mt_getrandmax .............................................................................................................. 475 number_format .............................................................................................................. 475 OctDec........................................................................................................................... 476 pi .................................................................................................................................... 476 pow ................................................................................................................................ 476 rad2deg .......................................................................................................................... 477 rand ................................................................................................................................ 477 round.............................................................................................................................. 477 Sin.................................................................................................................................. 478 Sqrt ................................................................................................................................ 478 srand .............................................................................................................................. 478 Tan ................................................................................................................................. 479 XXXIV. MCAL functions ...................................................................................................... 480 mcal_open...................................................................................................................... 481 mcal_close ..................................................................................................................... 481 mcal_fetch_event........................................................................................................... 481 mcal_list_events ............................................................................................................ 482 mcal_append_event ....................................................................................................... 482 22 mcal_store_event ........................................................................................................... 483 mcal_delete_event ......................................................................................................... 483 mcal_snooze .................................................................................................................. 483 mcal_list_alarms............................................................................................................ 483 mcal_event_init ............................................................................................................. 484 mcal_event_set_category............................................................................................... 484 mcal_event_set_title ...................................................................................................... 484 mcal_event_set_description........................................................................................... 485 mcal_event_set_start ..................................................................................................... 485 mcal_event_set_end....................................................................................................... 485 mcal_event_set_alarm ................................................................................................... 486 mcal_event_set_class..................................................................................................... 486 mcal_is_leap_year ......................................................................................................... 486 mcal_days_in_month..................................................................................................... 486 mcal_date_valid............................................................................................................. 487 mcal_time_valid ............................................................................................................ 487 mcal_day_of_week........................................................................................................ 487 mcal_day_of_year ......................................................................................................... 487 mcal_date_compare....................................................................................................... 488 mcal_next_recurrence.................................................................................................... 488 mcal_event_set_recur_none .......................................................................................... 488 mcal_event_set_recur_daily .......................................................................................... 489 mcal_event_set_recur_weekly....................................................................................... 489 mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_mday .......................................................................... 489 mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_wday .......................................................................... 489 mcal_event_set_recur_yearly ........................................................................................ 490 mcal_fetch_current_stream_event................................................................................. 490 XXXV. Microsoft SQL Server functions................................................................................ 492 mssql_close.................................................................................................................... 493 mssql_connect ............................................................................................................... 493 mssql_data_seek ............................................................................................................ 493 mssql_fetch_array.......................................................................................................... 494 mssql_fetch_field........................................................................................................... 494 mssql_fetch_object ........................................................................................................ 495 mssql_fetch_row............................................................................................................ 495 mssql_field_length......................................................................................................... 496 mssql_field_name .......................................................................................................... 496 mssql_field_seek............................................................................................................ 496 mssql_field_type............................................................................................................ 496 mssql_free_result........................................................................................................... 496 mssql_get_last_message................................................................................................ 497 mssql_min_error_severity ............................................................................................. 497 mssql_min_message_severity ....................................................................................... 497 mssql_num_fields .......................................................................................................... 497 23 mssql_num_rows ........................................................................................................... 498 mssql_pconnect ............................................................................................................. 498 mssql_query................................................................................................................... 498 mssql_result................................................................................................................... 499 mssql_select_db............................................................................................................. 499 XXXVI. Miscellaneous functions........................................................................................... 501 connection_aborted........................................................................................................ 502 connection_status .......................................................................................................... 502 connection_timeout ....................................................................................................... 502 define ............................................................................................................................. 502 defined ........................................................................................................................... 503 die .................................................................................................................................. 503 eval................................................................................................................................. 504 exit ................................................................................................................................. 505 func_get_arg .................................................................................................................. 505 func_get_args................................................................................................................. 506 func_num_args .............................................................................................................. 506 function_exists............................................................................................................... 507 get_browser ................................................................................................................... 507 ignore_user_abort .......................................................................................................... 509 iptcparse......................................................................................................................... 509 leak ................................................................................................................................ 509 pack................................................................................................................................ 510 register_shutdown_function .......................................................................................... 511 serialize.......................................................................................................................... 511 sleep............................................................................................................................... 512 uniqid............................................................................................................................. 513 unpack............................................................................................................................ 513 unserialize...................................................................................................................... 514 usleep............................................................................................................................. 515 XXXVII. mSQL functions ...................................................................................................... 516 msql ............................................................................................................................... 517 msql_affected_rows....................................................................................................... 517 msql_close ..................................................................................................................... 517 msql_connect................................................................................................................. 517 msql_create_db.............................................................................................................. 518 msql_createdb................................................................................................................ 518 msql_data_seek.............................................................................................................. 518 msql_dbname................................................................................................................. 519 msql_drop_db ................................................................................................................ 519 msql_dropdb .................................................................................................................. 519 msql_error...................................................................................................................... 520 msql_fetch_array ........................................................................................................... 520 msql_fetch_field ............................................................................................................ 520 24 msql_fetch_object.......................................................................................................... 521 msql_fetch_row ............................................................................................................. 522 msql_fieldname.............................................................................................................. 522 msql_field_seek ............................................................................................................. 522 msql_fieldtable .............................................................................................................. 523 msql_fieldtype ............................................................................................................... 523 msql_fieldflags............................................................................................................... 523 msql_fieldlen ................................................................................................................. 523 msql_free_result ............................................................................................................ 524 msql_freeresult .............................................................................................................. 524 msql_list_fields.............................................................................................................. 524 msql_listfields................................................................................................................ 524 msql_list_dbs................................................................................................................. 525 msql_listdbs................................................................................................................... 525 msql_list_tables ............................................................................................................. 525 msql_listtables ............................................................................................................... 525 msql_num_fields............................................................................................................ 526 msql_num_rows............................................................................................................. 526 msql_numfields.............................................................................................................. 526 msql_numrows............................................................................................................... 526 msql_pconnect............................................................................................................... 527 msql_query .................................................................................................................... 527 msql_regcase ................................................................................................................. 527 msql_result .................................................................................................................... 528 msql_select_db .............................................................................................................. 528 msql_selectdb ................................................................................................................ 528 msql_tablename............................................................................................................. 529 XXXVIII. MySQL functions .................................................................................................. 530 mysql_affected_rows..................................................................................................... 531 mysql_change_user ....................................................................................................... 531 mysql_close ................................................................................................................... 531 mysql_connect............................................................................................................... 532 mysql_create_db............................................................................................................ 533 mysql_data_seek............................................................................................................ 534 mysql_db_query ............................................................................................................ 535 mysql_drop_db .............................................................................................................. 535 mysql_errno................................................................................................................... 535 mysql_error.................................................................................................................... 536 mysql_fetch_array ......................................................................................................... 536 mysql_fetch_field .......................................................................................................... 537 mysql_fetch_lengths...................................................................................................... 539 mysql_fetch_object........................................................................................................ 539 mysql_fetch_row ........................................................................................................... 540 mysql_field_name.......................................................................................................... 541 25 mysql_field_seek ........................................................................................................... 541 mysql_field_table .......................................................................................................... 541 mysql_field_type ........................................................................................................... 541 mysql_field_flags........................................................................................................... 542 mysql_field_len ............................................................................................................. 543 mysql_free_result .......................................................................................................... 543 mysql_insert_id ............................................................................................................. 543 mysql_list_fields............................................................................................................ 544 mysql_list_dbs............................................................................................................... 544 mysql_list_tables ........................................................................................................... 544 mysql_num_fields.......................................................................................................... 545 mysql_num_rows........................................................................................................... 545 mysql_pconnect............................................................................................................. 545 mysql_query .................................................................................................................. 546 mysql_result .................................................................................................................. 547 mysql_select_db ............................................................................................................ 548 mysql_tablename........................................................................................................... 548 XXXIX. Network Functions ................................................................................................... 550 checkdnsrr...................................................................................................................... 551 closelog.......................................................................................................................... 551 debugger_off.................................................................................................................. 551 debugger_on .................................................................................................................. 551 fsockopen....................................................................................................................... 552 gethostbyaddr ................................................................................................................ 553 gethostbyname............................................................................................................... 553 gethostbynamel.............................................................................................................. 553 getmxrr .......................................................................................................................... 553 getprotobyname ............................................................................................................. 554 getprotobynumber.......................................................................................................... 554 getservbyname............................................................................................................... 554 getservbyport ................................................................................................................. 555 openlog .......................................................................................................................... 555 pfsockopen..................................................................................................................... 555 set_socket_blocking ...................................................................................................... 556 syslog............................................................................................................................. 556 XL. NIS functions ................................................................................................................... 557 yp_get_default_domain ................................................................................................. 558 yp_order......................................................................................................................... 558 yp_master ...................................................................................................................... 558 yp_match ....................................................................................................................... 559 yp_first........................................................................................................................... 559 yp_next .......................................................................................................................... 560 XLI. ODBC functions ............................................................................................................. 562 odbc_autocommit .......................................................................................................... 563 26 odbc_binmode ............................................................................................................... 563 odbc_close ..................................................................................................................... 564 odbc_close_all ............................................................................................................... 564 odbc_commit ................................................................................................................. 565 odbc_connect................................................................................................................. 565 odbc_cursor ................................................................................................................... 566 odbc_do ......................................................................................................................... 566 odbc_exec ...................................................................................................................... 566 odbc_execute ................................................................................................................. 566 odbc_fetch_into ............................................................................................................. 567 odbc_fetch_row ............................................................................................................. 567 odbc_field_name............................................................................................................ 567 odbc_field_num ............................................................................................................. 568 odbc_field_type ............................................................................................................. 568 odbc_field_len ............................................................................................................... 568 odbc_field_precision...................................................................................................... 569 odbc_field_scale ............................................................................................................ 569 odbc_free_result ............................................................................................................ 569 odbc_longreadlen .......................................................................................................... 570 odbc_num_fields............................................................................................................ 570 odbc_pconnect............................................................................................................... 570 odbc_prepare ................................................................................................................. 571 odbc_num_rows............................................................................................................. 571 odbc_result .................................................................................................................... 571 odbc_result_all .............................................................................................................. 572 odbc_rollback ................................................................................................................ 572 odbc_setoption............................................................................................................... 572 odbc_tables .................................................................................................................... 573 odbc_tableprivileges ...................................................................................................... 574 odbc_columns................................................................................................................ 575 odbc_columnprivileges.................................................................................................. 576 odbc_gettypeinfo ........................................................................................................... 577 odbc_primarykeys ......................................................................................................... 577 odbc_foreignkeys........................................................................................................... 578 odbc_procedures............................................................................................................ 579 odbc_procedurecolumns................................................................................................ 580 odbc_specialcolumns..................................................................................................... 580 odbc_statistics................................................................................................................ 581 XLII. Oracle functions ............................................................................................................ 583 Ora_Bind ....................................................................................................................... 584 Ora_Close ...................................................................................................................... 584 Ora_ColumnName......................................................................................................... 584 Ora_ColumnType .......................................................................................................... 585 Ora_Commit .................................................................................................................. 585 27 Ora_CommitOff............................................................................................................. 586 Ora_CommitOn ............................................................................................................. 586 Ora_Error....................................................................................................................... 586 Ora_ErrorCode .............................................................................................................. 587 Ora_Exec ....................................................................................................................... 587 Ora_Fetch ...................................................................................................................... 587 Ora_GetColumn ............................................................................................................ 588 Ora_Logoff .................................................................................................................... 588 Ora_Logon..................................................................................................................... 588 Ora_Open ...................................................................................................................... 589 Ora_Parse....................................................................................................................... 589 Ora_Rollback................................................................................................................. 589 XLIII. Oracle 8 functions........................................................................................................ 591 OCIDefineByName ....................................................................................................... 592 OCIBindByName .......................................................................................................... 592 OCILogon...................................................................................................................... 594 OCIPLogon.................................................................................................................... 596 OCINLogon................................................................................................................... 597 OCILogOff .................................................................................................................... 599 OCIExecute ................................................................................................................... 599 OCICommit ................................................................................................................... 599 OCIRollback.................................................................................................................. 600 OCINewDescriptor........................................................................................................ 600 OCIRowCount ............................................................................................................... 602 OCINumCols................................................................................................................. 602 OCIResult ...................................................................................................................... 603 OCIFetch ....................................................................................................................... 603 OCIFetchInto................................................................................................................. 604 OCIFetchStatement ....................................................................................................... 604 OCIColumnIsNULL...................................................................................................... 605 OCIColumnSize ............................................................................................................ 606 OCIServerVersion.......................................................................................................... 607 OCIStatementType ........................................................................................................ 607 OCINewCursor.............................................................................................................. 608 OCIFreeStatement ......................................................................................................... 609 OCIFreeCursor .............................................................................................................. 610 OCIColumnName.......................................................................................................... 610 OCIColumnType ........................................................................................................... 611 OCIParse........................................................................................................................ 612 OCIError........................................................................................................................ 612 OCIInternalDebug ......................................................................................................... 612 XLIV. PDF functions .............................................................................................................. 614 PDF_get_info ................................................................................................................ 620 PDF_set_info................................................................................................................. 620 28 PDF_open ...................................................................................................................... 621 PDF_close...................................................................................................................... 621 PDF_begin_page ........................................................................................................... 622 PDF_end_page .............................................................................................................. 622 PDF_show ..................................................................................................................... 622 PDF_show_boxed.......................................................................................................... 622 PDF_show_xy ............................................................................................................... 623 PDF_set_font................................................................................................................. 623 PDF_set_leading............................................................................................................ 624 PDF_set_parameter ....................................................................................................... 624 PDF_get_parameter....................................................................................................... 624 PDF_set_value............................................................................................................... 625 PDF_get_value .............................................................................................................. 625 PDF_set_text_rendering ................................................................................................ 625 PDF_set_horiz_scaling.................................................................................................. 626 PDF_set_text_rise.......................................................................................................... 626 PDF_set_text_matrix ..................................................................................................... 626 PDF_set_text_pos.......................................................................................................... 626 PDF_set_char_spacing .................................................................................................. 627 PDF_set_word_spacing ................................................................................................. 627 PDF_skew...................................................................................................................... 627 PDF_continue_text ........................................................................................................ 628 PDF_stringwidth............................................................................................................ 628 PDF_save....................................................................................................................... 628 PDF_restore................................................................................................................... 628 PDF_translate ................................................................................................................ 629 PDF_scale...................................................................................................................... 629 PDF_rotate..................................................................................................................... 630 PDF_setflat .................................................................................................................... 630 PDF_setlinejoin ............................................................................................................. 630 PDF_setlinecap.............................................................................................................. 631 PDF_setmiterlimit ......................................................................................................... 631 PDF_setlinewidth .......................................................................................................... 631 PDF_setdash .................................................................................................................. 631 PDF_moveto.................................................................................................................. 632 PDF_curveto.................................................................................................................. 632 PDF_lineto..................................................................................................................... 632 PDF_circle..................................................................................................................... 633 PDF_arc......................................................................................................................... 633 PDF_rect........................................................................................................................ 633 PDF_closepath............................................................................................................... 634 PDF_stroke .................................................................................................................... 634 PDF_closepath_stroke ................................................................................................... 634 PDF_fill ......................................................................................................................... 634 29 PDF_fill_stroke.............................................................................................................. 635 PDF_closepath_fill_stroke ............................................................................................ 635 PDF_endpath ................................................................................................................. 635 PDF_clip........................................................................................................................ 636 PDF_setgray_fill............................................................................................................ 636 PDF_setgray_stroke ...................................................................................................... 636 PDF_setgray .................................................................................................................. 637 PDF_setrgbcolor_fill ..................................................................................................... 637 PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke ................................................................................................ 637 PDF_setrgbcolor............................................................................................................ 637 PDF_add_outline........................................................................................................... 638 PDF_set_transition ........................................................................................................ 638 PDF_set_duration .......................................................................................................... 639 PDF_open_gif................................................................................................................ 639 PDF_open_png .............................................................................................................. 640 PDF_open_memory_image........................................................................................... 640 PDF_open_jpeg ............................................................................................................. 641 PDF_close_image.......................................................................................................... 641 PDF_place_image.......................................................................................................... 641 PDF_put_image............................................................................................................. 642 PDF_execute_image...................................................................................................... 642 pdf_add_annotation ....................................................................................................... 643 PDF_set_border_style ................................................................................................... 643 PDF_set_border_color................................................................................................... 643 PDF_set_border_dash.................................................................................................... 644 XLV. Perl-compatible Regular Expression functions ............................................................. 645 preg_match .................................................................................................................... 646 preg_match_all .............................................................................................................. 646 preg_replace................................................................................................................... 648 preg_split ....................................................................................................................... 649 preg_quote ..................................................................................................................... 650 preg_grep ....................................................................................................................... 650 Pattern Modifiers ........................................................................................................... 651 Pattern Syntax................................................................................................................ 652 XLVI. PHP options & information ......................................................................................... 678 error_log ........................................................................................................................ 679 error_reporting............................................................................................................... 680 extension_loaded ........................................................................................................... 680 getenv............................................................................................................................. 681 get_cfg_var .................................................................................................................... 681 get_current_user ............................................................................................................ 682 get_magic_quotes_gpc .................................................................................................. 682 get_magic_quotes_runtime............................................................................................ 682 getlastmod...................................................................................................................... 682 30 getmyinode .................................................................................................................... 683 getmypid ........................................................................................................................ 683 getmyuid ........................................................................................................................ 684 getrusage........................................................................................................................ 684 phpinfo........................................................................................................................... 684 phpversion ..................................................................................................................... 685 php_logo_guid............................................................................................................... 685 putenv ............................................................................................................................ 685 set_magic_quotes_runtime ............................................................................................ 686 set_time_limit ................................................................................................................ 686 zend_logo_guid ............................................................................................................. 687 XLVII. POSIX functions......................................................................................................... 688 posix_kill ....................................................................................................................... 689 posix_getpid .................................................................................................................. 689 posix_getppid ................................................................................................................ 689 posix_getuid .................................................................................................................. 689 posix_geteuid................................................................................................................. 690 posix_getgid .................................................................................................................. 690 posix_getegid................................................................................................................. 690 posix_setuid................................................................................................................... 690 posix_setgid................................................................................................................... 691 posix_getgroups............................................................................................................. 691 posix_getlogin ............................................................................................................... 691 posix_getpgrp ................................................................................................................ 691 posix_setsid ................................................................................................................... 692 posix_setpgid................................................................................................................. 692 posix_getpgid ................................................................................................................ 692 posix_getsid................................................................................................................... 693 posix_uname.................................................................................................................. 693 posix_times.................................................................................................................... 693 posix_ctermid ................................................................................................................ 694 posix_ttyname................................................................................................................ 694 posix_isatty.................................................................................................................... 694 posix_getcwd................................................................................................................. 694 posix_mkfifo.................................................................................................................. 695 posix_getgrnam ............................................................................................................. 695 posix_getgrgid ............................................................................................................... 695 posix_getpwnam............................................................................................................ 695 posix_getpwuid.............................................................................................................. 696 posix_getrlimit............................................................................................................... 697 XLVIII. PostgreSQL functions ............................................................................................... 699 pg_Close ........................................................................................................................ 701 pg_cmdTuples................................................................................................................ 701 pg_Connect.................................................................................................................... 701 31 pg_DBname................................................................................................................... 702 pg_ErrorMessage........................................................................................................... 702 pg_Exec ......................................................................................................................... 702 pg_Fetch_Array............................................................................................................. 703 pg_Fetch_Object............................................................................................................ 704 pg_Fetch_Row............................................................................................................... 705 pg_FieldIsNull............................................................................................................... 706 pg_FieldName ............................................................................................................... 706 pg_FieldNum................................................................................................................. 707 pg_FieldPrtLen .............................................................................................................. 707 pg_FieldSize .................................................................................................................. 707 pg_FieldType ................................................................................................................. 708 pg_FreeResult................................................................................................................ 708 pg_GetLastOid .............................................................................................................. 708 pg_Host.......................................................................................................................... 708 pg_loclose...................................................................................................................... 709 pg_locreate .................................................................................................................... 709 pg_loexport.................................................................................................................... 709 pg_loimport ................................................................................................................... 710 pg_loopen ...................................................................................................................... 710 pg_loread ....................................................................................................................... 710 pg_loreadall ................................................................................................................... 710 pg_lounlink.................................................................................................................... 711 pg_lowrite...................................................................................................................... 711 pg_NumFields ............................................................................................................... 711 pg_NumRows ................................................................................................................ 712 pg_Options .................................................................................................................... 712 pg_pConnect.................................................................................................................. 712 pg_Port .......................................................................................................................... 713 pg_Result....................................................................................................................... 713 pg_trace ......................................................................................................................... 713 pg_tty............................................................................................................................. 714 pg_untrace ..................................................................................................................... 714 XLIX. Program Execution functions ...................................................................................... 715 escapeshellcmd .............................................................................................................. 716 exec................................................................................................................................ 716 passthru.......................................................................................................................... 716 system ............................................................................................................................ 717 L. GNU Recode functions....................................................................................................... 718 recode_string ................................................................................................................. 719 recode ............................................................................................................................ 719 recode_file ..................................................................................................................... 719 LI. Regular expression functions ............................................................................................ 720 ereg ................................................................................................................................ 722 32 ereg_replace................................................................................................................... 722 eregi ............................................................................................................................... 723 eregi_replace.................................................................................................................. 723 split ................................................................................................................................ 723 sql_regcase..................................................................................................................... 724 LII. Semaphore and Shared Memory Functions ..................................................................... 726 sem_get.......................................................................................................................... 727 sem_acquire................................................................................................................... 727 sem_release.................................................................................................................... 727 shm_attach..................................................................................................................... 728 shm_detach .................................................................................................................... 728 shm_remove................................................................................................................... 728 shm_put_var .................................................................................................................. 729 shm_get_var................................................................................................................... 729 shm_remove_var............................................................................................................ 729 LIII. Session handling functions ............................................................................................. 730 session_start................................................................................................................... 734 session_destroy.............................................................................................................. 734 session_name................................................................................................................. 734 session_module_name................................................................................................... 735 session_save_path.......................................................................................................... 735 session_id ...................................................................................................................... 736 session_register.............................................................................................................. 736 session_unregister.......................................................................................................... 736 session_unset ................................................................................................................. 737 session_is_registered ..................................................................................................... 737 session_get_cookie_params .......................................................................................... 737 session_set_cookie_params........................................................................................... 738 session_decode .............................................................................................................. 738 session_encode .............................................................................................................. 738 LIV. SNMP functions ............................................................................................................. 740 snmpget.......................................................................................................................... 741 snmpset .......................................................................................................................... 741 snmpwalk....................................................................................................................... 741 snmpwalkoid.................................................................................................................. 742 snmp_get_quick_print ................................................................................................... 743 snmp_set_quick_print.................................................................................................... 743 LV. String functions ................................................................................................................ 745 AddCSlashes.................................................................................................................. 746 AddSlashes .................................................................................................................... 746 bin2hex .......................................................................................................................... 746 Chop .............................................................................................................................. 747 Chr ................................................................................................................................. 747 chunk_split .................................................................................................................... 747 33 convert_cyr_string ......................................................................................................... 748 count_chars.................................................................................................................... 748 crypt............................................................................................................................... 749 echo................................................................................................................................ 750 explode .......................................................................................................................... 750 flush ............................................................................................................................... 751 get_html_translation_table ............................................................................................ 751 get_meta_tags ................................................................................................................ 752 htmlentities .................................................................................................................... 753 htmlspecialchars ............................................................................................................ 753 implode .......................................................................................................................... 754 join................................................................................................................................. 754 levenshtein ..................................................................................................................... 754 ltrim ............................................................................................................................... 755 md5 ................................................................................................................................ 755 Metaphone ..................................................................................................................... 755 nl2br............................................................................................................................... 756 Ord................................................................................................................................. 756 parse_str......................................................................................................................... 756 print................................................................................................................................ 757 printf .............................................................................................................................. 757 quoted_printable_decode............................................................................................... 757 QuoteMeta ..................................................................................................................... 758 rawurldecode ................................................................................................................. 758 rawurlencode ................................................................................................................. 759 setlocale ......................................................................................................................... 759 similar_text .................................................................................................................... 760 soundex.......................................................................................................................... 760 sprintf............................................................................................................................. 761 strcasecmp ..................................................................................................................... 762 strchr .............................................................................................................................. 763 strcmp ............................................................................................................................ 763 strcspn............................................................................................................................ 763 strip_tags........................................................................................................................ 764 StripCSlashes................................................................................................................. 764 StripSlashes ................................................................................................................... 764 stristr .............................................................................................................................. 765 strlen .............................................................................................................................. 765 strpos.............................................................................................................................. 765 strrchr............................................................................................................................. 766 str_repeat ....................................................................................................................... 767 strrev .............................................................................................................................. 767 strrpos ............................................................................................................................ 767 strspn.............................................................................................................................. 768 34 strstr ............................................................................................................................... 768 strtok .............................................................................................................................. 769 strtolower ....................................................................................................................... 769 strtoupper....................................................................................................................... 770 str_replace...................................................................................................................... 770 strtr................................................................................................................................. 771 substr.............................................................................................................................. 772 substr_replace ................................................................................................................ 773 trim ................................................................................................................................ 774 ucfirst ............................................................................................................................. 774 ucwords.......................................................................................................................... 775 LVI. Shockwave Flash functions............................................................................................. 776 swf_openfile .................................................................................................................. 778 swf_closefile .................................................................................................................. 778 swf_labelframe .............................................................................................................. 778 swf_showframe.............................................................................................................. 778 swf_setframe.................................................................................................................. 779 swf_getframe ................................................................................................................. 779 swf_mulcolor................................................................................................................. 779 swf_addcolor ................................................................................................................. 779 swf_placeobject ............................................................................................................. 780 swf_modifyobject .......................................................................................................... 780 swf_removeobject.......................................................................................................... 781 swf_nextid ..................................................................................................................... 781 swf_startdoaction........................................................................................................... 781 swf_actiongotoframe ..................................................................................................... 781 swf_actiongeturl ............................................................................................................ 782 swf_actionnextframe ..................................................................................................... 782 swf_actionprevframe ..................................................................................................... 782 swf_actionplay............................................................................................................... 782 swf_actionstop............................................................................................................... 783 swf_actiontogglequality ................................................................................................ 783 swf_actionwaitforframe................................................................................................. 783 swf_actionsettarget ........................................................................................................ 783 swf_actiongotolabel....................................................................................................... 784 swf_enddoaction............................................................................................................ 784 swf_defineline................................................................................................................ 784 swf_definerect................................................................................................................ 784 swf_definepoly .............................................................................................................. 785 swf_startshape ............................................................................................................... 785 swf_shapelinesolid ........................................................................................................ 785 swf_shapefilloff ............................................................................................................. 786 swf_shapefillsolid .......................................................................................................... 786 swf_shapefillbitmaptile.................................................................................................. 786 35 swf_shapefillbitmaptile.................................................................................................. 786 swf_shapemoveto .......................................................................................................... 787 swf_shapelineto ............................................................................................................. 787 swf_shapecurveto .......................................................................................................... 787 swf_shapecurveto3 ........................................................................................................ 788 swf_shapearc ................................................................................................................. 788 swf_endshape ................................................................................................................ 788 swf_definefont ............................................................................................................... 788 swf_setfont .................................................................................................................... 789 swf_fontsize................................................................................................................... 789 swf_fontslant ................................................................................................................. 789 swf_fonttracking............................................................................................................ 789 swf_getfontinfo.............................................................................................................. 790 swf_definetext................................................................................................................ 790 swf_textwidth ................................................................................................................ 790 swf_definebitmap .......................................................................................................... 791 swf_getbitmapinfo......................................................................................................... 791 swf_startsymbol............................................................................................................. 791 swf_endsymbol.............................................................................................................. 791 swf_startbutton .............................................................................................................. 792 swf_addbuttonrecord ..................................................................................................... 792 swf_oncondition ............................................................................................................ 793 swf_endbutton ............................................................................................................... 793 swf_viewport ................................................................................................................. 794 swf_ortho....................................................................................................................... 794 swf_ortho2..................................................................................................................... 794 swf_perspective ............................................................................................................. 795 swf_polarview ............................................................................................................... 795 swf_lookat ..................................................................................................................... 795 swf_pushmatrix ............................................................................................................. 796 swf_popmatrix............................................................................................................... 796 swf_scale ....................................................................................................................... 796 swf_translate.................................................................................................................. 797 swf_rotate ...................................................................................................................... 797 swf_posround ................................................................................................................ 797 LVII. Sybase functions............................................................................................................ 798 sybase_affected_rows .................................................................................................... 799 sybase_close .................................................................................................................. 799 sybase_connect .............................................................................................................. 799 sybase_data_seek........................................................................................................... 800 sybase_fetch_array ........................................................................................................ 800 sybase_fetch_field ......................................................................................................... 801 sybase_fetch_object....................................................................................................... 801 sybase_fetch_row .......................................................................................................... 801 36 sybase_field_seek .......................................................................................................... 802 sybase_free_result ......................................................................................................... 802 sybase_num_fields......................................................................................................... 802 sybase_num_rows.......................................................................................................... 803 sybase_pconnect ............................................................................................................ 803 sybase_query ................................................................................................................. 803 sybase_result.................................................................................................................. 804 sybase_select_db ........................................................................................................... 804 LVIII. URL Functions ............................................................................................................. 806 base64_decode............................................................................................................... 807 base64_encode............................................................................................................... 807 parse_url ........................................................................................................................ 807 urldecode ....................................................................................................................... 807 urlencode ....................................................................................................................... 808 LIX. Variable Functions .......................................................................................................... 809 call_user_func................................................................................................................ 810 doubleval........................................................................................................................ 810 empty ............................................................................................................................. 810 gettype ........................................................................................................................... 811 intval .............................................................................................................................. 811 is_array .......................................................................................................................... 812 is_bool ........................................................................................................................... 812 is_double........................................................................................................................ 812 is_float ........................................................................................................................... 813 is_int .............................................................................................................................. 813 is_integer ....................................................................................................................... 813 is_long ........................................................................................................................... 814 is_numeric ..................................................................................................................... 814 is_object......................................................................................................................... 814 is_real ............................................................................................................................ 814 is_resource..................................................................................................................... 815 is_string ......................................................................................................................... 815 isset ................................................................................................................................ 815 print_r ............................................................................................................................ 816 settype............................................................................................................................ 817 strval .............................................................................................................................. 817 unset............................................................................................................................... 817 var_dump ....................................................................................................................... 818 LX. Vmailmgr functions ......................................................................................................... 819 vm_adduser.................................................................................................................... 820 vm_addalias................................................................................................................... 820 vm_passwd .................................................................................................................... 820 vm_delalias.................................................................................................................... 820 vm_deluser .................................................................................................................... 821 37 LXI. WDDX functions............................................................................................................ 822 wddx_serialize_value .................................................................................................... 824 wddx_serialize_vars ...................................................................................................... 824 wddx_packet_start ......................................................................................................... 825 wddx_packet_end .......................................................................................................... 825 wddx_add_vars.............................................................................................................. 825 wddx_deserialize ........................................................................................................... 825 LXII. XML parser functions ................................................................................................... 827 xml_parser_create.......................................................................................................... 837 xml_set_object............................................................................................................... 837 xml_set_element_handler.............................................................................................. 838 xml_set_character_data_handler ................................................................................... 839 xml_set_processing_instruction_handler ...................................................................... 840 xml_set_default_handler ............................................................................................... 841 xml_set_unparsed_entity_decl_handler ........................................................................ 841 xml_set_notation_decl_handler..................................................................................... 842 xml_set_external_entity_ref_handler ............................................................................ 843 xml_parse ...................................................................................................................... 844 xml_get_error_code....................................................................................................... 845 xml_error_string ............................................................................................................ 845 xml_get_current_line_number ...................................................................................... 846 xml_get_current_column_number ................................................................................ 846 xml_get_current_byte_index ......................................................................................... 847 xml_parser_free............................................................................................................. 847 xml_parser_set_option .................................................................................................. 847 xml_parser_get_option .................................................................................................. 848 utf8_decode ................................................................................................................... 849 utf8_encode ................................................................................................................... 849 V. Appendixes.................................................................................................................................. 851 A. Migrating from PHP/FI 2.0 to PHP 3.0.............................................................................. 852 About the incompatbilities in 3.0 .................................................................................. 852 Start/end tags ................................................................................................................. 852 if..endif syntax ............................................................................................................... 853 while syntax................................................................................................................... 854 Expression types............................................................................................................ 854 Error messages have changed........................................................................................ 855 Short-circuited boolean evaluation ................................................................................ 855 Function true/false return values ................................................................................... 855 Other incompatibilities .................................................................................................. 856 B. PHP development ............................................................................................................... 858 Adding functions to PHP3............................................................................................. 858 Function Prototype............................................................................................... 858 Function Arguments............................................................................................. 858 Variable Function Arguments .............................................................................. 858 38 Using the Function Arguments ............................................................................ 859 Memory Management in Functions ..................................................................... 860 Setting Variables in the Symbol Table ................................................................. 860 Returning simple values....................................................................................... 863 Returning complex values.................................................................................... 863 Using the resource list.......................................................................................... 865 Using the persistent resource table ...................................................................... 866 Adding runtime configuration directives ............................................................. 867 Calling User Functions .................................................................................................. 868 HashTable *function_table .................................................................................. 868 pval *object .......................................................................................................... 869 pval *function_name............................................................................................ 869 pval *retval........................................................................................................... 869 int param_count ................................................................................................... 869 pval *params[] ..................................................................................................... 869 Reporting Errors ............................................................................................................ 869 E_NOTICE........................................................................................................... 869 E_WARNING ...................................................................................................... 870 E_ERROR............................................................................................................ 870 E_PARSE ............................................................................................................. 870 E_CORE_ERROR ............................................................................................... 870 E_CORE_WARNING.......................................................................................... 870 C. The PHP Debugger............................................................................................................. 871 Using the Debugger ....................................................................................................... 871 Debugger Protocol......................................................................................................... 871 39 List of Tables 2-1. PHP Modules............................................................................................................................... 65 6-1. Escaped characters ...................................................................................................................... ?? 10-1. Arithmetic Operators............................................................................................................... 112 10-2. Bitwise Operators .................................................................................................................... 113 10-3. Comparison Operators............................................................................................................. 113 10-4. Increment/decrement Operators .............................................................................................. 115 10-5. Logical Operators .................................................................................................................... 116 10-6. Operator Precedence................................................................................................................ 116 1. Calendar modes ............................................................................................................................ 199 1. Calendar week modes ................................................................................................................... 200 1. Font file format ............................................................................................................................. 380 1. Returned Objects for imap_fetchstructure() .............................................................................. 396 2. Primary body type......................................................................................................................... 396 3. Transfer encodings........................................................................................................................ 397 1. Mailbox properties........................................................................................................................ 409 1. LONGVARBINARY handling ..................................................................................................... 563 1. error_log() log types .................................................................................................................... 679 1. error_reporting() bit values ........................................................................................................ 680 1. The user information array ........................................................................................................... 696 1. The user information array ........................................................................................................... 697 1. XML parser options...................................................................................................................... 848 1. UTF-8 encoding............................................................................................................................ 849 B-1. PHP Internal Types ................................................................................................................... 859 C-2. Debugger Error Types............................................................................................................... 872 List of Examples 1-1. An introductory example............................................................................................................. 49 5-1. Ways of escaping from HTML.................................................................................................... 83 6-1. Here doc string quoting example................................................................................................. 86 6-2. Some string examples.................................................................................................................. 87 7-1. Simple form variable ................................................................................................................. 103 7-2. More complex form variables ................................................................................................... 104 7-3. SetCookie Example ................................................................................................................... 105 8-1. Defining Constants .................................................................................................................... 108 8-2. Using __FILE__ and __LINE__ ............................................................................................... 108 11-1. include() in PHP3 and PHP4 .................................................................................................. 132 12-1. Variable function example....................................................................................................... 138 15-1. GIF creation with PHP ............................................................................................................ 144 16-1. HTTP Authentication example................................................................................................ 145 16-2. HTTP Authentication example forcing a new name/password ............................................... 146 40 18-1. File Upload Form .................................................................................................................... 148 18-2. Uploading multiple files .......................................................................................................... 149 19-1. Getting the title of a remote page ............................................................................................ 152 19-2. Storing data on a remote server ............................................................................................... 152 1. getallheaders() Example.............................................................................................................. 161 1. array() example............................................................................................................................ 168 1. array_count_values() example ................................................................................................... 168 1. array_flip() example .................................................................................................................... 169 1. array_keys() example .................................................................................................................. 169 1. array_merge() example ............................................................................................................... 170 1. array_pad() example ................................................................................................................... 171 1. array_pop() example ................................................................................................................... 171 1. array_push() example ................................................................................................................. 172 1. array_reverse() example ............................................................................................................. 172 1. array_shift() example .................................................................................................................. 173 1. array_slice() examples................................................................................................................. 174 1. array_splice() examples .............................................................................................................. 175 1. array_unshift() example.............................................................................................................. 176 1. array_values() example ............................................................................................................... 176 1. array_walk() example ................................................................................................................. 177 1. arsort() example........................................................................................................................... 178 1. asort() example ............................................................................................................................ 178 1. compact() example....................................................................................................................... 179 1. each() examples............................................................................................................................ 181 2. Traversing $HTTP_POST_VARS with each()............................................................................. 181 1. Extract() example ........................................................................................................................ 183 1. in_array() example ...................................................................................................................... 184 1. krsort() example .......................................................................................................................... 185 1. ksort() example ............................................................................................................................ 185 1. list() example ................................................................................................................................ 186 1. rsort() example............................................................................................................................. 189 1. shuffle() example.......................................................................................................................... 189 1. sort() example .............................................................................................................................. 190 1. uksort() example .......................................................................................................................... 191 1. usort() example ............................................................................................................................ 191 1. Aspell_new() ................................................................................................................................ 194 1. Aspell_check() ............................................................................................................................. 194 1. Aspell_check_raw()..................................................................................................................... 195 1. Aspell_suggest()........................................................................................................................... 195 1. Calendar functions ........................................................................................................................ 197 1. easter_date() example.................................................................................................................. 201 1. Easter_date() example................................................................................................................. 201 1. Text output .................................................................................................................................... 216 1. Text output .................................................................................................................................... 216 41 1. Save/Restore ................................................................................................................................. 222 1. Adding a page outline................................................................................................................... 232 1. gzopen() example.......................................................................................................................... 242 1. Date() example ............................................................................................................................. 256 2. Date() and mktime() example...................................................................................................... 256 1. Gmdate() example ....................................................................................................................... 258 1. Gmstrftime() example ................................................................................................................. 258 1. Mktime() example........................................................................................................................ 260 2. Last day of next month ................................................................................................................. 261 1. Strftime() example ....................................................................................................................... 262 1. Strtotime() example ..................................................................................................................... 263 1. Creating a dBase database file ...................................................................................................... 265 1. Using dbase_numfields()............................................................................................................. 268 1. Visiting every key/value pair in a dbm database........................................................................... 273 1. Dir() Example............................................................................................................................... 275 1. List all files in the current directory.............................................................................................. 276 2. List all files in the current directory and strip out . and ............................................................... 276 1. Mcrypt_get_cipher_name() example ......................................................................................... 282 1. Mcrypt_create_iv() example....................................................................................................... 283 1. basename() example .................................................................................................................... 290 1. copy() example ............................................................................................................................. 292 1. dirname() example....................................................................................................................... 293 1. diskfreespace() example .............................................................................................................. 293 1. Fgetcsv() example - Read and print entire contents of a CSV file ............................................... 295 1. Reading a file line by line ............................................................................................................. 296 1. fopen() example ............................................................................................................................ 302 1. Tempnam() example .................................................................................................................... 314 1. touch() example............................................................................................................................ 314 1. Accessing the form data................................................................................................................ 318 1. Populating a PDF document ......................................................................................................... 319 1. Gettext()-check ............................................................................................................................ 331 1. mhash_get_hash_name example .................................................................................................. 335 1. Traversing all hashes..................................................................................................................... 336 1. setcookie() examples .................................................................................................................... 339 1. modifying an attribute................................................................................................................... 361 2. adding a completely new attribute ................................................................................................ 362 3. modifying Title attribute ............................................................................................................... 362 4. modifying Title attribute ............................................................................................................... 362 5. removing attribute......................................................................................................................... 363 1. GetImageSize................................................................................................................................ 368 2. GetImageSize returning IPTC ...................................................................................................... 368 1. Example to handle an error during creation (courtesy vic@zymsys.com)................................... 374 1. Example to handle an error during creation (courtesy vic@zymsys.com ).................................. 375 1. Example to handle an error during creation (courtesy vic@zymsys.com)................................... 376 42 1. ImageTTFText .............................................................................................................................. 388 1. imap_append() example.............................................................................................................. 390 1. imap_mailboxmsginfo() example ............................................................................................... 391 1. imap_createmailbox() example .................................................................................................. 393 1. imap_getmailboxes() example .................................................................................................... 400 1. imap_getmailboxes() example .................................................................................................... 401 1. imap_open() example .................................................................................................................. 404 1. imap_rfc822_write_address() example...................................................................................... 409 1. imap_rfc822_parse_adrlist() example ....................................................................................... 410 1. imap_setflag_full() example........................................................................................................ 411 1. imap_status() example ................................................................................................................ 416 1. imap_fetch_overview() example................................................................................................. 418 1. imap_mime_header_decode() example ..................................................................................... 419 1. Connect to a Informix database .................................................................................................... 423 1. Closing a Informix connection ..................................................................................................... 424 1. Show all rows of the "orders" table as a html table ...................................................................... 425 2. Insert some values into the "catalog" table ................................................................................... 425 1. Informix affected rows.................................................................................................................. 428 1. Retrieve Informix sqlca.sqlerrd[x] values..................................................................................... 429 1. Informix fetch rows ...................................................................................................................... 430 1. Informix results as HTML table ................................................................................................... 431 1. Fielnames and SQL fieldtypes ...................................................................................................... 432 1. Informix SQL fieldproperties ....................................................................................................... 432 1. Ibase_connect() example ............................................................................................................. 441 1. Complete example with authenticated bind.................................................................................. 450 1. Show the list of attributes held for a particular directory entry .................................................... 455 1. List all values of the "mail" attribute for a directory entry ........................................................... 457 1. Produce a list of all organizational units of an organization......................................................... 459 1. LDAP search................................................................................................................................. 461 1. Enumerating all LDAP error messages ........................................................................................ 462 1. Generating and catching an error.................................................................................................. 463 1. Sending mail. ................................................................................................................................ 466 2. Sending mail with extra headers................................................................................................... 466 1. base_convert()............................................................................................................................... 469 1. Defining Constants........................................................................................................................ 503 1. die example ................................................................................................................................... 504 1. Eval() example - simple text merge.............................................................................................. 504 1. Get_browser() example ............................................................................................................... 508 1. Pack() format string ..................................................................................................................... 511 1. Serialize() example ...................................................................................................................... 512 1. Unpack() format string................................................................................................................. 513 1. Unserialize() example .................................................................................................................. 514 1. Msql_tablename() example......................................................................................................... 529 1. MySQL close example ................................................................................................................. 532 43 1. MySQL connect example ............................................................................................................. 533 1. MySQL create database example ................................................................................................. 533 1. MySQL data seek example ........................................................................................................... 534 1. Mysql_fetch_array() ................................................................................................................... 537 1. Mysql_fetch_field() ..................................................................................................................... 538 1. mysql fetch object......................................................................................................................... 540 1. mysql field types ........................................................................................................................... 542 1. mysql_query() ............................................................................................................................. 546 2. mysql_query() ............................................................................................................................. 547 1. Mysql_tablename() Example ...................................................................................................... 548 1. Fsockopen() Example .................................................................................................................. 552 1. Example for the default domain ................................................................................................... 558 1. Example for the NIS order............................................................................................................ 558 1. Example for the NIS master ......................................................................................................... 559 1. Example for NIS match ................................................................................................................ 559 1. Example for the NIS first.............................................................................................................. 560 1. Example for NIS next ................................................................................................................... 560 1. ODBC Setoption Examples .......................................................................................................... 573 1. OCIDefineByName....................................................................................................................... 592 1. OCIDefineByName....................................................................................................................... 593 1. OCILogon ....................................................................................................................................-999 1. OCINLogon .................................................................................................................................. 597 1. OCINewDescriptor ....................................................................................................................... 600 1. OCIRowCount .............................................................................................................................. 602 1. OCINumCols ................................................................................................................................ 603 1. OCIFetchStatement....................................................................................................................... 604 1. OCIColumnSize............................................................................................................................ 606 1. OCIServerVersion......................................................................................................................... 607 1. Code examples.............................................................................................................................. 608 1. Using a REF CURSOR from a stored procedure ......................................................................... 608 2. Using a REF CURSOR in a select statement ............................................................................... 609 1. OCIColumnName ......................................................................................................................... 610 1. OCIColumnType........................................................................................................................... 611 1. Setting document information ...................................................................................................... 620 1. Save and Restore........................................................................................................................... 629 1. Translation .................................................................................................................................... 629 1. Scaling .......................................................................................................................................... 630 1. Including a gif image .................................................................................................................... 639 1. Including a PNG image ................................................................................................................ 640 1. Including a memory image ........................................................................................................... 640 1. Multiple show of an image ........................................................................................................... 642 1. Getting the page number out of a string ....................................................................................... 646 1. Getting all phone numbers out of some text. ................................................................................ 647 1. Replacing several values............................................................................................................... 648 44 2. Using /e modifier .......................................................................................................................... 649 1. Getting parts of search string........................................................................................................ 649 1. preg_grep() example.................................................................................................................... 650 1. error_log() examples ................................................................................................................... 679 1. getlastmod() example.................................................................................................................... 683 1. Getrusage Example....................................................................................................................... 684 1. phpversion() example ................................................................................................................... 685 1. Setting an Environment Variable .................................................................................................. 686 1. pg_cmdtuples................................................................................................................................ 701 1. PostgreSQL fetch array................................................................................................................. 703 1. Postgres fetch object ..................................................................................................................... 704 1. Postgres fetch row......................................................................................................................... 706 1. ereg() example .............................................................................................................................. 722 1. ereg_replace() example................................................................................................................. 723 1. split() example .............................................................................................................................. 724 2. split() example .............................................................................................................................. 724 1. sql_regcase() example................................................................................................................... 725 1. session_name() examples ............................................................................................................ 735 1. Addcslashes() example ................................................................................................................ 746 1. Chop() example............................................................................................................................ 747 1. Chr() example .............................................................................................................................. 747 1. Chunk_split() example ................................................................................................................ 748 1. Echo() example ............................................................................................................................ 750 1. Explode() example ....................................................................................................................... 751 1. Translation Table Example ........................................................................................................... 752 1. Meta Tags Example ...................................................................................................................... 752 1. Implode() example ....................................................................................................................... 754 1. Ord() example .............................................................................................................................. 756 1. Using parse_str() ......................................................................................................................... 757 1. Rawurlencode() example 1 ......................................................................................................... 759 2. Rawurlencode() example 2 ......................................................................................................... 759 1. Soundex Examples........................................................................................................................ 761 1. Sprintf(): zero-padded integers .................................................................................................... 762 2. Sprintf(): formatting currency ..................................................................................................... 762 1. strcasecmp() example .................................................................................................................. 763 1. Strrchr() example ........................................................................................................................ 767 1. Str_repeat() example ................................................................................................................... 767 1. Strstr() example ........................................................................................................................... 768 1. Strtok() example .......................................................................................................................... 769 1. Strtolower() example ................................................................................................................... 770 1. Strtoupper() example .................................................................................................................. 770 1. Str_replace() example ................................................................................................................. 771 1. Strtr() example............................................................................................................................. 771 1. Substr_replace() example ........................................................................................................... 773 45 1. ucfirst() example .......................................................................................................................... 774 1. ucwords() example....................................................................................................................... 775 1. Swf_addbuttonrecord() function example ................................................................................. 792 1. Urldecode() example.................................................................................................................... 808 1. Urlencode() example.................................................................................................................... 808 1. Unset() example ........................................................................................................................... 818 1. wddx_serialize_vars example ....................................................................................................... 824 A-1. Migration: old start/end tags..................................................................................................... 852 A-2. Migration: first new start/end tags ............................................................................................ 852 A-3. Migration: second new start/end tags ....................................................................................... 852 A-4. Migration: third new start/end tags........................................................................................... 853 A-5. Migration: old if..endif syntax.................................................................................................. 853 A-6. Migration: new if..endif syntax ................................................................................................ 853 A-7. Migration: old while..endwhile syntax..................................................................................... 854 A-8. Migration: new while..endwhile syntax ................................................................................... 854 A-9. Migration from 2.0: return values, old code............................................................................. 856 A-10. Migration from 2.0: return values, new code ......................................................................... 856 A-11. Migration from 2.0: concatenation for strings........................................................................ 857 B-1. Fetching function arguments .................................................................................................... 858 B-2. Variable function arguments ..................................................................................................... 859 B-3. Checking whether $foo exists in a symbol table ...................................................................... 861 B-4. Finding a variable’s size in a symbol table ............................................................................... 861 B-5. Initializing a new array ............................................................................................................. 861 B-6. Adding entries to a new array ................................................................................................... 862 B-7. Adding a new resource ............................................................................................................. 865 B-8. Using an existing resource........................................................................................................ 865 B-9. Deleting an existing resource.................................................................................................... 866 C-1. Example Debugger Message .................................................................................................... 873 46 Preface PHP, which stands for "PHP: Hypertext Preprocessor", is an HTML-embedded scripting language. Much of its syntax is borrowed from C, Java and Perl with a couple of unique PHP-specific features thrown in. The goal of the language is to allow web developers to write dynamically generated pages quickly. About this Manual This manual is written in XML using the DocBook XML DTD (http://www.nwalsh.com/docbook/xml/), using DSSSL (http://www.jclark.com/dsssl/) (Document Style and Semantics Specification Language) for formatting. The tools used for formatting HTML, TeX and RTF versions are Jade (http://www.jclark.com/jade/), written by James Clark (http://www.jclark.com/bio.htm) and The Modular DocBook Stylesheets (http://nwalsh.com/docbook/dsssl/) written by Norman Walsh (http://nwalsh.com/). PHP’s documentation framework is maintained by Stig Sæther Bakken (mailto:stig@php.net). Daily HTML snapshots of the manual, including translations, can be found at http://snaps.php.net/manual/. 47 I. Getting Started Chapter 1. Introduction What is PHP? PHP (officially "PHP: Hypertext Preprocessor") is a server-side HTML-embedded scripting language. Simple answer, but what does that mean? An example: Example 1-1. An introductory example 1 2 3 4 Example 5 6 7 8 9 10 Notice how this is different from a CGI script written in other languages like Perl or C -- instead of writing a program with lots of commands to output HTML, you write an HTML script with a some embedded code to do something (in this case, output some text). The PHP code is enclosed in special start and end tags that allow you to jump into and out of PHP mode. What distinguishes PHP from something like client-side Javascript is that the code is executed on the server. If you were to have a script similar to the above on your server, the client would receive the results of running that script, with no way of determining what the underlying code may be. You can even configure your web server to process all your HTML files with PHP, and then there’s really no way that users can tell what you have up your sleeve. What can PHP do? At the most basic level, PHP can do anything any other CGI program can do, such as collect form data, generate dynamic page content, or send and receive cookies. Perhaps the strongest and most significant feature in PHP is its support for a wide range of databases. Writing a database-enabled web page is incredibly simple. The following databases are currently supported: Adabas D InterBase Solid 49 Chapter 1. Introduction dBase Empress FilePro Informix mSQL Sybase MySQL Velocis Oracle Unix dbm PostgreSQL PHP also has support for talking to other services using protocols such as IMAP, SNMP, NNTP, POP3, or even HTTP. You can also open raw network sockets and interact using other protocols. A brief history of PHP PHP was conceived sometime in the fall of 1994 by Rasmus Lerdorf (mailto:rasmus@php.net). Early non-released versions were used on his home page to keep track of who was looking at his online resume. The first version used by others was available sometime in early 1995 and was known as the Personal Home Page Tools. It consisted of a very simplistic parser engine that only understood a few special macros and a number of utilities that were in common use on home pages back then. A guestbook, a counter and some other stuff. The parser was rewritten in mid-1995 and named PHP/FI Version 2. The FI came from another package Rasmus had written which interpreted html form data. He combined the Personal Home Page tools scripts with the Form Interpreter and added mSQL support and PHP/FI was born. PHP/FI grew at an amazing pace and people started contributing code to it. It is difficult to give any hard statistics, but it is estimated that by late 1996 PHP/FI was in use on at least 15,000 web sites around the world. By mid-1997 this number had grown to over 50,000. Mid-1997 also saw a change in the development of PHP. It changed from being Rasmus’ own pet project that a handful of people had contributed to, to being a much more organized team effort. The parser was rewritten from scratch by Zeev Suraski and Andi Gutmans and this new parser formed the basis for PHP Version 3. A lot of the utility code from PHP/FI was ported over to PHP3 and a lot of it was completely rewritten. Today (end-1999) either PHP/FI or PHP3 ships with a number of commercial products such as C2’s StrongHold web server and RedHat Linux. A conservative estimate based on an extrapolation from numbers provided by NetCraft (http://www.netcraft.com/) (see also Netcraft Web Server Survey (http://www.netcraft.com/survey/)) would be that PHP is in use on over 1,000,000 sites around the world. To put that in perspective, that is more sites than run Netscape’s flagship Enterprise server on the Internet. Also as of this writing, work is underway on the next generation of PHP, which will utilize the powerful Zend (http://www.zend.com/) scripting engine to deliver higher performance, and will also support running under webservers other than Apache as a native server module. 50 Chapter 2. Installation Downloading the latest version The source code, and binary distributions for some platforms (including Windows), can be found at http://www.php.net/. Installation on UNIX systems This section will guide you through the configuration and installation of PHP. Prerequisite knowledge and software: • • • Basic UNIX skills (being able to operate "make" and a C compiler) An ANSI C compiler A web server Quick Installation Instructions (Apache Module Version) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 1. gunzip apache_1.3.x.tar.gz 2. tar xvf apache_1.3.x.tar 3. gunzip php-3.0.x.tar.gz 4. tar xvf php-3.0.x.tar 5. cd apache_1.3.x 6. ./configure --prefix=/www 7. cd ../php-3.0.x 8. ./configure --with-mysql --with-apache=../apache_1.3.x --enabletrack-vars 10 9. make 11 10. make install 12 11. cd ../apache_1.3.x 13 12. ./configure --prefix=/www --activatemodule=src/modules/php3/libphp3.a 14 13. make 15 14. make install 16 17 18 19 Instead of this step you may prefer to simply copy the httpd binary overtop of your existing binary. Make sure you shut down your server first though. 51 Chapter 2. Installation 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 15. cd ../php-3.0.x 16. cp php3.ini-dist /usr/local/lib/php3.ini You can edit /usr/local/lib/php3.ini file to set PHP options. you prefer this file in another location, use --with-config-file-path=/path in step 8. 17. Edit your httpd.conf or srm.conf file and add: AddType application/x-httpd-php3 .php3 You can choose any extension you wish here. we suggest. .php3 is simply the one If 18. Use your normal procedure for starting the Apache server. (You must stop and restart the server, not just cause the server to reload by use a HUP or USR1 signal.) Configuration There are two ways of configuring PHP. • Using the "setup" script that comes with PHP. This script asks you a series of questions (almost like the "install" script of PHP/FI 2.0) and runs "configure" in the end. To run this script, type ./setup. This script will also create a file called "do-conf", this file will contain the options passed to configure. You can edit this file to change just a few options without having to re-run setup. Then type ./do-conf to run configure with the new options. • Running configure by hand. To see what options you have, type ./configure --help. Details about some of the different configuration options are listed below. Apache module To build PHP as an Apache module, answer "yes" to "Build as an Apache module?" (the --with-apache=DIR option to configure) and specify the Apache distribution base directory. If you have unpacked your Apache distribution in /usr/local/www/apache_1.2.4, this is your Apache distribution base directory. The default directory is /usr/local/etc/httpd. 52 Chapter 2. Installation fhttpd module To build PHP as an fhttpd module, answer "yes" to "Build as an fhttpd module?" (the --with-fhttpd=DIR option to configure) and specify the fhttpd source base directory. The default directory is /usr/local/src/fhttpd. If you are running fhttpd, building PHP as a module will give better performance, more control and remote execution capability. CGI version The default is to build PHP as a CGI program. If you are running a web server PHP has module support for, you should generally go for that solution for performance reasons. However, the CGI version enables Apache users to run different PHP-enabled pages under different user-ids. Please make sure you read through the Security chapter if you are going to run PHP as a CGI. Database Support Options PHP has native support for a number of databases (as well as ODBC): Adabas D --with-adabas=DIR Compiles with Adabas D support. The parameter is the Adabas D install directory and defaults to /usr/local/adabasd. Adabas home page (http://www.adabas.com/) dBase --with-dbase Enables the bundled DBase support. No external libraries are required. filePro --with-filepro Enables the bundled read-only filePro support. No external libraries are required. 53 Chapter 2. Installation mSQL --with-msql=DIR Enables mSQL support. The parameter to this option is the mSQL install directory and defaults to /usr/local/Hughes. This is the default directory of the mSQL 2.0 distribution. configure automatically detects which mSQL version you are running and PHP supports both 1.0 and 2.0, but if you compile PHP with mSQL 1.0, you can only access mSQL 1.0 databases, and vice-versa. See also mSQL Configuration Directives in the configuration file. mSQL home page (http://www.hughes.com.au/) MySQL --with-mysql=DIR Enables MySQL support. The parameter to this option is the MySQL install directory and defaults to /usr/local. This is the default installation directory of the MySQL distribution. See also MySQL Configuration Directives in the configuration file. MySQL home page (http://www.mysql.com/) iODBC --with-iodbc=DIR Includes iODBC support. This feature was first developed for iODBC Driver Manager, a freely redistributable ODBC driver manager which runs under many flavors of UNIX. The parameter to this option is the iODBC installation directory and defaults to /usr/local. FreeODBC home page (http://users.ids.net/~bjepson/freeODBC/) or iODBC home page (http://www.iodbc.org/) OpenLink ODBC --with-openlink=DIR Includes OpenLink ODBC support. The parameter to this option is the OpenLink ODBC installation directory and defaults to /usr/local/openlink. OpenLink Software’s home page (http://www.openlinksw.com/) 54 Chapter 2. Installation Oracle --with-oracle=DIR Includes Oracle support. Has been tested and should be working at least with Oracle versions 7.0 through 7.3. The parameter is the ORACLE_HOME directory. You do not have to specify this parameter if your Oracle environment has been set up. Oracle home page (http://www.oracle.com/) PostgreSQL --with-pgsql=DIR Includes PostgreSQL support. The parameter is the PostgreSQL base install directory and defaults to /usr/local/pgsql. See also Postgres Configuration Directives in the configuration file. PostgreSQL home page (http://www.postgresql.org/) Solid --with-solid=DIR Includes Solid support. The parameter is the Solid install directory and defaults to /usr/local/solid. Solid home page (http://www.solidtech.com/) Sybase --with-sybase=DIR Includes Sybase support. The parameter is the Sybase install directory and defaults to /home/sybase. See also Sybase Configuration Directives in the configuration file. Sybase home page (http://www.sybase.com/) 55 Chapter 2. Installation Sybase-CT --with-sybase-ct=DIR Includes Sybase-CT support. The parameter is the Sybase-CT install directory and defaults to /home/sybase. See also Sybase-CT Configuration Directives in the configuration file. Velocis --with-velocis=DIR Includes Velocis support. The parameter is the Velocis install directory and defaults to /usr/local/velocis. Velocis home page (http://www.raima.com/) A custom ODBC library --with-custom-odbc=DIR Includes support for an arbitrary custom ODBC library. The parameter is the base directory and defaults to /usr/local. This option implies that you have defined CUSTOM_ODBC_LIBS when you run the configure script. You also must have a valid odbc.h header somewhere in your include path. If you don’t have one, create it and include your specific header from there. Your header may also require some extra definitions, particularly when it is multiplatform. Define them in CFLAGS. For example, you can use Sybase SQL Anywhere on QNX as following: CFLAGS=-DODBC_QNX LDFLAGS=-lunix CUSTOM_ODBC_LIBS="-ldblib -lodbc" ./configure --with-custom-odbc=/usr/lib/sqlany50 Unified ODBC --disable-unified-odbc Disables the Unified ODBC module, which is a common interface to all the databases with ODBC-based interfaces, such as Solid and Adabas D. It also works for normal ODBC libraries. Has been tested with iODBC, Solid, Adabas D and Sybase SQL Anywhere. Requires that one (and only one) of these modules or the Velocis module is enabled, or a custom ODBC library specified. This 56 Chapter 2. Installation option is only applicable if one of the following options is used: --with-iodbc, --with-solid, --with-adabas, --with-velocis, or --with-custom-odbc. See also Unified ODBC Configuration Directives in the configuration file. LDAP --with-ldap=DIR Includes LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) support. The parameter is the LDAP base install directory, defaults to /usr/local/ldap. More information about LDAP can be found in RFC1777 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1777.html) and RFC1778 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1778.html). Other configure options --with-mcrypt=DIR --with-mcrypt Include support for the mcrypt library. See the mcrypt documentation for more information. If you use the optional DIR argument, PHP will look for mcrypt.h in DIR/include. --enable-sysvsem --enable-sysvsem Include support for Sys V semaphores (supported by most Unix derivates). See the Semaphore and Shared Memory documentation for more information. --enable-sysvshm --enable-sysvshm Include support for Sys V shared memory (supported by most Unix derivates). See the Semaphore and Shared Memory documentation for more information. 57 Chapter 2. Installation --with-xml --with-xml Include support for a non-validating XML parser using James Clark’s expat library (http://www.jclark.com/xml/). See the XML function reference for details. --enable-maintainer-mode --enable-maintainer-mode Turns on extra dependencies and compiler warnings used by some of the PHP developers. --with-system-regex --with-system-regex Uses the system’s regular expression library rather than the bundled one. If you are building PHP as a server module, you must use the same library when building PHP as when linking the server. Enable this if the system’s library provides special features you need. It is recommended that you use the bundled library if possible. --with-config-file-path --with-config-file-path=DIR The path used to look for the configuration file when PHP starts up. --with-exec-dir --with-exec-dir=DIR Only allow running of executables in DIR when in safe mode. Defaults to /usr/local/bin. This option only sets the default, it may be changed with the safe_mode_exec_dir directive in the configuration file later. 58 Chapter 2. Installation --enable-debug --enable-debug Enables extra debug information. This makes it possible to gather more detailed information when there are problems with PHP. (Note that this doesn’t have anything to do with debugging facilities or information available to PHP scripts.) --enable-safe-mode --enable-safe-mode Enables "safe mode" by default. This imposes several restrictions on what PHP can do, such as opening only files within the document root. Read the Security chapter for more more information. CGI users should always enable secure mode. This option only sets the default, it may be enabled or disabled with the safe_mode directive in the configuration file later. --enable-track-vars --enable-track-vars Makes PHP keep track of where GET/POST/cookie variables come from in the arrays HTTP_GET_VARS, HTTP_POST_VARS and HTTP_COOKIE_VARS. This option only sets the default, it may be enabled or disabled with the track_vars directive in the configuration file later. --enable-magic-quotes --enable-magic-quotes Enable magic quotes by default. This option only sets the default, it may be enabled or disabled with the magic_quotes_runtime directive in the configuration file later. See also the magic_quotes_gpc and the magic_quotes_sybase directives. --enable-debugger --enable-debugger 59 Chapter 2. Installation Enables the internal PHP debugger support. This feature is still in an experimental state. See also the Debugger Configuration directives in the configuration file. --enable-discard-path --enable-discard-path If this is enabled, the PHP CGI binary can safely be placed outside of the web tree and people will not be able to circumvent .htaccess security. Read the section in the security chapter about this option. --enable-bcmath --enable-bcmath Enables bc style arbitrary precision math functions. See also the bcmath.scale option in the configuration file. --enable-force-cgi-redirect --enable-force-cgi-redirect Enable the security check for internal server redirects. You should use this if you are running the CGI version with Apache. When using PHP as a CGI binary, PHP by default always first checks that it is used by redirection (for example under Apache, by using Action directives). This makes sure that the PHP binary cannot be used to bypass standard web server authentication procedures by calling it directly, like http://my.host/cgi-bin/php/secret/doc.html. This example accesses http://my.host/secret/doc.html but does not honour any security settings enforced by httpd for directory /secret. Not enabling option disables the check and enables bypassing httpd security and authentication settings. Do this only if your server software is unable to indicate that a safe redirection was done and all your files under your document root and user directories may be accessed by anyone. Read the section in the security chapter about this option. --disable-short-tags --disable-short-tags 60 Chapter 2. Installation Disables the short form PHP tags. You must disable the short form if you want to use PHP with XML. With short tags disabled, the only PHP code tag is . This option only sets the default, it may be enabled or disabled with the short_open_tag directive in the configuration file later. --enable-url-includes --enable-url-includes Makes it possible to run code on other HTTP or FTP servers directly from PHP with include(). See also the include_path option in the configuration file. --disable-syntax-hl --disable-syntax-hl Turns off syntax highlighting. CPPFLAGS and LDFLAGS To make the PHP installation look for header or library files in different directories, modify the CPPFLAGS and LDFLAGS environment variables, respectively. If you are using a sensible shell, you should be able to do LDFLAGS=-L/my/lib/dir CPPFLAGS=-I/my/include/dir ./configure Building When PHP is configured, you are ready to build the CGI executable or the PHP library. The command make should take care of this. If it fails and you can’t figure out why, see the Problems section. Testing If you have built PHP as a CGI program, you may test your build by typing make test. It is always a good idea to test your build. This way you may catch a problem with PHP on your platform early instead of having to struggle with it later. 61 Chapter 2. Installation Benchmarking If you have built PHP as a CGI program, you may benchmark your build by typing make bench. Note that if safe mode is on by default, the benchmark may not be able to finish if it takes longer then the 30 seconds allowed. This is because the set_time_limit() can not be used in safe mode. Use the max_execution_time configuration setting to control this time for your own scripts. make bench ignores the configuration file. Installation on Windows 95/98/NT systems This install guide will help you install and configure PHP on your Windows 9x/NT webservers. This guide was compiled by Bob Silva (mailto:bob_silva@mail.umesd.k12.or.us). The latest revision can be found at http://www.umesd.k12.or.us/php/win32install.html. This guide provides installation support for: • • • • Personal Web Server (Newest version recommended) Internet Information Server 3 or 4 Apache 1.3.x Omni HTTPd 2.0b1 General Installation Steps The following steps should be performed on all installations before the server specific instructions. • • Extract the distribution file to a directory of your choice. "C:\PHP3\" is a good start. Copy the file, ’php3.ini-dist’ to your ’%WINDOWS%’ directory and rename it to ’php3.ini’. Your ’%WINDOWS%’ directory is typically: c:\windows for Windows 95/98 c:\winnt or c:\winnt40 for NT servers • Edit your ’php3.ini’ file: • You will need to change the ’extension_dir’ setting to point to your php-install-dir, or where you have placed your ’php3_*.dll’ files. ex: c:\php3 If you are using Omni Httpd, do not follow the next step. Set the ’doc_root’ to point to your webservers document_root. ex: c:\apache\htdocs or c:\webroot Choose which modules you would like to load when PHP starts. You can uncomment the: ’extension=php3_*.dll’ lines to load these modules. Some modules require you to have • • 62 Chapter 2. Installation additional libraries installed on your system for the module to work correctly. The PHP FAQ (http://www.php.net/FAQ.php) has more information on where to get supporting libraries. You can also load a module dynamically in your script using: dl("php_*.dll"); • On PWS and IIS, you can set the browscap.ini to point to: ’c:\windows\system\inetsrv\browscap.ini’ on Windows 95/98 and ’c:\winnt\system32\inetsrv\browscap.ini’ on NT Server. Additional information on using the browscap functionality in PHP can be found at this mirror (http://php.netvision.net.il/browser-id.php3), select the "source" button to see it in action. The DLLs for PHP extensions are prefixed with ’php3_’. This prevents confusion between PHP extensions and their supporting libraries. Windows 95/98/NT and PWS/IIS 3 The recommended method for configuring these servers is to use the INF file included with the distribution (php_iis_reg.inf). You may want to edit this file and make sure the extensions and PHP install directories match your configuration. Or you can follow the steps below to do it manually. WARNING: These steps involve working directly with the windows registry. One error here can leave your system in an unstable state. We highly recommend that you back up your registry first. The PHP Development team will not be held responsible if you damage your registry. Run Regedit. Navigate to: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE /System /CurrentControlSet /Services /W3Svc /Parameters /ScriptMap. On the edit menu select: New->String Value. Type in the extension you wish to use for your php scripts. ex: .php3 Double click on the new string value and enter the path to php.exe in the value data field. ex: c:\php3\php.exe %s %s. The ’%s %s’ is VERY important, PHP will not work properly without it. • • • • • • • • • • Repeat these steps for each extension you wish to associate with PHP scripts. Now navigate to: HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT On the edit menu select: New->Key. Name the key to the extension you setup in the previous section. ex: .php3 Highlight the new key and in the right side pane, double click the "default value" and enter phpfile. • • Repeat the last step for each extension you set up in the previous section. Now create another New->Key under HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT and name it phpfile. 63 Chapter 2. Installation • Highlight the new key phpfile and in the right side pane, double click the "default value" and enter PHP Script. Right click on the phpfile key and select New->Key, name it Shell. Right click on the Shell key and select New->Key, name it open. Right click on the open key and select New->Key, name it command. Highlight the new key command and in the right side pane, double click the "default value" and enter the path to php.exe. ex: c:\php3\php.exe -q %1. (don’t forget the %1). Exit Regedit. • • • • • PWS and IIS 3 users now have a fully operational system. IIS 3 users can use a nifty tool (http://www.genusa.com/iis/iiscfg.html) from Steven Genusa to configure their script maps. Windows NT and IIS 4 To install PHP on an NT Server running IIS 4, follow these instructions: In Internet Service Manager (MMC), select the Web site or the starting point directory of an application. Open the directory’s property sheets (by right clicking and selecting properties), and then click the Home Directory, Virtual Directory, or Directory tab. Click the Configuration button, and then click the App Mappings tab. Click Add, and in the Executable box, type: c:\path-to-php-dir\php.exe %s %s. You MUST have the %s %s on the end, PHP will not function properly if you fail to do this. In the Extension box, type the file name extension you want associated with PHP scripts. (You must repeat step 5 and 6 for each extension you want accociated with PHP scripts. (.php3 and .phtml are common.) Set up the appropriate security. (This is done in Internet Service Manager), and if your NT Server uses NTFS file system, add execute rights for I_USR_ to the directory that contains php.exe. • • • • • • Windows 9x/NT and Apache 1.3.x You must edit your srm.conf or httpd.conf to configure Apache to work with the PHP CGI binary. Although there can be a few variations of configuring PHP under Apache, this one is simple enough to be used by the newcomer. Please consult the Apache Docs for further configuration directives. • ScriptAlias /php3/ "c:/path-to-php-dir/" 64 Chapter 2. Installation • • • AddType application/x-httpd-php3 .php3 AddType application/x-httpd-php3 .phtml Action application/x-httpd-php3 "/php3/php.exe" To use the source code highlighting feature, simply create a PHP script file and stick this code in: . Substitute original_php_script.php3 with the name of the file you wish to show the source of. (this is only one way of doing it). Note: On Win-Apache all back slashes in a path statement such as: "c:\directory\file.ext", must be converted to forward slashes. Omni HTTPd 2.0b1 for Windows This has got to be the easiest config there is: Step 1: Install Omni server Step 2: Right click on the blue OmniHTTPd icon in the system tray and select Properties Step 3: Click on Web Server Global Settings Step 4: On the ’External’ tab, enter: virtual = .php3 | actual = c:\path-to-php-dir\php.exe Step 5: On the Mime tab, enter: virtual = wwwserver/stdcgi | actual = .php3 Step 6: Click OK Repeat steps 2 - 6 for each extension you want to associate with PHP. PHP Modules Table 2-1. PHP Modules php3_calendar.dll php3_crypt.dll php3_dbase.dll php3_dbm.dll php3_filepro.dll php3_gd.dll php3_hyperwave.dll php3_imap4r2.dll php3_ldap.dll php3_msql1.dll php3_msql2.dll Calendar conversion functions Crypt functions DBase functions GDBM emulation via Berkely DB2 library READ ONLY access to filepro databases GD Library functions for gif manipulation HyperWave functions IMAP 4 functions LDAP functions mSQL 1 client mSQL 2 client 65 Chapter 2. Installation php3_mssql.dll php3_mysql.dll php3_nsmail.dll php3_oci73.dll php3_snmp.dll php3_zlib.dll MSSQL client (requires MSSQL DB-Libraries MySQL functions Netscape mail functions Oracle functions SNMP get and walk functions (NT only!) ZLib functions Problems? Read the FAQ Some problems are more common than others. The most common ones are listed in the PHP FAQ, found at http://www.php.net/FAQ.php Bug reports If you think you have found a bug in PHP, please report it. The PHP developers probably don’t know about it, and unless you report it, chances are it won’t be fixed. You can report bugs using the bug-tracking system at http://www.php.net/bugs.php. Other problems If you are still stuck, someone on the PHP mailing list may be able to help you. You should check out the archive first, in case someone already answered someone else who had the same problem as you. The archives are available from the support page on http://www.php.net/. To subscribe to the PHP mailing list, send an empty mail to php3-subscribe@lists.php.net (mailto:php3-subscribe@lists.php.net). The mailing list address is php3@lists.php.net. If you want to get help on the mailing list, please try to be precise and give the necessary details about your environment (which operating system, what PHP version, what web server, if you are running PHP as CGI or a server module, etc.), and preferably enough code to make others able to reproduce and test your problem. 66 Chapter 3. Configuration The configuration file The configuration file (called php3.ini in PHP 3.0, and simply php.ini as of PHP 4.0) is read when PHP starts up. For the server module versions of PHP, this happens only once when the web server is started. For the CGI version, it happens on every invocation. When using PHP as an Apache module, you can also change the configuration settings using directives in Apache configuration files and .htaccess files. With PHP 3.0, there are Apache directives that correspond to each configuration setting in the php3.ini name, except the name is prefixed by "php3_". With PHP 4.0, there are just a few Apache directives that allow you to change the PHP configuration settings. php_value name value This sets the value of the specified variable. php_flag name on|off This is used to set a Boolean configuration option. php_admin_value name value This sets the value of the specified variable. "Admin" configuration settings can only be set from within the main Apache configuration files, and not from .htaccess files. php_admin_flag name on|off This is used to set a Boolean configuration option. You can view the settings of the configuration values in the output of phpinfo(). You can also access the values of individial configuration settings using get_cfg_var(). General Configuration Directives asp_tags boolean Enables the use of ASP-like <% %> tags in addition to the usual tags. This includes the variable-value printing shorthand of <%= $value %>. For more information, see Escaping from HTML. Note: Support for ASP-style tags was added in 3.0.4. 67 Chapter 3. Configuration auto_append_file string Specifies the name of a file that is automatically parsed after the main file. The file is included as if it was called with the include() function, so include_path is used. The special value none disables auto-appending. Note: If the script is terminated with exit(), auto-append will not occur. auto_prepend_file string Specifies the name of a file that is automatically parsed before the main file. The file is included as if it was called with the include() function, so include_path is used. The special value none disables auto-prepending. cgi_ext string display_errors boolean This determines whether errors should be printed to the screen as part of the HTML output or not. doc_root string PHP’s "root directory" on the server. Only used if non-empty. If PHP is configured with safe mode, no files outside this directory are served. engine boolean This directive is really only useful in the Apache module version of PHP. It is used by sites that would like to turn PHP parsing on and off on a per-directory or per-virtual server basis. By putting php3_engine off in the appropriate places in the httpd.conf file, PHP can be enabled or disabled. error_log string Name of file where script errors should be logged. If the special value syslog is used, the errors are sent to the system logger instead. On UNIX, this means syslog(3) and on Windows NT it means the event log. The system logger is not supported on Windows 95. error_reporting integer Set the error reporting level. The parameter is an integer representing a bit field. Add the values of the error reporting levels you want. Table 3-1. Error Reporting Levels 68 Chapter 3. Configuration bit value 1 2 4 8 enabled reporting normal errors normal warnings parser errors non-critical style-related warnings The default value for this directive is 7 (normal errors, normal warnings and parser errors are shown). open_basedir string Limit the files that can be opened by PHP to the specified directory-tree. When a script tries to open a file with, for example, fopen or gzopen, the location of the file is checked. When the file is outside the specified directory-tree, PHP will refuse to open it. All symbolic links are resolved, so it’s not possible to avoid this restriction with a symlink. The special value . indicates that the directory in which the script is stored will be used as base-directory. Under Windows, separate the directories with a semicolon. On all other systems, separate the directories with a colon. As an Apache module, open_basedir paths from parent directories are now automatically inherited. Note: Support for multiple directories was added in 3.0.7. The default is to allow all files to be opened. gpc_order string Set the order of GET/POST/COOKIE variable parsing. The default setting of this directive is "GPC". Setting this to "GP", for example, will cause PHP to completely ignore cookies and to overwrite any GET method variables with POST-method variables of the same name. ignore_user_abort string On by default. If changed to Off scripts will be terminated as soon as they try to output something after a client has aborted their connection. ignore_user_abort(). include_path string Specifies a list of directories where the require(), include() and fopen_with_path() functions look for files. The format is like the system’s PATH environment variable: a list of directories separated with a colon in UNIX or semicolon in Windows. Example 3-1. UNIX include_path 1 2 include_path=.:/home/httpd/php-lib 3 69 Chapter 3. Configuration Example 3-2. Windows include_path 1 2 include_path=".;c:\www\phplib" 3 The default value for this directive is . (only the current directory). isapi_ext string log_errors boolean Tells whether script error messages should be logged to the server’s error log. This option is thus server-specific. magic_quotes_gpc boolean Sets the magic_quotes state for GPC (Get/Post/Cookie) operations. When magic_quotes are on, all ’ (single-quote), " (double quote), \ (backslash) and NUL’s are escaped with a backslash automatically. If magic_quotes_sybase is also on, a single-quote is escaped with a single-quote instead of a backslash. magic_quotes_runtime boolean If magic_quotes_runtime is enabled, most functions that return data from any sort of external source including databases and text files will have quotes escaped with a backslash. If magic_quotes_sybase is also on, a single-quote is escaped with a single-quote instead of a backslash. magic_quotes_sybase boolean If magic_quotes_sybase is also on, a single-quote is escaped with a single-quote instead of a backslash if magic_quotes_gpc or magic_quotes_runtime is enabled. max_execution_time integer This sets the maximum time in seconds a script is allowed to take before it is terminated by the parser. This helps prevent poorly written scripts from tieing up the server. memory_limit integer This sets the maximum amount of memory in bytes that a script is allowed to allocate. This helps prevent poorly written scripts for eating up all available memory on a server. nsapi_ext string 70 Chapter 3. Configuration short_open_tag boolean Tells whether the short form (of PHP’s open tag should be allowed. If you want to use PHP in combination with XML, you have to disable this option. If disabled, you must use the long form of the open tag (). sql.safe_mode boolean track_errors boolean If enabled, the last error message will always be present in the global variable $php_errormsg. track_vars boolean If enabled, GET, POST and cookie input can be found in the global associative arrays $HTTP_GET_VARS, $HTTP_POST_VARS and $HTTP_COOKIE_VARS, respectively. upload_tmp_dir string The temporary directory used for storing files when doing file upload. Must be writable by whatever user PHP is running as. user_dir string The base name of the directory used on a user’s home directory for PHP files, for example public_html. warn_plus_overloading boolean If enabled, this option makes PHP output a warning when the plus (+) operator is used on strings. This is to make it easier to find scripts that need to be rewritten to using the string concatenator instead (.). Mail Configuration Directives SMTP string DNS name or IP address of the SMTP server PHP under Windows should use for mail sent with the mail() function. sendmail_from string Which "From:" mail address should be used in mail sent from PHP under Windows. sendmail_path string Where the sendmail program can be found, usually /usr/sbin/sendmail or /usr/lib/sendmail configure does an honest attempt of locating this one for you and set a 71 Chapter 3. Configuration default, but if it fails, you can set it here. Systems not using sendmail should set this directive to the sendmail wrapper/replacement their mail system offers, if any. For example, Qmail (http://www.qmail.org/) users can normally set it to /var/qmail/bin/sendmail. Safe Mode Configuration Directives safe_mode boolean Whether to enable PHP’s safe mode. Read the Security chapter for more more information. safe_mode_exec_dir string If PHP is used in safe mode, system() and the other functions executing system programs refuse to start programs that are not in this directory. Debugger Configuration Directives debugger.host string DNS name or IP address of host used by the debugger. debugger.port string Port number used by the debugger. debugger.enabled boolean Whether the debugger is enabled. Extension Loading Directives enable_dl boolean This directive is really only useful in the Apache module version of PHP. You can turn dynamic loading of PHP extensions with dl() on and off per virtual server or per directory. The main reason for turning dynamic loading off is security. With dynamic loading, it’s possible to ignore all the safe_mode and open_basedir restrictions. The default is to allow dynamic loading, except when using safe-mode. In safe-mode, it’s always imposible to use dl(). 72 Chapter 3. Configuration extension_dir string In what directory PHP should look for dynamically loadable extensions. extension string Which dynamically loadable extensions to load when PHP starts up. MySQL Configuration Directives mysql.allow_persistent boolean Whether to allow persistent MySQL connections. mysql.default_host string The default server host to use when connecting to the database server if no other host is specified. mysql.default_user string The default user name to use when connecting to the database server if no other name is specified. mysql.default_password string The default password to use when connecting to the database server if no other password is specified. mysql.max_persistent integer The maximum number of persistent MySQL connections per process. mysql.max_links integer The maximum number of MySQL connections per process, including persistent connections. mSQL Configuration Directives msql.allow_persistent boolean Whether to allow persistent mSQL connections. msql.max_persistent integer The maximum number of persistent mSQL connections per process. 73 Chapter 3. Configuration msql.max_links integer The maximum number of mSQL connections per process, including persistent connections. Postgres Configuration Directives pgsql.allow_persistent boolean Whether to allow persistent Postgres connections. pgsql.max_persistent integer The maximum number of persistent Postgres connections per process. pgsql.max_links integer The maximum number of Postgres connections per process, including persistent connections. Sybase Configuration Directives sybase.allow_persistent boolean Whether to allow persistent Sybase connections. sybase.max_persistent integer The maximum number of persistent Sybase connections per process. sybase.max_links integer The maximum number of Sybase connections per process, including persistent connections. Sybase-CT Configuration Directives sybct.allow_persistent boolean Whether to allow persistent Sybase-CT connections. The default is on. sybct.max_persistent integer The maximum number of persistent Sybase-CT connections per process. The default is -1 meaning unlimited. 74 Chapter 3. Configuration sybct.max_links integer The maximum number of Sybase-CT connections per process, including persistent connections. The default is -1 meaning unlimited. sybct.min_server_severity integer Server messages with severity greater than or equal to sybct.min_server_severity will be reported as warnings. This value can also be set from a script by calling sybase_min_server_severity(). The default is 10 which reports errors of information severity or greater. sybct.min_client_severity integer Client library messages with severity greater than or equal to sybct.min_client_severity will be reported as warnings. This value can also be set from a script by calling sybase_min_client_severity(). The default is 10 which effectively disables reporting. sybct.login_timeout integer The maximum time in seconds to wait for a connection attempt to succeed before returning failure. Note that if max_execution_time has been exceeded when a connection attempt times out, your script will be terminated before it can take action on failure. The default is one minute. sybct.timeout integer The maximum time in seconds to wait for a select_db or query operation to succeed before returning failure. Note that if max_execution_time has been exceeded when am operation times out, your script will be terminated before it can take action on failure. The default is no limit. sybct.hostname string The name of the host you claim to be connecting from, for display by sp_who. The default is none. Informix Configuration Directives ifx.allow_persistent boolean Whether to allow persistent Informix connections. ifx.max_persistent integer The maximum number of persistent Informix connections per process. ifx.max_links integer The maximum number of Informix connections per process, including persistent connections. 75 Chapter 3. Configuration ifx.default_host string The default host to connect to when no host is specified in ifx_connect() or ifx_pconnect(). ifx.default_user string The default user id to use when none is specified in ifx_connect() or ifx_pconnect(). ifx.default_password string The default password to use when none is specified in ifx_connect() or ifx_pconnect(). ifx.blobinfile boolean Set to true if you want to return blob columns in a file, false if you want them in memory. You can override the setting at runtime with ifx_blobinfile_mode(). ifx.textasvarchar boolean Set to true if you want to return TEXT columns as normal strings in select statements, false if you want to use blob id parameters. You can override the setting at runtime with ifx_textasvarchar(). ifx.byteasvarchar boolean Set to true if you want to return BYTE columns as normal strings in select queries, false if you want to use blob id parameters. You can override the setting at runtime with ifx_textasvarchar(). ifx.charasvarchar boolean Set to true if you want to trim trailing spaces from CHAR columns when fetching them. ifx.nullformat boolean Set to true if you want to return NULL columns as the literal string "NULL", false if you want them returned as the empty string "". You can override this setting at runtime with ifx_nullformat(). BC Math Configuration Directives bcmath.scale integer Number of decimal digits for all bcmath functions. 76 Chapter 3. Configuration Browser Capability Configuration Directives browscap string Name of browser capabilities file. See also get_browser(). Unified ODBC Configuration Directives uodbc.default_db string ODBC data source to use if none is specified in odbc_connect() or odbc_pconnect(). uodbc.default_user string User name to use if none is specified in odbc_connect() or odbc_pconnect(). uodbc.default_pw string Password to use if none is specified in odbc_connect() or odbc_pconnect(). uodbc.allow_persistent boolean Whether to allow persistent ODBC connections. uodbc.max_persistent integer The maximum number of persistent ODBC connections per process. uodbc.max_links integer The maximum number of ODBC connections per process, including persistent connections. 77 Chapter 4. Security PHP is a powerful language and the interpreter, whether included in a web server as a module or executed as a separate CGI binary, is able to access files, execute commands and open network connections on the server. These properties make anything run on a web server insecure by default. PHP is designed specifically to be a more secure language for writing CGI programs than Perl or C, and with correct selection of compile-time and runtime configuration options it gives you exactly the combination of freedom and security you need. As there are many different ways of utilizing PHP, there are many configuration options controlling its behaviour. A large selection of options guarantees you can use PHP for a lot of purposes, but it also means there are combinations of these options and server configurations that result in an insecure setup. This chapter explains the different configuration option combinations and the situations they can be safely used. CGI binary Possible attacks Using PHP as a CGI binary is an option for setups that for some reason do not wish to integrate PHP as a module into server software (like Apache), or will use PHP with different kinds of CGI wrappers to create safe chroot and setuid environments for scripts. This setup usually involves installing executable PHP binary to the web server cgi-bin directory. CERT advisory CA-96.11 (http://www.cert.org/advisories/CA-96.11.interpreters_in_cgi_bin_dir.html) recommends against placing any interpreters into cgi-bin. Even if the PHP binary can be used as a standalone interpreter, PHP is designed to prevent the attacks this setup makes possible: • Accessing system files: http://my.host/cgi-bin/php?/etc/passwd The query information in a url after the question mark (?) is passed as command line arguments to the interpreter by the CGI interface. Usually interpreters open and execute the file specified as the first argument on the command line. When invoked as a CGI binary, PHP refuses to interpret the command line arguments. • Accessing any web document on server: http://my.host/cgi-bin/php/secret/doc.html The path information part of the url after the PHP binary name, /secret/doc.html is conventionally used to specify the name of the file to be opened and interpreted by the CGI program. Usually some web server configuration directives (Apache: Action) are used to redirect requests to documents like http://my.host/secret/script.php3 to the PHP interpreter. With this setup, the web server first checks the access permissions to the directory /secret, and after that creates the redirected request http://my.host/cgi-bin/php/secret/script.php3. Unfortunately, if the request is 78 Chapter 4. Security originally given in this form, no access checks are made by web server for file /secret/script.php3, but only for the /cgi-bin/php file. This way any user able to access /cgi-bin/php is able to access any protected document on the web server. In PHP, compile-time configuration option --enable-force-cgi-redirect and runtime configuration directives doc_root and user_dir can be used to prevent this attack, if the server document tree has any directories with access restrictions. See below for full the explanation of the different combinations. Case 1: only public files served If your server does not have any content that is not restricted by password or ip based access control, there is no need for these configuration options. If your web server does not allow you to do redirects, or the server does not have a way to communicate to the PHP binary that the request is a safely redirected request, you can specify the option --disable-force-cgi-redirect to the configure script. You still have to make sure your PHP scripts do not rely on one or another way of calling the script, neither by directly http://my.host/cgi-bin/php/dir/script.php3 nor by redirection http://my.host/dir/script.php3. Redirection can be configured in Apache by using AddHandler and Action directives (see below). Case 2: using --enable-force-cgi-redirect This compile-time option prevents anyone from calling PHP directly with a url like http://my.host/cgi-bin/php/secretdir/script.php3. Instead, PHP will only parse in this mode if it has gone through a web server redirect rule. Usually the redirection in the Apache configuration is done with the following directives: 1 2 Action php3-script /cgi-bin/php 3 AddHandler php3-script .php3 4 This option has only been tested with the Apache web server, and relies on Apache to set the non-standard CGI environment variable REDIRECT_STATUS on redirected requests. If your web server does not support any way of telling if the request is direct or redirected, you cannot use this option and you must use one of the other ways of running the CGI version documented here. Case 3: setting doc_root or user_dir To include active content, like scripts and executables, in the web server document directories is sometimes consider an insecure practice. If, because of some configuration mistake, the scripts are not executed but displayed as regular HTML documents, this may result in leakage of intellectual 79 Chapter 4. Security property or security information like passwords. Therefore many sysadmins will prefer setting up another directory structure for scripts that are accessible only through the PHP CGI, and therefore always interpreted and not displayed as such. Also if the method for making sure the requests are not redirected, as described in the previous section, is not available, it is necessary to set up a script doc_root that is different from web document root. You can set the PHP script document root by the configuration directive doc_root in the configuration file, or you can set the environment variable PHP_DOCUMENT_ROOT. If it is set, the CGI version of PHP will always construct the file name to open with this doc_root and the path information in the request, so you can be sure no script is executed outside this directory (except for user_dir below). Another option usable here is user_dir. When user_dir is unset, only thing controlling the opened file name is doc_root. Opening an url like http://my.host/~user/doc.php3 does not result in opening a file under users home directory, but a file called ~user/doc.php3 under doc_root (yes, a directory name starting with a tilde [~]). If user_dir is set to for example public_php, a request like http://my.host/~user/doc.php3 will open a file called doc.php3 under the directory named public_php under the home directory of the user. If the home of the user is /home/user, the file executed is /home/user/public_php/doc.php3. user_dir expansion happens regardless of the doc_root setting, so you can control the document root and user directory access separately. Case 4: PHP parser outside of web tree A very secure option is to put the PHP parser binary somewhere outside of the web tree of files. In /usr/local/bin, for example. The only real downside to this option is that you will now have to put a line similar to: 1 2 #!/usr/local/bin/php 3 as the first line of any file containing PHP tags. You will also need to make the file executable. That is, treat it exactly as you would treat any other CGI script written in Perl or sh or any other common scripting language which uses the #! shell-escape mechanism for launching itself. To get PHP to handle PATH_INFO and PATH_TRANSLATED information correctly with this setup, the php parser should be compiled with the --enable-discard-path configure option. 80 Chapter 4. Security Apache module When PHP is used as an Apache module it inherits Apache’s user permissions (typically those of the "nobody" user). 81 II. Language Reference 82 Chapter 5. Basic syntax Escaping from HTML There are four ways of escaping from HTML and entering "PHP code mode": Example 5-1. Ways of escaping from HTML 1 2 1. 3 4 2. 5 6 3. 7 8 9 10 11 4. 12 13 <% echo ("You may optionally use ASP-style tags"); %> <%= $variable; # This is a shortcut for "<%echo .." %> The first way is only available if short tags have been enabled. This can be done via the short_tags() function, by enabling the short_open_tag configuration setting in the PHP config file, or by compiling PHP with the --enable-short-tags option to configure. The fourth way is only available if ASP-style tags have been enabled using the asp_tags configuration setting. Note: Support for ASP-style tags was added in 3.0.4. The closing tag for the block will include the immediately trailing newline if one is present. Instruction separation Instructions are separated the same as in C or perl - terminate each statement with a semicolon. The closing tag (?>) also implies the end of the statement, so the following are equivalent: 1 83 Chapter 5. Basic syntax 2 5 6 7 Comments PHP supports ’C’, ’C++’ and Unix shell-style comments. For example: 1 2 9 The "one-line" comment styles actually only comment to the end of the line or the current block of PHP code, whichever comes first. 1 2

This is an example.

3

The header above will say ’This is an example’. 4 You should be careful not to nest ’C’ style comments, which can happen when commenting out large blocks. 1 2 7 84 Chapter 6. Types PHP supports the following types: • • • • • array floating-point numbers integer object string The type of a variable is usually not set by the programmer; rather, it is decided at runtime by PHP depending on the context in which that variable is used. If you would like to force a variable to be converted to a certain type, you may either cast the variable or use the settype() function on it. Note that a variable may behave in different manners in certain situations, depending on what type it is at the time. For more information, see the section on Type Juggling. Integers Integers can be specified using any of the following syntaxes: 1 2 3 4 5 6 $a $a $a $a = = = = 1234; -123; 0123; 0x12; # # # # decimal number a negative number octal number (equivalent to 83 decimal) hexadecimal number (equivalent to 18 decimal) Floating point numbers Floating point numbers ("doubles") can be specified using any of the following syntaxes: 1 2 $a = 1.234; $a = 1.2e3; 3 85 Chapter 6. Types Strings Strings can be specified using one of two sets of delimiters. If the string is enclosed in double-quotes ("), variables within the string will be expanded (subject to some parsing limitations). As in C and Perl, the backslash ("\") character can be used in specifying special characters: Table 6-1. Escaped characters sequence \n \r \t \\ \$ \" \[0-7]{1,3} \x[0-9A-Fa-f]{1,2} meaning newline carriage horizontal tab backslash dollar sign double-quote the sequence of characters matching the regular expression is a character in octal notation the sequence of characters matching the regular expression is a character in hexadecimal notation You can escape any other character, but a warning will be issued at the highest warning level. The second way to delimit a string uses the single-quote ("’") character. When a string is enclosed in single quotes, the only escapes that will be understood are "\\" and "\’". This is for convenience, so that you can have single-quotes and backslashes in a single-quoted string. Variables will not be expanded inside a single-quoted string. Another way to delimit strings is by using here doc syntax ("<<<"). One should provide an identifier after <<<, then the string, and then the same identifier to close the quotation. The closing identifier must begin in the first column of the line. Example 6-1. Here doc string quoting example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $str = <<Number: 9

’ */ $num = 9; $str = "

Number: $num

"; /* This one will be ’

Number: $num

’ */ $num = 9; $str = ’

Number: $num

’; /* Get the first character of a string $str = ’This is a test.’; $first = $str[0]; */ /* Get the last character of a string. */ $str = ’This is still a test.’; $last = $str[strlen($str)-1]; ?> String conversion When a string is evaluated as a numeric value, the resulting value and type are determined as follows. The string will evaluate as a double if it contains any of the characters ’.’, ’e’, or ’E’. Otherwise, it will evaluate as an integer. The value is given by the initial portion of the string. If the string starts with valid numeric data, this will be the value used. Otherwise, the value will be 0 (zero). Valid numeric data is an optional sign, 87 Chapter 6. Types followed by one or more digits (optionally containing a decimal point), followed by an optional exponent. The exponent is an ’e’ or ’E’ followed by one or more digits. When the first expression is a string, the type of the variable will depend on the second expression. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo = = = = = = = = 1 + "10.5"; 1 + "-1.3e3"; 1 + "bob-1.3e3"; 1 + "bob3"; 1 + "10 Small Pigs"; 1 + "10 Little Piggies"; "10.0 pigs " + 1; "10.0 pigs " + 1.0; // // // // // // // // $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo $foo is is is is is is is is double (11.5) double (-1299) integer (1) integer (1) integer (11) integer (11) integer (11) double (11) For more information on this conversion, see the Unix manual page for strtod(3). If you would like to test any of the examples in this section, you can cut and paste the examples and insert the following line to see for yourself what’s going on: 1 2 echo "\$foo==$foo; type is " . gettype ($foo) . "
\n"; 3 Arrays Arrays actually act like both hash tables (associative arrays) and indexed arrays (vectors). Single Dimension Arrays PHP supports both scalar and associative arrays. In fact, there is no difference between the two. You can create an array using the list() or array() functions, or you can explicitly set each array element value. 1 2 $a[0] = "abc"; 3 $a[1] = "def"; 4 $b["foo"] = 13; 5 You can also create an array by simply adding values to the array. When you assign a value to an array variable using empty brackets, the value will be added onto the end of the array. 88 Chapter 6. Types 1 2 $a[] = "hello"; // $a[2] == "hello" 3 $a[] = "world"; // $a[3] == "world" 4 Arrays may be sorted using the asort(), arsort(), ksort(), rsort(), sort(), uasort(), usort(), and uksort() functions depending on the type of sort you want. You can count the number of items in an array using the count() function. You can traverse an array using next() and prev() functions. Another common way to traverse an array is to use the each() function. Multi-Dimensional Arrays Multi-dimensional arrays are actually pretty simple. For each dimension of the array, you add another [key] value to the end: 1 2 3 4 5 6 $a[1] $a["foo"] = $f; = $f; # one dimensional examples $a[1][0] = $f; $a["foo"][2] = $f; tive indices) 7 $a[3]["bar"] = $f; tive indices) 8 9 $a["foo"][4]["bar"][0] = $f; 10 # two dimensional # (you can mix numeric and associa# (you can mix numeric and associa- # four dimensional! In PHP3 it is not possible to reference multidimensional arrays directly within strings. For instance, the following will not have the desired result: 1 2 $a[3][’bar’] = ’Bob’; 3 echo "This won’t work: $a[3][bar]"; 4 In PHP3, the above will output This won’t work: Array[bar]. The string concatenation operator, however, can be used to overcome this: 1 2 $a[3][’bar’] = ’Bob’; 3 echo "This will work: " . $a[3][bar]; 4 89 Chapter 6. Types In PHP4, however, the whole problem may be circumvented by enclosing the array reference (inside the string) in curly braces: 1 2 $a[3][’bar’] = ’Bob’; 3 echo "This will work: {$a[3][bar]}"; 4 You can "fill up" multi-dimensional arrays in many ways, but the trickiest one to understand is how to use the array() command for associative arrays. These two snippets of code fill up the one-dimensional array in the same way: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 # Example 1: $a["color"] = "red"; $a["taste"] = "sweet"; $a["shape"] = "round"; $a["name"] = "apple"; $a[3] = 4; # Example 2: $a = array( "color" "taste" "shape" "name" 3 ); => => => => => "red", "sweet", "round", "apple", 4 The array() function can be nested for multi-dimensional arrays: 1 2 array( 5 "color" => "red", 6 "taste" => "sweet", 7 "shape" => "round" 8 ), 9 "orange" => array( 10 "color" => "orange", 11 "taste" => "tart", 12 "shape" => "round" 13 ), 14 "banana" => array( 90 Chapter 6. Types 15 "color" => "yellow", 16 "taste" => "paste-y", 17 "shape" => "banana-shaped" 18 ) 19 ); 20 21 echo $a["apple"]["taste"]; # will output "sweet" 22 ?> 23 Objects Object Initialization To initialize an object, you use the new statement to instantiate the object to a variable. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 do_foo(); ?> For a full discussion, please read the section Classes and Objects. Type Juggling PHP does not require (or support) explicit type definition in variable declaration; a variable’s type is determined by the context in which that variable is used. That is to say, if you assign a string value to variable var, var becomes a string. If you then assign an integer value to var, it becomes an integer. An example of PHP’s automatic type conversion is the addition operator ’+’. If any of the operands is a double, then all operands are evaluated as doubles, and the result will be a double. Otherwise, the 91 Chapter 6. Types operands will be interpreted as integers, and the result will also be an integer. Note that this does NOT change the types of the operands themselves; the only change is in how the operands are evaluated. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 $foo = "0"; // $foo is string (ASCII 48) $foo++; // $foo is the string "1" (ASCII 49) $foo += 1; // $foo is now an integer (2) $foo = $foo + 1.3; // $foo is now a double (3.3) $foo = 5 + "10 Little Piggies"; // $foo is integer (15) $foo = 5 + "10 Small Pigs"; // $foo is integer (15) If the last two examples above seem odd, see String conversion. If you wish to force a variable to be evaluated as a certain type, see the section on Type casting. If you wish to change the type of a variable, see settype(). If you would like to test any of the examples in this section, you can cut and paste the examples and insert the following line to see for yourself what’s going on: 1 2 echo "\$foo==$foo; type is " . gettype ($foo) . "
\n"; 3 Note: The behaviour of an automatic conversion to array is currently undefined. 1 2 $a = 1; 3 $a[0] = "f"; 4 // $a is an integer // $a becomes an array, with $a[0] holding "f" While the above example may seem like it should clearly result in $a becoming an array, the first element of which is ’f’, consider this: 1 2 $a = "1"; 3 $a[0] = "f"; 4 // $a is a string // What about string offsets? What happens? Since PHP supports indexing into strings via offsets using the same syntax as array indexing, the example above leads to a problem: should $a become an array with its first element being "f", or should "f" become the first character of the string $a? For this reason, as of PHP 3.0.12 and PHP 4.0b3-RC4, the result of this automatic conversion is considered to be undefined. Fixes are, however, being discussed. 92 Chapter 6. Types Type Casting Type casting in PHP works much as it does in C: the name of the desired type is written in parentheses before the variable which is to be cast. 1 2 $foo = 10; // $foo is an integer 3 $bar = (double) $foo; // $bar is a double 4 The casts allowed are: • • • • • (int), (integer) - cast to integer (real), (double), (float) - cast to double (string) - cast to string (array) - cast to array (object) - cast to object Note that tabs and spaces are allowed inside the parentheses, so the following are functionally equivalent: 1 2 $foo = (int) $bar; 3 $foo = ( int ) $bar; 4 It may not be obvious exactly what will happen when casting between certain types. For instance, the following should be noted. When casting from a scalar or a string variable to an array, the variable will become the first element of the array: 1 2 $var = ’ciao’; 3 $arr = (array) $var; 4 echo $arr[0]; // outputs ’ciao’ 5 When casting from a scalar or a string variable to an object, the variable will become an attribute of the object; the attribute name will be ’scalar’: 1 2 $var = ’ciao’; 3 $obj = (object) $var; 93 Chapter 6. Types 4 echo $obj->scalar; 5 // outputs ’ciao’ 94 Chapter 7. Variables Basics Variables in PHP are represented by a dollar sign followed by the name of the variable. The variable name is case-sensitive. Variable names follow the same rules as other labels in PHP. A valid variable name starts with a letter or underscore, followed by any number of letters, numbers, or underscores. As a regular expression, it would be expressed thus: ’[a-zA-Z_\x7f-\xff][a-zA-Z0-9_\x7f-\xff]*’ Note: For our purposes here, a letter is a-z, A-Z, and the ASCII characters from 127 through 255 (0x7f-0xff). 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $var = "Bob"; $Var = "Joe"; echo "$var, $Var"; $4site = ’not yet’; $_4site = ’not yet’; $täyte = ’mansikka’; // outputs "Bob, Joe" // invalid; starts with a number // valid; starts with an underscore // valid; ’ä’ is ASCII 228. In PHP3, variables are always assigned by value. That is to say, when you assign an expression to a variable, the entire value of the original expression is copied into the destination variable. This means, for instance, that after assigning one variable’s value to another, changing one of those variables will have no effect on the other. For more information on this kind of assignment, see Expressions. PHP4 offers another way to assign values to variables: assign by reference. This means that the new variable simply references (in other words, "becomes an alias for" or "points to") the original variable. Changes to the new variable affect the original, and vice versa. This also means that no copying is performed; thus, the assignment happens more quickly. However, any speedup will likely be noticed only in tight loops or when assigning large arrays or objects. To assign by reference, simply prepend an ampersand (&) to the beginning of the variable which is being assigned (the source variable). For instance, the following code snippet outputs ’My name is Bob’ twice: 1 2 = &$foo; = "My name is $bar"; $foo; $bar; // Reference $foo via $bar. // Alter $bar... // $foo is altered too. One important thing to note is that only named variables may be assigned by reference. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 // This is a valid assignment. // Invalid; references an unnamed expression. // Invalid. Predefined variables PHP provides a large number of predefined variables to any script which it runs. Many of these variables, however, cannot be fully documented as they are dependent upon which server is running, the version and setup of the server, and other factors. Some of these variables will not be available when PHP is run on the command-line. Despite these factors, here is a list of predefined variables available under a stock installation of PHP 3 running as a module under a stock installation of Apache (http://www.apache.org/) 1.3.6. For a list of all predefined variables (and lots of other useful information), please see (and use) phpinfo(). Note: This list is neither exhaustive nor intended to be. It is simply a guideline as to what sorts of predefined variables you can expect to have access to in your script. Apache variables These variables are created by the Apache (http://www.apache.org/) webserver. If you are running another webserver, there is no guarantee that it will provide the same variables; it may omit some, or provide others not listed here. That said, a large number of these variables are accounted for in the 96 Chapter 7. Variables CGI 1.1 specification (http://hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu/cgi/env.html), so you should be able to expect those. Note that few, if any, of these will be available (or indeed have any meaning) if running PHP on the command line. GATEWAY_INTERFACE What revision of the CGI specification the server is using; i.e. ’CGI/1.1’. SERVER_NAME The name of the server host under which the current script is executing. If the script is running on a virtual host, this will be the value defined for that virtual host. SERVER_SOFTWARE Server identification string, given in the headers when responding to requests. SERVER_PROTOCOL Name and revision of the information protocol via which the page was requested; i.e. ’HTTP/1.0’; REQUEST_METHOD Which request method was used to access the page; i.e. ’GET’, ’HEAD’, ’POST’, ’PUT’. QUERY_STRING The query string, if any, via which the page was accessed. DOCUMENT_ROOT The document root directory under which the current script is executing, as defined in the server’s configuration file. HTTP_ACCEPT Contents of the Accept: header from the current request, if there is one. HTTP_ACCEPT_CHARSET Contents of the Accept-Charset: header from the current request, if there is one. Example: ’iso-8859-1,*,utf-8’. HTTP_ENCODING Contents of the Accept-Encoding: header from the current request, if there is one. Example: ’gzip’. 97 Chapter 7. Variables HTTP_ACCEPT_LANGUAGE Contents of the Accept-Language: header from the current request, if there is one. Example: ’en’. HTTP_CONNECTION Contents of the Connection: header from the current request, if there is one. Example: ’Keep-Alive’. HTTP_HOST Contents of the Host: header from the current request, if there is one. HTTP_REFERER The address of the page (if any) which referred the browser to the current page. This is set by the user’s browser; not all browsers will set this. HTTP_USER_AGENT Contents of the User_Agent: header from the current request, if there is one. This is a string denoting the browser software being used to view the current page; i.e. Mozilla/4.5 [en] (X11; U; Linux 2.2.9 i586). Among other things, you can use this value with get_browser() to tailor your page’s functionality to the capabilities of the user’s browser. REMOTE_ADDR The IP address from which the user is viewing the current page. REMOTE_PORT The port being used on the user’s machine to communicate with the web server. SCRIPT_FILENAME The absolute pathname of the currently executing script. SERVER_ADMIN The value given to the SERVER_ADMIN (for Apache) directive in the web server configuration file. If the script is running on a virtual host, this will be the value defined for that virtual host. SERVER_PORT The port on the server machine being used by the web server for communication. For default setups, this will be ’80’; using SSL, for instance, will change this to whatever your defined secure HTTP port is. 98 Chapter 7. Variables SERVER_SIGNATURE String containing the server version and virtual host name which are added to server-generated pages, if enabled. PATH_TRANSLATED Filesystem- (not document root-) based path to the current script, after the server has done any virtual-to-real mapping. SCRIPT_NAME Contains the current script’s path. This is useful for pages which need to point to themselves. REQUEST_URI The URI which was given in order to access this page; for instance, ’/index.html’. Environment variables These variables are imported into PHP’s global namespace from the environment under which the PHP parser is running. Many are provided by the shell under which PHP is running and different systems are likely running different kinds of shells, a definitive list is impossible. Please see your shell’s documentation for a list of defined environment variables. Other environment variables include the CGI variables, placed there regardless of whether PHP is running as a server module or CGI processor. PHP variables These variables are created by PHP itself. argv Array of arguments passed to the script. When the script is run on the command line, this gives C-style access to the command line parameters. When called via the GET method, this will contain the query string. argc Contains the number of command line parameters passed to the script (if run on the command line). PHP_SELF The filename of the currently executing script, relative to the document root. If PHP is running as a command-line processor, this variable is not available. 99 Chapter 7. Variables HTTP_COOKIE_VARS An associative array of variables passed to the current script via HTTP cookies. Only available if variable tracking has been turned on via either the track_vars configuration directive or the directive. HTTP_GET_VARS An associative array of variables passed to the current script via the HTTP GET method. Only available if variable tracking has been turned on via either the track_vars configuration directive or the directive. HTTP_POST_VARS An associative array of variables passed to the current script via the HTTP POST method. Only available if variable tracking has been turned on via either the track_vars configuration directive or the directive. Variable scope The scope of a variable is the context within which it is defined. For the most part all PHP variables only have a single scope. This single scope spans included and required files as well. For example: 1 2 $a = 1; 3 include "b.inc"; 4 Here the $a variable will be available within the included b.inc script. However, within user-defined functions a local function scope is introduced. Any variable used inside a function is by default limited to the local function scope. For example: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $a = 1; /* global scope */ Function Test () { echo $a; /* reference to local scope variable */ } Test (); This script will not produce any output because the echo statement refers to a local version of the $a variable, and it has not been assigned a value within this scope. You may notice that this is a little bit different from the C language in that global variables in C are automatically available to functions 100 Chapter 7. Variables unless specifically overridden by a local definition. This can cause some problems in that people may inadvertently change a global variable. In PHP global variables must be declared global inside a function if they are going to be used in that function. An example: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 $a = 1; $b = 2; Function Sum () { global $a, $b; $b = $a + $b; } Sum (); echo $b; The above script will output "3". By declaring $a and $b global within the function, all references to either variable will refer to the global version. There is no limit to the number of global variables that can be manipulated by a function. A second way to access variables from the global scope is to use the special PHP-defined $GLOBALS array. The previous example can be rewritten as: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 $a = 1; $b = 2; Function Sum () { $GLOBALS["b"] = $GLOBALS["a"] + $GLOBALS["b"]; } Sum (); echo $b; The $GLOBALS array is an associative array with the name of the global variable being the key and the contents of that variable being the value of the array element. Another important feature of variable scoping is the static variable. A static variable exists only in a local function scope, but it does not lose its value when program execution leaves this scope. Consider the following example: 1 2 Function Test () { 3 $a = 0; 4 echo $a; 101 Chapter 7. Variables 5 6 } 7 $a++; This function is quite useless since every time it is called it sets $a to 0 and prints "0". The $a++ which increments the variable serves no purpose since as soon as the function exits the $a variable disappears. To make a useful counting function which will not lose track of the current count, the $a variable is declared static: 1 2 Function Test () { 3 static $a = 0; 4 echo $a; 5 $a++; 6 } 7 Now, every time the Test() function is called it will print the value of $a and increment it. Static variables also provide one way to deal with recursive functions. A recursive function is one which calls itself. Care must be taken when writing a recursive function because it is possible to make it recurse indefinitely. You must make sure you have an adequate way of terminating the recursion. The following simple function recursively counts to 10, using the static variable $count to know when to stop: 1 2 Function Test () { 3 static $count = 0; 4 5 $count++; 6 echo $count; 7 if ($count < 10) { 8 Test (); 9 } 10 $count--; 11 } 12 Variable variables Sometimes it is convenient to be able to have variable variable names. That is, a variable name which can be set and used dynamically. A normal variable is set with a statement such as: 1 2 $a = "hello"; 102 Chapter 7. Variables 3 A variable variable takes the value of a variable and treats that as the name of a variable. In the above example, hello, can be used as the name of a variable by using two dollar signs. i.e. 1 2 $$a = "world"; 3 At this point two variables have been defined and stored in the PHP symbol tree: $a with contents "hello" and $hello with contents "world". Therefore, this statement: 1 2 echo "$a ${$a}"; 3 produces the exact same output as: 1 2 echo "$a $hello"; 3 i.e. they both produce: hello world. In order to use variable variables with arrays, you have to resolve an ambiguity problem. That is, if you write $$a[1] then the parser needs to know if you meant to use $a[1] as a variable, or if you wanted $$a as the variable and then the [1] index from that variable. The syntax for resolving this ambiguity is: ${$a[1]} for the first case and ${$a}[1] for the second. Variables from outside PHP HTML Forms (GET and POST) When a form is submitted to a PHP script, any variables from that form will be automatically made available to the script by PHP. For instance, consider the following form: Example 7-1. Simple form variable 1 2 3 Name:
4 5 6 103 Chapter 7. Variables When submitted, PHP will create the variable $name, which will will contain whatever what entered into the Name: field on the form. PHP also understands arrays in the context of form variables, but only in one dimension. You may, for example, group related variables together, or use this feature to retrieve values from a multiple select input: Example 7-2. More complex form variables 1 2
3 Name:
4 Email:
5 Beer:
6 11 12
13 If PHP’s track_vars feature is turned on, either by the track_vars configuration setting or the directive, then variables submitted via the POST or GET methods will also be found in the global associative arrays $HTTP_POST_VARS and $HTTP_GET_VARS as appropriate. IMAGE SUBMIT variable names When submitting a form, it is possible to use an image instead of the standard submit button with a tag like: 1 2 3 When the user clicks somewhere on the image, the accompanying form will be transmitted to the server with two additional variables, sub_x and sub_y. These contain the coordinates of the user click within the image. The experienced may note that the actual variable names sent by the browser contains a period rather than an underscore, but PHP converts the period to an underscore automatically. 104 Chapter 7. Variables HTTP Cookies PHP transparently supports HTTP cookies as defined by Netscape’s Spec (http://www.netscape.com/newsref/std/cookie_spec.html). Cookies are a mechanism for storing data in the remote browser and thus tracking or identifying return users. You can set cookies using the SetCookie() function. Cookies are part of the HTTP header, so the SetCookie function must be called before any output is sent to the browser. This is the same restriction as for the Header() function. Any cookies sent to you from the client will automatically be turned into a PHP variable just like GET and POST method data. If you wish to assign multiple values to a single cookie, just add [] to the cookie name. For example: 1 2 SetCookie ("MyCookie[]", "Testing", time()+3600); 3 Note that a cookie will replace a previous cookie by the same name in your browser unless the path or domain is different. So, for a shopping cart application you may want to keep a counter and pass this along. i.e. Example 7-3. SetCookie Example 1 2 $Count++; 3 SetCookie ("Count", $Count, time()+3600); 4 SetCookie ("Cart[$Count]", $item, time()+3600); 5 Environment variables PHP automatically makes environment variables available as normal PHP variables. 1 2 echo $HOME; 3 /* Shows the HOME environment variable, if set. */ Since information coming in via GET, POST and Cookie mechanisms also automatically create PHP variables, it is sometimes best to explicitly read a variable from the environment in order to make sure that you are getting the right version. The getenv() function can be used for this. You can also set an environment variable with the putenv() function. 105 Chapter 7. Variables Dots in incoming variable names Typically, PHP does not alter the names of variables when they are passed into a script. However, it should be noted that the dot (period, full stop) is not a valid character in a PHP variable name. For the reason, look at it: 1 2 $varname.ext; 3 /* invalid variable name */ Now, what the parser sees is a variable named $varname, followed by the string concatenation operator, followed by the barestring (i.e. unquoted string which doesn’t match any known key or reserved words) ’ext’. Obviously, this doesn’t have the intended result. For this reason, it is important to note that PHP will automatically replace any dots in incoming variable names with underscores. Determining variable types Because PHP determines the types of variables and converts them (generally) as needed, it is not always obvious what type a given variable is at any one time. PHP includes several functions which find out what type a variable is. They are gettype(), is_long(), is_double(), is_string(), is_array(), and is_object(). 106 Chapter 8. Constants PHP defines several constants and provides a mechanism for defining more at run-time. Constants are much like variables, save for the two facts that constants must be defined using the define() function, and that they cannot later be redefined to another value. The predefined constants (always available) are: __FILE__ The name of the script file presently being parsed. If used within a file which has been included or required, then the name of the included file is given, and not the name of the parent file. __LINE__ The number of the line within the current script file which is being parsed. If used within a file which has been included or required, then the position within the included file is given. PHP_VERSION The string representation of the version of the PHP parser presently in use; e.g. ’3.0.8-dev’. PHP_OS The name of the operating system on which the PHP parser is executing; e.g. ’Linux’. TRUE A true value. FALSE A false value. E_ERROR Denotes an error other than a parsing error from which recovery is not possible. E_WARNING Denotes a condition where PHP knows something is wrong, but will continue anyway; these can be caught by the script itself. An example would be an invalid regexp in ereg(). E_PARSE The parser choked on invalid syntax in the script file. Recovery is not possible. E_NOTICE Something happened which may or may not be an error. Execution continues. Examples include using an unquoted string as a hash index, or accessing a variable which has not been set. 107 Chapter 8. Constants E_NOTICE Something happened which may or may not be an error. Execution continues. Examples include using an unquoted string as a hash index, or accessing a variable which has not been set. E_ALL All of the E_* constants rolled into one. If used with error_reporting(), will cause any and all problems noticed by PHP to be reported. The E_* constants are typically used with the error_reporting() function for setting the error reporting level. You can define additional constants using the define() function. Note that these are constants, not C-style macros; only valid scalar data may be represented by a constant. Example 8-1. Defining Constants 1 2 3 4 5 6 Example 8-2. Using __FILE__ and __LINE__ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 108 Chapter 9. Expressions Expressions are the most important building stones of PHP. In PHP, almost anything you write is an expression. The simplest yet most accurate way to define an expression is "anything that has a value". The most basic forms of expressions are constants and variables. When you type "$a = 5", you’re assigning ’5’ into $a. ’5’, obviously, has the value 5, or in other words ’5’ is an expression with the value of 5 (in this case, ’5’ is an integer constant). After this assignment, you’d expect $a’s value to be 5 as well, so if you wrote $b = $a, you’d expect it to behave just as if you wrote $b = 5. In other words, $a is an expression with the value of 5 as well. If everything works right, this is exactly what will happen. Slightly more complex examples for expressions are functions. For instance, consider the following function: 1 2 function foo () { 3 return 5; 4 } 5 Assuming you’re familiar with the concept of functions (if you’re not, take a look at the chapter about functions), you’d assume that typing $c = foo() is essentially just like writing $c = 5, and you’re right. Functions are expressions with the value of their return value. Since foo() returns 5, the value of the expression ’foo()’ is 5. Usually functions don’t just return a static value but compute something. Of course, values in PHP don’t have to be integers, and very often they aren’t. PHP supports three scalar value types: integer values, floating point values and string values (scalar values are values that you can’t ’break’ into smaller pieces, unlike arrays, for instance). PHP also supports two composite (non-scalar) types: arrays and objects. Each of these value types can be assigned into variables or returned from functions. So far, users of PHP/FI 2 shouldn’t feel any change. However, PHP takes expressions much further, in the same way many other languages do. PHP is an expression-oriented language, in the sense that almost everything is an expression. Consider the example we’ve already dealt with, ’$a = 5’. It’s easy to see that there are two values involved here, the value of the integer constant ’5’, and the value of $a which is being updated to 5 as well. But the truth is that there’s one additional value involved here, and that’s the value of the assignment itself. The assignment itself evaluates to the assigned value, in this case 5. In practice, it means that ’$a = 5’, regardless of what it does, is an expression with the value 5. Thus, writing something like ’$b = ($a = 5)’ is like writing ’$a = 5; $b = 5;’ (a semicolon marks the end of a statement). Since assignments are parsed in a right to left order, you can also write ’$b = $a = 5’. Another good example of expression orientation is pre- and post-increment and decrement. Users of PHP/FI 2 and many other languages may be familiar with the notation of variable++ and variable--. 109 Chapter 9. Expressions These are increment and decrement operators. In PHP/FI 2, the statement ’$a++’ has no value (is not an expression), and thus you can’t assign it or use it in any way. PHP enhances the increment/decrement capabilities by making these expressions as well, like in C. In PHP, like in C, there are two types of increment - pre-increment and post-increment. Both pre-increment and post-increment essentially increment the variable, and the effect on the variable is idential. The difference is with the value of the increment expression. Pre-increment, which is written ’++$variable’, evaluates to the incremented value (PHP increments the variable before reading its value, thus the name ’pre-increment’). Post-increment, which is written ’$variable++’ evaluates to the original value of $variable, before it was incremented (PHP increments the variable after reading its value, thus the name ’post-increment’). A very common type of expressions are comparison expressions. These expressions evaluate to either 0 or 1, meaning FALSE or TRUE (respectively). PHP supports > (bigger than), >= (bigger than or equal to), == (equal), != (not equal), < (smaller than) and <= (smaller than or equal to). These expressions are most commonly used inside conditional execution, such as if statements. The last example of expressions we’ll deal with here is combined operator-assignment expressions. You already know that if you want to increment $a by 1, you can simply write ’$a++’ or ’++$a’. But what if you want to add more than one to it, for instance 3? You could write ’$a++’ multiple times, but this is obviously not a very efficient or comfortable way. A much more common practice is to write ’$a = $a + 3’. ’$a + 3’ evaluates to the value of $a plus 3, and is assigned back into $a, which results in incrementing $a by 3. In PHP, as in several other languages like C, you can write this in a shorter way, which with time would become clearer and quicker to understand as well. Adding 3 to the current value of $a can be written ’$a += 3’. This means exactly "take the value of $a, add 3 to it, and assign it back into $a". In addition to being shorter and clearer, this also results in faster execution. The value of ’$a += 3’, like the value of a regular assignment, is the assigned value. Notice that it is NOT 3, but the combined value of $a plus 3 (this is the value that’s assigned into $a). Any two-place operator can be used in this operator-assignment mode, for example ’$a -= 5’ (subtract 5 from the value of $a), ’$b *= 7’ (multiply the value of $b by 7), etc. There is one more expression that may seem odd if you haven’t seen it in other languages, the ternary conditional operator: 1 2 $first ? $second : $third 3 If the value of the first subexpression is true (non-zero), then it the second subexpression is evaluated, and that is the result of the conditional expression. Otherwise, the third subexpression is evaluated, and that is the value. The following example should help you understand pre- and post-increment and expressions in general a bit better: 1 2 function double($i) { 3 return $i*2; 110 Chapter 9. Expressions 4 } 5 $b = $a = 5; /* assign the value five into the vari/* post-increment, assign original value of $a (5) to $c */ /* pre-increment, assign the incremented value of $b (6) to $d and $e */ able $a and $b */ 6 $c = $a++; 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 $e = $d = ++$b; /* at this point, both $d and $e are equal to 6 */ $f = double($d++); /* assign twice the value of $d before the increment, 2*6 = 12 to $f */ $g = double(++$e); /* assign twice the value of $e after the increment, 2*7 = 14 to $g */ $h = $g += 10; /* first, $g is incremented by 10 and ends with the value of 24. the value of the assignment (24) is then assigned into $h, and $h ends with the value 20 of 24 as well. */ 21 In the beginning of the chapter we said that we’ll be describing the various statement types, and as promised, expressions can be statements. However, not every expression is a statement. In this case, a statement has the form of ’expr’ ’;’ that is, an expression followed by a semicolon. In ’$b=$a=5;’, $a=5 is a valid expression, but it’s not a statement by itself. ’$b=$a=5;’ however is a valid statement. One last thing worth mentioning is the truth value of expressions. In many events, mainly in conditional execution and loops, you’re not interested in the specific value of the expression, but only care about whether it means TRUE or FALSE (PHP doesn’t have a dedicated boolean type). The truth value of expressions in PHP is calculated in a similar way to perl. Any numeric non-zero numeric value is TRUE, zero is FALSE. Be sure to note that negative values are non-zero and are thus considered TRUE! The empty string and the string "0" are FALSE; all other strings are TRUE. With non-scalar values (arrays and objects) - if the value contains no elements it’s considered FALSE, otherwise it’s considered TRUE. PHP provides a full and powerful implementation of expressions, and documenting it entirely goes beyond the scope of this manual. The above examples should give you a good idea about what expressions are and how you can construct useful expressions. Throughout the rest of this manual we’ll write expr to indicate any valid PHP expression. 111 Chapter 10. Operators Arithmetic Operators Remember basic arithmetic from school? These work just like those. Table 10-1. Arithmetic Operators example $a + $b $a - $b $a * $b $a / $b $a % $b name Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Modulus result Sum of $a and $b. Difference of $a and $b. Product of $a and $b. Quotient of $a and $b. Remainder of $a divided by $b. Assignment Operators The basic assignment operator is "=". Your first inclination might be to think of this as "equal to". Don’t. It really means that the the left operand gets set to the value of the expression on the rights (that is, "gets set to"). The value of an assignment expression is the value assigned. That is, the value of "$a = 3" is 3. This allows you to do some tricky things: 1 2 $a = ($b = 4) + 5; // $a is equal to 9 now, and $b has been set to 4. 3 In addition to the basic assignment operator, there are "combined operators" for all of the binary arithmetic and string operators that allow you to use a value in an expression and then set its value to the result of that expression. For example: 1 2 3 4 5 6 $a $a $b $b = 3; += 5; // sets $a to 8, as if we had said: $a = $a + 5; = "Hello "; .= "There!"; // sets $b to "Hello There!", just like $b = $b . "There!"; 112 Chapter 10. Operators Note that the assignment copies the original variable to the new one (assignment by value), so changes to one will not affect the other. This may also have relevance if you need to copy something like a large array inside a tight loop. PHP4 supports assignment by reference, using the $var = &$othervar; syntax, but this is not possible in PHP3. ’Assignment by reference’ means that both variables end up pointing at the same data, and nothing is copied anywhere. Bitwise Operators Bitwise operators allow you to turn specific bits within an integer on or off. Table 10-2. Bitwise Operators example $a & $b $a | $b $a ^ $b ~ $a $a << $b name And Or Xor Not Shift left result Bits that are set in both $a and $b are set. Bits that are set in either $a or $b are set. Bits that are set in $a or $b but not both are set. Bits that are set in $a are not set, and vice versa. Shift the bits of $a $b steps to the left (each step means "multiply by two") Shift the bits of $a $b steps to the right (each step means "divide by two") $a >> $b Shift right Comparison Operators Comparison operators, as their name implies, allow you to compare two values. Table 10-3. Comparison Operators example $a == $b name Equal result True if $a is equal to $b. 113 Chapter 10. Operators example $a === $b name Identical result True if $a is equal to $b, and they are of the same type. (PHP4 only) True if $a is not equal to $b. True if $a is strictly less than $b. True if $a is strictly greater than $b. True if $a is less than or equal to $b. True if $a is greater than or equal to $b. $a != $b $a < $b $a > $b $a <= $b $a >= $b Not equal Less than Greater than Less than or equal to Greater than or equal to Another conditional operator is the "?:" (or trinary) operator, which operates as in C and many other languages. 1 2 (expr1) ? (expr2) : (expr3); 3 This expression evaluates to expr2 if expr1 evaluates to true, and expr3 if expr1 evaluates to false. Error control Operators PHP supports one error control operator: the at sign (@). When prepended to an expression in PHP, any error messages that might be generated by that expression will be ignored. If the track_errors feature is enabled, any error message generated by the expression will be saved in the global variable $php_errormsg. This variable will be overwritten on each error, so check early if you want to use it. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 See also error_reporting(). 114 Chapter 10. Operators Execution Operators PHP supports one execution operator: backticks (“). Note that these are not single-quotes! PHP will attempt to execute the contents of the backticks as a shell command; the output will be returned (i.e., it won’t simply be dumped to output; it can be assigned to a variable). 1 2 $output = ‘ls -al‘; 3 echo "
$output
"; 4 See also system(), passthru(), exec(), popen(), and escapeshellcmd(). Incrementing/Decrementing Operators PHP supports C-style pre- and post-increment and decrement operators. Table 10-4. Increment/decrement Operators example ++$a $a++ --$a $a-name Pre-increment Post-increment Pre-decrement Post-decrement effect Increments $a by one, then returns $a. Returns $a, then increments $a by one. Decrements $a by one, then returns $a. Returns $a, then decrements $a by one. Here’s a simple example script: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Postincrement"; $a = 5; echo "Should be 5: " . $a++ . "
\n"; echo "Should be 6: " . $a . "
\n"; echo $a = echo echo "

Preincrement

"; 5; "Should be 6: " . ++$a . "
\n"; "Should be 6: " . $a . "
\n"; 115 Chapter 10. Operators 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 echo $a = echo echo echo $a = echo echo ?> "

Postdecrement

"; 5; "Should be 5: " . $a-- . "
\n"; "Should be 4: " . $a . "
\n"; "

Predecrement

"; 5; "Should be 4: " . --$a . "
\n"; "Should be 4: " . $a . "
\n"; Logical Operators Table 10-5. Logical Operators example $a and $b $a or $b $a xor $b ! $a $a && $b $a || $b name And Or Or Not And Or result True if both $a and $b are true. True if either $a or $b is true. True if either $a or $b is true, but not both. True if $a is not true. True if both $a and $b are true. True if either $a or $b is true. The reason for the two different variations of "and" and "or" operators is that they operate at different precedences. (See Operator Precedence.) Operator Precedence The precedence of an operator specifies how "tightly" it binds two expressions together. For example, in the expression 1 + 5 * 3, the answer is 16 and not 18 because the multiplication ("*") operator has a higher precedence than the addition ("+") operator. The following table lists the precedence of operators with the lowest-precedence operators listed first. Table 10-6. Operator Precedence 116 Chapter 10. Operators Associativity left left left left right left left left left left left left non-associative non-associative left left left right right non-associative Operators , or xor and print = += -= *= /= .= %= &= |= ^= ~= <<= >>= ?: || && | ^ & == != === < <= > >= << >> +-. */% ! ~ ++ -- (int) (double) (string) (array) (object) @ [ new String Operators There are two string operators. The first is the concatenation operator (’.’), which returns the concatenation of its right and left arguments. The second is the concatenating assignment operator (’.=’). Please read Assignment Operators for more information. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $a = "Hello "; $b = $a . "World!"; // now $b contains "Hello World!" $a = "Hello "; $a .= "World!"; // now $a contains "Hello World!" 117 Chapter 11. Control Structures Any PHP script is built out of a series of statements. A statement can be an assignment, a function call, a loop, a conditional statement of even a statement that does nothing (an empty statement). Statements usually end with a semicolon. In addition, statements can be grouped into a statement-group by encapsulating a group of statements with curly braces. A statement-group is a statement by itself as well. The various statement types are described in this chapter. if The if construct is one of the most important features of many languages, PHP included. It allows for conditional execution of code fragments. PHP features an if structure that is similar to that of C: 1 2 if (expr) 3 statement 4 As described in the section about expressions, expr is evaluated to its truth value. If expr evaluates to TRUE, PHP will execute statement, and if it evaluates to FALSE - it’ll ignore it. The following example would display a is bigger than b if $a is bigger than $b: 1 2 if ($a > $b) 3 print "a is bigger than b"; 4 Often you’d want to have more than one statement to be executed conditionally. Of course, there’s no need to wrap each statement with an if clause. Instead, you can group several statements into a statement group. For example, this code would display a is bigger than b if $a is bigger than $b, and would then assign the value of $a into $b: 1 2 if ($a > $b) { 3 print "a is bigger than b"; 4 $b = $a; 5 } 6 If statements can be nested indefinitely within other if statements, which provides you with complete flexibility for conditional execution of the various parts of your program. 118 Chapter 11. Control Structures else Often you’d want to execute a statement if a certain condition is met, and a different statement if the condition is not met. This is what else is for. else extends an if statement to execute a statement in case the expression in the if statement evaluates to FALSE. For example, the following code would display a is bigger than b if $a is bigger than $b, and a is NOT bigger than b otherwise: 1 2 if ($a > $b) { 3 print "a is bigger than b"; 4 } else { 5 print "a is NOT bigger than b"; 6 } 7 The else statement is only executed if the if expression evaluated to FALSE, and if there were any elseif expressions - only if they evaluated to FALSE as well (see elseif). elseif elseif, as its name suggests, is a combination of if and else. Like else, it extends an if statement to execute a different statement in case the original if expression evaluates to FALSE. However, unlike else, it will execute that alternative expression only if the elseif conditional expression evaluates to TRUE. For example, the following code would display a is bigger than b, a equal to b or a is smaller than b: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 if ($a > $b) print "a } elseif ($a print "a } else { print "a } { is bigger than b"; == $b) { is equal to b"; is smaller than b"; There may be several elseifs within the same if statement. The first elseif expression (if any) that evaluates to true would be executed. In PHP, you can also write ’else if’ (in two words) and the behavior would be identical to the one of ’elseif’ (in a single word). The syntactic meaning is slightly different (if you’re familiar with C, this is the same behavior) but the bottom line is that both would result in exactly the same behavior. 119 Chapter 11. Control Structures The elseif statement is only executed if the preceding if expression and any preceding elseif expressions evaluated to FALSE, and the current elseif expression evaluated to TRUE. Alternative syntax for control structures PHP offers an alternative syntax for some of its control structures; namely, if, while, for, and switch. In each case, the basic form of the alternate syntax is to change the opening brace to a colon (:) and the closing brace to endif;, endwhile;, endfor;, or endswitch;, respectively. 1 2 3 4 5 A is equal to 5 In the above example, the HTML block "A = 5" is nested within an if statement written in the alternative syntax. The HTML block would be displayed only if $a is equal to 5. The alternative syntax applies to else and elseif as well. The following is an if structure with elseif and else in the alternative format: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 if ($a == 5): print "a equals 5"; print "..."; elseif ($a == 6): print "a equals 6"; print "!!!"; else: print "a is neither 5 nor 6"; endif; See also while, for, and if for further examples. while while loops are the simplest type of loop in PHP. They behave just like their C counterparts. The basic form of a while statement is: 1 2 while (expr) statement 120 Chapter 11. Control Structures 3 The meaning of a while statement is simple. It tells PHP to execute the nested statement(s) repeatedly, as long as the while expression evaluates to TRUE. The value of the expression is checked each time at the beginning of the loop, so even if this value changes during the execution of the nested statement(s), execution will not stop until the end of the iteration (each time PHP runs the statements in the loop is one iteration). Sometimes, if the while expression evaluates to FALSE from the very beginning, the nested statement(s) won’t even be run once. Like with the if statement, you can group multiple statements within the same while loop by surrounding a group of statements with curly braces, or by using the alternate syntax: 1 2 while (expr): statement ... endwhile; 3 The following examples are identical, and both print numbers from 1 to 10: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 /* example 1 */ $i = 1; while ($i <= 10) { print $i++; /* the printed value would be $i before the increment (post-increment) */ } /* example 2 */ $i = 1; while ($i <= 10): print $i; $i++; endwhile; do..while do..while loops are very similar to while loops, except the truth expression is checked at the end of each iteration instead of in the beginning. The main difference from regular while loops is that the first iteration of a do..while loop is guarenteed to run (the truth expression is only checked at the end of the iteration), whereas it’s may not necessarily run with a regular while loop (the truth 121 Chapter 11. Control Structures expression is checked at the beginning of each iteration, if it evaluates to FALSE right from the beginning, the loop execution would end immediately). There is just one syntax for do..while loops: 1 2 $i = 0; 3 do { 4 print $i; 5 } while ($i>0); 6 The above loop would run one time exactly, since after the first iteration, when truth expression is checked, it evaluates to FALSE ($i is not bigger than 0) and the loop execution ends. Advanced C users may be familiar with a different usage of the do..while loop, to allow stopping execution in the middle of code blocks, by encapsulating them with do..while(0), and using the break statement. The following code fragment demonstrates this: 1 2 do { 3 if ($i < 5) { 4 print "i is not big enough"; 5 break; 6 } 7 $i *= $factor; 8 if ($i < $minimum_limit) { 9 break; 10 } 11 print "i is ok"; 12 13 ...process i... 14 15 } while(0); 16 Don’t worry if you don’t understand this right away or at all. You can code scripts and even powerful scripts without using this ‘feature’. for for loops are the most complex loops in PHP. They behave like their C counterparts. The syntax of a for loop is: 1 122 Chapter 11. Control Structures 2 for (expr1; expr2; expr3) statement 3 The first expression (expr1) is evaluated (executed) once unconditionally at the beginning of the loop. In the beginning of each iteration, expr2 is evaluated. If it evaluates to TRUE, the loop continues and the nested statement(s) are executed. If it evaluates to FALSE, the execution of the loop ends. At the end of each iteration, expr3 is evaluated (executed). Each of the expressions can be empty. expr2 being empty means the loop should be run indefinitely (PHP implicitly considers it as TRUE, like C). This may not be as useless as you might think, since often you’d want to end the loop using a conditional break statement instead of using the for truth expression. Consider the following examples. All of them display numbers from 1 to 10: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 /* example 1 */ for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; $i++) { print $i; } /* example 2 */ for ($i = 1;;$i++) { if ($i > 10) { break; } print $i; } /* example 3 */ $i = 1; for (;;) { if ($i > 10) { break; } print $i; $i++; } /* example 4 */ for ($i = 1; $i <= 10; print $i, $i++) ; 123 Chapter 11. Control Structures Of course, the first example appears to be the nicest one (or perhaps the fourth), but you may find that being able to use empty expressions in for loops comes in handy in many occasions. PHP also supports the alternate "colon syntax" for for loops. 1 2 for (expr1; expr2; expr3): statement; ...; endfor; 3 Other languages have a foreach statement to traverse an array or hash. PHP3 has no such construct; PHP4 does (see foreach). In PHP3, you can combine while with the list() and each() functions to achieve the same effect. See the documentation for these functions for an example. foreach PHP4 (not PHP3) includes a foreach construct, much like perl and some other languages. This simply gives an easy way to iterate over arrays. There are two syntaxes; the second is a minor but useful extension of the first: 1 2 foreach(array_expression as $value) statement 3 foreach(array_expression as $key => $value) statement 4 The first form loops over the array given by array_expression. On each loop, the value of the current element is assigned to $value and the internal array pointer is advanced by one (so on the next loop, you’ll be looking at the next element). The second form does the same thing, except that the current element’s key will be assigned to the variable $key on each loop. When foreach first starts executing, the internal array pointer is automatically reset to the first element of the array. This means that you do not need to call reset() before a foreach loop. You may have noticed that the following are functionally identical: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 reset ($arr); while (list(, $value) = each ($arr)) { echo "Value: $value
\n"; } foreach ($arr as $value) { echo "Value: $value
\n"; } 124 Chapter 11. Control Structures The following are also functionally identical: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 reset ($arr); while (list($key, $value) = each ($arr)) { echo "Key: $key; Value: $value
\n"; } foreach ($arr as $key => $value) { echo "Key: $key; Value: $value
\n"; } Some more examples to demonstrate usages: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 /* foreach example 1: value only */ $a = array (1, 2, 3, 17); foreach ($a as $v) { print "Current value of \$a: $v.\n"; } /* foreach example 2: value (with key printed for illustration) */ $a = array (1, 2, 3, 17); $i = 0; /* for illustrative purposes only */ foreach($a as $v) { print "\$a[$i] => $k.\n"; } /* foreach example 3: key and value */ $a = array ( "one" => 1, "two" => 2, "three" => 3, "seventeen" => 17 ); foreach($a as $k => $v) { print "\$a[$k] => $v.\n"; } 125 Chapter 11. Control Structures break break ends execution of the current for, while, or switch structure. break accepts an optional numeric argument which tells it how many nested enclosing structures are to be broken out of. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 $arr = array( ’one’, ’two’, ’three’, ’four’, ’stop’, ’five’ ); while ( list( , $val ) = each( $arr ) ) { if ( $val == ’stop’ ) { break; /* You could also write ’break 1;’ here. */ } echo "$val
\n"; } /* Using the optional argument. */ $i = 0; while ( ++$i ) { switch ( $i ) { case 5: echo "At 5
\n"; break 1; /* Exit only the switch. */ case 10: echo "At 10; quitting
\n"; break 2; /* Exit the switch and the while. */ default: break; } } continue continue is used within looping structures to skip the rest of the current loop iteration and continue execution at the beginning of the next iteration. continue accepts an optional numeric argument which tells it how many levels of enclosing loops it should skip to the end of. 1 2 while (list ($key, $value) = each ($arr)) { 3 if (!($key % 2)) { // skip odd members 4 continue; 5 } 126 Chapter 11. Control Structures 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 do_something_odd ($value); } $i = 0; while ($i++ < 5) { echo "Outer
\n"; while (1) { echo " Middle
\n"; while (1) { echo " Inner
\n"; continue 3; } echo "This never gets output.
\n"; } echo "Neither does this.
\n"; } switch The switch statement is similar to a series of IF statements on the same expression. In many occasions, you may want to compare the same variable (or expression) with many different values, and execute a different piece of code depending on which value it equals to. This is exactly what the switch statement is for. The following two examples are two different ways to write the same thing, one using a series of if statements, and the other using the switch statement: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 if ($i == print } if ($i == print } if ($i == print } 0) { "i equals 0"; 1) { "i equals 1"; 2) { "i equals 2"; switch ($i) { case 0: print "i equals 0"; break; case 1: print "i equals 1"; break; 127 Chapter 11. Control Structures 19 20 21 22 } 23 case 2: print "i equals 2"; break; It is important to understand how the switch statement is executed in order to avoid mistakes. The switch statement executes line by line (actually, statement by statement). In the beginning, no code is executed. Only when a case statement is found with a value that matches the value of the switch expression does PHP begin to execute the statements. PHP continues to execute the statements until the end of the switch block, or the first time it sees a break statement. If you don’t write a break statement at the end of a case’s statement list, PHP will go on executing the statements of the following case. For example: 1 2 switch ($i) { 3 case 0: 4 print "i equals 0"; 5 case 1: 6 print "i equals 1"; 7 case 2: 8 print "i equals 2"; 9 } 10 Here, if $i equals to 0, PHP would execute all of the print statements! If $i equals to 1, PHP would execute the last two print statements, and only if $i equals to 2, you’d get the ’expected’ behavior and only ’i equals 2’ would be displayed. So, it’s important not to forget break statements (even though you may want to avoid supplying them on purpose under certain circumstances). In a switch statement, the condition is evaluated only once and the result is compared to each case statement. In an elseif statement, the condition is evaluated again. If your condition is more complicated than a simple compare and/or is in a tight loop, a switch may be faster. The statement list for a case can also be empty, which simply passes control into the statement list for the next case. 1 2 switch ($i) { 3 case 0: 4 case 1: 5 case 2: 6 print "i is less than 3 but not negative"; 7 break; 8 case 3: 9 print "i is 3"; 10 } 128 Chapter 11. Control Structures 11 A special case is the default case. This case matches anything that wasn’t matched by the other cases. For example: 1 2 switch ($i) { 3 case 0: 4 print "i 5 break; 6 case 1: 7 print "i 8 break; 9 case 2: 10 print "i 11 break; 12 default: 13 print "i 14 } 15 equals 0"; equals 1"; equals 2"; is not equal to 0, 1 or 2"; The case expression may be any expression that evaluates to a simple type, that is, integer or floating-point numbers and strings. Arrays or objects cannot be used here unless they are dereferenced to a simple type. The alternative syntax for control structures is supported with switches. For more information, see Alternative syntax for control structures . 1 2 switch ($i): 3 case 0: 4 print "i 5 break; 6 case 1: 7 print "i 8 break; 9 case 2: 10 print "i 11 break; 12 default: 13 print "i 14 endswitch; 15 equals 0"; equals 1"; equals 2"; is not equal to 0, 1 or 2"; 129 Chapter 11. Control Structures require() The require() statement replaces itself with the specified file, much like the C preprocessor’s #include works. An important note about how this works is that when a file is include()ed or require()ed, parsing drops out of PHP mode and into HTML mode at the beginning of the target file, and resumes PHP mode again at the end. For this reason, any code inside the target file which should be executed as PHP code must be enclosed within valid PHP start and end tags. require() is not actually a function in PHP; rather, it is a language construct. It is subject to some different rules than functions are. For instance, require() is not subject to any containing control structures. For another, it does not return any value; attempting to read a return value from a require() call results in a parse error. Unlike include(), require() will always read in the target file, even if the line it’s on never executes. If you want to conditionally include a file, use include(). The conditional statement won’t affect the require(). However, if the line on which the require() occurs is not executed, neither will any of the code in the target file be executed. Similarly, looping structures do not affect the behaviour of require(). Although the code contained in the target file is still subject to the loop, the require() itself happens only once. This means that you can’t put a require() statement inside of a loop structure and expect it to include the contents of a different file on each iteration. To do that, use an include() statement. 1 2 require (’header.inc’); 3 Please note that both include() and require() actually pull the contents of the target file into the calling script file itself; they do not call the target via HTTP or anything like that. So any variable set in the scope in which the inclusion happens will be available within the included file automatically, since it has effectively become a part of the calling file. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 require ("file.inc?varone=1&vartwo=2"); /* Won’t work. */ $varone = 1; $vartwo = 2; require ("file.inc"); able in file.inc */ /* $varone and $vartwo will be avail- Don’t be misled by the fact that you can require or include files via HTTP using the Remote files feature; the above holds true regardless. 130 Chapter 11. Control Structures In PHP3, it is possible to execute a return statement inside a require()ed file, as long as that statement occurs in the global scope of the require()ed file. It may not occur within any block (meaning inside braces ({}). In PHP4, however, this ability has been discontinued. If you need this functionality, see include(). include() The include() statement includes and evaluates the specified file. An important note about how this works is that when a file is include()ed or require()ed, parsing drops out of PHP mode and into HTML mode at the beginning of the target file, and resumes again at the end. For this reason, any code inside the target file which should be executed as PHP code must be enclosed within valid PHP start and end tags. This happens each time the include() statement is encountered, so you can use an include() statement within a looping structure to include a number of different files. 1 2 $files = array (’first.inc’, ’second.inc’, ’third.inc’); 3 for ($i = 0; $i < count($files); $i++) { 4 include $files[$i]; 5 } 6 include() differs from require() in that the include statement is re-evaluated each time it is encountered (and only when it is being executed), whereas the require() statement is replaced by the required file when it is first encountered, whether the contents of the file will be evaluated or not (for example, if it is inside an if statement whose condition evaluated to false). Because include() is a special language construct, you must enclose it within a statement block if it is inside a conditional block. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 /* This is WRONG and will not work as desired. */ if ($condition) include($file); else include($other); /* This is CORRECT. */ if ($condition) { include($file); } else { include($other); 131 Chapter 11. Control Structures 15 } 16 In both PHP3 and PHP4, it is possible to execute a return statement inside an include()ed file, in order to terminate processing in that file and return to the script which called it. Some differences in the way this works exist, however. The first is that in PHP3, the return may not appear inside a block unless it’s a function block, in which case the return applies to that function and not the whole file. In PHP4, however, this restriction does not exist. Also, PHP4 allows you to return values from include()ed files. You can take the value of the include() call as you would a normal function. This generates a parse error in PHP3. Example 11-1. include() in PHP3 and PHP4 Assume the existence of the following file (named test.inc) in the same directory as the main file: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 \n"; if (1) { return 27; } echo "After the return
\n"; ?> Assume that the main file (main.html) contains the following: 1 2 3 4 5 6 \n"; ?> When main.html is called in PHP3, it will generate a parse error on line 2; you can’t take the value of an include() in PHP3. In PHP4, however, the result will be: Before the return File returned: ’27’ Now, assume that main.html has been altered to contain the following: 1 2 3 4 5 6 \n"; ?> In PHP4, the output will be: 132 Chapter 11. Control Structures Before the return Back in main.html However, PHP3 will give the following output: Before the return 27Back in main.html Parse error: parse error in /home/torben/public_html/phptest/main.html on line 5 The above parse error is a result of the fact that the return statement is enclosed in a non-function block within test.inc. When the return is moved outside of the block, the output is: Before the return 27Back in main.html The spurious ’27’ is due to the fact that PHP3 does not support returning values from files like that. Please note that both include() and require() actually pull the contents of the target file into the calling script file itself; they do not call the target via HTTP or anything like that. So any variable set in the scope in which the inclusion happens will be available within the included file automatically, since it has effectively become a part of the calling file. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 include ("file.inc?varone=1&vartwo=2"); /* Won’t work. */ $varone = 1; $vartwo = 2; include ("file.inc"); able in file.inc */ /* $varone and $vartwo will be avail- Don’t be misled by the fact that you can require or include files via HTTP using the Remote files feature; the above holds true regardless. See also readfile(), require(), and virtual(). 133 Chapter 12. Functions User-defined functions A function may be defined using syntax such as the following: 1 2 function foo ($arg_1, $arg_2, ..., $arg_n) { 3 echo "Example function.\n"; 4 return $retval; 5 } 6 Any valid PHP code may appear inside a function, even other functions and class definitions. In PHP3, functions must be defined before they are referenced. No such requirement exists in PHP4. PHP does not support function overloading, nor is it possible to undefine or redefine previously-declared functions. PHP3 does not support variable numbers of arguments to functions, although default arguments are supported (see Default argument values for more information). PHP4 supports both: see Variable-length argument lists and the function references for func_num_args(), func_get_arg(), and func_get_args() for more information. Function arguments Information may be passed to functions via the argument list, which is a comma-delimited list of variables and/or constants. PHP supports passing arguments by value (the default), passing by reference, and default argument values. Variable-length argument lists are supported only in PHP4 and later; see Variable-length argument lists and the function references for func_num_args(), func_get_arg(), and func_get_args() for more information. A similar effect can be achieved in PHP3 by passing an array of arguments to a function: 1 2 function takes_array($input) { 3 echo "$input[0] + $input[1] = ", $input[0]+$input[1]; 4 } 5 134 Chapter 12. Functions Making arguments be passed by reference By default, function arguments are passed by value (so that if you change the value of the argument within the function, it does not get changed outside of the function). If you wish to allow a function to modify its arguments, you must pass them by reference. If you want an argument to a function to always be passed by reference, you can prepend an ampersand (&) to the argument name in the function definition: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 function add_some_extra(&$string) { $string .= ’and something extra.’; } $str = ’This is a string, ’; add_some_extra($str); echo $str; // outputs ’This is a string, and something extra.’ If you wish to pass a variable by reference to a function which does not do this by default, you may prepend an ampersand to the argument name in the function call: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 function foo ($bar) { $bar .= ’ and something extra.’; } $str = ’This is a string, ’; foo ($str); echo $str; // outputs ’This is a string, ’ foo (&$str); echo $str; // outputs ’This is a string, and something extra.’ Default argument values A function may define C++-style default values for scalar arguments as follows: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 function makecoffee ($type = "cappucino") { return "Making a cup of $type.\n"; } echo makecoffee (); echo makecoffee ("espresso"); The output from the above snippet is: 135 Chapter 12. Functions Making a cup of cappucino. Making a cup of espresso. The default value must be a constant expression, not (for example) a variable or class member. Note that when using default arguments, any defaults should be on the right side of any non-default arguments; otherwise, things will not work as expected. Consider the following code snippet: 1 2 function makeyogurt ($type = "acidophilus", $flavour) { 3 return "Making a bowl of $type $flavour.\n"; 4 } 5 6 echo makeyogurt ("raspberry"); // won’t work as expected 7 The output of the above example is: Warning: Missing argument 2 in call to makeyogurt() in /usr/local/etc/httpd/htdocs/php3test/functest.html on line 41 Making a bowl of raspberry . Now, compare the above with this: 1 2 function makeyogurt ($flavour, $type = "acidophilus") { 3 return "Making a bowl of $type $flavour.\n"; 4 } 5 6 echo makeyogurt ("raspberry"); // works as expected 7 The output of this example is: Making a bowl of acidophilus raspberry. Variable-length argument lists PHP4 has support for variable-length argument lists in user-defined functions. This is really quite easy, using the func_num_args(), func_get_arg(), and func_get_args() functions. 136 Chapter 12. Functions No special syntax is required, and argument lists may still be explicitly provided with function definitions and will behave as normal. Returning values Values are returned by using the optional return statement. Any type may be returned, including lists and objects. 1 2 function square ($num) { 3 return $num * $num; 4 } 5 echo square (4); // outputs ’16’. 6 You can’t return multiple values from a function, but similar results can be obtained by returning a list. 1 2 function small_numbers() { 3 return array (0, 1, 2); 4 } 5 list ($zero, $one, $two) = small_numbers(); 6 old_function The old_function statement allows you to declare a function using a syntax identical to PHP/FI2 (except you must replace ’function’ with ’old_function’. This is a deprecated feature, and should only be used by the PHP/FI2->PHP3 convertor. Warning Functions declared as old_function cannot be called from PHP’s internal code. Among other things, this means you can’t use them in functions such as usort(), array_walk(), and register_shutdown_function(). You can get around this limitation by writing a wrapper function (in normal PHP3 form) to call the old_function. 137 Chapter 12. Functions Variable functions PHP supports the concept of variable functions. This means that if a variable name has parentheses appended to it, PHP will look for a function with the same name as whatever the variable evaluates to, and will attempt to execute it. Among other things, this can be used to implement callbacks, function tables, and so forth. Example 12-1. Variable function example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 \n"; } function bar( $arg = ” ) { echo "In bar(); argument was ’$arg’.
\n"; } $func = ’foo’; $func(); $func = ’bar’; $func( ’test’ ); ?> 138 Chapter 13. Classes and Objects class A class is a collection of variables and functions working with these variables. A class is defined using the following syntax: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 items[$artnr] += $num; } // Take $num articles of $artnr out of the cart function remove_item ($artnr, $num) { if ($this->items[$artnr] > $num) { $this->items[$artnr] -= $num; return true; } else { return false; } } } ?> This defines a class named Cart that consists of an associative array of articles in the cart and two functions to add and remove items from this cart. Classes are types, that is, they are blueprints for actual variables. You have to create a variable of the desired type with the new operator. 1 2 3 4 $cart = new Cart; $cart->add_item("10", 1); This creates an object $cart of the class Cart. The function add_item() of that object is being called to add 1 item of article number 10 to the cart. 139 Chapter 13. Classes and Objects Classes can be extensions of other classes. The extended or derived class has all variables and functions of the base class and what you add in the extended definition. This is done using the extends keyword. Multiple inheritance is not supported. 1 2 class Named_Cart extends Cart { 3 var $owner; 4 5 function set_owner ($name) { 6 $this->owner = $name; 7 } 8 } 9 This defines a class Named_Cart that has all variables and functions of Cart plus an additional variable $owner and an additional function set_owner(). You create a named cart the usual way and can now set and get the carts owner. You can still use normal cart functions on named carts: 1 2 3 4 5 6 $ncart = new Named_Cart; $ncart->set_owner ("kris"); print $ncart->owner; $ncart->add_item ("10", 1); // // // // Create a named cart Name that cart print the cart owners name (inherited functionality from cart) Within functions of a class the variable $this means this object. You have to use $this->something to access any variable or function named something within your current object. Constructors are functions in a class that are automatically called when you create a new instance of a class. A function becomes a constructor when it has the same name as the class. 1 2 class Auto_Cart extends Cart { 3 function Auto_Cart () { 4 $this->add_item ("10", 1); 5 } 6 } 7 This defines a class Auto_Cart that is a Cart plus a constructor which initializes the cart with one item of article number "10" each time a new Auto_Cart is being made with "new". Constructors can also take arguments and these arguments can be optional, which makes them much more useful. 1 2 class Constructor_Cart extends Cart { 3 function Constructor_Cart ($item = "10", $num = 1) { 4 $this->add_item ($item, $num); 5 } 140 Chapter 13. Classes and Objects 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 } // Shop the same old boring stuff. $default_cart = new Constructor_Cart; // Shop for real... $different_cart = new Constructor_Cart ("20", 17); Caution For derived classes, the constructor of the parent class is not automatically called when the derived class’s constructor is called. 141 III. Features 142 Chapter 14. Error handling There are 4 types of errors and warnings in PHP. They are: • • • • 1 - Normal Function Errors 2 - Normal Warnings 4 - Parser Errors 8 - Notices (warnings you can ignore but which may imply a bug in your code) The above 4 numbers are added up to define an error reporting level. The default error reporting level is 7 which is 1 + 2 + 4, or everything except notices. This level can be changed in the php3.ini file with the error_reporting directive. It can also be set in your Apache httpd.conf file with the php3_error_reporting directive or lastly it may be set at runtime within a script using the error_reporting() function. All PHP expressions can also be called with the "@" prefix, which turns off error reporting for that particular expression. If an error occurred during such an expression and the track_errors feature is enabled, you can find the error message in the global variable $php_errormsg. 143 Chapter 15. Creating GIF images PHP is not limited to creating just HTML output. It can also be used to create GIF image files, or even more convenient GIF image streams. You will need to compile PHP with the GD library of image functions for this to work. Example 15-1. GIF creation with PHP 1 2 12 This example would be called from a page with a tag like: The above button.php3 script then takes this "text" string an overlays it on top of a base image which in this case is "images/button1.gif" and outputs the resulting image. This is a very convenient way to avoid having to draw new button images every time you want to change the text of a button. With this method they are dynamically generated. 144 Chapter 16. HTTP authentication with PHP The HTTP Authentication hooks in PHP are only available when it is running as an Apache module and is hence not available in the CGI version. In an Apache module PHP script, it is possible to use the Header() function to send an "Authentication Required" message to the client browser causing it to pop up a Username/Password input window. Once the user has filled in a username and a password, the URL containing the PHP script will be called again with the variables, $PHP_AUTH_USER, $PHP_AUTH_PW and $PHP_AUTH_TYPE set to the user name, password and authentication type respectively. Only "Basic" authentication is supported at this point. See the Header() function for more information. An example script fragment which would force client authentication on a page would be the following: Example 16-1. HTTP Authentication example 1 2 "; 10 echo "You entered $PHP_AUTH_PW as your password.

"; 11 } 12 ?> 13 Instead of simply printing out the $PHP_AUTH_USER and $PHP_AUTH_PW, you would probably want to check the username and password for validity. Perhaps by sending a query to a database, or by looking up the user in a dbm file. Watch out for buggy Internet Explorer browsers out there. They seem very picky about the order of the headers. Sending the WWW-Authenticate header before the HTTP/1.0 401 header seems to do the trick for now. In order to prevent someone from writing a script which reveals the password for a page that was authenticated through a traditional external mechanism, the PHP_AUTH variables will not be set if external authentication is enabled for that particular page. In this case, the $REMOTE_USER variable can be used to identify the externally-authenticated user. Note, however, that the above does not prevent someone who controls a non-authenticated URL from stealing passwords from authenticated URLs on the same server. Both Netscape and Internet Explorer will clear the local browser window’s authentication cache for the realm upon receiving a server response of 401. This can effectively "log out" a user, forcing them 145 Chapter 16. HTTP authentication with PHP to re-enter their username and password. Some people use this to "time out" logins, or provide a "log-out" button. Example 16-2. HTTP Authentication example forcing a new name/password 1 2 "; 15 echo "Old: $OldAuth"; 16 echo "

\n"; 17 echo "\n"; 18 echo "\n"; 19 echo "\n"; 20 echo "
\n"; 21 22 } 23 ?> 24 9 10 This behavior is not required by the HTTP Basic authentication standard, so you should never depend on this. Testing with Lynx has shown that Lynx does not clear the authentication credentials with a 401 server response, so pressing back and then forward again will open the resource (as long as the credential requirements haven’t changed). Also note that this does not work using Microsoft’s IIS server and the CGI version of PHP due to a limitation of IIS. 146 Chapter 17. Cookies PHP transparently supports HTTP cookies. Cookies are a mechanism for storing data in the remote browser and thus tracking or identifying return users. You can set cookies using the setcookie() function. Cookies are part of the HTTP header, so setcookie() must be called before any output is sent to the browser. This is the same limitation that header() has. Any cookies sent to you from the client will automatically be turned into a PHP variable just like GET and POST method data. If you wish to assign multiple values to a single cookie, just add [] to the cookie name. For more details see the setcookie() function. 147 Chapter 18. Handling file uploads POST method uploads PHP is capable of receiving file uploads from any RFC-1867 compliant browser (which includes Netscape Navigator 3 or later, Microsoft Internet Explorer 3 with a patch from Microsoft, or later without a patch). This feature lets people upload both text and binary files. With PHP’s authentication and file manipulation functions, you have full control over who is allowed to upload and what is to be done with the file once it has been uploaded. Note that PHP also supports PUT-method file uploads as used by Netscape Composer and W3C’s Amaya clients. See the PUT Method Support for more details. A file upload screen can be built by creating a special form which looks something like this: Example 18-1. File Upload Form 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Send this file:
The _URL_ should point to a PHP file. The MAX_FILE_SIZE hidden field must precede the file input field and its value is the maximum filesize accepted. The value is in bytes. In this destination file, the following variables will be defined upon a successful upload: $userfile - The temporary filename in which the uploaded file was stored on the server machine. $userfile_name - The original name of the file on the sender’s system. $userfile_size - The size of the uploaded file in bytes. $userfile_type - The mime type of the file if the browser provided this information. An example would be "image/gif". • • • • Note that the "$userfile" part of the above variables is whatever the name of the INPUT field of TYPE=file is in the upload form. In the above upload form example, we chose to call it "userfile". Files will by default be stored in the server’s default temporary directory. This can be changed by setting the environment variable TMPDIR in the environment in which PHP runs. Setting it using putenv() from within a PHP script will not work. The PHP script which receives the uploaded file should implement whatever logic is necessary for determining what should be done with the uploaded file. You can for example use the $file_size 148 Chapter 18. Handling file uploads variable to throw away any files that are either too small or too big. You could use the $file_type variable to throw away any files that didn’t match a certain type criteria. Whatever the logic, you should either delete the file from the temporary directory or move it elsewhere. The file will be deleted from the temporary directory at the end of the request if it has not been moved away or renamed. Common Pitfalls The MAX_FILE_SIZE item cannot specify a file size greater than the file size that has been set in the upload_max_filesize in the PHP3.ini file or the corresponding php3_upload_max_filesize Apache .conf directive. The default is 2 Megabytes. Please note that the CERN httpd seems to strip off everything starting at the first whitespace in the content-type mime header it gets from the client. As long as this is the case, CERN httpd will not support the file upload feature. Uploading multiple files It is possible to upload multiple files simultaneously and have the information organized automatically in arrays for you. To do so, you need to use the same array submission syntax in the HTML form as you do with multiple selects and checkboxes: Note: Support for multiple file uploads was added in version 3.0.10. Example 18-2. Uploading multiple files 1 2
3 Send these files:
4
5
6 7
8 When the above form is submitted, the arrays $userfile, $userfile_name, and $userfile_size will be formed in the global scope (as well as in $HTTP_POST_FILES ($HTTP_POST_VARS in PHP 3)). Each of these will be a numerically indexed array of the appropriate values for the submitted files. 149 Chapter 18. Handling file uploads For instance, assume that the filenames /home/test/review.html and /home/test/xwp.out are submitted. In this case, $userfile_name[0] would contain the value review.html, and $userfile_name[1] would contain the value xwp.out. Similarly, $userfile_size[0] would contain review.html’s filesize, and so forth. $userfile[’name’][0], $userfile[’tmp_name’][0], $userfile[’size’][0], and $userfile[’type’][0] are also set. PUT method support PHP provides support for the HTTP PUT method used by clients such as Netscape Composer and W3C Amaya. PUT requests are much simpler than a file upload and they look something like this: 1 2 PUT /path/filename.html HTTP/1.1 3 This would normally mean that the remote client would like to save the content that follows as: /path/filename.html in your web tree. It is obviously not a good idea for Apache or PHP to automatically let everybody overwrite any files in your web tree. So, to handle such a request you have to first tell your web server that you want a certain PHP script to handle the request. In Apache you do this with the Script directive. It can be placed almost anywhere in your Apache configuration file. A common place is inside a block or perhaps inside a block. A line like this would do the trick: 1 2 Script PUT /put.php3 3 This tells Apache to send all PUT requests for URIs that match the context in which you put this line to the put.php3 script. This assumes, of course, that you have PHP enabled for the .php3 extension and PHP is active. Inside your put.php3 file you would then do something like this: 1 2 3 This would copy the file to the location requested by the remote client. You would probably want to perform some checks and/or authenticate the user before performing this file copy. The only trick here is that when PHP sees a PUT-method request it stores the uploaded file in a temporary file just like those handled bu the POST-method. When the request ends, this temporary file is deleted. So, 150 Chapter 18. Handling file uploads your PUT handling PHP script has to copy that file somewhere. The filename of this temporary file is in the $PHP_PUT_FILENAME variable, and you can see the suggested destination filename in the $REQUEST_URI (may vary on non-Apache web servers). This destination filename is the one that the remote client specified. You do not have to listen to this client. You could, for example, copy all uploaded files to a special uploads directory. 151 Chapter 19. Using remote files As long as support for the "URL fopen wrapper" is enabled when you configure PHP (which it is unless you explicitly pass the --disable-url-fopen-wrapper flag to configure), you can use HTTP and FTP URLs with most functions that take a filename as a parameter, including the require() and include() statements. Note: You can’t use remote files in include() and require() statements on Windows. For example, you can use this to open a file on a remote web server, parse the output for the data you want, and then use that data in a database query, or simply to output it in a style matching the rest of your website. Example 19-1. Getting the title of a remote page 1 2 Unable to open remote file.\n"; 6 exit; 7 } 8 while (!feof($file)) { 9 $line = fgets($file, 1024); 10 /* This only works if the title and its tags are on one line. */ 11 if (eregi("(.*)", $line, $out)) { 12 $title = $out[1]; 13 break; 14 } 15 } 16 fclose($file); 17 ?> 18 You can also write to files on an FTP as long you connect as a user with the correct access rights, and the file doesn’t exist already. To connect as a user other than ’anonymous’, you need to specify the username (and possibly password) within the URL, such as ’ftp://user:password@ftp.example.com/path/to/file’. (You can use the same sort of syntax to access files via HTTP when they require Basic authentication.) Example 19-2. Storing data on a remote server 1 2 Unable to open remote file for writing.\n"; 6 exit; 7 } 8 /* Write the data here. */ 9 fputs($file, "$HTTP_USER_AGENT\n"); 10 fclose($file); 11 ?> 12 Note: You might get the idea from the example above to use this technique to write to a remote log, but as mentioned above, you can only write to a new file using the URL fopen() wrappers. To do distributed logging like that, you should take a look at syslog(). 153 Chapter 20. Connection handling Note: The following applies to 3.0.7 and later. Internally in PHP a connection status is maintained. There are 3 possible states: • • • 0 - NORMAL 1 - ABORTED 2 - TIMEOUT When a PHP script is running normally the NORMAL state, is active. If the remote client disconnects the ABORTED state flag is turned on. A remote client disconnect is usually caused by the user hitting his STOP button. If the PHP-imposed time limit (see set_time_limit()) is hit, the TIMEOUT state flag is turned on. You can decide whether or not you want a client disconnect to cause your script to be aborted. Sometimes it is handy to always have your scripts run to completion even if there is no remote browser receiving the output. The default behaviour is however for your script to be aborted when the remote client disconnects. This behaviour can be set via the ignore_user_abort php3.ini directive as well as through the corresponding php3_ignore_user_abort Apache .conf directive or with the ignore_user_abort() function. If you do not tell PHP to ignore a user abort and the user aborts, your script will terminate. The one exception is if you have registered a shutdown function using register_shutdown_function(). With a shutdown function, when the remote user hits his STOP button, the next time your script tries to output something PHP will detect that the connection has been aborted and the shutdown function is called. This shutdown function will also get called at the end of your script terminating normally, so to do something different in case of a client diconnect you can use the connection_aborted() function. This function will return true if the connection was aborted. Your script can also be terminated by the built-in script timer. The default timeout is 30 seconds. It can be changed using the max_execution_time php3.ini directive or the corresponding php3_max_execution_time Apache .conf directive as well as with the set_time_limit() function. When the timer expires the script will be aborted and as with the above client disconnect case, if a shutdown function has been registered it will be called. Within this shutdown function you can check to see if a timeout caused the shutdown function to be called by calling the connection_timeout() function. This function will return true if a timeout caused the shutdown function to be called. One thing to note is that both the ABORTED and the TIMEOUT states can be active at the same time. This is possible if you tell PHP to ignore user aborts. PHP will still note the fact that a user may have broken the connection, but the script will keep running. If it then hits the time limit it will be aborted and your shutdown function, if any, will be called. At this point you will find that connection_timeout() and connection_aborted() return true. You can also check both states in a 154 Chapter 20. Connection handling single call by using the connection_status(). This function returns a bitfield of the active states. So, if both states are active it would return 3, for example. 155 Chapter 21. Persistent database connections Persistent connections are SQL links that do not close when the execution of your script ends. When a persistent connection is requested, PHP checks if there’s already an identical persistent connection (that remained open from earlier) - and if it exists, it uses it. If it does not exist, it creates the link. An ’identical’ connection is a connection that was opened to the same host, with the same username and the same password (where applicable). People who aren’t thoroughly familiar with the way web servers work and distribute the load may mistake persistent connects for what they’re not. In particular, they do not give you an ability to open ’user sessions’ on the same SQL link, they do not give you an ability to build up a transaction efficently, and they don’t do a whole lot of other things. In fact, to be extremely clear about the subject, persistent connections don’t give you any functionality that wasn’t possible with their non-persistent brothers. Why? This has to do with the way web servers work. There are three ways in which your web server can utilize PHP to generate web pages. The first method is to use PHP as a CGI "wrapper". When run this way, an instance of the PHP interpreter is created and destroyed for every page request (for a PHP page) to your web server. Because it is destroyed after every request, any resources that it acquires (such as a link to an SQL database server) are closed when it is destroyed. In this case, you do not gain anything from trying to use persistent connections -- they simply don’t persist. The second, and most popular, method is to run PHP as a module in a multiprocess web server, which currently only includes Apache. A multiprocess server typically has one process (the parent) which coordinates a set of processes (its children) who actually do the work of serving up web pages. When each request comes in from a a client, it is handed off to one of the children that is not already serving another client. This means that when the same client makes a second request to the server, it may be serviced by a different child process than the first time. What a persistent connection does for you in this case it make it so each child process only needs to connect to your SQL server the first time that it serves a page that makes us of such a connection. When another page then requires a connection to the SQL server, it can reuse the connection that child established earlier. The last method is to use PHP as a plug-in for a multithreaded web server. Currently this is only theoretical -- PHP does not yet work as a plug-in for any multithreaded web servers. Work is progressing on support for ISAPI, WSAPI, and NSAPI (on Windows), which will all allow PHP to be used as a plug-in on multithreaded servers like Netscape FastTrack, Microsoft’s Internet Information Server (IIS), and O’Reilly’s WebSite Pro. When this happens, the behavior will be essentially the same as for the multiprocess model described before. If persistent connections don’t have any added functionality, what are they good for? The answer here is extremely simple -- efficiency. Persistent connections are good if the overhead to create a link to your SQL server is high. Whether or not this overhead is really high depends on many factors. Like, what kind of database it is, whether or not it sits on the same computer on which 156 Chapter 21. Persistent database connections your web server sits, how loaded the machine the SQL server sits on is and so forth. The bottom line is that if that connection overhead is high, persistent connections help you considerably. They cause the child process to simply connect only once for its entire lifespan, instead of every time it processes a page that requires connecting to the SQL server. This means that for every child that opened a persistent connection will have its own open persistent connection to the server. For example, if you had 20 different child processes that ran a script that made a persistent connection to your SQL server, you’d have 20 different connections to the SQL server, one from each child. An important summary. Persistent connections were designed to have one-to-one mapping to regular connections. That means that you should always be able to replace persistent connections with non-persistent connections, and it won’t change the way your script behaves. It may (and probably will) change the efficiency of the script, but not its behavior! 157 IV. Function Reference 158 I. Apache-specific Functions 159 apache_lookup_uri (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Perform a partial request for the specified URI and return all info about it class apache_lookup_uri (string filename) This performs a partial request for a URI. It goes just far enough to obtain all the important information about the given resource and returns this information in a class. The properties of the returned class are: status the_request status_line method content_type handler uri filename path_info args boundary no_cache no_local_copy allowed send_bodyct bytes_sent byterange clength unparsed_uri mtime request_time Note: Apache_lookup_uri() only works when PHP is installed as an Apache module. 160 Apache apache_note (PHP3 >= 3.0.2, PHP4 ) Get and set apache request notes string apache_note (string note_name [, string note_value]) Apache_note() is an Apache-specific function which gets and sets values in a request’s notes table. If called with one argument, it returns the current value of note note_name. If called with two arguments, it sets the value of note note_name to note_value and returns the previous value of note note_name. getallheaders (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch all HTTP request headers array getallheaders(void); This function returns an associative array of all the HTTP headers in the current request. Note: You can also get at the value of the common CGI variables by reading them from the environment, which works whether or not you are using PHP as an Apache module. Use phpinfo() to see a list of all of the environment variables defined this way. Example 1. getallheaders() Example 1 2 $headers = getallheaders(); 3 while (list ($header, $value) = each ($headers)) { 4 echo "$header: $value
\n"; 5 } 6 This example will display all the request headers for the current request. Note: Getallheaders() is currently only supported when PHP runs as an Apache module. 161 Apache virtual (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Perform an Apache sub-request int virtual (string filename) Virtual() is an Apache-specific function which is equivalent to in mod_include. It performs an Apache sub-request. It is useful for including CGI scripts or .shtml files, or anything else that you would parse through Apache. Note that for a CGI script, the script must generate valid CGI headers. At the minimum that means it must generate a Content-type header. For PHP files, you need to use include() or require(); virtual() cannot be used to include a document which is itself a PHP file. 162 II. Arbitrary precision mathematics functions These functions are only available if PHP was configured with --enable-bcmath. 163 bcadd (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Add two arbitrary precision numbers. string bcadd (string left operand, string right operand [, int scale]) Adds the left operand to the right operand and returns the sum in a string. The optional scale parameter is used to set the number of digits after the decimal place in the result. See also bcsub(). bccomp (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Compare two arbitrary precision numbers. int bccomp (string left operand, string right operand [, int scale]) Compares the left operand to the right operand and returns the result as an integer. The optional scale parameter is used to set the number of digits after the decimal place which will be used in the comparion. The return value is 0 if the two operands are equal. If the left operand is larger than the right operand the return value is +1 and if the left operand is less than the right operand the return value is -1. bcdiv (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Divide two arbitrary precision numbers. string bcdiv (string left operand, string right operand [, int scale]) Divides the left operand by the right operand and returns the result. The optional scale sets the number of digits after the decimal place in the result. See also bcmul(). 164 BC math bcmod (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get modulus of an arbitrary precision number. string bcmod (string left operand, string modulus) Get the modulus of the left operand using modulus. See also bcdiv(). bcmul (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Multiply two arbitrary precision number. string bcmul (string left operand, string right operand [, int scale]) Multiply the left operand by the right operand and returns the result. The optional scale sets the number of digits after the decimal place in the result. See also bcdiv(). bcpow (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Raise an arbitrary precision number to another. string bcpow (string x, string y [, int scale]) Raise x to the power y. The optional scale can be used to set the number of digits after the decimal place in the result. See also bcsqrt(). bcscale (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set default scale parameter for all bc math functions. 165 BC math string bcscale (int scale) This function sets the default scale parameter for all subsequent bc math functions that do not explicitly specify a scale parameter. bcsqrt (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the square root of an arbitray precision number. string bcsqrt (string operand, int scale) Return the square root of the operand. The optional scale parameter sets the number of digits after the decimal place in the result. See also bcpow(). bcsub (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Subtract one arbitrary precision number from another. string bcsub (string left operand, string right operand [, int scale]) Subtracts the right operand from the left operand and returns the result in a string. The optional scale parameter is used to set the number of digits after the decimal place in the result. See also bcadd(). 166 III. Array functions 167 array (unknown) Create an array array array(...); Returns an array of the parameters. The parameters can be given an index with the => operator. Note: array() is a language construct used to represent literal arrays, and not a regular function. The following example demonstrates how to create a two-dimensional array, how to specify keys for associative arrays, and how to skip-and-continue numeric indices in normal arrays. Example 1. array() example 1 2 $fruits = array ( 3 "fruits" => array("a"=>"orange", "b"=>"banana", "c"=>"apple"), 4 "numbers" => array(1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6), 5 "holes" => array("first", 5 => "second", "third") 6 ); 7 See also: list(). array_count_values (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Counts all the values of an array array array_count_values (array input) array_count_values() returns an array using the values of the input array as keys and their frequency in input as values. Example 1. array_count_values() example 1 2 $array = array(1, "hello", 1, "world", "hello"); 3 array_count_values($array); // returns ar- ray(1=>2, "hello"=>2, "world"=>1) 4 168 Arrays Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_flip (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Flip all the values of an array array array_flip (array trans) array_flip() returns an array in flip order. Example 1. array_flip() example 1 2 $trans = array_flip ($trans); 3 $original = strtr ($str, $trans); 4 Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_keys (PHP4 ) Return all the keys of an array array array_keys (array input [, mixed search_value]) array_keys() returns the keys, numeric and string, from the input array. If the optional search_value is specified, then only the keys for that value are returned. Otherwise, all the keys from the input are returned. Example 1. array_keys() example 1 2 $array = array(0 => 100, "color" => "red"); 3 array_keys ($array); // returns array (0, "color") 4 5 $array = array(1, 100, 2, 100); 169 Arrays 6 array_keys ($array, 100); 7 // returns array (0, 2) See also array_values(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_merge (PHP4 ) Merge two or more arrays array array_merge (array array1, array array2 [, ...]) array_merge() merges the elements of two or more arrays together so that the values of one are appended to the end of the previous one. It returns the resulting array. If the input arrays had the same string keys, then the later value for that key will overwrite previous one. If, however, the arrays have the same numeric key, this does not happen since the values are appended. Example 1. array_merge() example 1 2 $array1 = array ("color" => "red", 2, 4); 3 $array2 = array ("a", "b", "color" => "green", "shape" => "trapezoid"); 4 array_merge ($array1, $array2); 5 Resulting array will be array("color" => "green", 2, 4, "a", "b", "shape" => "trapezoid"). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_pad (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Pad array to the specified length with a value array array_pad (array input, int pad_size, mixed pad_value) 170 Arrays array_pad() returns a copy of the input padded to size specified by pad_size with value pad_value. If pad_size is positive then the array is padded on the right, if it’s negative then on the left. If the absolute value of pad_size is less than or equal to the length of the input then no padding takes place. Example 1. array_pad() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 $input = array (12, 10, 9); $result = array_pad ($input, 5, 0); // result is array (12, 10, 9, 0, 0) $result = array_pad ($input, -7, -1); // result is array (-1, -1, -1, -1, 12, 10, 9) $result = array_pad ($input, 2, "noop"); // not padded array_pop (PHP4 ) Pop the element off the end of array mixed array_pop (array array) array_pop() pops and returns the last value of the array, shortening the array by one element. Example 1. array_pop() example 1 2 $stack = array ("orange", "apple", "raspberry"); 3 $fruit = array_pop ($stack); 4 After this, $stack has only 2 elements: "orange" and "apple", and $fruit has "raspberry". See also array_push(), array_shift(), and array_unshift(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. 171 Arrays array_push (PHP4 ) Push one or more elements onto the end of array int array_push (array array, mixed var [, ...]) array_push() treats array as a stack, and pushes the passed variables onto the end of array. The length of array increases by the number of variables pushed. Has the same effect as: 1 2 $array[] = $var; 3 repeated for each var. Returns the new number of elements in the array. Example 1. array_push() example 1 2 $stack = array (1, 2); 3 array_push($stack, "+", 3); 4 This example would result in $stack having 4 elements: 1, 2, "+", and 3. See also: array_pop(), array_shift(), and array_unshift(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_reverse (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Return an array with elements in reverse order array array_reverse (array array) array_reverse() takes input array and returns a new array with the order of the elements reversed. Example 1. array_reverse() example 1 172 Arrays 2 $input = array ("php", 4.0, array ("green", "red")); 3 $result = array_reverse ($input); 4 This makes $result have array (array ("green", "red"), 4.0, "php"). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0 Beta 3. array_shift (PHP4 ) Pop an element off the beginning of array mixed array_shift (array array) array_shift() shifts the first value of the array off and returns it, shortening the array by one element and moving everything down. Example 1. array_shift() example 1 2 $args = array ("-v", "-f"); 3 $opt = array_shift ($args); 4 This would result in $args having one element "-f" left, and $opt being "-v". See also array_unshift(), array_push(), and array_pop(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_slice (PHP4 ) Extract a slice of the array array array_slice (array array, int offset [, int length]) 173 Arrays array_slice() returns a sequence of elements from the array specified by the offset and length parameters. If offset is positive, the sequence will start at that offset in the array. If offset is negative, the sequence will start that far from the end of the array. If length is given and is positive, then the sequence will have that many elements in it. If length is given and is negative then the sequence will stop that many elements from the end of the array. If it is omitted, then the sequence will have everything from offset up until the end of the array. Example 1. array_slice() examples 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 $input = array ("a", "b", "c", "d", "e"); $output $output $output $output = = = = array_slice array_slice array_slice array_slice ($input, ($input, ($input, ($input, 2); 2, -1); -2, 1); 0, 3); // // // // returns returns returns returns "c", "d", and "e" "c", "d" "d" "a", "b", and "c" See also array_splice(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_splice (PHP4 ) Remove a portion of the array and replace it with something else array array_splice (array input, int offset [, int length [, array replacement]]) array_splice() removes the elements designated by offset and length from the input array, and replaces them with the elements of the replacement array, if supplied. If offset is positive then the start of removed portion is at that offset from the beginning of the input array. If offset is negative then it starts that far from the end of the input array. If length is omitted, removes everything from offset to the end of the array. If length is specified and is positive, then that many elements will be removed. If length is specified and is negative then the end of the removed portion will be that many elements from the end of the array. Tip: to remove everything from offset to the end of the array when replacement is also specified, use count($input) for length. 174 Arrays If replacement array is specified, then the removed elements are replaced with elements from this array. If offset and length are such that nothing is removed, then the elements from the replacement array are inserted in the place specified by the offset. Tip: if the replacement is just one element it is not necessary to put array() around it, unless the element is an array itself. The following equivalences hold: 1 2 array_push($input, $x, $y) ray_splice($input, count($input), 3 array_pop($input) 4 array_shift($input) 5 array_unshift($input, $x, $y) ray($x, $y)) 6 $a[$x] = $y 7 ar0, array($x, $y)) array_splice($input, -1) array_splice($input, 0, 1) array_splice($input, 0, 0, ararray_splice($input, $x, 1, $y) Returns the array consisting of removed elements. Example 1. array_splice() examples 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 $input = array("red", "green", "blue", "yellow"); array_splice($input, 2); // $input is now array("red", "green") array_splice($input, 1, -1); // $input is now array("red", "yellow") array_splice($input, 1, count($input), "orange"); // $input is now array("red", "orange") array_splice($input, -1, 1, array("black", "maroon")); // $input is now array("red", "green", // "blue", "black", "maroon") See also array_slice(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_unshift (PHP4 ) Push one or more elements onto the beginning of array int array_unshift (array array, mixed var [, ...]) 175 Arrays array_unshift() prepends passed elements to the front of the array. Note that the list of elements is prepended as a whole, so that the prepended elements stay in the same order. Returns the new number of elements in the array. Example 1. array_unshift() example 1 2 $queue = array("p1", "p3"); 3 array_unshift($queue, "p4", "p5", "p6"); 4 This would result in $queue having 5 elements: "p4", "p5", "p6", "p1", and "p3". See also array_shift(), array_push(), and array_pop(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_values (PHP4 ) Return all the values of an array array array_values (array input) array_values() returns all the values from the input array. Example 1. array_values() example 1 2 $array = array("size" => "XL", "color" => "gold"); 3 array_values($array); // returns array("XL", "gold") 4 Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. array_walk (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Apply a user function to every member of an array. 176 Arrays int array_walk (array arr, string func, mixed userdata) Applies the function named by func to each element of arr. func will be passed array value as the first parameter and array key as the second parameter. If userdata is supplied, it will be passed as the third parameter to the user function. If func requires more than two or three arguments, depending on userdata, a warning will be generated each time array_walk() calls func. These warnings may be suppressed by prepending the ’@’ sign to the array_walk() call, or by using error_reporting(). Note: If func needs to be working with the actual values of the array, specify that the first parameter of func should be passed by reference. Then any changes made to those elements will be made in the array itself. Note: Passing the key and userdata to func was added in 4.0. In PHP 4 reset() needs to be called as necessary since array_walk() does not reset the array by default. Example 1. array_walk() example 1 2 $fruits = ar- ray ("d"=>"lemon", "a"=>"orange", "b"=>"banana", "c"=>"apple"); 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 function test_alter (&$item1, $key, $prefix) { $item1 = "$prefix: $item1"; } function test_print ($item2, $key) { echo "$key. $item2
\n"; } array_walk ($fruits, ’test_print’); reset ($fruits); array_walk ($fruits, ’test_alter’, ’fruit’); reset ($fruits); array_walk ($fruits, ’test_print’); See also each() and list(). 177 Arrays arsort (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Sort an array in reverse order and maintain index association void arsort (array array) This function sorts an array such that array indices maintain their correlation with the array elements they are associated with. This is used mainly when sorting associative arrays where the actual element order is significant. Example 1. arsort() example 1 2 $fruits = ar- ray ("d"=>"lemon", "a"=>"orange", "b"=>"banana", "c"=>"apple"); 3 arsort ($fruits); 4 for (reset ($fruits); $key = key ($fruits); next ($fruits)) { 5 echo "fruits[$key] = ".$fruits[$key]."\n"; 6 } 7 This example would display: fruits[a] = orange fruits[d] = lemon fruits[b] = banana fruits[c] = apple The fruits have been sorted in reverse alphabetical order, and the index associated with each element has been maintained. See also: asort(), rsort(), ksort(), and sort(). asort (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Sort an array and maintain index association void asort (array array) This function sorts an array such that array indices maintain their correlation with the array elements they are associated with. This is used mainly when sorting associative arrays where the actual element order is significant. Example 1. asort() example 1 2 $fruits = ar- ray ("d"=>"lemon", "a"=>"orange", "b"=>"banana", "c"=>"apple"); 3 asort ($fruits); 178 Arrays 4 for (reset ($fruits); $key = key ($fruits); next ($fruits)) { 5 echo "fruits[$key] = ".$fruits[$key]."\n"; 6 } 7 This example would display: fruits[c] = apple fruits[b] = banana fruits[d] = lemon fruits[a] = orange The fruits have been sorted in alphabetical order, and the index associated with each element has been maintained. See also arsort(), rsort(), ksort(), and sort(). compact (PHP4 ) Create array containing variables and their values array compact (string varname | array varnames [, ...]) compact() takes a variable number of parameters. Each parameter can be either a string containing the name of the variable, or an array of variable names. The array can contain other arrays of variable names inside it; compact() handles it recursively. For each of these, compact() looks for a variable with that name in the current symbol table and adds it to the output array such that the variable name becomes the key and the contents of the variable become the value for that key. In short, it does the opposite of extract(). It returns the output array with all the variables added to it. Example 1. compact() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $city = "San Francisco"; $state = "CA"; $event = "SIGGRAPH"; $location_vars = array ("city", "state"); $result = compact ("event", $location_vars); After this, $result will be array ("event" => "SIGGRAPH", "city" => "San Francisco", "state" => "CA"). See also extract(). Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. 179 Arrays count (PHP3 , PHP4 ) count elements in a variable int count (mixed var) Returns the number of elements in var, which is typically an array (since anything else will have one element). Returns 1 if the variable is not an array. Returns 0 if the variable is not set. Warning count() may return 0 for a variable that isn’t set, but it may also return 0 for a variable that has been initialized with an empty array. Use isset() to test if a variable is set. See also: sizeof(), isset(), and is_array(). current (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return the current element in an array mixed current (array array) Every array has an internal pointer to its "current" element, which is initialized to the first element inserted into the array. The current() function simply returns the array element that’s currently being pointed by the internal pointer. It does not move the pointer in any way. If the internal pointer points beyond the end of the elements list, current() returns false. Warning If the array contains empty elements (0 or "", the empty string) then this function will return false for these elements as well. This makes it impossible to determine if you are really at the end of the list in such an array using current(). To properly traverse an array that may contain empty elements, use the each() function. 180 Arrays See also: end(), next(), prev() and reset(). each (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return the next key and value pair from an array array each (array array) Returns the current key and value pair from the array array and advances the array cursor. This pair is returned in a four-element array, with the keys 0, 1, key, and value. Elements 0 and key contain the key name of the array element, and 1 and value contain the data. If the internal pointer for the array points past the end of the array contents, each() returns false. Example 1. each() examples 1 2 $foo = array ("bob", "fred", "jussi", "jouni", "egon", "marliese"); 3 $bar = each ($foo); 4 $bar now contains the following key/value pairs: • • • • 0 => 0 1 => ’bob’ key => 0 value => ’bob’ 1 2 $foo = array ("Robert" => "Bob", "Seppo" => "Sepi"); 3 $bar = each ($foo); 4 $bar now contains the following key/value pairs: • • • • 0 => ’Robert’ 1 => ’Bob’ key => ’Robert’ value => ’Bob’ each() is typically used in conjunction with list() to traverse an array; for instance, $HTTP_POST_VARS: 181 Arrays Example 2. Traversing $HTTP_POST_VARS with each() 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 echo "Values submitted via POST method:
"; reset ($HTTP_POST_VARS); while (list ($key, $val) = each ($HTTP_POST_VARS)) { echo "$key => $val
"; } After each() has executed, the array cursor will be left on the next element of the array, or on the last element if it hits the end of the array. See also key(), list(), current(), reset(), next(), and prev(). end (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set the internal pointer of an array to its last element end (array array) end() advances array’s internal pointer to the last element. See also: current(), each(), end(), next(), and reset(). extract (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Import variables into the symbol table from an array void extract (array var_array [, int extract_type [, string prefix]]) This function is used to import variables from an array into the current symbol table. It takes associative array var_array and treats keys as variable names and values as variable values. For each key/value pair it will create a variable in the current symbol table, subject to extract_type and prefix parameters. extract() checks for colissions with existing variables. The way collisions are treated is determined by extract_type. It can be one of the following values: 182 Arrays EXTR_OVERWRITE If there is a collision, overwrite the existing variable. EXTR_SKIP If there is a collision, don’t overwrite the existing variable. EXTR_PREFIX_SAME If there is a collision, prefix the new variable with prefix. EXTR_PREFIX_ALL Prefix all variables with prefix. If extract_type is not specified, it is assumed to be EXTR_OVERWRITE. Note that prefix is only required if extract_type is EXTR_PREFIX_SAME or EXTR_PREFIX_ALL. extract() checks each key to see if it constitues a valid variable name, and if it does only then does it proceed to import it. A possible use for extract is to import into symbol table variables contained in an associative array returned by wddx_deserialize(). Example 1. Extract() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 "blue", "size" => "medium", "shape" => "sphere"); extract ($var_array, EXTR_PREFIX_SAME, "wddx"); print "$color, $size, $shape, $wddx_size\n"; ?> The above example will produce: 1 2 blue, large, sphere, medium 3 183 Arrays The $size wasn’t overwritten, becaus we specified EXTR_PREFIX_SAME, which resulted in $wddx_size being created. If EXTR_SKIP was specified, then $wddx_size wouldn’t even have been created. EXTR_OVERWRITE would have cause $size to have value "medium", and EXTR_PREFIX_ALL would result in new variables being named $wddx_color, $wddx_size, and $wddx_shape. in_array (PHP4 ) Return true if a value exists in an array bool in_array (mixed needle, array haystack) Searches haystack for needle and returns true if it is found in the array, false otherwise. Example 1. in_array() example 1 2 $os = array ("Mac", "NT", "Irix", "Linux"); 3 if (in_array ("Irix", $os)) 4 print "Got Irix"; 5 Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0. key (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch a key from an associative array mixed key (array array) key() returns the index element of the current array position. See also: current(), next() 184 Arrays krsort (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sort an array by key in reverse order int krsort (array array) Sorts an array by key in reverse order, maintaining key to data correlations. This is useful mainly for associative arrays. Example 1. krsort() example 1 2 $fruits = ar- ray ("d"=>"lemon", "a"=>"orange", "b"=>"banana", "c"=>"apple"); 3 krsort ($fruits); 4 for (reset ($fruits); $key = key ($fruits); next ($fruits)) { 5 echo "fruits[$key] = ".$fruits[$key]."\n"; 6 } 7 This example would display: fruits[d] = lemon fruits[c] = apple fruits[b] = banana fruits[a] = orange See also asort(), arsort(), ksort() sort(), and rsort(). ksort (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Sort an array by key int ksort (array array) Sorts an array by key, maintaining key to data correlations. This is useful mainly for associative arrays. Example 1. ksort() example 1 2 $fruits = ar- ray ("d"=>"lemon", "a"=>"orange", "b"=>"banana", "c"=>"apple"); 3 ksort ($fruits); 4 for (reset ($fruits); $key = key ($fruits); next ($fruits)) { 5 echo "fruits[$key] = ".$fruits[$key]."\n"; 6 } 185 Arrays 7 This example would display: fruits[a] = orange fruits[b] = banana fruits[c] = apple fruits[d] = lemon See also asort(), arsort(), sort(), and rsort(). list (unknown) Assign variables as if they were an array void list(...); Like array(), this is not really a function, but a language construct. list() is used to assign a list of variables in one operation. Example 1. list() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 \n". " \n". " \n". " \n"); } ?>
Employee name Salary
$name$salary
See also: each(), array(). 186 Arrays next (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Advance the internal array pointer of an array mixed next (array array) Returns the array element in the next place that’s pointed by the internal array pointer, or false if there are no more elements. next() behaves like current(), with one difference. It advances the internal array pointer one place forward before returning the element. That means it returns the next array element and advances the internal array pointer by one. If advancing the internal array pointer results in going beyond the end of the element list, next() returns false. Warning If the array contains empty elements then this function will return false for these elements as well. To properly traverse an array which may contain empty elements see the each() function. See also: current(), end() prev() and reset() pos (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the current element from an array mixed pos (array array) This is an alias for current(). See also: end(), next(), prev() and reset(). prev (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Rewind the internal array pointer mixed prev (array array) 187 Arrays Returns the array element in the previous place that’s pointed by the internal array pointer, or false if there are no more elements. Warning If the array contains empty elements then this function will return false for these elements as well. To properly traverse an array which may contain empty elements see the each() function. prev() behaves just like next(), except it rewinds the internal array pointer one place instead of advancing it. See also: current(), end() next() and reset() range (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Create an array containing a range of integers array range (int low, int high) range() returns an array of integers from low to high, inclusive. See shuffle() for an example of its use. reset (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set the internal pointer of an array to its first element mixed reset (array array) reset() rewinds array’s internal pointer to the first element. reset() returns the value of the first array element. See also: current(), each(), next(), prev(), and reset(). rsort (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Sort an array in reverse order 188 Arrays void rsort (array array) This function sorts an array in reverse order (highest to lowest). Example 1. rsort() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $fruits = array ("lemon", "orange", "banana", "apple"); rsort ($fruits); for (reset ($fruits); list ($key, $value) = each ($fruits); ) { echo "fruits[$key] = ", $value, "\n"; } This example would display: fruits[0] = orange fruits[1] = lemon fruits[2] = banana fruits[3] = apple The fruits have been sorted in reverse alphabetical order. See also: arsort(), asort(), ksort(), sort(), and usort(). shuffle (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Shuffle an array void shuffle (array array) This function shuffles (randomizes the order of the elements in) an array. Example 1. shuffle() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 $numbers = range (1,20); srand (time()); shuffle ($numbers); while (list(, $number) = each ($numbers)) { echo "$number "; } See also arsort(), asort(), ksort(), rsort(), sort() and usort(). 189 Arrays sizeof (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the number of elements in an array int sizeof (array array) Returns the number of elements in the array. See also: count() sort (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Sort an array void sort (array array) This function sorts an array. Elements will be arranged from lowest to highest when this function has completed. Example 1. sort() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $fruits = array ("lemon", "orange", "banana", "apple"); sort ($fruits); for (reset ($fruits); $key = key ($fruits); next ($fruits)) { echo "fruits[$key] = ".$fruits[$key]."\n"; } This example would display: fruits[0] = apple fruits[1] = banana fruits[2] = lemon fruits[3] = orange The fruits have been sorted in alphabetical order. See also: arsort(), asort(), ksort(), rsort(), and usort(). uasort (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Sort an array with a user-defined comparison function and maintain index association void uasort (array array, function cmp_function) 190 Arrays This function sorts an array such that array indices maintain their correlation with the array elements they are associated with. This is used mainly when sorting associative arrays where the actual element order is significant. The comparison function is user-defined. uksort (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Sort an array by keys using a user-defined comparison function void uksort (array array, function cmp_function) This function will sort the keys of an array using a user-supplied comparison function. If the array you wish to sort needs to be sorted by some non-trivial criteria, you should use this function. Example 1. uksort() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 function mycompare ($a, $b) { if ($a == $b) return 0; return ($a > $b) ? -1 : 1; } $a = array (4 => "four", 3 => "three", 20 => "twenty", 10 => "ten"); uksort ($a, mycompare); while (list ($key, $value) = each ($a)) { echo "$key: $value\n"; } This example would display: 20: twenty 10: ten 4: four 3: three See also: arsort(), asort(), uasort(), ksort(), rsort(), and sort(). usort (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Sort an array by values using a user-defined comparison function void usort (array array, function cmp_function) This function will sort an array by its values using a user-supplied comparison function. If the array you wish to sort needs to be sorted by some non-trivial criteria, you should use this function. 191 Arrays The comparison function must return an integer less than, equal to, or greater than zero if the first argument is considered to be respectively less than, equal to, or greater than the second. If two members compare as equal, their order in the sorted array is undefined. Example 1. usort() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 function cmp ($a, $b) { if ($a == $b) return 0; return ($a > $b) ? -1 : 1; } $a = array (3, 2, 5, 6, 1); usort ($a, cmp); while (list ($key, $value) = each ($a)) { echo "$key: $value\n"; } This example would display: 0: 6 1: 5 2: 3 3: 2 4: 1 Note: Obviously in this trivial case the rsort() function would be more appropriate. Warning The underlying quicksort function in some C libraries (such as on Solaris systems) may cause PHP to crash if the comparison function does not return consistent values. See also: arsort(), asort(), ksort(), rsort() and sort(). 192 IV. Aspell functions The aspell() functions allows you to check the spelling on a word and offer suggestions. You need the aspell library, available from: http:/metalab.unc.edu/kevina/aspell/. 193 aspell_new (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Load a new dictionary int aspell_new (string master, string personal) Aspell_new() opens up a new dictionary and returns the dictionary link identifier for use in other aspell functions. Example 1. Aspell_new() 1 2 $aspell_link=aspell_new ("english"); 3 aspell_check (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Check a word boolean aspell_check (int dictionary_link, string word) Aspell_check() checks the spelling of a word and returns true if the spelling is correct, false if not. Example 1. Aspell_check() 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 $aspell_link=aspell_new ("english"); if (aspell_check ($aspell_link,"testt")) { echo "This is a valid spelling"; } else { echo "Sorry, wrong spelling"; } aspell_check-raw (unknown) Check a word without changing its case or trying to trim it 194 Aspell boolean aspell_check_raw (int dictionary_link, string word) Aspell_check_raw() checks the spelling of a word, without changing its case or trying to trim it in any way and returns true if the spelling is correct, false if not. Example 1. Aspell_check_raw() 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 $aspell_link=aspell_new ("english"); if (aspell_check_raw ($aspell_link, "test")) { echo "This is a valid spelling"; } else { echo "Sorry, wrong spelling"; } aspell_suggest (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Suggest spellings of a word array aspell_suggest (int dictionary_link, string word) Aspell_suggest() returns an array of possible spellings for the given word. Example 1. Aspell_suggest() 1 2 $aspell_link=aspell_new ("english"); 3 4 if (!aspell_check ($aspell_link, "test")) { 5 $suggestions=aspell_suggest ($aspell_link, "test"); 6 7 for ($i=0; $i < count ($suggestions); $i++) { 8 echo "Possible spelling: " . $suggestions[$i] . "
"; 9 } 10 } 11 195 V. Calendar functions The calendar functions are only available if you have compiled the calendar extension in dl/calendar. Read dl/README for instructions on using it. The calendar extension presents a series of functions to simplify converting between different calendar formats. The intermediary or standard it is based on is the Julian Day Count. The Julian Day Count is a count of days starting way earlier than any date most people would need to track (somewhere around 4000bc). To convert between calendar systems, you must first convert to Julian Day Count, then to the calendar system of your choice. Julian Day Count is very different from the Julian Calendar! For more information on calendar systems visit http://genealogy.org/~scottlee/cal-overview.html. Excerpts from this page are included in these instructions, and are in quotes. 196 JDToGregorian (unknown) Converts Julian Day Count to Gregorian date string jdtogregorian (int julianday) Converts Julian Day Count to a string containing the Gregorian date in the format of "month/day/year". GregorianToJD (unknown) Converts a Gregorian date to Julian Day Count int gregoriantojd (int month, int day, int year) Valid Range for Gregorian Calendar 4714 B.C. to 9999 A.D. Although this software can handle dates all the way back to 4714 B.C., such use may not be meaningful. The Gregorian calendar was not instituted until October 15, 1582 (or October 5, 1582 in the Julian calendar). Some countries did not accept it until much later. For example, Britain converted in 1752, The USSR in 1918 and Greece in 1923. Most European countries used the Julian calendar prior to the Gregorian. Example 1. Calendar functions 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 JDToJulian (unknown) Converts a Julian Calendar date to Julian Day Count 197 Calendar string jdtojulian (int julianday) Converts Julian Day Count to a string containing the Julian Calendar Date in the format of "month/day/year". JulianToJD (unknown) Converts a Julian Calendar date to Julian Day Count int juliantojd (int month, int day, int year) Valid Range for Julian Calendar 4713 B.C. to 9999 A.D. Although this software can handle dates all the way back to 4713 B.C., such use may not be meaningful. The calendar was created in 46 B.C., but the details did not stabilize until at least 8 A.D., and perhaps as late at the 4th century. Also, the beginning of a year varied from one culture to another - not all accepted January as the first month. JDToJewish (unknown) Converts a Julian Day Count to the Jewish Calendar string jdtojewish (int julianday) Converts a Julian Day Count the the Jewish Calendar. JewishToJD (unknown) Converts a date in the Jewish Calendar to Julian Day Count int jewishtojd (int month, int day, int year) Valid Range Although this software can handle dates all the way back to the year 1 (3761 B.C.), such use may not be meaningful. 198 Calendar The Jewish calendar has been in use for several thousand years, but in the early days there was no formula to determine the start of a month. A new month was started when the new moon was first observed. JDToFrench (unknown) Converts a Julian Day Count to the French Republican Calendar string jdtofrench (int month, int day, int year) Converts a Julian Day Count to the French Republican Calendar. FrenchToJD (unknown) Converts a date from the French Republican Calendar to a Julian Day Count int frenchtojd (int month, int day, int year) Converts a date from the French Republican Calendar to a Julian Day Count. These routines only convert dates in years 1 through 14 (Gregorian dates 22 September 1792 through 22 September 1806). This more than covers the period when the calendar was in use. JDMonthName (unknown) Returns a month name string jdmonthname (int julianday, int mode) Returns a string containing a month name. mode tells this function which calendar to convert the Julian Day Count to, and what type of month names are to be returned. Table 1. Calendar modes Mode 0 Meaning Gregorian - abbreviated 199 Calendar Mode 1 2 3 4 5 Meaning Gregorian Julian - abbreviated Julian Jewish French Republican JDDayOfWeek (unknown) Returns the day of the week mixed jddayofweek (int julianday, int mode) Returns the day of the week. Can return a string or an int depending on the mode. Table 1. Calendar week modes Mode 0 1 2 Meaning Returns the day number as an int (0=sunday, 1=monday, etc) Returns string containing the day of week (english-gregorian) Returns a string containing the abbreviated day of week (english-gregorian) easter_date (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Get UNIX timestamp for midnight on Easter of a given year int easter_date (int year) Returns the UNIX timestamp corresponding to midnight on Easter of the given year. If no year is specified, the current year is assumed. Warning: This function will generate a warning if the year is outside of the range for UNIX timestamps (i.e. before 1970 or after 2037). 200 Calendar Example 1. easter_date() example 1 2 echo date ("M-d-Y", easter_date(1999)); 3 echo date ("M-d-Y", easter_date(2000)); 4 echo date ("M-d-Y", easter_date(2001)); 5 /* "Apr-04-1999" */ /* "Apr-23-2000" */ /* "Apr-15-2001" */ The date of Easter Day was defined by the Council of Nicaea in AD325 as the Sunday after the first full moon which falls on or after the Spring Equinox. The Equinox is assumed to always fall on 21st March, so the calculation reduces to determining the date of the full moon and the date of the following Sunday. The algorithm used here was introduced around the year 532 by Dionysius Exiguus. Under the Julian Calendar (for years before 1753) a simple 19-year cycle is used to track the phases of the Moon. Under the Gregorian Calendar (for years after 1753 - devised by Clavius and Lilius, and introduced by Pope Gregory XIII in October 1582, and into Britain and its then colonies in September 1752) two correction factors are added to make the cycle more accurate. (The code is based on a C program by Simon Kershaw, ) See easter_days() for calculating Easter before 1970 or after 2037. easter_days (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Get number of days after March 21 on which Easter falls for a given year int easter_days (int year) Returns the number of days after March 21 on which Easter falls for a given year. If no year is specified, the current year is assumed. This function can be used instead of easter_date() to calculate Easter for years which fall outside the range of UNIX timestamps (i.e. before 1970 or after 2037). Example 1. Easter_date() example 1 2 echo easter_days (1999); 3 echo easter_days (1492); 4 echo easter_days (1913); 5 /* 14, i.e. April 4 /* 32, i.e. April 22 /* 2, i.e. March 23 */ */ */ The date of Easter Day was defined by the Council of Nicaea in AD325 as the Sunday after the first full moon which falls on or after the Spring Equinox. The Equinox is assumed to always fall on 21st March, so the calculation reduces to determining the date of the full moon and the date of the 201 Calendar following Sunday. The algorithm used here was introduced around the year 532 by Dionysius Exiguus. Under the Julian Calendar (for years before 1753) a simple 19-year cycle is used to track the phases of the Moon. Under the Gregorian Calendar (for years after 1753 - devised by Clavius and Lilius, and introduced by Pope Gregory XIII in October 1582, and into Britain and its then colonies in September 1752) two correction factors are added to make the cycle more accurate. (The code is based on a C program by Simon Kershaw, ) See also easter_date(). unixtojd (PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Convert UNIX timestamp to Julian Day int unixtojd ([int timestamp]) Return the Julian Day for a UNIX timestamp (seconds since 1.1.1970), or for the current day if no timestamp is given. See also jdtounix(). Note: This function is only available in PHP versions after PHP4RC1. jdtounix (PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Convert Julian Day to UNIX timestamp int jdtounix (int jday) This function will return a UNIX timestamp corresponding to the Julian Day given in jday or false if jday is not inside the UNIX epoch (Gregorian years between 1970 and 2037 or 2440588 <= jday <= 2465342 ) See also jdtounix(). Note: This function is only available in PHP versions after PHP4RC1. 202 VI. COM support functions for Windows These functions are only available on the Windows version of PHP. These functions have been added in PHP4. 203 com_load (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) ??? string com_load (string module name [, string server name]) com_invoke (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) ??? mixed com_invoke (resource object, string function_name [, mixed function parameters, ...]) com_propget (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) ??? mixed com_propget (resource object, string property) com_get (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) ??? mixed com_get (resource object, string property) com_propput (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) ??? 204 COM void com_propput (resource object, string property, mixed value) com_propset (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) ??? void com_propset (resource object, string property, mixed value) This function is an alias for com_propput(). com_set (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) ??? void com_set (resource object, string property, mixed value) This function is an alias for com_set(). 205 VII. Class/Object Functions 206 get_class_methods (PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Returns an array of class methods’ names array get_class_methods (string class_name) This function returns an array of method names defined for the class specified by class_name. get_class_vars (PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Returns an array of default properties of the class array get_class_vars (string class_name) This function will return an array of default properties of the class. get_object_vars (PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Returns an array of object properties array get_class_vars (object obj) This function returns an array of object properties for the specified object obj. method_exists (PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Checks if the class method exists bool method_exists (object object, string method_name) This function returns true if the method given by method_name has been defined for the given object, false otherwise. 207 VIII. ClibPDF functions ClibPDF lets you create PDF documents with PHP. It is available at FastIO (http://www.fastio.com/) but it isn’t free software. You should definitely read the licence before you start playing with ClibPDF. If you cannot fullfil the licence agreement consider using pdflib by Thomas Merz, which is also very powerful. ClibPDF functionality and API is similar to Thomas Merz’s pdflib but, according to FastIO, ClibPDF is faster and creates smaller documents. This may have changed with the new version 2.0 of pdflib. A simple benchmark (the pdfclock.c example from pdflib 2.0 turned into a php script) actually shows no difference in speed at all. The file size is also similar if compression is turned off. So, try them both and see which one does the job for you. This documentation should be read alongside the ClibPDF manual since it explains the library in much greater detail. Many functions in the native ClibPDF and the PHP module, as well as in pdflib, have the same name. All functions except for cpdf_open() take the handle for the document as their first parameter. Currently this handle is not used internally since ClibPDF does not support the creation of several PDF documents at the same time. Actually, you should not even try it, the results are unpredictable. I can’t oversee what the consequences in a multi threaded environment are. According to the author of ClibPDF this will change in one of the next releases (current version when this was written is 1.10). If you need this functionality use the pdflib module. Note: The function cpdf_set_font() has changed since PHP3 to support asian fonts. The encoding parameter is no longer an integer but a string. One big advantage of ClibPDF over pdflib is the possibility to create the pdf document completely in memory without using temporary files. It also provides the ability to pass coordinates in a predefined unit length. This is a handy feature but can be simulated with pdf_translate(). Most of the functions are fairly easy to use. The most difficult part is probably creating a very simple PDF document at all. The following example should help you get started. It creates a document with one page. The page contains the text "Times-Roman" in an outlined 30pt font. The text is underlined. Example 1. Simple ClibPDF Example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 The pdflib distribution contains a more complex example which creates a series of pages with an analog clock. Here is that example converted into PHP using the ClibPDF extension: Example 2. pdfclock example from pdflib 2.0 distribution 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 0) { cpdf_page_init($pdf, $pagecount+1, 0, 2 * ($radius + $margin), 2 * ($radius + $margin), 1.0); cpdf_set_page_animation($pdf, 4, 0.5, 0, 0, 0); /* wipe */ cpdf_translate($pdf, $radius + $margin, $radius + $margin); cpdf_save($pdf); cpdf_setrgbcolor($pdf, 0.0, 0.0, 1.0); /* minute strokes */ cpdf_setlinewidth($pdf, 2.0); for ($alpha = 0; $alpha < 360; $alpha += 6) { cpdf_rotate($pdf, 6.0); cpdf_moveto($pdf, $radius, 0.0); cpdf_lineto($pdf, $radius-$margin/3, 0.0); cpdf_stroke($pdf); } cpdf_restore($pdf); cpdf_save($pdf); /* 5 minute strokes */ cpdf_setlinewidth($pdf, 3.0); for ($alpha = 0; $alpha < 360; $alpha += 30) { cpdf_rotate($pdf, 30.0); 209 Classes/Objects /* draw hour hand */ cpdf_save($pdf); cpdf_rotate($pdf, -(($ltime[’minutes’]/60.0) + $ltime[’hours’] 3.0) * 30.0); 48 cpdf_moveto($pdf, -$radius/10, -$radius/20); 49 cpdf_lineto($pdf, $radius/2, 0.0); 50 cpdf_lineto($pdf, -$radius/10, $radius/20); 51 cpdf_closepath($pdf); 52 cpdf_fill($pdf); 53 cpdf_restore($pdf); /* draw minute hand */ cpdf_save($pdf); cpdf_rotate($pdf, -(($ltime[’seconds’]/60.0) + $ltime[’minutes’] 15.0) * 6.0); 58 cpdf_moveto($pdf, -$radius/10, -$radius/20); 59 cpdf_lineto($pdf, $radius * 0.8, 0.0); 60 cpdf_lineto($pdf, -$radius/10, $radius/20); 61 cpdf_closepath($pdf); 62 cpdf_fill($pdf); 63 cpdf_restore($pdf); 64 65 /* draw second hand */ 66 cpdf_setrgbcolor($pdf, 1.0, 0.0, 0.0); 67 cpdf_setlinewidth($pdf, 2); 68 cpdf_save($pdf); 69 cpdf_rotate($pdf, -(($ltime[’seconds’] - 15.0) * 6.0)); 70 cpdf_moveto($pdf, -$radius/5, 0.0); 71 cpdf_lineto($pdf, $radius, 0.0); 72 cpdf_stroke($pdf); 73 cpdf_restore($pdf); 74 75 /* draw little circle at center */ 76 cpdf_circle($pdf, 0, 0, $radius/30); 77 cpdf_fill($pdf); 78 79 cpdf_restore($pdf); 80 81 cpdf_finalize_page($pdf, $pagecount+1); 82 } 83 84 cpdf_finalize($pdf); 54 55 56 57 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 cpdf_moveto($pdf, $radius, 0.0); cpdf_lineto($pdf, $radius-$margin, 0.0); cpdf_stroke($pdf); } $ltime = getdate(); 210 Classes/Objects 85 86 87 88 89 Header("Content-type: application/pdf"); cpdf_output_buffer($pdf); cpdf_close($pdf); ?> 211 cpdf_global_set_document_limits (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets document limits for any pdf document void cpdf_global_set_document_limits (int maxpages, int maxfonts, int maximages, int maxannotations, int maxobjects) The cpdf_global_set_document_limits() function sets several document limits. This function has to be called before cpdf_open() to take effect. It sets the limits for any document open afterwards. See also cpdf_open(). cpdf_set_creator (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the creator field in the pdf document void cpdf_set_creator (string creator) The cpdf_set_creator() function sets the creator of a pdf document. See also cpdf_set_subject(), cpdf_set_title(), cpdf_set_keywords(). cpdf_set_title (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the title field of the pdf document void cpdf_set_title (string title) The cpdf_set_title() function sets the title of a pdf document. See also cpdf_set_subject(), cpdf_set_creator(), cpdf_set_keywords(). cpdf_set_subject (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the subject field of the pdf document 212 ClibPDF void cpdf_set_subject (string subject) The cpdf_set_subject() function sets the subject of a pdf document. See also cpdf_set_title(), cpdf_set_creator(), cpdf_set_keywords(). cpdf_set_keywords (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the keywords field of the pdf document void cpdf_set_keywords (string keywords) The cpdf_set_keywords() function sets the keywords of a pdf document. See also cpdf_set_title(), cpdf_set_creator(), cpdf_set_subject(). cpdf_open (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Opens a new pdf document int cpdf_open (int compression, string filename) The cpdf_open() function opens a new pdf document. The first parameter turns document compression on if it is unequal to 0. The second optional parameter sets the file in which the document is written. If it is omitted the document is created in memory and can either be written into a file with the cpdf_save_to_file() or written to standard output with cpdf_output_buffer(). Note: The return value will be needed in futher versions of ClibPDF as the first parameter in all other functions which are writing to the pdf document. The ClibPDF library takes the filename "-" as a synonym for stdout. If PHP is compiled as an apache module this will not work because the way ClibPDF outputs to stdout does not work with apache. You can solve this problem by skipping the filename and using cpdf_output_buffer() to output the pdf document. See also cpdf_close(), cpdf_output_buffer(). 213 ClibPDF cpdf_close (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Closes the pdf document void cpdf_close (int pdf document) The cpdf_close() function closes the pdf document. This should be the last function even after cpdf_finalize(), cpdf_output_buffer() and cpdf_save_to_file(). See also cpdf_open(). cpdf_page_init (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Starts new page void cpdf_page_init (int pdf document, int page number, int orientation, double height, double width, double unit) The cpdf_page_init() function starts a new page with height height and width width. The page has number page number and orientation orientation. orientation can be 0 for portrait and 1 for landscape. The last optional parameter unit sets the unit for the koordinate system. The value should be the number of postscript points per unit. Since one inch is equal to 72 points, a value of 72 would set the unit to one inch. The default is also 72. See also cpdf_set_current_page(). cpdf_finalize_page (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Ends page void cpdf_finalize_page (int pdf document, int page number) The cpdf_finalize_page() function ends the page with page number page number. This function is only for saving memory. A finalized page takes less memory but cannot be modified anymore. See also cpdf_page_init(). 214 ClibPDF cpdf_finalize (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Ends document void cpdf_finalize (int pdf document) The cpdf_finalize() function ends the document. You still have to call cpdf_close(). See also cpdf_close(). cpdf_output_buffer (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Outputs the pdf document in memory buffer void cpdf_output_buffer (int pdf document) The cpdf_output_buffer() function outputs the pdf document to stdout. The document has to be created in memory which is the case if cpdf_open() has been called with no filename parameter. See also cpdf_open(). cpdf_save_to_file (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Writes the pdf document into a file void cpdf_save_to_file (int pdf document, string filename) The cpdf_save_to_file() function outputs the pdf document into a file if it has been created in memory. This function is not needed if the pdf document has been open by specifying a filename as a parameter of cpdf_open(). See also cpdf_output_buffer(), cpdf_open(). cpdf_set_current_page (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets current page 215 ClibPDF void cpdf_set_current_page (int pdf document, int page number) The cpdf_set_current_page() function set the page on which all operations are performed. One can switch between pages until a page is finished with cpdf_finalize_page(). See also cpdf_finalize_page(). cpdf_begin_text (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Starts text section void cpdf_begin_text (int pdf document) The cpdf_begin_text() function starts a text section. It must be ended with cpdf_end_text(). Example 1. Text output 1 2 3 4 5 6 See also cpdf_end_text(). cpdf_end_text (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Ends text section void cpdf_end_text (int pdf document) The cpdf_end_text() function ends a text section which was started with cpdf_begin_text(). Example 1. Text output 1 2 3 4 5 216 ClibPDF 6 See also cpdf_begin_text(). cpdf_show (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Output text at current position void cpdf_show (int pdf document, string text) The cpdf_show() function outputs the string in text at the current position. See also cpdf_text(), cpdf_begin_text(), cpdf_end_text(). cpdf_show_xy (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Output text at position void cpdf_show_xy (int pdf document, string text, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode) The cpdf_show_xy() function outputs the string text at position with coordinates (x-koor, y-koor). The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. Note: The function cpdf_show_xy() is identical to cpdf_text() without the optional parameters. See also cpdf_text(). cpdf_text (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Output text with parameters void cpdf_text (int pdf document, string text, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode, double orientation, int alignmode) 217 ClibPDF The cpdf_text() function outputs the string text at position with coordinates (x-koor, y-koor). The optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. The optional parameter orientation is the rotation of the text in degree. The optional parameter alignmode determines how the text is align. See the ClibPDF documentation for possible values. See also cpdf_show_xy(). cpdf_set_font (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Select the current font face and size void cpdf_set_font (int pdf document, string font name, double size, string encoding) The cpdf_set_font() function sets the the current font face, font size and encoding. Currently only the standard postscript fonts are supported. The last parameter encoding can take the following values: "MacRomanEncoding", "MacExpertEncoding", "WinAnsiEncoding", and "NULL". "NULL" stands for the font’s built-in encoding. See the ClibPDF Manual for more information, especially how to support asian fonts. cpdf_set_leading (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets distance between text lines void cpdf_set leading (int pdf document, double distance) The cpdf_set_leading() function sets the distance between text lines. This will be used if text is output by cpdf_continue_text(). See also cpdf_continue_text(). cpdf_set_text_rendering (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Determines how text is rendered 218 ClibPDF void cpdf_set_text_rendering (int pdf document, int mode) The cpdf_set_text_rendering() function determines how text is rendered. The possible values for mode are 0=fill text, 1=stroke text, 2=fill and stroke text, 3=invisible, 4=fill text and add it to cliping path, 5=stroke text and add it to clipping path, 6=fill and stroke text and add it to cliping path, 7=add it to clipping path. cpdf_set_horiz_scaling (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets horizontal scaling of text void cpdf_set_horiz_scaling (int pdf document, double scale) The cpdf_set_horiz_scaling() function sets the horizontal scaling to scale percent. cpdf_set_text_rise (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the text rise void cpdf_set_text_rise (int pdf document, double value) The cpdf_set_text_rise() function sets the text rising to value units. cpdf_set_text_matrix (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the text matrix void cpdf_set_text_matrix (int pdf document, array matrix) The cpdf_set_text_matrix() function sets a matrix which describes a transformation applied on the current text font. 219 ClibPDF cpdf_set_text_pos (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets text position void cpdf_set_text_pos (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode) The cpdf_set_text_pos() function sets the position of text for the next cpdf_show() function call. The last optional parameter mode determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_show(), cpdf_text(). cpdf_set_char_spacing (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets character spacing void cpdf_set_char_spacing (int pdf document, double space) The cpdf_set_char_spacing() function sets the spacing between characters. See also cpdf_set_word_spacing(), cpdf_set_leading(). cpdf_set_word_spacing (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets spacing between words void cpdf_set_word_spacing (int pdf document, double space) The cpdf_set_word_spacing() function sets the spacing between words. See also cpdf_set_char_spacing(), cpdf_set_leading(). 220 ClibPDF cpdf_continue_text (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Output text in next line void cpdf_continue_text (int pdf document, string text) The cpdf_continue_text() function outputs the string in text in the next line. See also cpdf_show_xy(), cpdf_text(), cpdf_set_leading(), cpdf_set_text_pos(). cpdf_stringwidth (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns width of text in current font double cpdf_stringwidth (int pdf document, string text) The cpdf_stringwidth() function returns the width of the string in text. It requires a font to be set before. See also cpdf_set_font(). cpdf_save (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Saves current enviroment void cpdf_save (int pdf document) The cpdf_save() function saves the current enviroment. It works like the postscript command gsave. Very useful if you want to translate or rotate an object without effecting other objects. See also cpdf_restore(). cpdf_restore (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Restores formerly saved enviroment 221 ClibPDF void cpdf_restore (int pdf document) The cpdf_restore() function restores the enviroment saved with cpdf_save(). It works like the postscript command grestore. Very useful if you want to translate or rotate an object without effecting other objects. Example 1. Save/Restore 1 2 5 See also cpdf_save(). cpdf_translate (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets origin of coordinate system void cpdf_translate (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode) The cpdf_translate() function set the origin of coordinate system to the point (x-koor, y-koor). The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. cpdf_scale (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets scaling void cpdf_scale (int pdf document, double x-scale, double y-scale) The cpdf_scale() function set the scaling factor in both directions. 222 ClibPDF cpdf_rotate (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets rotation void cpdf_rotate (int pdf document, double angle) The cpdf_rotate() function set the rotation in degress to angle. cpdf_setflat (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets flatness void cpdf_setflat (int pdf document, double value) The cpdf_setflat() function set the flatness to a value between 0 and 100. cpdf_setlinejoin (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets linejoin parameter void cpdf_setlinejoin (int pdf document, long value) The cpdf_setlinejoin() function set the linejoin parameter between a value of 0 and 2. 0 = miter, 1 = round, 2 = bevel. cpdf_setlinecap (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets linecap aparameter void cpdf_setlinecap (int pdf document, int value) The cpdf_setlinecap() function set the linecap parameter between a value of 0 and 2. 0 = butt end, 1 = round, 2 = projecting square. 223 ClibPDF cpdf_setmiterlimit (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets miter limit void cpdf_setmiterlimit (int pdf document, double value) The cpdf_setmiterlimit() function set the miter limit to a value greater or equal than 1. cpdf_setlinewidth (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets line width void cpdf_setlinewidth (int pdf document, double width) The cpdf_setlinewidth() function set the line width to width. cpdf_setdash (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets dash pattern void cpdf_setdash (int pdf document, double white, double black) The cpdf_setdash() function set the dash pattern white white units and black black units. If both are 0 a solid line is set. cpdf_newpath (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Starts a new path void cpdf_newpath (int pdf_document) The cpdf_newpath() starts a new path on the document given by the pdf_document parameter. 224 ClibPDF cpdf_moveto (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets current point void cpdf_moveto (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode) The cpdf_moveto() function set the current point to the coordinates x-koor and y-koor. The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. cpdf_rmoveto (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets current point void cpdf_rmoveto (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode) The cpdf_rmoveto() function set the current point relative to the coordinates x-koor and y-koor. The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_moveto(). cpdf_curveto (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Draws a curve void cpdf_curveto (int pdf document, double x1, double y1, double x2, double y2, double x3, double y3, int mode) The cpdf_curveto() function draws a Bezier curve from the current point to the point (x3, y3) using (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) as control points. 225 ClibPDF The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_moveto(), cpdf_rmoveto(), cpdf_rlineto(), cpdf_lineto(). cpdf_lineto (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Draws a line void cpdf_lineto (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode) The cpdf_lineto() function draws a line from the current point to the point with coordinates (x-koor, y-koor). The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_moveto(), cpdf_rmoveto(), cpdf_curveto(). cpdf_rlineto (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Draws a line void cpdf_rlineto (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, int mode) The cpdf_rlineto() function draws a line from the current point to the relative point with coordinates (x-koor, y-koor). The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_moveto(), cpdf_rmoveto(), cpdf_curveto(). 226 ClibPDF cpdf_circle (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Draw a circle void cpdf_circle (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, double radius, int mode) The cpdf_circle() function draws a circle with center at point (x-koor, y-koor) and radius radius. The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_arc(). cpdf_arc (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Draws an arc void cpdf_arc (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, double radius, double start, double end, int mode) The cpdf_arc() function draws an arc with center at point (x-koor, y-koor) and radius radius, starting at angle start and ending at angle end. The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_circle(). cpdf_rect (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Draw a rectangle void cpdf_rect (int pdf document, double x-koor, double y-koor, double width, double height, int mode) 227 ClibPDF The cpdf_rect() function draws a rectangle with its lower left corner at point (x-koor, y-koor). This width is set to widgth. This height is set to height. The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. cpdf_closepath (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Close path void cpdf_closepath (int pdf document) The cpdf_closepath() function closes the current path. cpdf_stroke (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Draw line along path void cpdf_stroke (int pdf document) The cpdf_stroke() function draws a line along current path. See also cpdf_closepath(), cpdf_closepath_stroke(). cpdf_closepath_stroke (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Close path and draw line along path void cpdf_closepath_stroke (int pdf document) The cpdf_closepath_stroke() function is a combination of cpdf_closepath() and cpdf_stroke(). Than clears the path. See also cpdf_closepath(), cpdf_stroke(). 228 ClibPDF cpdf_fill (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Fill current path void cpdf_fill (int pdf document) The cpdf_fill() function fills the interior of the current path with the current fill color. See also cpdf_closepath(), cpdf_stroke(), cpdf_setgray_fill(), cpdf_setgray(), cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill(), cpdf_setrgbcolor(). cpdf_fill_stroke (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Fill and stroke current path void cpdf_fill_stroke (int pdf document) The cpdf_fill_stroke() function fills the interior of the current path with the current fill color and draws current path. See also cpdf_closepath(), cpdf_stroke(), cpdf_fill(), cpdf_setgray_fill(), cpdf_setgray(), cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill(), cpdf_setrgbcolor(). cpdf_closepath_fill_stroke (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Close, fill and stroke current path void cpdf_closepath_fill_stroke (int pdf document) The cpdf_closepath_fill_stroke() function closes, fills the interior of the current path with the current fill color and draws current path. See also cpdf_closepath(), cpdf_stroke(), cpdf_fill(), cpdf_setgray_fill(), cpdf_setgray(), cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill(), cpdf_setrgbcolor(). 229 ClibPDF cpdf_clip (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Clips to current path void cpdf_clip (int pdf document) The cpdf_clip() function clips all drawing to the current path. cpdf_setgray_fill (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets filling color to gray value void cpdf_setgray_fill (int pdf document, double value) The cpdf_setgray_fill() function sets the current gray value to fill a path. See also cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill(). cpdf_setgray_stroke (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets drawing color to gray value void cpdf_setgray_stroke (int pdf document, double gray value) The cpdf_setgray_stroke() function sets the current drawing color to the given gray value. See also cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke(). cpdf_setgray (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets drawing and filling color to gray value void cpdf_setgray (int pdf document, double gray value) 230 ClibPDF The cpdf_setgray_stroke() function sets the current drawing and filling color to the given gray value. See also cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke(), cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill(). cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets filling color to rgb color value void cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill (int pdf document, double red value, double green value, double blue value) The cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill() function sets the current rgb color value to fill a path. See also cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke(), cpdf_setrgbcolor(). cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets drawing color to rgb color value void cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke (int pdf document, double red value, double green value, double blue value) The cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke() function sets the current drawing color to the given rgb color value. See also cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill(), cpdf_setrgbcolor(). cpdf_setrgbcolor (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets drawing and filling color to rgb color value void cpdf_setrgbcolor (int pdf document, double red value, double green value, double blue value) The cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke() function sets the current drawing and filling color to the given rgb color value. See also cpdf_setrgbcolor_stroke(), cpdf_setrgbcolor_fill(). 231 ClibPDF cpdf_add_outline (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Adds bookmark for current page void cpdf_add_outline (int pdf document, string text) The cpdf_add_outline() function adds a bookmark with text text that points to the current page. Example 1. Adding a page outline 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 cpdf_set_page_animation (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets duration between pages void cpdf_set_page_animation (int pdf document, int transition, double duration) The cpdf_set_page_animation() function set the transition between following pages. The value of transition can be 0 for none, 1 for two lines sweeping across the screen reveal the page, 2 for multiple lines sweeping across the screen reveal the page, 3 for a box reveals the page, 232 ClibPDF 4 for a single line sweeping across the screen reveals the page, 5 for the old page dissolves to reveal the page, 6 for the dissolve effect moves from one screen edge to another, 7 for the old page is simply replaced by the new page (default) The value of duration is the number of seconds between page flipping. cpdf_import_jpeg (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Opens a JPEG image int cpdf_open_jpeg (int pdf document, string file name, double x-koor, double y-koor, double angle, double width, double height, double x-scale, double y-scale, int mode) The cpdf_import_jpeg() function opens an image stored in the file with the name file name. The format of the image has to be jpeg. The image is placed on the current page at position (x-koor, y-koor). The image is rotated by angle degres. The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_place_inline_image(), cpdf_place_inline_image (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Places an image on the page void cpdf_place_inline_image (int pdf document, int image, double x-koor, double y-koor, double angle, double width, double height, int mode) The cpdf_place_inline_image() function places an image created with the php image functions on the page at postion (x-koor, y-koor). The image can be scaled at the same time. The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. See also cpdf_import_jpeg(), 233 ClibPDF cpdf_add_annotation (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Adds annotation void cpdf_add_annotation (int pdf document, double llx, double lly, double urx, double ury, string title, string content, int mode) The cpdf_add_annotation() adds a note with the lower left corner at (llx, lly) and the upper right corner at (urx, ury). The last optional parameter determines the unit length. If is 0 or omitted the default unit as specified for the page is used. Otherwise the koodinates are measured in postscript points disregarding the current unit. 234 IX. Cybercash payment functions These functions are only available if the interpreter has been compiled with the --with-cybercash=[DIR]. These functions have been added in PHP4. 235 cybercash_encr (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) ??? array cybercash_encr (string wmk, string sk, string inbuff) The function returns an associative array with the elements "errcode" and, if "errcode" is false, "outbuff" (string), "outLth" (long) and "macbuff" (string). cybercash_decr (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) ??? array cybercash_decr (string wmk, string sk, string inbuff) The function returns an associative array with the elements "errcode" and, if "errcode" is false, "outbuff" (string), "outLth" (long) and "macbuff" (string). cybercash_base64_encode (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) ??? string cybercash_base64_encode (string inbuff) cybercash_base64_decode (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) string cybercash_base64_decode (string inbuff) 236 X. DOM XML functions These functions are only available if PHP was configured with --with-dom=[DIR], using the GNOME xml library. You will need at least libxml-2.0.0 (the beta version will not work). These functions have been added in PHP4. This module defines the following constants: Table 1. XML constants Constant XML_ELEMENT_NODE XML_ATTRIBUTE_NODE XML_TEXT_NODE Value 1 2 3 Description 4 XML_CDATA_SECTION_NODE XML_ENTITY_REF_NODE XML_ENTITY_NODE XML_PI_NODE XML_COMMENT_NODE XML_DOCUMENT_NODE 5 6 7 8 9 10 XML_DOCUMENT_TYPE_NODE 11 XML_DOCUMENT_FRAG_NODE XML_NOTATION_NODE 12 XML_GLOBAL_NAMESPACE 1 XML_LOCAL_NAMESPACE 2 This module defines a number of classes. The DOM XML functions return a parsed tree of the XML document with each node being an object belonging to one of these classes. 237 xmldoc (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Creates a DOM object of an XML document object xmldoc (string str) The function parses the XML document in str and returns an object of class "Dom document", having the properties "doc" (resource), "version" (string) and "type" (long). xmldocfile (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Creates a DOM object from XML file object xmldocfile (string filename) The function parses the XML document in the file named filename and returns an object of class "Dom document", having the properties "doc" (resource), "version" (string). xmltree (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Creates a tree of php objects from XML document object xmltree (string str) The function parses the XML document in str and returns a tree PHP objects as the parsed document. 238 XI. Compression functions This module uses the functions of zlib (http://www.cdrom.com/pub/infozip/zlib/) by Jean-loup Gailly and Mark Adler to transparently read and write gzip (.gz) compressed files. You have to use a zlib version >= 1.0.9 with this module. This module contains versions of most of the filesystem functions which work with gzip-compressed files (and uncompressed files, too, but not with sockets). Small code example Opens a temporary file and writes a test string to it, then it prints out the content of this file twice. Example 1. Small Zlib example 1 2 \n\n\n
\n"; 5 $s = "Only a test, test, test, test, test, test, test, test!\n"; 6 // open file for writing with maximum compression 7 $zp = gzopen($filename, "w9"); 8 // write string to file 9 gzwrite($zp, $s); 10 // close file 11 gzclose($zp); 12 // open file for reading 13 $zp = gzopen($filename, "r"); 14 // read 3 char 15 print gzread($zp, 3); 16 // output until end of the file and close it. 17 gzpassthru($zp); 18 print "\n"; 19 // open file and print content (the 2nd time). 20 if (readgzfile($filename) != strlen($s)) { 21 echo "Error with zlib functions!"; 22 } 23 unlink($filename); 24 print "
\n\n\n"; 25 ?> 26 239 gzclose (PHP3 , PHP4 ) close an open gz-file pointer int gzclose (int zp) The gz-file pointed to by zp is closed. Returns true on success and false on failure. The gz-file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by gzopen(). gzeof (PHP3 , PHP4 ) test for end-of-file on a gz-file pointer int gzeof (int zp) Returns true if the gz-file pointer is at EOF or an error occurs; otherwise returns false. The gz-file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by gzopen(). gzfile (PHP3 , PHP4 ) read entire gz-file into an array array gzfile (string filename [, int use_include_path]) Identical to readgzfile(), except that gzfile() returns the file in an array. You can use the optional second parameter and set it to "1", if you want to search for the file in the include_path, too. See also readgzfile(), and gzopen(). gzgetc (PHP3 , PHP4 ) get character from gz-file pointer 240 Zlib string gzgetc (int zp) Returns a string containing a single (uncompressed) character read from the file pointed to by zp. Returns FALSE on EOF (as does gzeof()). The gz-file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by gzopen(). See also gzopen(), and gzgets(). gzgets (PHP3 , PHP4 ) get line from file pointer string gzgets (int zp, int length) Returns a (uncompressed) string of up to length - 1 bytes read from the file pointed to by fp. Reading ends when length - 1 bytes have been read, on a newline, or on EOF (whichever comes first). If an error occurs, returns false. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by gzopen(). See also gzopen(), gzgetc(), and fgets(). gzgetss (PHP3 , PHP4 ) get line from gz-file pointer and strip HTML tags string gzgetss (int zp, int length [, string allowable_tags]) Identical to gzgets(), except that gzgetss attempts to strip any HTML and PHP tags from the text it reads. You can use the optional third parameter to specify tags which should not be stripped. Note: allowable_tags was added in PHP 3.0.13, PHP4B3. See also gzgets(), gzopen(), and strip_tags(). 241 Zlib gzopen (PHP3 , PHP4 ) open gz-file int gzopen (string filename, string mode [, int use_include_path]) Opens a gzip (.gz) file for reading or writing. The mode parameter is as in fopen() ("rb" or "wb") but can also include a compression level ("wb9") or a strategy: ’f’ for filtered data as in "wb6f", ’h’ for Huffman only compression as in "wb1h". (See the description of deflateInit2 in zlib.h for more information about the strategy parameter.) Gzopen can be used to read a file which is not in gzip format; in this case gzread() will directly read from the file without decompression. Gzopen returns a file pointer to the file opened, after that, everything you read from this file descriptor will be transparently decompressed and what you write gets compressed. If the open fails, the function returns false. You can use the optional third parameter and set it to "1", if you want to search for the file in the include_path, too. Example 1. gzopen() example 1 2 $fp = gzopen("/tmp/file.gz", "r"); 3 See also gzclose(). gzpassthru (PHP3 , PHP4 ) output all remaining data on a gz-file pointer int gzpassthru (int zp) Reads to EOF on the given gz-file pointer and writes the (uncompressed) results to standard output. If an error occurs, returns false. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by gzopen(). The gz-file is closed when gzpassthru() is done reading it (leaving zp useless). 242 Zlib gzputs (PHP3 , PHP4 ) write to a gz-file pointer int gzputs (int zp, string str [, int length]) gzputs() is an alias to gzwrite(), and is identical in every way. gzread (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Binary-safe gz-file read string gzread (int zp, int length) gzread() reads up to length bytes from the gz-file pointer referenced by zp. Reading stops when length (uncompressed) bytes have been read or EOF is reached, whichever comes first. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 // get contents of a gz-file into a string $filename = "/usr/local/something.txt.gz"; $zd = gzopen( $filename, "r" ); $contents = gzread( $zd, 10000 ); gzclose( $zd ); See also gzwrite(), gzopen(), gzgets(), gzgetss(), gzfile(), and gzpassthru(). gzrewind (PHP3 , PHP4 ) rewind the position of a gz-file pointer int gzrewind (int zp) Sets the file position indicator for zp to the beginning of the file stream. If an error occurs, returns 0. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by gzopen(). 243 Zlib See also gzseek() and gztell(). gzseek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) seek on a gz-file pointer int gzseek (int zp, int offset) Sets the file position indicator for the file referenced by zp to offset bytes into the file stream. Equivalent to calling (in C) gzseek( zp, offset, SEEK_SET ). If the file is opened for reading, this function is emulated but can be extremely slow. If the file is opened for writing, only forward seeks are supported; gzseek then compresses a sequence of zeroes up to the new starting position. Upon success, returns 0; otherwise, returns -1. Note that seeking past EOF is not considered an error. See also gztell() and gzrewind(). gztell (PHP3 , PHP4 ) tell gz-file pointer read/write position int gztell (int zp) Returns the position of the file pointer referenced by zp; i.e., its offset into the file stream. If an error occurs, returns false. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by gzopen(). See also gzopen(), gzseek() and gzrewind(). gzwrite (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Binary-safe gz-file write int gzwrite (int zp, string string [, int length]) 244 Zlib gzwrite() writes the contents of string to the gz-file stream pointed to by zp. If the length argument is given, writing will stop after length (uncompressed) bytes have been written or the end of string is reached, whichever comes first. Note that if the length argument is given, then the magic_quotes_runtime configuration option will be ignored and no slashes will be stripped from string. See also gzread(), gzopen(), and gzputs(). readgzfile (PHP3 , PHP4 ) output a gz-file int readgzfile (string filename [, int use_include_path]) Reads a file, decompresses it and writes it to standard output. Readgzfile() can be used to read a file which is not in gzip format; in this case readgzfile() will directly read from the file without decompression. Returns the number of (uncompressed) bytes read from the file. If an error occurs, false is returned and unless the function was called as @readgzfile, an error message is printed. The file filename will be opened from the filesystem and its contents written to standard output. You can use the optional second parameter and set it to "1", if you want to search for the file in the include_path, too. See also gzpassthru(), gzfile(), and gzopen(). gzcompress (unknown) gz-compress a string string gzcompress (string data [, int level]) This function returns a gzip-compressed version of the input data or false on errors. The optional parameter level can be given as 0 for no compression up to 9 for maximum compression. See also gzuncompress(). 245 Zlib gzuncompress (unknown) uncompress a gz-compressed string string gzcompress (string data [, int length]) This function takes data compressed by gzcompress() and returns the orignial uncompressed data or false on error. The function will return an error if the uncompressed data is more than 256 times the lenght of the compressed input data or more than the optional parameter length. See also gzcompress(). 246 XII. Database (dbm-style) abstraction layer functions These functions build the foundation for accessing Berkeley DB style databases. This is a general abstraction layer for several file-based databases. As such, functionality is limited to a subset of features modern databases such as Sleepycat Software’s DB2 () support. (This is not to be confused with IBM’s DB2 software, which is supported through the ODBC functions.) The behaviour of various aspects depend on the implementation of the underlying database. Functions such as dba_optimize() and dba_sync() will do what they promise for one database and will do nothing for others. The following handlers are supported: • dbm is the oldest (original) type of Berkeley DB style databases. You should avoid it, if possible. We do not support the compatibility functions built into DB2 and gdbm, because they are only compatible on the source code level, but cannot handle the original dbm format. ndbm is a newer type and more flexible than dbm. It still has most of the arbitrary limits of dbm (therefore it is deprecated). gdbm is the GNU database manager (). db2 is Sleepycat Software’s DB2 (). It is described as "a programmatic toolkit that provides high-performance built-in database support for both standalone and client/server applications." cdb is "a fast, reliable, lightweight package for creating and reading constant databases." It is from the author of qmail and can be found here (). Since it is constant, we support only reading operations. • • • • Example 1. DBA example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 20 DBA is binary safe and does not have any arbitrary limits. It inherits all limits set by the underlying database implementation. All file-based databases must provide a way of setting the file mode of a new created database, if that is possible at all. The file mode is commonly passed as the fourth argument to dba_open() or dba_popen(). You can access all entries of a database in a linear way by using the dba_firstkey() and dba_nextkey() functions. You may not change the database while traversing it. Example 2. Traversing a database 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 248 dba_close (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Close database void dba_close (int handle) dba_close() closes the established database and frees all resources specified by handle. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_close() does not return any value. See also: dba_open() dba_popen() dba_delete (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Delete entry specified by key string dba_delete (string key, int handle) dba_delete() deletes the entry specified by key from the database specified with handle. key is the key of the entry which is deleted. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_delete() returns true or false, if the entry is deleted or not deleted, respectively. See also: dba_exists() dba_fetch() dba_insert() dba_replace() dba_exists (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Check whether key exists bool dba_exists (string key, int handle) dba_exists() checks whether the specified key exists in the database specified by handle. key is the key the check is performed for. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_exists() returns true or false, if the key is found or not found, respectively. 249 dba See also: dba_fetch() dba_delete() dba_insert() dba_replace() dba_fetch (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Fetch data specified by key string dba_fetch (string key, int handle) dba_fetch() fetches the data specified by key from the database specified with handle. key is the key the data is specified by. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_fetch() returns the associated string or false, if the key/data pair is found or not found, respectively. See also: dba_exists() dba_delete() dba_insert() dba_replace() dba_firstkey (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Fetch first key string dba_firstkey (int handle) dba_firstkey() returns the first key of the database specified by handle and resets the internal key pointer. This permits a linear search through the whole database. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_firstkey() returns the key or false depending on whether it succeeds or fails, respectively. See also: dba_nextkey() dba_insert (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Insert entry bool dba_insert (string key, string value, int handle) 250 dba dba_insert() inserts the entry described with key and value into the database specified by handle. It fails, if an entry with the same key already exists. key is the key of the entry to be inserted. value is the value to be inserted. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_insert() returns true or false, depending on whether it succeeds of fails, respectively. See also: dba_exists() dba_delete() dba_fetch() dba_replace() dba_nextkey (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Fetch next key string dba_nextkey (int handle) dba_nextkey() returns the next key of the database specified by handle and increments the internal key pointer. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_nextkey() returns the key or false depending on whether it succeeds or fails, respectively. See also: dba_firstkey() dba_popen (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Open database persistently int dba_popen (string path, string mode, string handler [, ...]) dba_popen() establishes a persistent database instance for path with mode using handler. path is commonly a regular path in your filesystem. mode is "r" for read access, "w" for read/write access to an already existing database, "c" for read/write access and database creation if it doesn’t currently exist, and "n" for create, truncate and read/write access. handler is the name of the handler which shall be used for accessing path. It is passed all optional parameters given to dba_popen() and can act on behalf of them. 251 dba dba_popen() returns a positive handler id or false, in the case the open is successful or fails, respectively. See also: dba_open() dba_close() dba_open (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Open database int dba_open (string path, string mode, string handler [, ...]) dba_open() establishes a database instance for path with mode using handler. path is commonly a regular path in your filesystem. mode is "r" for read access, "w" for read/write access to an already existing database, "c" for read/write access and database creation if it doesn’t currently exist, and "n" for create, truncate and read/write access. handler is the name of the handler which shall be used for accessing path. It is passed all optional parameters given to dba_open() and can act on behalf of them. dba_open() returns a positive handler id or false, in the case the open is successful or fails, respectively. See also: dba_popen() dba_close() dba_optimize (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Optimize database bool dba_optimize (int handle) dba_optimize() optimizes the underlying database specified by handle. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_optimize() returns true or false, if the optimization succeeds or fails, respectively. See also: dba_sync() 252 dba dba_replace (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Replace or insert entry bool dba_replace (string key, string value, int handle) dba_replace() replaces or inserts the entry described with key and value into the database specified by handle. key is the key of the entry to be inserted. value is the value to be inserted. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_replace() returns true or false, depending on whether it succeeds of fails, respectively. See also: dba_exists() dba_delete() dba_fetch() dba_insert() dba_sync (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Synchronize database bool dba_sync (int handle) dba_sync() synchronizes the database specified by handle. This will probably trigger a physical write to disk, if supported. handle is a database handle returned by dba_open(). dba_sync() returns true or false, if the synchronization succeeds or fails, respectively. See also: dba_optimize() 253 XIII. Date and Time functions 254 checkdate (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Validate a date/time int checkdate (int month, int day, int year) Returns true if the date given is valid; otherwise returns false. Checks the validity of the date formed by the arguments. A date is considered valid if: • • • year is between 0 and 32767 inclusive month is between 1 and 12 inclusive Day is within the allowed number of days for the given month. Leap years are taken into consideration. date (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Format a local time/date string date (string format [, int timestamp]) Returns a string formatted according to the given format string using the given timestamp or the current local time if no timestamp is given. The following characters are recognized in the format string: • • • • • • • • • • • a - "am" or "pm" A - "AM" or "PM" d - day of the month, 2 digits with leading zeros; i.e. "01" to "31" D - day of the week, textual, 3 letters; i.e. "Fri" F - month, textual, long; i.e. "January" h - hour, 12-hour format; i.e. "01" to "12" H - hour, 24-hour format; i.e. "00" to "23" g - hour, 12-hour format without leading zeros; i.e. "1" to "12" G - hour, 24-hour format without leading zeros; i.e. "0" to "23" i - minutes; i.e. "00" to "59" j - day of the month without leading zeros; i.e. "1" to "31" 255 Date/time • • • • • • • • • • • • • • l (lowercase ’L’) - day of the week, textual, long; i.e. "Friday" L - boolean for whether it is a leap year; i.e. "0" or "1" m - month; i.e. "01" to "12" n - month without leading zeros; i.e. "1" to "12" M - month, textual, 3 letters; i.e. "Jan" s - seconds; i.e. "00" to "59" S - English ordinal suffix, textual, 2 characters; i.e. "th", "nd" t - number of days in the given month; i.e. "28" to "31" U - seconds since the epoch w - day of the week, numeric, i.e. "0" (Sunday) to "6" (Saturday) Y - year, 4 digits; i.e. "1999" y - year, 2 digits; i.e. "99" z - day of the year; i.e. "0" to "365" Z - timezone offset in seconds (i.e. "-43200" to "43200") Unrecognized characters in the format string will be printed as-is. The "Z" format will always return "0" when using gmdate(). Example 1. Date() example 1 2 print (date ("l dS of F Y h:i:s A")); 3 print ("July 1, 2000 is on a " . date ("l", mktime(0,0,0,7,1,2000))); 4 It is possible to use date() and mktime() together to find dates in the future or the past. Example 2. Date() and mktime() example 1 2 $tomorrow = mktime (0,0,0,date("m") ,date("d")+1,date("Y")); 3 $lastmonth = mktime (0,0,0,date("m")-1,date("d"), date("Y")); 4 $nextyear = mktime (0,0,0,date("m"), date("d"), date("Y")+1); 5 To format dates in other languages, you should use the setlocale() and strftime() functions. See also gmdate() and mktime(). 256 Date/time getdate (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get date/time information array getdate (int timestamp) Returns an associative array containing the date information of the timestamp as the following array elements: • • • • • • • • • • "seconds" - seconds "minutes" - minutes "hours" - hours "mday" - day of the month "wday" - day of the week, numeric "mon" - month, numeric "year" - year, numeric "yday" - day of the year, numeric; i.e. "299" "weekday" - day of the week, textual, full; i.e. "Friday" "month" - month, textual, full; i.e. "January" gettimeofday (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get current time array gettimeofday (void) This is an interface to gettimeofday(2). It returns an associative array containing the data returned from the system call. • • • • "sec" - seconds "usec" - microseconds "minuteswest" - minutes west of Greenwich "dsttime" - type of dst correction 257 Date/time gmdate (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Format a GMT/CUT date/time string gmdate (string format, int timestamp) Identical to the date() function except that the time returned is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). For example, when run in Finland (GMT +0200), the first line below prints "Jan 01 1998 00:00:00", while the second prints "Dec 31 1997 22:00:00". Example 1. Gmdate() example 1 2 echo date ("M d Y H:i:s", mktime (0,0,0,1,1,1998)); 3 echo gmdate ("M d Y H:i:s", mktime (0,0,0,1,1,1998)); 4 See also date(), mktime(), and gmmktime(). gmmktime (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get UNIX timestamp for a GMT date int gmmktime (int hour, int minute, int second, int month, int day, int year [, int is_dst]) Identical to mktime() except the passed parameters represents a GMT date. gmstrftime (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Format a GMT/CUT time/date according to locale settings string gmstrftime (string format, int timestamp) Behaves the same as strftime() except that the time returned is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). For example, when run in Eastern Standard Time (GMT -0500), the first line below prints "Dec 31 1998 20:00:00", while the second prints "Jan 01 1999 01:00:00". 258 Date/time Example 1. Gmstrftime() example 1 2 setlocale (’LC_TIME’, ’en_US’); 3 echo strftime ("%b %d %Y %H:%M:%S", mktime (20,0,0,12,31,98))."\n"; 4 echo gmstrftime ("%b %d %Y %H:%M:%S", mktime (20,0,0,12,31,98))."\n"; 5 See also strftime(). localtime (PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Get the local time array localtime ([int timestamp [, bool is_associative]]) The localtime() function returns an array identical to that of the structure returned by the C function call. The first argument to localtime() is the timestamp, if this is not given the current time is used. The second argument to the localtime() is the is_associative, if this is set to 0 or not supplied than the array is returned as a regular, numerically indexed array. If the argument is set to 1 then localtime() is an associative array containing all the different elements of the structure returned by the C function call to localtime. The names of the different keys of the associative array are as follows: • • • • • • • • • "tm_sec" - seconds "tm_min" - minutes "tm_hour" - hour "tm_mday" - day of the month "tm_mon" - month of the year "tm_year" - Year, not y2k compliant "tm_wday" - Day of the week "tm_yday" - Day of the year "tm_isdst" - Is daylight savings time in effect microtime (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return current UNIX timestamp with microseconds 259 Date/time string microtime(void); Returns the string "msec sec" where sec is the current time measured in the number of seconds since the Unix Epoch (0:00:00 January 1, 1970 GMT), and msec is the microseconds part. This function is only available on operating systems that support the gettimeofday() system call. See also time(). mktime (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get UNIX timestamp for a date int mktime (int hour, int minute, int second, int month, int day, int year [, int is_dst]) Warning: Note the strange order of arguments, which differs from the order of arguments in a regular UNIX mktime() call and which does not lend itself well to leaving out parameters from right to left (see below). It is a common error to mix these values up in a script. Returns the Unix timestamp corresponding to the arguments given. This timestamp is a long integer containing the number of seconds between the Unix Epoch (January 1 1970) and the time specified. Arguments may be left out in order from right to left; any arguments thus omitted will be set to the current value according to the local date and time. Is_dst can be set to 1 if the time is during daylight savings time, 0 if it is not, or -1 (the default) if it is unknown whether the time is within daylight savings time or not. Note: Is_dst was added in 3.0.10. Mktime() is useful for doing date arithmetic and validation, as it will automatically calculate the correct value for out-of-range input. For example, each of the following lines produces the string "Jan-01-1998". Example 1. Mktime() example 1 2 3 4 5 echo echo echo echo date date date date ("M-d-Y", ("M-d-Y", ("M-d-Y", ("M-d-Y", mktime mktime mktime mktime (0,0,0,12,32,1997)); (0,0,0,13,1,1997)); (0,0,0,1,1,1998)); (0,0,0,1,1,98)); 260 Date/time 6 Year may be a two or four digit value, with values between 0-69 mapping to 2000-2069 and 70-99 to 1970-1999 (on systems where time_t is a 32bit signed integer, as most common today, the valid range for year is somewhere between 1902 and 2037). The last day of any given month can be expressed as the "0" day of the next month, not the -1 day. Both of the following examples will produce the string "The last day in Feb 2000 is: 29". Example 2. Last day of next month 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $lastday = mktime (0,0,0,3,0,2000); echo strftime ("Last day in Feb 2000 is: %d", $lastday); $lastday = mktime (0,0,0,4,-31,2000); echo strftime ("Last day in Feb 2000 is: %d", $lastday); See also date() and time(). strftime (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Format a local time/date according to locale settings string strftime (string format, int timestamp) Returns a string formatted according to the given format string using the given timestamp or the current local time if no timestamp is given. Month and weekday names and other language dependent strings respect the current locale set with setlocale(). The following conversion specifiers are recognized in the format string: • • • • • • • • %a - abbreviated weekday name according to the current locale %A - full weekday name according to the current locale %b - abbreviated month name according to the current locale %B - full month name according to the current locale %c - preferred date and time representation for the current locale %C - century number (the year divided by 100 and truncated to an integer, range 00 to 99) %d - day of the month as a decimal number (range 00 to 31) %D - same as %m/%d/%y 261 Date/time • %e - day of the month as a decimal number, a single digit is preceded by a space (range ’ 1’ to ’31’) %h - same as %b %H - hour as a decimal number using a 24-hour clock (range 00 to 23) %I - hour as a decimal number using a 12-hour clock (range 01 to 12) %j - day of the year as a decimal number (range 001 to 366) %m - month as a decimal number (range 1 to 12) %M - minute as a decimal number %n - newline character %p - either ‘am’ or ‘pm’ according to the given time value, or the corresponding strings for the current locale %r - time in a.m. and p.m. notation %R - time in 24 hour notation %S - second as a decimal number %t - tab character %T - current time, equal to %H:%M:%S %u - weekday as a decimal number [1,7], with 1 representing Monday %U - week number of the current year as a decimal number, starting with the first Sunday as the first day of the first week %V - The ISO 8601:1988 week number of the current year as a decimal number, range 01 to 53, where week 1 is the first week that has at least 4 days in the current year, and with Monday as the first day of the week. %W - week number of the current year as a decimal number, starting with the first Monday as the first day of the first week %w - day of the week as a decimal, Sunday being 0 %x - preferred date representation for the current locale without the time %X - preferred time representation for the current locale without the date %y - year as a decimal number without a century (range 00 to 99) %Y - year as a decimal number including the century %Z - time zone or name or abbreviation %% - a literal ‘%’ character • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Example 1. Strftime() example 1 262 Date/time 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 setlocale ("LC_TIME", "C"); print (strftime ("%A in Finnish is ")); setlocale ("LC_TIME", "fi_FI"); print (strftime ("%A, in French ")); setlocale ("LC_TIME", "fr_CA"); print (strftime ("%A and in German ")); setlocale ("LC_TIME", "de_DE"); print (strftime ("%A.\n")); This example works if you have the respective locales installed in your system. See also setlocale() and mktime() and the Open Group specification of strftime()() (http://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/7908799/xsh/strftime.html). time (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return current UNIX timestamp int time(void); Returns the current time measured in the number of seconds since the Unix Epoch (January 1 1970 00:00:00 GMT). See also date(). strtotime (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b2) Parse about any english textual datetime description into a UNIX timestamp int strtotime (string time [, int now]) The function expects to be given a string containing an english date format and will try to parse that format into a UNIX timestamp. Example 1. Strtotime() example 1 2 echo strtotime ("10 march 2000") . "\n"; 3 263 XIV. dBase functions These functions allow you to access records stored in dBase-format (dbf) databases. There is no support for indexes or memo fields. There is no support for locking, too. Two concurrent webserver processes modifying the same dBase file will very likely ruin your database. Unlike SQL databases, dBase "databases" cannot change the database definition afterwards. Once the file is created, the database definition is fixed. There are no indexes that speed searching or otherwise organize your data. dBase files are simple sequential files of fixed length records. Records are appended to the end of the file and delete records are kept until you call dbase_pack()(). We recommend that you do not use dBase files as your production database. Choose any real SQL server instead; MySQL or Postgres are common choices with PHP. dBase support is here to allow you to import and export data to and from your web database, since the file format is commonly understood with Windows spreadsheets and organizers. Import and export of data is about all that dBase support is good for. 264 dbase_create (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Creates a dBase database int dbase_create (string filename, array fields) The fields parameter is an array of arrays, each array describing the format of one field in the database. Each field consists of a name, a character indicating the field type, a length, and a precision. The types of fields available are: L Boolean. These do not have a length or precision. M Memo. (Note that these aren’t supported by PHP.) These do not have a length or precision. D Date (stored as YYYYMMDD). These do not have a length or precision. N Number. These have both a length and a precision (the number of digits after the decimal point). C String. If the database is successfully created, a dbase_identifier is returned, otherwise false is returned. Example 1. Creating a dBase database file 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 // "database" name $dbname = "/tmp/test.dbf"; // database "definition" $def = array( array("date", array("name", array("age", array("email", array("ismember", ); "D"), "C", 50), "N", 3, 0), "C", 128), "L") 265 dBase 14 15 // creation 16 if (!dbase_create($dbname, $def)) 17 print "Error!"; 18 dbase_open (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Opens a dBase database int dbase_open (string filename, int flags) The flags correspond to those for the open() system call. (Typically 0 means read-only, 1 means write-only, and 2 means read and write.) Returns a dbase_identifier for the opened database, or false if the database couldn’t be opened. dbase_close (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close a dBase database bool dbase_close (int dbase_identifier) Closes the database associated with dbase_identifier. dbase_pack (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Packs a dBase database bool dbase_pack (int dbase_identifier) Packs the specified database (permanently deleting all records marked for deletion using dbase_delete_record(). 266 dBase dbase_add_record (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Add a record to a dBase database bool dbase_add_record (int dbase_identifier, array record) Adds the data in the record to the database. If the number of items in the supplied record isn’t equal to the number of fields in the database, the operation will fail and false will be returned. dbase_replace_record (PHP3 >= 3.0.11, PHP4 ) Replace a record in a dBase database bool dbase_replace_record (int dbase_identifier, array record, int dbase_record_number) Replaces the data associated with the record record_number with the data in the record in the database. If the number of items in the supplied record is not equal to the number of fields in the database, the operation will fail and false will be returned. dbase_record_number is an integer which spans from 1 to the number of records in the database (as returned by dbase_numrecords()). dbase_delete_record (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Deletes a record from a dBase database bool dbase_delete_record (int dbase_identifier, int record) Marks record to be deleted from the database. To actually remove the record from the database, you must also call dbase_pack(). dbase_get_record (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Gets a record from a dBase database 267 dBase array dbase_get_record (int dbase_identifier, int record) Returns the data from record in an array. The array is indexed starting at 0, and includes an associative member named ’deleted’ which is set to 1 if the record has been marked for deletion (see dbase_delete_record(). Each field is converted to the appropriate PHP type. (Dates are left as strings.) dbase_get_record_with_names (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Gets a record from a dBase database as an associative array array dbase_get_record_with_names (int dbase_identifier, int record) Returns the data from record in an associative array. The array also includes an associative member named ’deleted’ which is set to 1 if the record has been marked for deletion (see dbase_delete_record(). Each field is converted to the appropriate PHP type. (Dates are left as strings.) dbase_numfields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Find out how many fields are in a dBase database int dbase_numfields (int dbase_identifier) Returns the number of fields (columns) in the specified database. Field numbers are between 0 and dbase_numfields($db)-1, while record numbers are between 1 and dbase_numrecords($db). Example 1. Using dbase_numfields() 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 $rec = dbase_get_record($db, $recno); $nf = dbase_numfields($db); for ($i=0; $i < $nf; $i++) { print $rec[$i]."
\n"; } 268 dBase dbase_numrecords (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Find out how many records are in a dBase database int dbase_numrecords (int dbase_identifier) Returns the number of records (rows) in the specified database. Record numbers are between 1 and dbase_numrecords($db), while field numbers are between 0 and dbase_numfields($db)-1. 269 XV. dbm functions These functions allow you to store records stored in a dbm-style database. This type of database (supported by the Berkeley db, gdbm, and some system libraries, as well as a built-in flatfile library) stores key/value pairs (as opposed to the full-blown records supported by relational databases). Example 1. dbm example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 $dbm = dbmopen("lastseen", "w"); if (dbmexists($dbm, $userid)) { $last_seen = dbmfetch($dbm, $userid); } else { dbminsert($dbm, $userid, time()); } do_stuff(); dbmreplace($dbm, $userid, time()); dbmclose($dbm); 270 dbmopen (PHP3 , PHP4 ) opens a dbm database int dbmopen (string filename, string flags) The first argument is the full-path filename of the dbm file to be opened and the second is the file open mode which is one of "r", "n", "c" or "w" for read-only, new (implies read-write, and most likely will truncate an already-existing database of the same name), create (implies read-write, and will not truncate an already-existing database of the same name) and read-write respectively. Returns an identifer to be passed to the other dbm functions on success, or false on failure. If ndbm support is used, ndbm will actually create filename.dir and filename.pag files. gdbm only uses one file, as does the internal flat-file support, and Berkeley db creates a filename.db file. Note that PHP does its own file locking in addition to any file locking that may be done by the dbm library itself. PHP does not delete the .lck files it creates. It uses these files simply as fixed inodes on which to do the file locking. For more information on dbm files, see your Unix man pages, or obtain GNU’s gdbm (ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/gdbm/). dbmclose (PHP3 , PHP4 ) closes a dbm database bool dbmclose (int dbm_identifier) Unlocks and closes the specified database. dbmexists (PHP3 , PHP4 ) tells if a value exists for a key in a dbm database bool dbmexists (int dbm_identifier, string key) Returns true if there is a value associated with the key. 271 DBM dbmfetch (PHP3 , PHP4 ) fetches a value for a key from a dbm database string dbmfetch (int dbm_identifier, string key) Returns the value associated with key. dbminsert (PHP3 , PHP4 ) inserts a value for a key in a dbm database int dbminsert (int dbm_identifier, string key, string value) Adds the value to the database with the specified key. Returns -1 if the database was opened read-only, 0 if the insert was successful, and 1 if the specified key already exists. (To replace the value, use dbmreplace().) dbmreplace (PHP3 , PHP4 ) replaces the value for a key in a dbm database bool dbmreplace (int dbm_identifier, string key, string value) Replaces the value for the specified key in the database. This will also add the key to the database if it didn’t already exist. dbmdelete (PHP3 , PHP4 ) deletes the value for a key from a dbm database bool dbmdelete (int dbm_identifier, string key) 272 DBM Deletes the value for key in the database. Returns false if the key didn’t exist in the database. dbmfirstkey (PHP3 , PHP4 ) retrieves the first key from a dbm database string dbmfirstkey (int dbm_identifier) Returns the first key in the database. Note that no particular order is guaranteed since the database may be built using a hash-table, which doesn’t guarantee any ordering. dbmnextkey (PHP3 , PHP4 ) retrieves the next key from a dbm database string dbmnextkey (int dbm_identifier, string key) Returns the next key after key. By calling dbmfirstkey() followed by successive calls to dbmnextkey() it is possible to visit every key/value pair in the dbm database. For example: Example 1. Visiting every key/value pair in a dbm database. 1 2 $key = dbmfirstkey($dbm_id); 3 while ($key) { 4 echo "$key = " . dbmfetch($dbm_id, $key) . "\n"; 5 $key = dbmnextkey($dbm_id, $key); 6 } 7 dblist (PHP3 , PHP4 ) describes the dbm-compatible library being used string dblist (void) 273 XVI. Directory functions 274 chdir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) change directory int chdir (string directory) Changes PHP’s current directory to directory. Returns FALSE if unable to change directory, TRUE otherwise. dir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) directory class new dir (string directory) A pseudo-object oriented mechanism for reading a directory. The given directory is opened. Two properties are available once directory has been opened. The handle property can be used with other directory functions such as readdir(), rewinddir() and closedir(). The path property is set to path the directory that was opened. Three methods are available: read, rewind and close. Example 1. Dir() Example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 $d = dir("/etc"); echo "Handle: ".$d->handle."
\n"; echo "Path: ".$d->path."
\n"; while($entry=$d->read()) { echo $entry."
\n"; } $d->close(); closedir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) close directory handle void closedir (int dir_handle) 275 Directories Closes the directory stream indicated by dir_handle. The stream must have previously been opened by opendir(). opendir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) open directory handle int opendir (string path) Returns a directory handle to be used in subsequent closedir(), readdir(), and rewinddir() calls. readdir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) read entry from directory handle string readdir (int dir_handle) Returns the filename of the next file from the directory. The filenames are not returned in any particular order. Example 1. List all files in the current directory 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Note that readdir() will return the . and .. entries. If you don’t want these, simply strip them out: Example 2. List all files in the current directory and strip out . and .. 1 2 rewinddir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) rewind directory handle void rewinddir (int dir_handle) Resets the directory stream indicated by dir_handle to the beginning of the directory. 277 XVII. Dynamic Loading functions 278 dl (PHP3 , PHP4 ) load a PHP extension at runtime int dl (string library) Loads the PHP extension defined in library. See also the extension_dir configuration directive. 279 XVIII. Encryption functions These functions work using mcrypt (ftp://argeas.cs-net.gr/pub/unix/mcrypt/). This is an interface to the mcrypt library, which supports a wide variety of block algorithms such as DES, TripleDES, Blowfish (default), 3-WAY, SAFER-SK64, SAFER-SK128, TWOFISH, TEA, RC2 and GOST in CBC, OFB, CFB and ECB cipher modes. Additionally, it supports RC6 and IDEA which are considered "non-free". To use it, download libmcrypt-x.x.tar.gz from here (ftp://argeas.cs-net.gr/pub/unix/mcrypt/) and follow the included installation instructions. You need to compile PHP with the --with-mcrypt parameter to enable this extension. mcrypt can be used to encrypt and decrypt using the above mentioned ciphers. The four important mcrypt commands (mcrypt_cfb(), mcrypt_cbc(), mcrypt_ecb(), and mcrypt_ofb()) can operate in both modes which are named MCRYPT_ENCRYPT and MCRYPT_DECRYPT, respectively. Example 1. Encrypt an input value with TripleDES in ECB mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 8 This example will give you the encrypted data as a string in $encrypted_data. Mcrypt can operate in four cipher modes (CBC, OFB, CFB, and ECB). We will outline the normal use for each of these modes. For a more complete reference and discussion see Applied Cryptography by Schneier (ISBN 0-471-11709-9). • ECB (electronic codebook) is suitable for random data, such as encrypting other keys. Since data there is short and random, the disadvantages of ECB have a favorable negative effect. CBC (cipher block chaining) is especially suitable for encrypting files where the security is increased over ECB significantly. CFB (cipher feedback) is the best mode for encrypting byte streams where single bytes must be encrypted. OFB (output feedback) is comparable to CFB, but can be used in applications where error propagation cannot be tolerated. • • • PHP does not support encrypting/decrypting bit streams currently. As of now, PHP only supports handling of strings. 280 Dyn.loading For a complete list of supported ciphers, see the defines at the end of mcrypt.h. The general rule is that you can access the cipher from PHP with MCRYPT_ciphername. Here is a short list of ciphers which are currently supported by the mcrypt extension. If a cipher is not listed here, but is listed by mcrypt as supported, you can safely assume that this documentation is outdated. • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • MCRYPT_BLOWFISH MCRYPT_DES MCRYPT_TripleDES MCRYPT_ThreeWAY MCRYPT_GOST MCRYPT_CRYPT MCRYPT_DES_COMPAT MCRYPT_SAFER64 MCRYPT_SAFER128 MCRYPT_CAST128 MCRYPT_TEAN MCRYPT_RC2 MCRYPT_TWOFISH (for older mcrypt 2.x versions) MCRYPT_TWOFISH128 (TWOFISHxxx are available in newer 2.x versions) MCRYPT_TWOFISH192 MCRYPT_TWOFISH256 MCRYPT_RC6 MCRYPT_IDEA You must (in CFB and OFB mode) or can (in CBC mode) supply an initialization vector (IV) to the respective cipher function. The IV must be unique and must be the same when decrypting/encrypting. With data which is stored encrypted, you can take the output of a function of the index under which the data is stored (e.g. the MD5 key of the filename). Alternatively, you can transmit the IV together with the encrypted data (see chapter 9.3 of Applied Cryptography by Schneier (ISBN 0-471-11709-9) for a discussion of this topic). 281 mcrypt_get_cipher_name (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Get the name of the specified cipher string mcrypt_get_cipher_name (int cipher) Mcrypt_get_cipher_name() is used to get the name of the specified cipher. Mcrypt_get_cipher_name() takes the cipher number as an argument and returns the name of the cipher or false, if the cipher does not exist. Example 1. Mcrypt_get_cipher_name() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The above example will produce: 1 2 TripleDES 3 mcrypt_get_block_size (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Get the block size of the specified cipher int mcrypt_get_block_size (int cipher) Mcrypt_get_block_size() is used to get the size of a block of the specified cipher. Mcrypt_get_block_size() takes one argument, the cipher and returns the size in bytes. See also: mcrypt_get_key_size(). 282 mcrypt mcrypt_get_key_size (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Get the key size of the specified cipher int mcrypt_get_key_size (int cipher) Mcrypt_get_key_size() is used to get the size of a key of the specified cipher. mcrypt_get_key_size() takes one argument, the cipher and returns the size in bytes. See also: mcrypt_get_block_size(). mcrypt_create_iv (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Create an initialization vector (IV) from a random source string mcrypt_create_iv (int size, int source) Mcrypt_create_iv() is used to create an IV. mcrypt_create_iv() takes two arguments, size determines the size of the IV, source specifies the source of the IV. The source can be MCRYPT_RAND (system random number generator), MCRYPT_DEV_RANDOM (read data from /dev/random) and MCRYPT_DEV_URANDOM (read data from /dev/urandom). If you use MCRYPT_RAND, make sure to call srand() before to initialize the random number generator. Example 1. Mcrypt_create_iv() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 283 mcrypt mcrypt_cbc (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Encrypt/decrypt data in CBC mode string mcrypt_cbc (int cipher, string key, string data, int mode [, string iv]) Mcrypt_cbc() encrypts or decrypts (depending on mode) the data with cipher and key in CBC cipher mode and returns the resulting string. Cipher is one of the MCRYPT_ciphername constants. Key is the key supplied to the algorithm. It must be kept secret. Data is the data which shall be encrypted/decrypted. Mode is MCRYPT_ENCRYPT or MCRYPT_DECRYPT. IV is the optional initialization vector. See also: mcrypt_cfb(), mcrypt_ecb(), and mcrypt_ofb(). mcrypt_cfb (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Encrypt/decrypt data in CFB mode string mcrypt_cfb (int cipher, string key, string data, int mode, string iv) Mcrypt_cfb() encrypts or decrypts (depending on mode) the data with cipher and key in CFB cipher mode and returns the resulting string. Cipher is one of the MCRYPT_ciphername constants. Key is the key supplied to the algorithm. It must be kept secret. Data is the data which shall be encrypted/decrypted. Mode is MCRYPT_ENCRYPT or MCRYPT_DECRYPT. IV is the initialization vector. See also: mcrypt_cbc(), mcrypt_ecb(), and mcrypt_ofb(). 284 mcrypt mcrypt_ecb (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Encrypt/decrypt data in ECB mode string mcrypt_ecb (int cipher, string key, string data, int mode) Mcrypt_ecb() encrypts or decrypts (depending on mode) the data with cipher and key in ECB cipher mode and returns the resulting string. Cipher is one of the MCRYPT_ciphername constants. Key is the key supplied to the algorithm. It must be kept secret. Data is the data which shall be encrypted/decrypted. Mode is MCRYPT_ENCRYPT or MCRYPT_DECRYPT. See also: mcrypt_cbc(), mcrypt_cfb(), and mcrypt_ofb(). mcrypt_ofb (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Encrypt/decrypt data in OFB mode string mcrypt_ofb (int cipher, string key, string data, int mode, string iv) Mcrypt_ofb() encrypts or decrypts (depending on mode) the data with cipher and key in OFB cipher mode and returns the resulting string. Cipher is one of the MCRYPT_ciphername constants. Key is the key supplied to the algorithm. It must be kept secret. Data is the data which shall be encrypted/decrypted. Mode is MCRYPT_ENCRYPT or MCRYPT_DECRYPT. IV is the initialization vector. See also: mcrypt_cbc(), mcrypt_cfb(), and mcrypt_ecb(). 285 XIX. filePro functions These functions allow read-only access to data stored in filePro databases. filePro is a registered trademark of Fiserv, Inc. You can find more information about filePro at http://www.fileproplus.com/. 286 filepro (PHP3 , PHP4 ) read and verify the map file bool filepro (string directory) This reads and verifies the map file, storing the field count and info. No locking is done, so you should avoid modifying your filePro database while it may be opened in PHP. filepro_fieldname (PHP3 , PHP4 ) gets the name of a field string filepro_fieldname (int field_number) Returns the name of the field corresponding to field_number. filepro_fieldtype (PHP3 , PHP4 ) gets the type of a field string filepro_fieldtype (int field_number) Returns the edit type of the field corresponding to field_number. filepro_fieldwidth (PHP3 , PHP4 ) gets the width of a field int filepro_fieldwidth (int field_number) Returns the width of the field corresponding to field_number. 287 filePro functions filepro_retrieve (PHP3 , PHP4 ) retrieves data from a filePro database string filepro_retrieve (int row_number, int field_number) Returns the data from the specified location in the database. filepro_fieldcount (PHP3 , PHP4 ) find out how many fields are in a filePro database int filepro_fieldcount(void); Returns the number of fields (columns) in the opened filePro database. See also filepro(). filepro_rowcount (PHP3 , PHP4 ) find out how many rows are in a filePro database int filepro_rowcount(void); Returns the number of rows in the opened filePro database. See also filepro(). 288 XX. Filesystem functions 289 basename (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return filename component of path string basename (string path) Given a string containing a path to a file, this function will return the base name of the file. On Windows, both slash (/) and backslash (\) are used as path separator character. In other environments, it is the forward slash (/). Example 1. basename() example 1 2 $path = "/home/httpd/html/index.php3"; 3 $file = basename($path); // $file is set to "index.php3" 4 See also: dirname() chgrp (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Change file group int chgrp (string filename, mixed group) Attempts to change the group of the file filename to group. Only the superuser may change the group of a file arbitrarily; other users may change the group of a file to any group of which that user is a member. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. See also chown() and chmod(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems chmod (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Change file mode 290 Filesystem int chmod (string filename, int mode) Attempts to change the mode of the file specified by filename to that given in mode. Note that mode is not automatically assumed to be an octal value. To ensure the expected operation, you need to prefix mode with a zero (0): 1 2 chmod( "/somedir/somefile", 755 ); 3 chmod( "/somedir/somefile", 0755 ); 4 // decimal; probably incorrect // octal; correct value of mode Returns true on success and false otherwise. See also chown() and chgrp(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems chown (PHP3 , PHP4 ) change file owner int chown (string filename, mixed user) Attempts to change the owner of the file filename to user user. Only the superuser may change the owner of a file. Returns true on success; otherwise returns false. Note: On Windows, does nothing and returns true. See also chown() and chmod(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems clearstatcache (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Clear file stat cache 291 Filesystem void clearstatcache(void); Invoking the stat or lstat system call on most systems is quite expensive. Therefore, the result of the last call to any of the status functions (listed below) is stored for use on the next such call using the same filename. If you wish to force a new status check, for instance if the file is being checked many times and may change or disappear, use this function to clear the results of the last call from memory. This value is only cached for the lifetime of a single request. Affected functions include stat(), lstat(), file_exists(), is_writeable(), is_readable(), is_executable(), is_file(), is_dir(), is_link(), filectime(), fileatime(), filemtime(), fileinode(), filegroup(), fileowner(), filesize(), filetype(), and fileperms(). copy (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Copy file int copy (string source, string dest) Makes a copy of a file. Returns true if the copy succeeded, false otherwise. Example 1. copy() example 1 2 if ( !copy($file, $file.’.bak’) ) { 3 print("failed to copy $file...
\n"); 4 } 5 See also: rename(). delete (unknown) A dummy manual entry void delete (string file) This is a dummy manual entry to satisfy those people who are looking for unlink() or unset() in the wrong place. See also: unlink() to delete files, unset() to delete variables. 292 Filesystem dirname (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return directory name component of path string dirname (string path) Given a string containing a path to a file, this function will return the name of the directory. On Windows, both slash (/) and backslash (\) are used as path separator character. In other environments, it is the forward slash (/). Example 1. dirname() example 1 2 $path = "/etc/passwd"; 3 $file = dirname($path); // $file is set to "/etc" 4 See also: basename() diskfreespace (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Return available space in directory float diskfreespace (string directory) Given a string containing a directory, this function will return the number of bytes available on the corresponding disk. Example 1. diskfreespace() example 1 2 $df = diskfreespace("/"); // $df contains the number of bytes 3 // available on "/" 4 293 Filesystem fclose (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close an open file pointer int fclose (int fp) The file pointed to by fp is closed. Returns true on success and false on failure. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by fopen() or fsockopen(). feof (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Test for end-of-file on a file pointer int feof (int fp) Returns true if the file pointer is at EOF or an error occurs; otherwise returns false. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by fopen(), popen(), or fsockopen(). fgetc (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get character from file pointer string fgetc (int fp) Returns a string containing a single character read from the file pointed to by fp. Returns FALSE on EOF (as does feof()). The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by fopen(), popen(), or fsockopen(). See also fread(), fopen(), popen(), fsockopen(), and fgets(). 294 Filesystem fgetcsv (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Get line from file pointer and parse for CSV fields array fgetcsv (int fp, int length [, string delimiter]) Similar to fgets() except that fgetcsv() parses the line it reads for fields in CSV format and returns an array containing the fields read. The field delimiter is a comma, unless you specifiy another delimiter with the optional third parameter. fp must be a valid file pointer to a file successfully opened by fopen(), popen(), or fsockopen() length must be greater than the longest line to be found in the CSV file (allowing for trailing line-end characters). fgetcsv() returns false on error, including end of file. NB A blank line in a CSV file will be returned as an array comprising just one single null field, and will not be treated as an error. Example 1. Fgetcsv() example - Read and print entire contents of a CSV file 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 $row = 1; $fp = fopen ("test.csv","r"); while ($data = fgetcsv ($fp, 1000, ",")) { $num = count ($data); print "

$num fields in line $row:
"; $row++; for ($c=0; $c<$num; $c++) { print $data[$c] . "
"; } } fclose ($fp); fgets (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get line from file pointer string fgets (int fp, int length) 295 Filesystem Returns a string of up to length - 1 bytes read from the file pointed to by fp. Reading ends when length - 1 bytes have been read, on a newline (which is included in the return value), or on EOF (whichever comes first). If an error occurs, returns false. Common Pitfalls: People used to the ’C’ semantics of fgets should note the difference in how EOF is returned. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by fopen(), popen(), or fsockopen(). A simple example follows: Example 1. Reading a file line by line 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 $fd = fopen ("/tmp/inputfile.txt", "r"); while (!feof($fd)) { $buffer = fgets($fd, 4096); echo $buffer; } fclose ($fd); See also fread(), fopen(), popen(), fgetc(), and fsockopen(). fgetss (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get line from file pointer and strip HTML tags string fgetss (int fp, int length [, string allowable_tags]) Identical to fgets(), except that fgetss attempts to strip any HTML and PHP tags from the text it reads. You can use the optional third parameter to specify tags which should not be stripped. Note: allowable_tags was added in PHP 3.0.13, PHP4B3. See also fgets(), fopen(), fsockopen(), popen(), and strip_tags(). 296 Filesystem file (PHP3 , PHP4 ) read entire file into an array array file (string filename [, int use_include_path]) Identical to readfile(), except that file() returns the file in an array. Each element of the array corresponds to a line in the file, with the newline still attached. You can use the optional second parameter and set it to "1", if you want to search for the file in the include_path, too. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Line $line_num: " . htmlspecialchars( $line ) . "
\n"; 7 } 8 9 // get a web page into a string 10 $fcontents = join( ”, file( ’http://www.php.net’ ) ); 11 ?> 12 See also readfile(), fopen(), and popen(). file_exists (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Check whether a file exists int file_exists (string filename) Returns true if the file specified by filename exists; false otherwise. file_exists() will not work on remote files; the file to be examined must be accessible via the server’s filesystem. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. 297 Filesystem fileatime (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get last access time of file int fileatime (string filename) Returns the time the file was last accessed, or false in case of an error. The time is returned as a Unix timestamp. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. filectime (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get inode change time of file int filectime (string filename) Returns the time the file was last changed, or false in case of an error. The time is returned as a Unix timestamp. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. filegroup (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get file group int filegroup (string filename) Returns the group ID of the owner of the file, or false in case of an error. The group ID is returned in numerical format, use posix_getgrgid() to resolve it to a group name. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. Note: This function does not work on Windows systems 298 Filesystem fileinode (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get file inode int fileinode (string filename) Returns the inode number of the file, or false in case of an error. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. Note: This function does not work on Windows systems filemtime (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get file modification time int filemtime (string filename) Returns the time the file was last modified, or false in case of an error. The time is returned as a Unix timestamp. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. fileowner (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get file owner int fileowner (string filename) Returns the user ID of the owner of the file, or false in case of an error. The user ID is returned in numerical format, use posix_getpwuid() to resolve it to a username. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. Note: This function does not work on Windows systems 299 Filesystem fileperms (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get file permissions int fileperms (string filename) Returns the permissions on the file, or false in case of an error. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. filesize (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get file size int filesize (string filename) Returns the size of the file, or false in case of an error. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. filetype (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get file type string filetype (string filename) Returns the type of the file. Possible values are fifo, char, dir, block, link, file, and unknown. Returns false if an error occurs. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. flock (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Portable advisory file locking bool flock (int fp, int operation [, int wouldblock]) 300 Filesystem PHP supports a portable way of locking complete files in an advisory way (which means all accessing programs have to use the same way of locking or it will not work). flock() operates on fp which must be an open file pointer. operation is one of the following values: To acquire a shared lock (reader), set operation to LOCK_SH (set to 1 prior to PHP 4.0.1). To acquire an exclusive lock (writer), set operation to LOCK_EX (set to 2 prior to PHP 4.0.1). To release a lock (shared or exclusive), set operation to LOCK_UN (set to 3 prior to PHP 4.0.1). If you don’t want flock() to block while locking, add LOCK_NB (4 prior to PHP 4.0.1) to operation. • • • • flock() allows you to perform a simple reader/writer model which can be used on virtually every platform (including most Unices and even Windows). The optional 3rd argument is set to true if the lock would block (EWOULDBLOCK errno condition) flock() returns true on success and false on error (e.g. when a lock could not be acquired). fopen (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open file or URL int fopen (string filename, string mode [, int use_include_path]) If filename begins with "http://" (not case sensitive), an HTTP 1.0 connection is opened to the specified server and a file pointer is returned to the beginning of the text of the response. Does not handle HTTP redirects, so you must include trailing slashes on directories. If filename begins with "ftp://" (not case sensitive), an ftp connection to the specified server is opened and a pointer to the requested file is returned. If the server does not support passive mode ftp, this will fail. You can open files for either reading and writing via ftp (but not both simultaneously). If filename is one of "php://stdin", "php://stdout", or "php://stderr", the corresponding stdio stream will be opened. (This was introduced in PHP 3.0.13; in earlier versions, a filename such as "/dev/stdin" or "/dev/fd/0" must be used to access the stdio streams.) If filename begins with anything else, the file will be opened from the filesystem, and a file pointer to the file opened is returned. If the open fails, the function returns false. mode may be any of the following: 301 Filesystem • • • ’r’ - Open for reading only; place the file pointer at the beginning of the file. ’r+’ - Open for reading and writing; place the file pointer at the beginning of the file. ’w’ - Open for writing only; place the file pointer at the beginning of the file and truncate the file to zero length. If the file does not exist, attempt to create it. ’w+’ - Open for reading and writing; place the file pointer at the beginning of the file and truncate the file to zero length. If the file does not exist, attempt to create it. ’a’ - Open for writing only; place the file pointer at the end of the file. If the file does not exist, attempt to create it. ’a+’ - Open for reading and writing; place the file pointer at the end of the file. If the file does not exist, attempt to create it. • • • As well, mode may contain the letter ’b’. This is useful only on systems which differentiate between binary and text files (i.e., it’s useless on Unix). If not needed, this will be ignored. You can use the optional third parameter and set it to "1", if you want to search for the file in the include_path, too. Example 1. fopen() example 1 2 $fp = fopen("/home/rasmus/file.txt", "r"); 3 $fp = fopen("http://www.php.net/", "r"); 4 $fp = fopen("ftp://user:password@example.com/", "w"); 5 If you are experiencing problems with reading and writing to files and you’re using the server module version of PHP, remember to make sure that the files and directories you’re using are accessible to the server process. On the Windows platform, be careful to escape any backslashes used in the path to the file, or use forward slashes. 1 2 $fp = fopen("c:\\data\\info.txt", "r"); 3 See also fclose(), fsockopen(), and popen(). fpassthru (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Output all remaining data on a file pointer 302 Filesystem int fpassthru (int fp) Reads to EOF on the given file pointer and writes the results to standard output. If an error occurs, fpassthru() returns false. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by fopen(), popen(), or fsockopen(). The file is closed when fpassthru() is done reading it (leaving fp useless). If you just want to dump the contents of a file to stdout you may want to use the readfile(), which saves you the fopen() call. See also readfile(), fopen(), popen(), and fsockopen() fputs (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Write to a file pointer int fputs (int fp, string str [, int length]) fputs() is an alias to fwrite(), and is identical in every way. Note that the length parameter is optional and if not specified the entire string will be written. fread (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Binary-safe file read string fread (int fp, int length) fread() reads up to length bytes from the file pointer referenced by fp. Reading stops when length bytes have been read or EOF is reached, whichever comes first. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 // get contents of a file into a string $filename = "/usr/local/something.txt"; $fd = fopen ($filename, "r"); $contents = fread ($fd, filesize ($filename)); fclose ($fd); See also fwrite(), fopen(), fsockopen(), popen(), fgets(), fgetss(), file(), and fpassthru(). 303 Filesystem fseek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Seek on a file pointer int fseek (int fp, int offset [, int whence]) Sets the file position indicator for the file referenced by fp.The new position, measured in bytes from the beginning of the file, is obtained by adding offset to the position specified by whence, whose values are defined as follows: SEEK_SET - Set position equal to offset bytes. SEEK_CUR - Set position to current location plus offset. SEEK_END - Set position to end-of-file plus offset. If whence is not specified, it is assumed to be SEEK_SET. Upon success, returns 0; otherwise, returns -1. Note that seeking past EOF is not considered an error. May not be used on file pointers returned by fopen() if they use the "http://" or "ftp://" formats. Note: The whence argument was added after PHP 4.0 RC1. See also ftell() and rewind(). ftell (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tell file pointer read/write position int ftell (int fp) Returns the position of the file pointer referenced by fp; i.e., its offset into the file stream. If an error occurs, returns false. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by fopen() or popen(). See also fopen(), popen(), fseek() and rewind(). 304 Filesystem ftruncate (PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Truncate a file to a given length. int ftruncate (int fp, int size) Takes the filepointer, fp, and truncates the file to length, size. This function returns true on success and false on failure. fwrite (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Binary-safe file write int fwrite (int fp, string string [, int length]) fwrite() writes the contents of string to the file stream pointed to by fp. If the length argument is given, writing will stop after length bytes have been written or the end of string is reached, whichever comes first. Note that if the length argument is given, then the magic_quotes_runtime configuration option will be ignored and no slashes will be stripped from string. See also fread(), fopen(), fsockopen(), popen(), and fputs(). set_file_buffer (PHP3 >= 3.0.8) Sets file buffering on the given file pointer int fwrite (int fp, int buffer) set_file_buffer() sets the buffering for write operations on the given filepointer fp to buffer bytes. If buffer is 0 then write operations are unbuffered. The function returns 0 on success, or EOF if the request cannot be honored. Note that the default for any fopen with calling set_file_buffer is 8K. See also fopen(). 305 Filesystem is_dir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tells whether the filename is a directory bool is_dir (string filename) Returns true if the filename exists and is a directory. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. See also is_file() and is_link(). is_executable (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tells whether the filename is executable bool is_executable (string filename) Returns true if the filename exists and is executable. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. See also is_file() and is_link(). is_file (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tells whether the filename is a regular file bool is_file (string filename) Returns true if the filename exists and is a regular file. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. See also is_dir() and is_link(). is_link (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tells whether the filename is a symbolic link 306 Filesystem bool is_link (string filename) Returns true if the filename exists and is a symbolic link. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. See also is_dir() and is_file(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems is_readable (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tells whether the filename is readable bool is_readable (string filename) Returns true if the filename exists and is readable. Keep in mind that PHP may be accessing the file as the user id that the web server runs as (often ’nobody’). Safe mode limitations are not taken into account. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. See also is_writeable(). is_writeable (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tells whether the filename is writeable bool is_writeable (string filename) Returns true if the filename exists and is writeable. The filename argument may be a directory name allowing you to check if a directory is writeable. Keep in mind that PHP may be accessing the file as the user id that the web server runs as (often ’nobody’). Safe mode limitations are not taken into account. The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. See also is_readable(). 307 Filesystem link (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Create a hard link int link (string target, string link) Link() creates a hard link. See also the symlink() to create soft links, and readlink() along with linkinfo(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems linkinfo (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get information about a link int linkinfo (string path) Linkinfo() returns the st_dev field of the UNIX C stat structure returned by the lstat system call. This function is used to verify if a link (pointed to by path) really exists (using the same method as the S_ISLNK macro defined in stat.h). Returns 0 or FALSE in case of error. See also symlink(), link(), and readlink(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems mkdir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Make directory int mkdir (string pathname, int mode) Attempts to create the directory specified by pathname. Note that you probably want to specify the mode as an octal number, which means it should have a leading zero. 308 Filesystem 1 2 mkdir ("/path/to/my/dir", 0700); 3 Returns true on success and false on failure. See also rmdir(). pclose (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close process file pointer int pclose (int fp) Closes a file pointer to a pipe opened by popen(). The file pointer must be valid, and must have been returned by a successful call to popen(). Returns the termination status of the process that was run. See also popen(). popen (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open process file pointer int popen (string command, string mode) Opens a pipe to a process executed by forking the command given by command. Returns a file pointer identical to that returned by fopen(), except that it is unidirectional (may only be used for reading or writing) and must be closed with pclose(). This pointer may be used with fgets(), fgetss(), and fputs(). If an error occurs, returns false. 1 2 $fp = popen ("/bin/ls", "r"); 3 See also pclose(). 309 Filesystem readfile (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Output a file int readfile (string filename [, int use_include_path]) Reads a file and writes it to standard output. Returns the number of bytes read from the file. If an error occurs, false is returned and unless the function was called as @readfile, an error message is printed. If filename begins with "http://" (not case sensitive), an HTTP 1.0 connection is opened to the specified server and the text of the response is written to standard output. Does not handle HTTP redirects, so you must include trailing slashes on directories. If filename begins with "ftp://" (not case sensitive), an ftp connection to the specified server is opened and the requested file is written to standard output. If the server does not support passive mode ftp, this will fail. If filename begins with neither of these strings, the file will be opened from the filesystem and its contents written to standard output. You can use the optional second parameter and set it to "1", if you want to search for the file in the include_path, too. See also fpassthru(), file(), fopen(), include(), require(), and virtual(). readlink (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return the target of a symbolic link string readlink (string path) Readlink() does the same as the readlink C function and returns the contents of the symbolic link path or 0 in case of error. See also symlink(), readlink() and linkinfo(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems 310 Filesystem rename (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Rename a file int rename (string oldname, string newname) Attempts to rename oldname to newname. Returns true on success and false on failure. rewind (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Rewind the position of a file pointer int rewind (int fp) Sets the file position indicator for fp to the beginning of the file stream. If an error occurs, returns 0. The file pointer must be valid, and must point to a file successfully opened by fopen(). See also fseek() and ftell(). rmdir (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Remove directory int rmdir (string dirname) Attempts to remove the directory named by pathname. The directory must be empty, and the relevant permissions must permit. this. If an error occurs, returns 0. See also mkdir(). 311 Filesystem stat (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Give information about a file array stat (string filename) Gathers the statistics of the file named by filename. Returns an array with the statistics of the file with the following elements: 1. device 2. inode 3. inode protection mode 4. number of links 5. user id of owner 6. group id owner 7. device type if inode device * 8. size in bytes 9. time of last access 10. time of last modification 11. time of last change 12. blocksize for filesystem I/O * 13. number of blocks allocated * - only valid on systems supporting the st_blksize type--other systems (i.e. Windows) return -1 The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. lstat (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Give information about a file or symbolic link array lstat (string filename) Gathers the statistics of the file or symbolic link named by filename. This function is identical to the stat() function except that if the filename parameter is a symbolic link, the status of the symbolic link is returned, not the status of the file pointed to by the symbolic link. 312 Filesystem Returns an array with the statistics of the file with the following elements: 1. device 2. inode 3. number of links 4. user id of owner 5. group id owner 6. device type if inode device * 7. size in bytes 8. time of last access 9. time of last modification 10. time of last change 11. blocksize for filesystem I/O * 12. number of blocks allocated * - only valid on systems supporting the st_blksize type--other systems (i.e. Windows) return -1 The results of this function are cached. See clearstatcache() for more details. symlink (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Create a symbolic link int symlink (string target, string link) symlink() creates a symbolic link from the existing target with the specified name link. See also link() to create hard links, and readlink() along with linkinfo(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems tempnam (PHP3 , PHP4 ) create unique file name 313 Filesystem string tempnam (string dir, string prefix) Creates a unique temporary filename in the specified directory. If the directory does not exist, tempnam() may generate a filename in the system’s temporary directory. The behaviour of the tempnam() function is system dependent. On Windows the TMP environment variable will override the dir parameter, on Linux the TMPDIR environment variable has precedence, while SVR4 will always use your dir parameter if the directory it points to exists. Consult your system documentation on the tempnam(3) function if in doubt. Returns the new temporary filename, or the null string on failure. Example 1. Tempnam() example 1 2 $tmpfname = tempnam ("/tmp", "FOO"); 3 touch (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set modification time of file int touch (string filename, int time) Attempts to set the modification time of the file named by filename to the value given by time. If the option time is not given, uses the present time. If the file does not exist, it is created. Returns true on success and false otherwise. Example 1. touch() example 1 2 if ( touch($FileName) ) { 3 print "$FileName modification time has been changed to to- days date and time"; 4 } else { 5 print "Sorry Could Not change modification time of $FileName"; 6 } 7 314 Filesystem umask (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Changes the current umask int umask (int mask) Umask() sets PHP’s umask to mask & 0777 and returns the old umask. When PHP is being used as a server module, the umask is restored when each request is finished. Umask() without arguments simply returns the current umask. unlink (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Delete a file int unlink (string filename) Deletes filename. Similar to the Unix C unlink() function. Returns 0 or FALSE on an error. See also rmdir() for removing directories. Note: This function may not work on Windows systems. 315 XXI. Forms Data Format functions Forms Data Format (FDF) is a format for handling forms within PDF documents. You should read the documentation at http://partners.adobe.com/asn/developer/acrosdk/forms.html for more information on what FDF is and how it is used in general. Note: Currently Adobe only provides a libc5 compatible version for Linux. Tests with glibc2 resulted in a segmentation fault. If somebody is able to make it work, please comment on this page. Note: If you run into problems configuring php with fdftk support, check whether the header file FdfTk.h and the library libFdfTk.so are at the right place. They should be in fdftk-dir/include and fdftk-dir/lib. This will not be the case if you just unpack the FdfTk distribution. The general idea of FDF is similar to HTML forms. The diffence is basically the format how filled in data is transmitted to the server when the submit button is pressed (this is actually the Form Data Format) and the format of the form itself (which is the Portable Document Format, PDF). Processing the FDF data is one of the features provided by the fdf functions. But there is more. One may as well take an existing PDF form and populated the input fields with data without modifying the form itself. In such a case one would create a FDF document (fdf_create()) set the values of each input field (fdf_set_value()) and associate it with a PDF form (fdf_set_file()). Finally it has to be sent to the browser with MimeType application/vnd.fdf. The Acrobat reader plugin of your browser recognizes the MimeType, reads the associated PDF form and fills in the data from the FDF document. The following examples shows just the evaluation of form data. Example 1. Evaluating a FDF document 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 $volume’
"; $date = fdf_get_value($fdf, "date"); echo "The date field has the value ’$date’
"; 316 Filesystem 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 $comment = fdf_get_value($fdf, "comment"); echo "The comment field has the value ’$comment’
"; if(fdf_get_value($fdf, "show_publisher") == "On") { $publisher = fdf_get_value($fdf, "publisher"); echo "The publisher field has the value ’$publisher’
"; } else echo "Publisher shall not be shown.
"; if(fdf_get_value($fdf, "show_preparer") == "On") { $preparer = fdf_get_value($fdf, "preparer"); echo "The preparer field has the value ’$preparer’
"; } else echo "Preparer shall not be shown.
"; fdf_close($fdf); ?> 317 fdf_open (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Open a FDF document int fdf_open (string filename) The fdf_open() function opens a file with form data. This file must contain the data as returned from a PDF form. Currently, the file has to be created ’manually’ by using fopen() and writing the content of HTTP_FDF_DATA with fwrite() into it. A mechanism like for HTML form data where for each input field a variable is created does not exist. Example 1. Accessing the form data 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 See also fdf_close(). fdf_close (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Close an FDF document void fdf_close (int fdf_document) The fdf_close() function closes the FDF document. See also fdf_open(). 318 FDF fdf_create (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Create a new FDF document int fdf_create (void ) The fdf_create() creates a new FDF document. This function is needed if one would like to populate input fields in a PDF document with data. Example 1. Populating a PDF document 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 See also fdf_close(), fdf_save(), fdf_open(). fdf_save (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Save a FDF document int fdf_save (string filename) The fdf_save() function saves a FDF document. The FDF Toolkit provides a way to output the document to stdout if the parameter filename is ’.’. This does not work if PHP is used as an apache module. In such a case one will have to write to a file and use e.g. fpassthru(). to output it. See also fdf_close() and example for fdf_create(). 319 FDF fdf_get_value (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get the value of a field string fdf_get_value (int fdf_document, string fieldname) The fdf_get_value() function returns the value of a field. See also fdf_set_value(). fdf_set_value (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Set the value of a field void fdf_set_value (int fdf_document, string fieldname, string value, int isName) The fdf_set_value() function sets the value of a field. The last parameter determines if the field value is to be converted to a PDF Name (isName = 1) or set to a PDF String (isName = 0). See also fdf_get_value(). fdf_next_field_name (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get the next field name string fdf_next_field_name (int fdf_document, string fieldname) The fdf_next_field_name() function returns the name of the field after the field in fieldname or the field name of the first field if the second paramter is NULL. See also fdf_set_field(), fdf_get_field(). fdf_set_ap (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Set the appearance of a field 320 FDF void fdf_set_ap (int fdf_document, string field_name, int face, string filename, int page_number) The fdf_set_ap() function sets the appearance of a field (i.e. the value of the /AP key). The possible values of face are 1=FDFNormalAP, 2=FDFRolloverAP, 3=FDFDownAP. fdf_set_status (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Set the value of the /STATUS key void fdf_set_status (int fdf_document, string status) The fdf_set_status() sets the value of the /STATUS key. See also fdf_get_status(). fdf_get_status (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get the value of the /STATUS key string fdf_get_status (int fdf_document) The fdf_get_status() returns the value of the /STATUS key. See also fdf_set_status(). fdf_set_file (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Set the value of the /F key void fdf_set_file (int fdf_document, string filename) The fdf_set_file() sets the value of the /F key. The /F key is just a reference to a PDF form which is to be populated with data. In a web environment it is a URL (e.g. http:/testfdf/resultlabel.pdf). See also fdf_get_file() and example for fdf_create(). 321 FDF fdf_get_file (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get the value of the /F key string fdf_get_file (int fdf_document) The fdf_set_file() returns the value of the /F key. See also fdf_set_file(). 322 XXII. FTP functions FTP stands for File Transfer Protocol. The following constants are defined when using the FTP module: FTP_ASCII, and FTP_BINARY. 323 ftp_connect (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Opens up an FTP connection int ftp_connect (string host [, int port]) Returns a FTP stream on success, false on error. ftp_connect() opens up a FTP connection to the specified host. The port parameter specifies an alternate port to connect to. If it is omitted or zero, then the default FTP port, 21, will be used. ftp_login (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Logs in an FTP connection int ftp_login (int ftp_stream, string username, string password) Returns true on success, false on error. Logs in the given FTP stream. ftp_pwd (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the current directory name int ftp_pwd (int ftp_stream) Returns the current directory, or false on error. ftp_cdup (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Changes to the parent directory int ftp_cdup (int ftp_stream) 324 FTP Returns true on success, false on error. Changes to the parent directory. ftp_chdir (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Changes directories on a FTP server int ftp_chdir (int ftp_stream, string directory) Returns true on success, false on error. Changes to the specified directory. ftp_mkdir (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Creates a directory string ftp_mkdir (int ftp_stream, string directory) Returns the newly created directory name on success, false on error. Creates the specified directory. ftp_rmdir (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Removes a directory int ftp_rmdir (int ftp_stream, string directory) Returns true on success, false on error. Removes the specified directory. 325 FTP ftp_nlist (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns a list of files in the given directory. int ftp_nlist (int ftp_stream, string directory) Returns an array of filenames on success, false on error. ftp_rawlist (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns a detailed list of files in the given directory. int ftp_rawlist (int ftp_stream, string directory) ftp_rawlist() executes the FTP LIST command, and returns the result as an array. Each array element corresponds to one line of text. The output is not parsed in any way. The system type identifier returned by ftp_systype() can be used to determine how the results should be interpreted. ftp_systype (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the system type identifier of the remote FTP server. int ftp_systype (int ftp_stream) Returns the remote system type, or false on error. ftp_pasv (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Turns passive mode on or off. int ftp_pasv (int ftp_stream, int pasv) Returns true on success, false on error. 326 FTP ftp_pasv() turns on passive mode if the pasv parameter is true (it turns off passive mode if pasv is false.) In passive mode, data connections are initiated by the client, rather than by the server. ftp_get (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Downloads a file from the FTP server. int ftp_get (int ftp_stream, string local_file, string remote_file, int mode) Returns true on success, false on error. ftp_get() retrieves remote_file from the FTP server, and saves it to local_file locally. The transfer mode specified must be either FTP_ASCII or FTP_BINARY. ftp_fget (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Downloads a file from the FTP server and saves to an open file. int ftp_fget (int ftp_stream, int fp, string remote_file, int mode) Returns true on success, false on error. ftp_fget() retrieves remote_file from the FTP server, and writes it to the given file pointer, fp. The transfer mode specified must be either FTP_ASCII or FTP_BINARY. ftp_put (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Uploads a file to the FTP server. int ftp_put (int ftp_stream, string remote_file, string local_file, int mode) Returns true on success, false on error. ftp_put() stores local_file on the FTP server, as remote_file. The transfer mode specified must be either FTP_ASCII or FTP_BINARY. 327 FTP ftp_fput (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Uploads from an open file to the FTP server. int ftp_fput (int ftp_stream, string remote_file, int fp, int mode) Returns true on success, false on error. ftp_fput() uploads the data from the file pointer fp until end of file. The results are stored in remote_file on the FTP server. The transfer mode specified must be either FTP_ASCII or FTP_BINARY. ftp_size (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the size of the given file. int ftp_size (int ftp_stream, string remote_file) Returns the file size on success, or -1 on error. ftp_size() returns the size of a file. If an error occurs, of if the file does not exist, -1 is returned. Not all servers support this feature. ftp_mdtm (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the last modified time of the given file. int ftp_mdtm (int ftp_stream, string remote_file) Returns a UNIX timestamp on success, or -1 on error. ftp_mdtm() checks the last-modified time for a file, and returns it as a UNIX timestamp. If an error occurs, or the file does not exist, -1 is returned. Note that not all servers support this feature. ftp_rename (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Renames a file on the ftp server. 328 FTP int ftp_rename (int ftp_stream, string from, string to) Returns true on success, false on error. ftp_rename() renames the file specified by from to the new name to ftp_delete (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Deletes a file on the ftp server. int ftp_delete (int ftp_stream, string path) Returns true on success, false on error. ftp_delete() deletes the file specified by path from the FTP server. ftp_site (PHP3 >= 3.0.15, PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Sends a SITE command to the server. int ftp_site (int ftp_stream, string cmd) Returns true on success, false on error. ftp_site() sends the command specified by cmd to the FTP server. SITE commands are not standardized, and vary from server to server. They are useful for handling such things as file permissions and group membership. ftp_quit (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Closes an FTP connection int ftp_quit (int ftp_stream) ftp_connect() closes ftp_stream. 329 XXIII. GNU Gettext 330 bindtextdomain (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Sets the path for a domain string bindtextdomain (string domain, string directory) The bindtextdomain() function sets the path for a domain. dcgettext (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Overrides the domain for a single lookup string dcgettext (string domain, string message, int category) This function allows you to override the current domain for a single message lookup. It also allows you to specify a category. dgettext (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Override the current domain string dgettext (string domain, string message) The dgettext() function allows you to override the current domain for a single message lookup. gettext (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Lookup a message in the current domain string gettext (string message) This function returns a translated string if one is found in the translation table, or the submitted message if not found. You may use an underscore character as an alias to this function. 331 gettext Example 1. Gettext()-check 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 textdomain (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Sets the default domain int textdomain ([string library]) This function sets the domain to search within when calls are made to gettext(), usually the named after an application. The previous default domain is returned. Call it with no parameters to get the current setting without changing it. 332 XXIV. Hash functions These functions are intended to work with mhash (http://sasweb.de/mhash/). This is an interface to the mhash library. mhash supports a wide variety of hash algorithms such as MD5, SHA1, GOST, and many others. To use it, download the mhash distribution from its web site (http://sasweb.de/mhash/) and follow the included installation instructions. You need to compile PHP with the --with-mhash parameter to enable this extension. mhash can be used to create checksums, message digests, and more. Example 1. Compute the SHA1 key and print it out as hex 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 This will produce: 1 2 The hash is d3b85d710d8f6e4e5efd4d5e67d041f9cecedafe 3 For a complete list of supported hashes, refer to the documentation of mhash. The general rule is that you can access the hash algorithm from PHP with MHASH_HASHNAME. For example, to access HAVAL you use the PHP constant MHASH_HAVAL. Here is a list of hashes which are currently supported by mhash. If a hash is not listed here, but is listed by mhash as supported, you can safely assume that this documentation is outdated. • • • • • • • MHASH_MD5 MHASH_SHA1 MHASH_HAVAL MHASH_RIPEMD160 MHASH_RIPEMD128 MHASH_SNEFRU MHASH_TIGER 333 gettext • • • MHASH_GOST MHASH_CRC32 MHASH_CRC32B 334 mhash_get_hash_name (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 ) Get the name of the specified hash string mhash_get_hash_name (int hash) mhash_get_hash_name() is used to get the name of the specified hash. mhash_get_hash_name() takes the hash id as an argument and returns the name of the hash or false, if the hash does not exist. Example 1. mhash_get_hash_name example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 The above example will print out: 1 2 MD5 3 mhash_get_block_size (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 ) Get the block size of the specified hash int mhash_get_block_size (int hash) mhash_get_block_size() is used to get the size of a block of the specified hash. mhash_get_block_size() takes one argument, the hash and returns the size in bytes or false, if the hash does not exist. 335 mhash mhash_count (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 ) Get the highest available hash id int mhash_count (void) mhash_count() returns the highest available hash id. Hashes are numbered from 0 to this hash id. Example 1. Traversing all hashes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 mhash (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 ) Compute hash string mhash (int hash, string data) mhash() applies a hash function specified by hash to the data and returns the resulting hash (also called digest). 336 XXV. HTTP functions These functions let you manipulate the output sent back to the remote browser right down to the HTTP protocol level. 337 header (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Send a raw HTTP header int header (string string) The Header() function is used at the top of an HTML file to send raw HTTP header strings. See the HTTP 1.1 Specification (http://www.w3.org/Protocols/rfc2616/rfc2616) for more information on raw http headers. Note: Remember that the Header() function must be called before any actual output is sent either by normal HTML tags or from PHP. It is a very common error to read code with include() or with auto_prepend and have spaces or empty lines in this code that force output before header() is called. There are two special-case header calls. The first is the "Location" header. Not only does it send this header back to the browser, it also returns a REDIRECT status code to Apache. From a script writer’s point of view this should not be important, but for people who understand Apache internals it is important to understand. 1 2 header ("Location: http://www.php.net"); /* Redirect browser 3 to PHP web site */ 4 exit; /* Make sure that code below does 5 not get executed when we redirect. */ 6 The second special-case is any header that starts with the string, "HTTP/" (case is not significant). For example, if you have your ErrorDocument 404 Apache directive pointed to a PHP script, it would be a good idea to make sure that your PHP script is actually generating a 404. The first thing you do in your script should then be: 1 2 header ("http/1.0 404 Not Found"); 3 PHP scripts often generate dynamic HTML that must not be cached by the client browser or any proxy caches between the server and the client browser. Many proxies and clients can be forced to disable caching with 1 2 header ("Ex- pires: Mon, 26 Jul 1997 05:00:00 GMT"); // Date in the past 3 header ("Last-Modified: " . gmdate("D, d M Y H:i:s") . " GMT"); 4 // always modified 338 HTTP 5 header ("Cache-Control: no-cache, must-revalidate"); 6 header ("Pragma: no-cache"); 7 // HTTP/1.1 // HTTP/1.0 setcookie (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Send a cookie int setcookie (string name, string value, int expire, string path, string domain, int secure) setcookie() defines a cookie to be sent along with the rest of the header information. Cookies must be sent before any other headers are sent (this is a restriction of cookies, not PHP). This requires you to place calls to this function before any or tags. All the arguments except the name argument are optional. If only the name argument is present, the cookie by that name will be deleted from the remote client. You may also replace any argument with an empty string ("") in order to skip that argument. The expire and secure arguments are integers and cannot be skipped with an empty string. Use a zero (0) instead. The expire argument is a regular Unix time integer as returned by the time() or mktime() functions. The secure indicates that the cookie should only be transmitted over a secure HTTPS connection. Common Pitfalls: Cookies will not become visible until the next loading of a page that the cookie should be visible for. In PHP3, multiple calls to setcookie() in the same script will be performed in reverse order. If you are trying to delete one cookie before inserting another you should put the insert before the delete. In PHP4, multiple calls to setcookie() are performed in the order called. Some examples follow: Example 1. setcookie() examples 1 2 setcookie ("TestCookie", "Test Value"); 3 setcookie ("TestCookie", $value,time()+3600); /* expire in 1 hour */ 4 setcookie ("TestCookie", $value,time()+3600, "/~ras- mus/", ".utoronto.ca", 1); 5 Note that the value portion of the cookie will automatically be urlencoded when you send the cookie, and when it is received, it is automatically decoded and assigned to a variable by the same name as 339 HTTP the cookie name. To see the contents of our test cookie in a script, simply use one of the following examples: 1 2 echo $TestCookie; 3 echo $HTTP_COOKIE_VARS["TestCookie"]; 4 You may also set array cookies by using array notation in the cookie name. This has the effect of setting as many cookies as you have array elements, but when the cookie is received by your script, the values are all placed in an array with the cookie’s name: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 setcookie ("cookie[three]", "cookiethree"); setcookie ("cookie[two]", "cookietwo"); setcookie ("cookie[one]", "cookieone"); if (isset ($cookie)) { while (list ($name, $value) = each ($cookie)) { echo "$name == $value
\n"; } } For more information on cookies, see Netscape’s cookie specification at http://www.netscape.com/newsref/std/cookie_spec.html. Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 with Service Pack 1 applied does not correctly deal with cookies that have their path parameter set. Netscape Communicator 4.05 and Microsoft Internet Explorer 3.x appear to handle cookies incorrectly when the path and time are not set. 340 XXVI. Hyperwave functions Introduction Hyperwave has been developed at IICM (http://iicm.edu/) in Graz. It started with the name Hyper-G and changed to Hyperwave when it was commercialised (If I remember properly it was in 1996). Hyperwave is not free software. The current version, 4.1, is available at www.hyperwave.com (http://www.hyperwave.com/). A time limited version can be ordered for free (30 days). Hyperwave is an information system similar to a database (HIS, Hyperwave Information Server). Its focus is the storage and management of documents. A document can be any possible piece of data that may as well be stored in file. Each document is accompanied by its object record. The object record contains meta data for the document. The meta data is a list of attributes which can be extended by the user. Certain attributes are always set by the Hyperwave server, other may be modified by the user. An attribute is a name/value pair of the form name=value. The complete object record contains as many of those pairs as the user likes. The name of an attribute does not have to be unique, e.g. a title may appear several times within an object record. This makes sense if you want to specify a title in several languages. In such a case there is a convention, that each title value is preceded by the two letter language abbreviation followed by a colon, e.g. ’en:Title in English’ or ’ge:Titel in deutsch’. Other attributes like a description or keywords are potential candidates. You may also replace the language abbreviation by any other string as long as it separated by colon from the rest of the attribute value. Each object record has native a string representation with each name/value pair separated by a newline. The Hyperwave extension also knows a second representation which is an associated array with the attribute name being the key. Multilingual attribute values itself form another associated array with the key being the language abbreviation. Actually any multiple attribute forms an associated array with the string left to the colon in the attribute value being the key. (This is not fully implemented. Only the attributes Title, Description and Keyword are treated properly yet.) Besides the documents, all hyper links contained in a document are stored as object records as well. Hyper links which are in a document will be removed from it and stored as individual objects, when the document is inserted into the database. The object record of the link contains information about where it starts and where it ends. In order to gain the original document you will have to retrieve the plain document without the links and the list of links and reinsert them (The functions hw_pipedocument() and hw_gettext() do this for you. The advantage of separating links from the document is obvious. Once a document to which a link is pointing to changes its name, the link can easily be modified accordingly. The document containing the link is not affected at all. You may even add a link to a document without modifying the document itself. Saying that hw_pipedocument() and hw_gettext() do the link insertion automatically is not as simple as it sounds. Inserting links implies a certain hierarchy of the documents. On a web server this is given by the file system, but Hyperwave has its own hierarchy and names do not reflect the position of an object in that hierarchy. Therefore creation of links first of all requires a mapping from 341 HTTP the Hyperwave hierarchy and namespace into a web hierarchy respective web namespace. The fundamental difference between Hyperwave and the web is the clear distinction between names and hierarchy in Hyperwave. The name does not contain any information about the objects position in the hierarchy. In the web the name also contains the information on where the object is located in the hierarchy. This leads to two possibles ways of mapping. Either the Hyperwave hierarchy and name of the Hyperwave object is reflected in the URL or the name only. To make things simple the second approach is used. Hyperwave object with name ’my_object’ is mapped to ’http://host/my_object’ disregarding where it resides in the Hyperwave hierarchy. An object with name ’parent/my_object’ could be the child of ’my_object’ in the Hyperwave hierarchy, though in a web namespace it appears to be just the opposite and the user might get confused. This can only be prevented by selecting reasonable object names. Having made this decision a second problem arises. How do you involve PHP? The URL http://host/my_object will not call any PHP script unless you tell your web server to rewrite it to e.g. ’http://host/php3_script/my_object’ and the script ’php3_script’ evaluates the $PATH_INFO variable and retrieves the object with name ’my_object’ from the Hyperwave server. Their is just one little drawback which can be fixed easily. Rewriting any URL would not allow any access to other document on the web server. A PHP script for searching in the Hyperwave server would be impossible. Therefore you will need at least a second rewriting rule to exclude certain URLS like all e.g. starting with http://host/Hyperwave. This is basically sharing of a namespace by the web and Hyperwave server. Based on the above mechanism links are insert into documents. It gets more complicated if PHP is not run as a server module or CGI script but as a standalone application e.g. to dump the content of the Hyperwave server on a CD-ROM. In such a case it makes sense to retain the Hyperwave hierarchy and map in onto the file system. This conflicts with the object names if they reflect its own hierarchy (e.g. by choosing names including ’/’). Therefore ’/’ has to be replaced by another character, e.g. ’_’. to be continued. The network protocol to communicate with the Hyperwave server is called HG-CSP (http://www.hyperwave.com/7.17-hg-prot) (Hyper-G Client/Server Protocol). It is based on messages to initiate certain actions, e.g. get object record. In early versions of the Hyperwave Server two native clients (Harmony, Amadeus) were provided for communication with the server. Those two disappeared when Hyperwave was commercialised. As a replacement a so called wavemaster was provided. The wavemaster is like a protocol converter from HTTP to HG-CSP. The idea is to do all the administration of the database and visualisation of documents by a web interface. The wavemaster implements a set of placeholders for certain actions to customise the interface. This set of placeholders is called the PLACE Language. PLACE lacks a lot of features of a real programming language and any extension to it only enlarges the list of placeholders. This has led to the use of JavaScript which IMO does not make life easier. Adding Hyperwave support to PHP should fill in the gap of a missing programming language for interface customisation. It implements all the messages as defined by the HG-CSP but also provides more powerful commands to e.g. retrieve complete documents. Hyperwave has its own terminology to name certain pieces of information. This has widely been taken over and extended. Almost all functions operate on one of the following data types. 342 HTTP • object ID: An unique integer value for each object in the Hyperwave server. It is also one of the attributes of the object record (ObjectID). Object ids are often used as an input parameter to specify an object. object record: A string with attribute-value pairs of the form attribute=value. The pairs are separated by a carriage return from each other. An object record can easily be converted into an object array with hw_object2array(). Several functions return object records. The names of those functions end with obj. object array: An associated array with all attributes of an object. The key is the attribute name. If an attribute occurs more than once in an object record it will result in another indexed or associated array. Attributes which are language depended (like the title, keyword, description) will form an associated array with the key set to the language abbreviation. All other multiple attributes will form an indexed array. PHP functions never return object arrays. hw_document: This is a complete new data type which holds the actual document, e.g. HTML, PDF etc. It is somewhat optimised for HTML documents but may be used for any format. • • • Several functions which return an array of object records do also return an associated array with statistical information about them. The array is the last element of the object record array. The statistical array contains the following entries: Hidden Number of object records with attribute PresentationHints set to Hidden. CollectionHead Number of object records with attribute PresentationHints set to CollectionHead. FullCollectionHead Number of object records with attribute PresentationHints set to FullCollectionHead. CollectionHeadNr Index in array of object records with attribute PresentationHints set to CollectionHead. FullCollectionHeadNr Index in array of object records with attribute PresentationHints set to FullCollectionHead. Total Total: Number of object records. Integration with Apache The Hyperwave extension is best used when PHP is compiled as an Apache module. In such a case 343 HTTP the underlying Hyperwave server can be hidden from users almost completely if Apache uses its rewriting engine. The following instructions will explain this. Since PHP with Hyperwave support built into Apache is intended to replace the native Hyperwave solution based on Wavemaster I will assume that the Apache server will only serve as a Hyperwave web interface. This is not necessary but it simplifies the configuration. The concept is quite simple. First of all you need a PHP script which evaluates the PATH_INFO variable and treats its value as the name of a Hyperwave object. Let’s call this script ’Hyperwave’. The URL http://your.hostname/Hyperwave/name_of_object would than return the Hyperwave object with the name ’name_of_object’. Depending on the type of the object the script has to react accordingly. If it is a collection, it will probably return a list of children. If it is a document it will return the mime type and the content. A slight improvement can be achieved if the Apache rewriting engine is used. From the users point of view it would be more straight forward if the URL http://your.hostname/name_of_object would return the object. The rewriting rule is quite easy: 1 2 RewriteRule ^/(.*) /usr/local/apache/htdocs/HyperWave/$1 [L] 3 Now every URL relates to an object in the Hyperwave server. This causes a simple to solve problem. There is no way to execute a different script, e.g. for searching, than the ’Hyperwave’ script. This can be fixed with another rewriting rule like the following: 1 2 RewriteRule ^/hw/(.*) /usr/local/apache/htdocs/hw/$1 [L] 3 This will reserve the directory /usr/local/apache/htdocs/hw for additional scripts and other files. Just make sure this rule is evaluated before the one above. There is just a little drawback: all Hyperwave objects whose name starts with ’hw/’ will be shadowed. So, make sure you don’t use such names. If you need more directories, e.g. for images just add more rules or place them all in one directory. Finally, don’t forget to turn on the rewriting engine with 1 2 RewriteEngine on 3 My experiences have shown that you will need the following scripts: • • • • to return the object itself to allow searching to identify yourself to set your profile 344 HTTP • one for each additional function like to show the object attributes, to show information about users, to show the status of the server, etc. Todo There are still some things todo: • • • The hw_InsertDocument has to be split into hw_InsertObject() and hw_PutDocument(). The names of several functions are not fixed, yet. Most functions require the current connection as its first parameter. This leads to a lot of typing, which is quite often not necessary if there is just one open connection. A default connection will improve this. Conversion form object record into object array needs to handle any multiple attribute. • 345 hw_Array2Objrec (unknown) convert attributes from object array to object record strin hw_array2objrec (array object_array) Converts an object_array into an object record. Multiple attributes like ’Title’ in different languages are treated properly. See also hw_objrec2array(). hw_Children (unknown) object ids of children array hw_children (int connection, int objectID) Returns an array of object ids. Each id belongs to a child of the collection with ID objectID. The array contains all children both documents and collections. hw_ChildrenObj (unknown) object records of children array hw_childrenobj (int connection, int objectID) Returns an array of object records. Each object record belongs to a child of the collection with ID objectID. The array contains all children both documents and collections. hw_Close (unknown) closes the Hyperwave connection int hw_close (int connection) 346 Hyperwave Returns false if connection is not a valid connection index, otherwise true. Closes down the connection to a Hyperwave server with the given connection index. hw_Connect (unknown) opens a connection int hw_connect (string host, int port, string username, string password) Opens a connection to a Hyperwave server and returns a connection index on success, or false if the connection could not be made. Each of the arguments should be a quoted string, except for the port number. The username and password arguments are optional and can be left out. In such a case no identification with the server will be done. It is similar to identify as user anonymous. This function returns a connection index that is needed by other Hyperwave functions. You can have multiple connections open at once. Keep in mind, that the password is not encrypted. See also hw_pConnect(). hw_Cp (unknown) copies objects int hw_cp (int connection, array object_id_array, int destination id) Copies the objects with object ids as specified in the second parameter to the collection with the id destination id. The value return is the number of copied objects. See also hw_mv(). hw_Deleteobject (unknown) deletes object int hw_deleteobject (int connection, int object_to_delete) 347 Hyperwave Deletes the object with the given object id in the second parameter. It will delete all instances of the object. Returns TRUE if no error occurs otherwise FALSE. See also hw_mv(). hw_DocByAnchor (unknown) object id object belonging to anchor int hw_docbyanchor (int connection, int anchorID) Returns an th object id of the document to which anchorID belongs. hw_DocByAnchorObj (unknown) object record object belonging to anchor string hw_docbyanchorobj (int connection, int anchorID) Returns an th object record of the document to which anchorID belongs. hw_DocumentAttributes (unknown) object record of hw_document string hw_documentattributes (int hw_document) Returns the object record of the document. See also hw_DocumentBodyTag(), hw_DocumentSize(). 348 Hyperwave hw_DocumentBodyTag (unknown) body tag of hw_document string hw_documentbodytag (int hw_document) Returns the BODY tag of the document. If the document is an HTML document the BODY tag should be printed before the document. See also hw_DocumentAttributes(), hw_DocumentSize(). hw_DocumentContent (unknown) returns content of hw_document string hw_documentcontent (int hw_document) Returns the content of the document. If the document is an HTML document the content is everything after the BODY tag. Information from the HEAD and BODY tag is in the stored in the object record. See also hw_DocumentAttributes(), hw_DocumentSize(), hw_DocumentSetContent(). hw_DocumentSetContent (unknown) sets/replaces content of hw_document string hw_documentsetcontent (int hw_document, string content) Sets or replaces the content of the document. If the document is an HTML document the content is everything after the BODY tag. Information from the HEAD and BODY tag is in the stored in the object record. If you provide this information in the content of the document too, the Hyperwave server will change the object record accordingly when the document is inserted. Probably not a very good idea. If this functions fails the document will retain its old content. See also hw_DocumentAttributes(), hw_DocumentSize(), hw_DocumentContent(). 349 Hyperwave hw_DocumentSize (unknown) size of hw_document int hw_documentsize (int hw_document) Returns the size in bytes of the document. See also hw_DocumentBodyTag(), hw_DocumentAttributes(). hw_ErrorMsg (unknown) returns error message string hw_errormsg (int connection) Returns a string containing the last error message or ’No Error’. If false is returned, this function failed. The message relates to the last command. hw_EditText (unknown) retrieve text document int hw_edittext (int connection, int hw_document) Uploads the text document to the server. The object record of the document may not be modified while the document is edited. This function will only works for pure text documents. It will not open a special data connection and therefore blocks the control connection during the transfer. See also hw_PipeDocument(), hw_FreeDocument(), hw_DocumentBodyTag(), hw_DocumentSize(), hw_OutputDocument(), hw_GetText(). hw_Error (unknown) error number 350 Hyperwave int hw_error (int connection) Returns the last error number. If the return value is 0 no error has occurred. The error relates to the last command. hw_Free_Document (unknown) frees hw_document int hw_free_document (int hw_document) Frees the memory occupied by the Hyperwave document. hw_GetParents (unknown) object ids of parents array hw_getparentsobj (int connection, int objectID) Returns an indexed array of object ids. Each object id belongs to a parent of the object with ID objectID. hw_GetParentsObj (unknown) object records of parents array hw_getparentsobj (int connection, int objectID) Returns an indexed array of object records plus an associated array with statistical information about the object records. The associated array is the last entry of the returned array. Each object record belongs to a parent of the object with ID objectID. 351 Hyperwave hw_GetChildColl (unknown) object ids of child collections array hw_getchildcoll (int connection, int objectID) Returns an array of object ids. Each object ID belongs to a child collection of the collection with ID objectID. The function will not return child documents. See also hw_GetChildren(), hw_GetChildDocColl(). hw_GetChildCollObj (unknown) object records of child collections array hw_getchildcollobj (int connection, int objectID) Returns an array of object records. Each object records belongs to a child collection of the collection with ID objectID. The function will not return child documents. See also hw_ChildrenObj(), hw_GetChildDocCollObj(). hw_GetRemote (unknown) Gets a remote document int hw_getremote (int connection, int objectID) Returns a remote document. Remote documents in Hyperwave notation are documents retrieved from an external source. Common remote documents are for example external web pages or queries in a database. In order to be able to access external sources throught remote documents Hyperwave introduces the HGI (Hyperwave Gateway Interface) which is similar to the CGI. Currently, only ftp, http-servers and some databases can be accessed by the HGI. Calling hw_GetRemote() returns the document from the external source. If you want to use this function you should be very familiar with HGIs. You should also consider to use PHP instead of Hyperwave to access external sources. Adding database support by a Hyperwave gateway should be more difficult than doing it in PHP. See also hw_GetRemoteChildren(). 352 Hyperwave hw_GetRemoteChildren (unknown) Gets children of remote document int hw_getremotechildren (int connection, string object record) Returns the children of a remote document. Children of a remote document are remote documents itself. This makes sense if a database query has to be narrowed and is explained in Hyperwave Programmers’ Guide. If the number of children is 1 the function will return the document itself formated by the Hyperwave Gateway Interface (HGI). If the number of children is greater than 1 it will return an array of object record with each maybe the input value for another call to hw_GetRemoteChildren(). Those object records are virtual and do not exist in the Hyperwave server, therefore they do not have a valid object ID. How exactely such an object record looks like is up to the HGI. If you want to use this function you should be very familiar with HGIs. You should also consider to use PHP instead of Hyperwave to access external sources. Adding database support by a Hyperwave gateway should be more difficult than doing it in PHP. See also hw_GetRemote(). hw_GetSrcByDestObj (unknown) Returns anchors pointing at object array hw_getsrcbydestobj (int connection, int objectID) Returns the object records of all anchors pointing to the object with ID objectID. The object can either be a document or an anchor of type destination. See also hw_GetAnchors(). hw_GetObject (unknown) object record array hw_getobject (int connection, [int|array] objectID, string query) Returns the object record for the object with ID objectID if the second parameter is an integer. If the second parameter is an array of integer the function will return an array of object records. In such 353 Hyperwave a case the last parameter is also evaluated which is a query string. The query string has the following syntax: ::= "(" ")" | "!" | /* NOT */ "||" | /* OR */ "&&" | /* AND */ ::= /* any attribute name (Title, Author, DocumentType ...) */ ::= "=" | /* equal */ "<" | /* less than (string compare) */ ">" | /* greater than (string compare) */ "~" /* regular expression matching */ The query allows to further select certain objects from the list of given objects. Unlike the other query functions, this query may use not indexed attributes. How many object records are returned depends on the query and if access to the object is allowed. See also hw_GetAndLock(), hw_GetObjectByQuery(). hw_GetAndLock (unknown) return bject record and lock object string hw_getandlock (int connection, int objectID) Returns the object record for the object with ID objectID. It will also lock the object, so other users cannot access it until it is unlocked. See also hw_Unlock(), hw_GetObject(). hw_GetText (unknown) retrieve text document int hw_gettext (int connection, int objectID [, mixed rootID/prefix]) 354 Hyperwave Returns the document with object ID objectID. If the document has anchors which can be inserted, they will be inserted already. The optional parameter rootID/prefix can be a string or an integer. If it is an integer it determines how links are inserted into the document. The default is 0 and will result in links that are constructed from the name of the link’s destination object. This is useful for web applications. If a link points to an object with name ’internet_movie’ the HTML link will be . The actual location of the source and destination object in the document hierachy is disregarded. You will have to set up your web browser, to rewrite that URL to for example ’/my_script.php3/internet_movie’. ’my_script.php3’ will have to evaluate $PATH_INFO and retrieve the document. All links will have the prefix ’/my_script.php3/’. If you do not want this you can set the optional parameter rootID/prefix to any prefix which is used instead. Is this case it has to be a string. If rootID/prefix is an integer and unequal to 0 the link is constructed from all the names starting at the object with the id rootID/prefix separated by a slash relative to the current object. If for example the above document ’internet_movie’ is located at ’a-b-c-internet_movie’ with ’-’ being the seperator between hierachy levels on the Hyperwave server and the source document is located at ’a-b-d-source’ the resulting HTML link would be: . This is useful if you want to download the whole server content onto disk and map the document hierachy onto the file system. This function will only work for pure text documents. It will not open a special data connection and therefore blocks the control connection during the transfer. See also hw_PipeDocument(), hw_FreeDocument(), hw_DocumentBodyTag(), hw_DocumentSize(), hw_OutputDocument(). hw_GetObjectByQuery (unknown) search object array hw_getobjectbyquery (int connection, string query, int max_hits) Searches for objects on the whole server and returns an array of object ids. The maximum number of matches is limited to max_hits. If max_hits is set to -1 the maximum number of matches is unlimited. The query will only work with indexed attributes. See also hw_GetObjectByQueryObj(). 355 Hyperwave hw_GetObjectByQueryObj (unknown) search object array hw_getobjectbyqueryobj (int connection, string query, int max_hits) Searches for objects on the whole server and returns an array of object records. The maximum number of matches is limited to max_hits. If max_hits is set to -1 the maximum number of matches is unlimited. The query will only work with indexed attributes. See also hw_GetObjectByQuery(). hw_GetObjectByQueryColl (unknown) search object in collection array hw_getobjectbyquerycoll (int connection, int objectID, string query, int max_hits) Searches for objects in collection with ID objectID and returns an array of object ids. The maximum number of matches is limited to max_hits. If max_hits is set to -1 the maximum number of matches is unlimited. The query will only work with indexed attributes. See also hw_GetObjectByQueryCollObj(). hw_GetObjectByQueryCollObj (unknown) search object in collection array hw_getobjectbyquerycollobj (int connection, int objectID, string query, int max_hits) Searches for objects in collection with ID objectID and returns an array of object records. The maximum number of matches is limited to max_hits. If max_hits is set to -1 the maximum number of matches is unlimited. 356 Hyperwave The query will only work with indexed attributes. See also hw_GetObjectByQueryColl(). hw_GetChildDocColl (unknown) object ids of child documents of collection array hw_getchilddoccoll (int connection, int objectID) Returns array of object ids for child documents of a collection. See also hw_GetChildren(), hw_GetChildColl(). hw_GetChildDocCollObj (unknown) object records of child documents of collection array hw_getchilddoccollobj (int connection, int objectID) Returns an array of object records for child documents of a collection. See also hw_ChildrenObj(), hw_GetChildCollObj(). hw_GetAnchors (unknown) object ids of anchors of document array hw_getanchors (int connection, int objectID) Returns an array of object ids with anchors of the document with object ID objectID. hw_GetAnchorsObj (unknown) object records of anchors of document 357 Hyperwave array hw_getanchorsobj (int connection, int objectID) Returns an array of object records with anchors of the document with object ID objectID. hw_Mv (unknown) moves objects int hw_mv (int connection, array object id array, int source id, int destination id) Moves the objects with object ids as specified in the second parameter from the collection with id source id to the collection with the id destination id. If the destination id is 0 the objects will be unlinked from the source collection. If this is the last instance of that object it will be deleted. If you want to delete all instances at once, use hw_deleteobject(). The value return is the number of moved objects. See also hw_cp(), hw_deleteobject(). hw_Identify (unknown) identifies as user int hw_identify (string username, string password) Identifies as user with username and password. Identification is only valid for the current session. I do not thing this function will be needed very often. In most cases it will be easier to identify with the opening of the connection. See also hw_Connect(). hw_InCollections (unknown) check if object ids in collections array hw_incollections (int connection, array object_id_array, array collection_id_array, int return_collections) 358 Hyperwave Checks whether a set of objects (documents or collections) specified by the object_id_array is part of the collections listed in collection_id_array. When the fourth parameter return_collections is 0, the subset of object ids that is part of the collections (i.e., the documents or collections that are children of one or more collections of collection ids or their subcollections, recursively) is returned as an array. When the fourth parameter is 1, however, the set of collections that have one or more objects of this subset as children are returned as an array. This option allows a client to, e.g., highlight the part of the collection hierarchy that contains the matches of a previous query, in a graphical overview. hw_Info (unknown) info about connection string hw_info (int connection) Returns information about the current connection. The returned string has the following format: , , , , , hw_InsColl (unknown) insert collection int hw_inscoll (int connection, int objectID, array object_array) Inserts a new collection with attributes as in object_array into collection with object ID objectID. hw_InsDoc (unknown) insert document int hw_insdoc (int connection, int parentID, string object_record, string text) 359 Hyperwave Inserts a new document with attributes as in object_record into collection with object ID parentID. This function inserts either an object record only or an object record and a pure ascii text in text if text is given. If you want to insert a general document of any kind use hw_insertdocument() instead. See also hw_InsertDocument(), hw_InsColl(). hw_InsertDocument (unknown) upload any document int hw_insertdocument (int connection, int parent_id, int hw_document) Uploads a document into the collection with parent_id. The document has to be created before with hw_NewDocument(). Make sure that the object record of the new document contains at least the attributes: Type, DocumentType, Title and Name. Possibly you also want to set the MimeType. The functions returns the object id of the new document or false. See also hw_PipeDocument(). hw_InsertObject (unknown) inserts an object record int hw_insertobject (int connection, string object rec, string parameter) Inserts an object into the server. The object can be any valid hyperwave object. See the HG-CSP documentation for a detailed information on how the parameters have to be. Note: If you want to insert an Anchor, the attribute Position has always been set either to a start/end value or to ’invisible’. Invisible positions are needed if the annotation has no correspondig link in the annotation text. See also hw_PipeDocument(), hw_InsertDocument(), hw_InsDoc(), hw_InsColl(). hw_mapid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Maps global id on virtual local id 360 Hyperwave int hw_mapid (int connection, int server id, int object id) Maps a global object id on any hyperwave server, even those you did not connect to with hw_connect(), onto a virtual object id. This virtual object id can then be used as any other object id, e.g. to obtain the object record with hw_getobject(). The server id is the first part of the global object id (GOid) of the object which is actually the IP number as an integer. Note: In order to use this function you will have to set the F_DISTRIBUTED flag, which can currently only be set at compile time in hg_comm.c. It is not set by default. Read the comment at the beginning of hg_comm.c hw_Modifyobject (unknown) modifies object record int hw_modifyobject (int connection, int object_to_change, array remove, array add, int mode) This command allows to remove, add, or modify individual attributes of an object record. The object is specified by the Object ID object_to_change. The first array remove is a list of attributes to remove. The second array add is a list of attributes to add. In order to modify an attribute one will have to remove the old one and add a new one. hw_modifyobject() will always remove the attributes before it adds attributes unless the value of the attribute to remove is not a string or array. The last parameter determines if the modification is performed recursively. 1 means recurive modification. If some of the objects cannot be modified they will be skiped without notice. hw_error() may not indicate an error though some of the objects could not be modified. The keys of both arrays are the attributes name. The value of each array element can either be an array, a string or anything else. If it is an array each attribute value is constructed by the key of each element plus a colon and the value of each element. If it is a string it is taken as the attribute value. An empty string will result in a complete removal of that attribute. If the value is neither a string nor an array but something else, e.g. an integer, no operation at all will be performed on the attribute. This is neccessary if you want to to add a completely new attribute not just a new value for an existing attribute. If the remove array contained an empty string for that attribute, the attribute would be tried to be removed which would fail since it doesn’t exist. The following addition of a new value for that attribute would also fail. Setting the value for that attribute to e.g. 0 would not even try to remove it and the addition will work. If you would like to change the attribute ’Name’ with the current value ’books’ into ’articles’ you will have to create two arrays and call hw_modifyobject(). 361 Hyperwave Example 1. modifying an attribute 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 // $connect is an existing connection to the Hyperwave server // $objid is the ID of the object to modify $remarr = array("Name" => "books"); $addarr = array("Name" => "articles"); $hw_modifyobject($connect, $objid, $remarr, $addarr); In order to delete/add a name=value pair from/to the object record just pass the remove/add array and set the last/third parameter to an empty array. If the attribute is the first one with that name to add, set attribute value in the remove array to an integer. Example 2. adding a completely new attribute 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 // $connect is an existing connection to the Hyperwave server // $objid is the ID of the object to modify $remarr = array("Name" => 0); $addarr = array("Name" => "articles"); $hw_modifyobject($connect, $objid, $remarr, $addarr); Note: Multilingual attributes, e.g. ’Title’, can be modified in two ways. Either by providing the attributes value in its native form ’language’:’title’ or by providing an array with elements for each language as described above. The above example would than be: Example 3. modifying Title attribute 1 2 3 4 5 $remarr = array("Title" => "en:Books"); $addarr = array("Title" => "en:Articles"); $hw_modifyobject($connect, $objid, $remarr, $addarr); or Example 4. modifying Title attribute 1 2 3 $remarr = array("Title" => array("en" => "Books")); $addarr = array("Title" => array("en" => "Articles", "ge"=>"Artikel")); 4 $hw_modifyobject($connect, $objid, $remarr, $addarr); 362 Hyperwave 5 This removes the english title ’Books’ and adds the english title ’Articles’ and the german title ’Artikel’. Example 5. removing attribute 1 2 3 4 5 $remarr = array("Title" => ""); $addarr = array("Title" => "en:Articles"); $hw_modifyobject($connect, $objid, $remarr, $addarr); Note: This will remove all attributes with the name ’Title’ and adds a new ’Title’ attribute. This comes in handy if you want to remove attributes recursively. Note: If you need to delete all attributes with a certain name you will have to pass an empty string as the attribute value. Note: Only the attributes ’Title’, ’Description’ and ’Keyword’ will properly handle the language prefix. If those attributes don’t carry a language prefix, the prefix ’xx’ will be assigned. Note: The ’Name’ attribute is somewhat special. In some cases it cannot be complete removed. You will get an error message ’Change of base attribute’ (not clear when this happens). Therefore you will always have to add a new Name first and than remove the old one. Note: You may not suround this function by calls to hw_getandlock() and hw_unlock(). hw_modifyobject() does this internally. Returns TRUE if no error occurs otherwise FALSE. hw_New_Document (unknown) create new document int hw_new_document (string object_record, string document_data, int document_size) 363 Hyperwave Returns a new Hyperwave document with document data set to document_data and object record set to object_record. The length of the document_data has to passed in document_sizeThis function does not insert the document into the Hyperwave server. See also hw_FreeDocument(), hw_DocumentSize(), hw_DocumentBodyTag(), hw_OutputDocument(), hw_InsertDocument(). hw_Objrec2Array (unknown) convert attributes from object record to object array array hw_objrec2array (string object_record) Converts an object_record into an object array. The keys of the resulting array are the attributes names. Multiple attributes like ’Title’ in different languages form its own array. The keys of this array are the left part to the colon of the attribute value. Currently only the attributes ’Title’, ’Description’ and ’Keyword’ are treated properly. Other multiple attributes form an index array. Currently only the attribute ’Group’ is handled properly. See also hw_array2objrec(). hw_OutputDocument (unknown) prints hw_document int hw_outputdocument (int hw_document) Prints the document without the BODY tag. hw_pConnect (unknown) make a persistent database connection int hw_pconnect (string host, int port, string username, string password) Returns a connection index on success, or false if the connection could not be made. Opens a persistent connection to a Hyperwave server. Each of the arguments should be a quoted string, except 364 Hyperwave for the port number. The username and password arguments are optional and can be left out. In such a case no identification with the server will be done. It is similar to identify as user anonymous. This function returns a connection index that is needed by other Hyperwave functions. You can have multiple persistent connections open at once. See also hw_Connect(). hw_PipeDocument (unknown) retrieve any document int hw_pipedocument (int connection, int objectID) Returns the Hyperwave document with object ID objectID. If the document has anchors which can be inserted, they will have been inserted already. The document will be transfered via a special data connection which does not block the control connection. See also hw_GetText() for more on link insertion, hw_FreeDocument(), hw_DocumentSize(), hw_DocumentBodyTag(), hw_OutputDocument(). hw_Root (unknown) root object id int hw_root () Returns the object ID of the hyperroot collection. Currently this is always 0. The child collection of the hyperroot is the root collection of the connected server. hw_Unlock (unknown) unlock object int hw_unlock (int connection, int objectID) Unlocks a document, so other users regain access. 365 Hyperwave See also hw_GetAndLock(). hw_Who (unknown) List of currently logged in users int hw_who (int connection) Returns an array of users currently logged into the Hyperwave server. Each entry in this array is an array itself containing the elements id, name, system, onSinceDate, onSinceTime, TotalTime and self. ’self’ is 1 if this entry belongs to the user who initianted the request. hw_Username (unknown) name of currently logged in user string hw_getusername (int connection) Returns the username of the connection. 366 XXVII. Image functions You can use the image functions in PHP to get the size of JPEG, GIF, PNG, and SWF images, and if you have the GD library (available at http://www.boutell.com/gd/) you will also be able to create and manipulate images. 367 GetImageSize (unknown) Get the size of a GIF, JPEG, PNG or SWF image array getimagesize (string filename [, array imageinfo]) The GetImageSize() function will determine the size of any GIF, JPG, PNG or SWF image file and return the dimensions along with the file type and a height/width text string to be used inside a normal HTML IMG tag. Returns an array with 4 elements. Index 0 contains the width of the image in pixels. Index 1 contains the height. Index 2 a flag indicating the type of the image. 1 = GIF, 2 = JPG, 3 = PNG, 4 = SWF. Index 3 is a text string with the correct "height=xxx width=xxx" string that can be used directly in an IMG tag. Example 1. GetImageSize 1 2 3 4 The optional imageinfo parameter allows you to extract some extended information from the image file. Currently this will return the diffrent JPG APP markers in an associative Array. Some Programs use these APP markers to embedd text information in images. A very common one in to embed IPTC http://www.xe.net/iptc/ information in the APP13 marker. You can use the iptcparse() function to parse the binary APP13 marker into something readable. Example 2. GetImageSize returning IPTC 1 2 9 Note: This function does not require the GD image library. 368 Graphics ImageArc (unknown) Draw a partial ellipse int imagearc (int im, int cx, int cy, int w, int h, int s, int e, int col) ImageArc() draws a partial ellipse centered at cx, cy (top left is 0, 0) in the image represented by im. W and h specifies the ellipse’s width and height respectively while the start and end points are specified in degrees indicated by the s and e. arguments. ImageChar (unknown) Draw a character horizontally int imagechar (int im, int font, int x, int y, string c, int col) ImageChar() draws the first character of c in the image identified by id with its upper-left at x,y (top left is 0, 0) with the color col. If font is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, a built-in font is used (with higher numbers corresponding to larger fonts). See also imageloadfont(). ImageCharUp (unknown) Draw a character vertically int imagecharup (int im, int font, int x, int y, string c, int col) ImageCharUp() draws the character c vertically in the image identified by im at coordinates x, y (top left is 0, 0) with the color col. If font is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, a built-in font is used. See also imageloadfont(). ImageColorAllocate (unknown) Allocate a color for an image 369 Graphics int imagecolorallocate (int im, int red, int green, int blue) ImageColorAllocate() returns a color identifier representing the color composed of the given RGB components. The im argument is the return from the imagecreate() function. ImageColorAllocate() must be called to create each color that is to be used in the image represented by im. 1 2 $white = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 255, 255, 255); 3 $black = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 0, 0, 0); 4 ImageColorDeAllocate (unknown) De-allocate a color for an image int imagecolordeallocate (int im, int index) The ImageColorDeAllocate() function de-allocates a color previously allocated with the ImageColorAllocate() function. 1 2 $white = ImageColorAllocate($im, 255, 255, 255); 3 ImageColorDeAllocate($im, $white); 4 ImageColorAt (unknown) Get the index of the color of a pixel int imagecolorat (int im, int x, int y) Returns the index of the color of the pixel at the specified location in the image. See also imagecolorset() and imagecolorsforindex(). 370 Graphics ImageColorClosest (unknown) Get the index of the closest color to the specified color int imagecolorclosest (int im, int red, int green, int blue) Returns the index of the color in the palette of the image which is "closest" to the specified RGB value. The "distance" between the desired color and each color in the palette is calculated as if the RGB values represented points in three-dimensional space. See also imagecolorexact(). ImageColorExact (unknown) Get the index of the specified color int imagecolorexact (int im, int red, int green, int blue) Returns the index of the specified color in the palette of the image. If the color does not exist in the image’s palette, -1 is returned. See also imagecolorclosest(). ImageColorResolve (unknown) Get the index of the specified color or its closest possible alternative int imagecolorresolve (int im, int red, int green, int blue) This function is guaranteed to return a color index for a requested color, either the exact color or the closest possible alternative. See also imagecolorclosest(). 371 Graphics ImageGammaCorrect (unknown) Apply a gamma correction to a GD image int imagegammacorrect (int im, double inputgamma, double outputgamma) The ImageGammaCorrect() function applies gamma correction to a gd image stream (im) given an input gamma, the parameter inputgamma and an output gamma, the parameter outputgamma. ImageColorSet (unknown) Set the color for the specified palette index bool imagecolorset (int im, int index, int red, int green, int blue) This sets the specified index in the palette to the specified color. This is useful for creating flood-fill-like effects in paletted images without the overhead of performing the actual flood-fill. See also imagecolorat(). ImageColorsForIndex (unknown) Get the colors for an index array imagecolorsforindex (int im, int index) This returns an associative array with red, green, and blue keys that contain the appropriate values for the specified color index. See also imagecolorat() and imagecolorexact(). ImageColorsTotal (unknown) Find out the number of colors in an image’s palette int imagecolorstotal (int im) 372 Graphics This returns the number of colors in the specified image’s palette. See also imagecolorat() and imagecolorsforindex(). ImageColorTransparent (unknown) Define a color as transparent int imagecolortransparent (int im [, int col]) ImageColorTransparent() sets the transparent color in the im image to col. Im is the image identifier returned by ImageCreate() and col is a color identifier returned by ImageColorAllocate(). The identifier of the new (or current, if none is specified) transparent color is returned. ImageCopy (unknown) Copy part of an image int ImageCopy (int dst_im, int src_im, int dst_x, int dst_y, int src_x, int src_y, int src_w, int src_h) Copy a part of src_im onto dst_im starting at the x,y coordinates src_x, src_y with a width of src_w and a height of src_h. The portion defined will be copied onto the x,y coordinates, dst_x and dst_y. ImageCopyResized (unknown) Copy and resize part of an image int imagecopyresized (int dst_im, int src_im, int dstX, int dstY, int srcX, int srcY, int dstW , int dstH, int srcW , int srcH) ImageCopyResized() copies a rectangular portion of one image to another image. Dst_im is the destination image, src_im is the source image identifier. If the source and destination coordinates and width and heights differ, appropriate stretching or shrinking of the image fragment will be 373 Graphics performed. The coordinates refer to the upper left corner. This function can be used to copy regions within the same image (if dst_im is the same as src_im) but if the regions overlap the results will be unpredictable. ImageCreate (unknown) Create a new image int imagecreate (int x_size, int y_size) ImageCreate() returns an image identifier representing a blank image of size x_size by y_size. ImageCreateFromGif (unknown) Create a new image from file or URL int imagecreatefromgif (string filename) ImageCreateFromGif() returns an image identifier representing the image obtained from the given filename. ImageCreateFromGif() returns an empty string on failure. It also outputs an error message, which unfortunately displays as a broken link in a browser. To ease debugging the following example will produce an error GIF: Example 1. Example to handle an error during creation (courtesy vic@zymsys.com) 1 2 function LoadGif ($imgname) { 3 $im = @imagecreatefromgif ($imgname); /* Attempt to open */ 4 if ($im == "") { /* See if it failed */ 5 $im = ImageCreate (150, 30); /* Create a blank image */ 6 $bgc = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 255, 255, 255); 7 $tc = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 0, 0, 0); 8 ImageFilledRectangle ($im, 0, 0, 150, 30, $bgc); 9 /* Output an errmsg */ 10 ImageString($im, 1, 5, 5, "Error loading $imgname", $tc); 11 } 12 return $im; 13 } 374 Graphics 14 Note: Since all GIF support was removed from the GD library in version 1.6, this function is not available if you are using that version of the GD library. ImageCreateFromJPEG (unknown) Create a new image from file or URL int imagecreatefromjpeg (string filename) ImageCreateFromJPEG() returns an image identifier representing the image obtained from the given filename. ImagecreateFromJPEG() returns an empty string on failure. It also outputs an error message, which unfortunately displays as a broken link in a browser. To ease debugging the following example will produce an error JPEG: Example 1. Example to handle an error during creation (courtesy vic@zymsys.com ) 1 2 function LoadJpeg ($imgname) { 3 $im = @imagecreatefromjpeg ($imgname); /* Attempt to open */ 4 if ($im == "") { /* See if it failed */ 5 $im = ImageCreate (150, 30); /* Create a blank image */ 6 $bgc = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 255, 255, 255); 7 $tc = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 0, 0, 0); 8 ImageFilledRectangle ($im, 0, 0, 150, 30, $bgc); 9 /* Output an errmsg */ 10 ImageString ($im, 1, 5, 5, "Error loading $imgname", $tc); 11 } 12 return $im; 13 } 14 ImageCreateFromPNG (unknown) Create a new image from file or URL 375 Graphics int imagecreatefrompng (string filename) ImageCreateFromPNG() returns an image identifier representing the image obtained from the given filename. ImageCreateFromPNG() returns an empty string on failure. It also outputs an error message, which unfortunately displays as a broken link in a browser. To ease debugging the following example will produce an error PNG: Example 1. Example to handle an error during creation (courtesy vic@zymsys.com) 1 2 function LoadPNG ($imgname) { 3 $im = @imagecreatefrompng ($imgname); /* Attempt to open */ 4 if ($im == "") { /* See if it failed */ 5 $im = ImageCreate (150, 30); /* Create a blank image */ 6 $bgc = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 255, 255, 255); 7 $tc = ImageColorAllocate ($im, 0, 0, 0); 8 ImageFilledRectangle ($im, 0, 0, 150, 30, $bgc); 9 /* Output an errmsg */ 10 ImageString ($im, 1, 5, 5, "Error loading $imgname", $tc); 11 } 12 return $im; 13 } 14 ImageDashedLine (unknown) Draw a dashed line int imagedashedline (int im, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int col) ImageDashedLine() draws a dashed line from x1, y1 to x2, y2 (top left is 0, 0) in image im of color col. See also ImageLine(). ImageDestroy (unknown) Destroy an image 376 Graphics int imagedestroy (int im) ImageDestroy() frees any memory associated with image im. Im is the image identifier returned by the ImageCreate() function. ImageFill (unknown) Flood fill int imagefill (int im, int x, int y, int col) ImageFill() performs a flood fill starting at coordinate x, y (top left is 0, 0) with color col in the image im. ImageFilledPolygon (unknown) Draw a filled polygon int imagefilledpolygon (int im, array points, int num_points, int col) ImageFilledPolygon() creates a filled polygon in image im. Points is a PHP array containing the polygon’s vertices, ie. points[0] = x0, points[1] = y0, points[2] = x1, points[3] = y1, etc. Num_points is the total number of vertices. ImageFilledRectangle (unknown) Draw a filled rectangle int imagefilledrectangle (int im, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int col) ImageFilledRectangle() creates a filled rectangle of color col() in image im starting at upper left coordinates x1, y1 and ending at bottom right coordinates x2, y2. 0, 0 is the top left corner of the image. 377 Graphics ImageFillToBorder (unknown) Flood fill to specific color int imagefilltoborder (int im, int x, int y, int border, int col) ImageFillToBorder() performs a flood fill whose border color is defined by border. The starting point for the fill is x, y (top left is 0, 0) and the region is filled with color col. ImageFontHeight (unknown) Get font height int imagefontheight (int font) Returns the pixel height of a character in the specified font. See also ImageFontWidth() and ImageLoadFont(). ImageFontWidth (unknown) Get font width int imagefontwidth (int font) Returns the pixel width of a character in font. See also ImageFontHeight() and ImageLoadFont(). ImageGIF (unknown) Output image to browser or file int imagegif (int im [, string filename]) 378 Graphics ImageGIF() creates the GIF file in filename from the image im. The im argument is the return from the imagecreate() function. The image format will be GIF87a unless the image has been made transparent with ImageColorTransparent(), in which case the image format will be GIF89a. The filename argument is optional, and if left off, the raw image stream will be output directly. By sending an image/gif content-type using header(), you can create a PHP script that outputs GIF images directly. Note: Since all GIF support was removed from the GD library in version 1.6, this function is not available if you are using that version of the GD library. ImagePng (unknown) Output a PNG image to either the browser or a file int imagepng (int im [, string filename]) The ImagePng() outputs a GD image stream (im) in PNG format to standard output (usually the browser) or, if a filename is given by the filename it outputs the image to the file. 1 2 $im = ImageCreateFromPng("test.png"); 3 ImagePng($im); 4 ImageJPEG (unknown) Output image to browser or file int imagejpeg (int im [, string filename [, int quality]]) ImageJPEG() creates the JPEG file in filename from the image im. The im argument is the return from the ImageCreate() function. The filename argument is optional, and if left off, the raw image stream will be output directly. To skip the filename argument in order to provide a quality argument just use an empty string (”). By sending an image/jpg content-type using header(), you can create a PHP script that outputs JPEG images directly. 379 Graphics Note: JPEG support is only available in PHP if PHP was compiled against GD-1.8 or later. ImageInterlace (unknown) Enable or disable interlace int imageinterlace (int im [, int interlace]) ImageInterlace() turns the interlace bit on or off. If interlace is 1 the im image will be interlaced, and if interlace is 0 the interlace bit is turned off. This functions returns whether the interlace bit is set for the image. ImageLine (unknown) Draw a line int imageline (int im, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int col) ImageLine() draws a line from x1, y1 to x2, y2 (top left is 0, 0) in image im of color col. See also ImageCreate() and ImageColorAllocate(). ImageLoadFont (unknown) Load a new font int imageloadfont (string file) ImageLoadFont() loads a user-defined bitmap font and returns an identifier for the font (that is always greater than 5, so it will not conflict with the built-in fonts). The font file format is currently binary and architecture dependent. This means you should generate the font files on the same type of CPU as the machine you are running PHP on. 380 Graphics Table 1. Font file format byte position byte 0-3 byte 4-7 byte 8-11 byte 12-15 byte 16C data type int int int int char description number of characters in the font value of first character in the font (often 32 for space) pixel width of each character pixel height of each character array with character data, one byte per pixel in each character, for a total of (nchars*width*height) bytes. See also ImageFontWidth() and ImageFontHeight(). ImagePolygon (unknown) Draw a polygon int imagepolygon (int im, array points, int num_points, int col) ImagePolygon() creates a polygon in image id. Points is a PHP array containing the polygon’s vertices, ie. points[0] = x0, points[1] = y0, points[2] = x1, points[3] = y1, etc. Num_points is the total number of vertices. See also imagecreate(). ImagePSBBox (unknown) Give the bounding box of a text rectangle using PostScript Type1 fonts array imagepsbbox (string text, int font, int size [, int space [, int tightness [, float angle]]]) Size is expressed in pixels. Space allows you to change the default value of a space in a font. This amount is added to the normal value and can also be negative. 381 Graphics Tightness allows you to control the amount of white space between characters. This amount is added to the normal character width and can also be negative. Angle is in degrees. Parameters space and tightness are expressed in character space units, where 1 unit is 1/1000th of an em-square. Parameters space, tightness, and angle are optional. The bounding box is calculated using information available from character metrics, and unfortunately tends to differ slightly from the results achieved by actually rasterizing the text. If the angle is 0 degrees, you can expect the text to need 1 pixel more to every direction. This function returns an array containing the following elements: 0 1 2 3 lower left x-coordinate lower left y-coordinate upper right x-coordinate upper right y-coordinate See also imagepstext(). ImagePSEncodeFont (unknown) Change the character encoding vector of a font int imagepsencodefont (string encodingfile) Loads a character encoding vector from from a file and changes the fonts encoding vector to it. As a PostScript fonts default vector lacks most of the character positions above 127, you’ll definitely want to change this if you use an other language than english. The exact format of this file is described in T1libs documentation. T1lib comes with two ready-to-use files, IsoLatin1.enc and IsoLatin2.enc. If you find yourself using this function all the time, a much better way to define the encoding is to set ps.default_encoding in the configuration file to point to the right encoding file and all fonts you load will automatically have the right encoding. ImagePSFreeFont (unknown) Free memory used by a PostScript Type 1 font 382 Graphics void imagepsfreefont (int fontindex) See also ImagePSLoadFont(). ImagePSLoadFont (unknown) Load a PostScript Type 1 font from file int imagepsloadfont (string filename) In the case everything went right, a valid font index will be returned and can be used for further purposes. Otherwise the function returns false and prints a message describing what went wrong. See also ImagePSFreeFont(). ImagePsExtendFont (unknown) Extend or condense a font bool imagepsextendfont (int font_index, double extend) Extend or condense a font (font_index), if the value of the extend parameter is less than one you will be condensing the font. ImagePsSlantFont (unknown) Slant a font bool imagepsslantfont (int font_index, double slant) Slant a font given by the font_index parameter with a slant of the value of the slant parameter. 383 Graphics ImagePSText (unknown) To draw a text string over an image using PostScript Type1 fonts array imagepstext (int image, string text, int font, int size, int foreground, int background, int x, int y [, int space [, int tightness [, float angle [, int antialias_steps]]]]) Size is expressed in pixels. Foreground is the color in which the text will be painted. Background is the color to which the text will try to fade in with antialiasing. No pixels with the color background are actually painted, so the background image does not need to be of solid color. The coordinates given by x, y will define the origin (or reference point) of the first character (roughly the lower-left corner of the character). This is different from the ImageString(), where x, y define the upper-right corner of the first character. Refer to PostScipt documentation about fonts and their measuring system if you have trouble understanding how this works. Space allows you to change the default value of a space in a font. This amount is added to the normal value and can also be negative. Tightness allows you to control the amount of white space between characters. This amount is added to the normal character width and can also be negative. Angle is in degrees. Antialias_steps allows you to control the number of colours used for antialiasing text. Allowed values are 4 and 16. The higher value is recommended for text sizes lower than 20, where the effect in text quality is quite visible. With bigger sizes, use 4. It’s less computationally intensive. Parameters space and tightness are expressed in character space units, where 1 unit is 1/1000th of an em-square. Parameters space, tightness, angle and antialias are optional. This function returns an array containing the following elements: 0 1 2 3 lower left x-coordinate lower left y-coordinate upper right x-coordinate upper right y-coordinate See also imagepsbbox(). 384 Graphics ImageRectangle (unknown) Draw a rectangle int imagerectangle (int im, int x1, int y1, int x2, int y2, int col) ImageRectangle() creates a rectangle of color col in image im starting at upper left coordinate x1, y1 and ending at bottom right coordinate x2, y2. 0, 0 is the top left corner of the image. ImageSetPixel (unknown) Set a single pixel int imagesetpixel (int im, int x, int y, int col) ImageSetPixel() draws a pixel at x, y (top left is 0, 0) in image im of color col. See also ImageCreate() and ImageColorAllocate(). ImageString (unknown) Draw a string horizontally int imagestring (int im, int font, int x, int y, string s, int col) ImageString() draws the string s in the image identified by im at coordinates x, y (top left is 0, 0) in color col. If font is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, a built-in font is used. See also ImageLoadFont(). ImageStringUp (unknown) Draw a string vertically int imagestringup (int im, int font, int x, int y, string s, int col) 385 Graphics ImageStringUp() draws the string s vertically in the image identified by im at coordinates x, y (top left is 0, 0) in color col. If font is 1, 2, 3, 4 or 5, a built-in font is used. See also ImageLoadFont(). ImageSX (unknown) Get image width int imagesx (int im) ImageSX() returns the width of the image identified by im. See also ImageCreate() and ImageSY(). ImageSY (unknown) Get image height int imagesy (int im) ImageSY() returns the height of the image identified by im. See also ImageCreate() and ImageSX(). ImageTTFBBox (unknown) Give the bounding box of a text using TypeType fonts array imagettfbbox (int size, int angle, string fontfile, string text) This function calculates and returns the bounding box in pixels for a TrueType text. text The string to be measured. 386 Graphics size The font size. fontfile The name of the TrueType font file. (Can also be an URL.) angle Angle in degrees in which text will be measured. ImageTTFBBox() returns an array with 8 elements representing four points making the bounding box of the text: 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 lower left corner, X position lower left corner, Y position lower right corner, X position lower right corner, Y position upper right corner, X position upper right corner, Y position upper left corner, X position upper left corner, Y position The points are relative to the text regardless of the angle, so "upper left" means in the top left-hand corner seeing the text horizontallty. This function requires both the GD library and the FreeType library. See also ImageTTFText(). ImageTTFText (unknown) Write text to the image using TrueType fonts array imagettftext (int im, int size, int angle, int x, int y, int col, string fontfile, string text) ImageTTFText() draws the string text in the image identified by im, starting at coordinates x, y (top left is 0, 0), at an angle of angle in color col, using the TrueType font file identified by fontfile. The coordinates given by x, y will define the basepoint of the first character (roughly the lower-left corner of the character). This is different from the ImageString(), where x, y define the upper-right 387 Graphics corner of the first character. Angle is in degrees, with 0 degrees being left-to-right reading text (3 o’clock direction), and higher values representing a counter-clockwise rotation. (i.e., a value of 90 would result in bottom-to-top reading text). Fontfile is the path to the TrueType font you wish to use. Text is the text string which may include UTF-8 character sequences (of the form: {) to access characters in a font beyond the first 255. Col is the color index. Using the negative of a color index has the effect of turning off antialiasing. ImageTTFText() returns an array with 8 elements representing four points making the bounding box of the text. The order of the points is upper left, upper right, lower right, lower left. The points are relative to the text regardless of the angle, so "upper left" means in the top left-hand corner when you see the text horizontallty. This example script will produce a black GIF 400x30 pixels, with the words "Testing..." in white in the font Arial. Example 1. ImageTTFText 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 This function requires both the GD library and the FreeType (http://www.freetype.org/) library. See also ImageTTFBBox(). 388 XXVIII. IMAP, POP3 and NNTP functions To get these functions to work, you have to compile PHP with --with-imap. That requires the c-client library to be installed. Grab the latest version from ftp://ftp.cac.washington.edu/imap/ and compile it. Then copy c-client/c-client.a to /usr/local/lib/libc-client.a or some other directory on your link path and copy c-client/rfc822.h, mail.h and linkage.h to /usr/local/include or some other directory in your include path. Note that these functions are not limited to the IMAP protocol, despite their name. The underlying c-client library also supports NNTP, POP3 and local mailbox access methods. This document can’t go into detail on all the topics touched by the provided functions. Further information is provided by the documentation of the c-client library source (docs/internal.txt). and the following RFC documents: • • • RFC821 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc821.html): Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). RFC822 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc822.html): Standard for ARPA internet text messages. RFC2060 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2060.html): Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP) Version 4rev1. RFC1939 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1939.html): Post Office Protocol Version 3 (POP3). RFC977 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc977.html): Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP). RFC2076 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2076.html): Common Internet Message Headers. RFC2045 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html) , RFC2046 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2046.html) , RFC2047 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2047.html) , RFC2048 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2048.html) & RFC2049 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2049.html): Multipurpose Internet Mail Extensions (MIME). • • • • A detailed overview is also available in the book Programming Internet Email (http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/progintemail/noframes.html) by David Wood. 389 imap_append (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Append a string message to a specified mailbox int imap_append (int imap_stream, string mbox, string message [, string flags]) Returns true on sucess, false on error. imap_append() appends a string message to the specified mailbox mbox. If the optional flags is specified, writes the flags to that mailbox also. When talking to the Cyrus IMAP server, you must use "\r\n" as your end-of-line terminator instead of "\n" or the operation will fail. Example 1. imap_append() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 $stream = imap_open("{your.imap.host}INBOX.Drafts","username", "password"); $check = imap_check($stream); print "Msg Count before append: ". $check->Nmsgs."\n"; imap_append($stream,"{your.imap.host}INBOX.Drafts" ,"From: me@my.host\r\n" ."To: you@your.host\r\n" ."Subject: test\r\n" ."\r\n" ."this is a test message, please ignore\r\n" ); $check = imap_check($stream); print "Msg Count after append : ". $check->Nmsgs."\n"; imap_close($stream); imap_base64 (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Decode BASE64 encoded text string imap_base64 (string text) 390 IMAP imap_base64() function decodes BASE-64 encoded text (see RFC2045 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html), Section 6.8). The decoded message is returned as a string. See also imap_binary(). Example 1. imap_mailboxmsginfo() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 $mbox = imap_open("{your.imap.host}INBOX","username", "password") || die("can’t connect: ".imap_last_error()); $check = imap_mailboxmsginfo($mbox); if($check) { print "Date: " . print "Driver: " . print "Mailbox: " . print "Messages: ". print "Recent: " . print "Size: " . } else print "imap_check() imap_close($mbox); $check->Date $check->Driver $check->Mailbox $check->Nmsgs $check->Recent $check->Size ."
\n" ."
\n" ."
\n" ."
\n" ."
\n" ."
\n" ; ; ; ; ; ; failed: ".imap_lasterror(). "
\n"; imap_body (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Read the message body string imap_body (int imap_stream, int msg_number [, int flags]) imap_body() returns the body of the message, numbered msg_number in the current mailbox. The optional flags are a bit mask with one or more of the following: • • • FT_UID - The msgno is a UID FT_PEEK - Do not set the \Seen flag if not already set FT_INTERNAL - The return string is in internal format, will not canonicalize to CRLF. 391 IMAP imap_check (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Check current mailbox object imap_check (int imap_stream) Returns information about the current mailbox. Returns FALSE on failure. The imap_check() function checks the current mailbox status on the server and returns the information in an object with following properties: Date - last change of mailbox contents Driver - protocol used to access this mailbox: POP3, IMAP, NNTP Mailbox - the mailbox name Nmsgs - number of messages in the mailbox Recent - number of recent messages in the mailbox • • • • • imap_close (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close an IMAP stream int imap_close (int imap_stream [, int flags]) Close the imap stream. Takes an optional flag CL_EXPUNGE, which will silently expunge the mailbox before closing, removing all messages marked for deletion. imap_createmailbox (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Create a new mailbox int imap_createmailbox (int imap_stream, string mbox) imap_createmailbox() creates a new mailbox specified by mbox. Names containing international characters should be encoded by imap_utf7_encode() Returns true on success and false on error. 392 IMAP See also imap_renamemailbox(), imap_deletemailbox() and imap_open() for the format of mbox names. Example 1. imap_createmailbox() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 $mbox = imap_open("{your.imap.host}","username","password",OP_HALFOPEN) || die("can’t connect: ".imap_last_error()); $name1 = "phpnewbox"; $name2 = imap_utf7_encode("phpnewböx"); $newname = $name1; echo "Newname will be ’$name1’
\n"; # we will now create a new mailbox "phptestbox" in your inbox folder, # check its status after creation and finaly remove it to restore # your inbox to its initial state if(@imap_createmailbox($mbox,imap_utf7_encode("{your.imap.host}INBOX.$newname"))) { $sta= @imap_status($mbox,"{your.imap.host}INBOX.$newname",SA_ALL); if($status) { print("your new mailbox ’$name1’ has the following status:
\n"); print("Messages: ". $status->messages )."
\n"; print("Recent: ". $status->recent )."
\n"; print("Unseen: ". $status->unseen )."
\n"; print("UIDnext: ". $status->uidnext )."
\n"; print("UIDvalidity:". $status->uidvalidity)."
\n"; tus 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 if(imap_renamemailbox($mbox,"{your.imap.host}INBOX.$newname","{your.imap.host}INB echo "renamed new mailbox from ’$name1’ to ’$name2’
\n"; $newname=$name2; } else { print "imap_renamemailbox on new mailbox failed: ".imap_last_error()."
\n"; 30 } 31 } else { 32 print "imap_status on new mailbox failed: ".imap_last_error()."
\n"; 33 } 34 if(@imap_deletemailbox($mbox,"{your.imap.host}INBOX.$newname")) { 35 print "new mailbox removed to restore initial state
\n"; 36 } else { 37 print "imap_deletemailbox on new mailbox failed: ".implode("
\n",imap_errors())."
\n"; 38 } 39 393 IMAP 40 } else { 41 print "could not create new mailbox: ".im- plode("
\n",imap_errors())."
\n"; 42 } 43 44 imap_close($mbox); 45 imap_delete (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Mark a messge for deletion from current mailbox int imap_delete (int imap_stream, int msg_number [, int flags]) Returns true. imap_delete() function marks message pointed by msg_number for deletion. The optional flags parameter only has a single option, FT_UID, which tells the function to treat the msg_number argument as a UID. Messages marked for deletion will stay in the mailbox until either imap_expunge() is called or imap_close() is called with the optional parameter CL_EXPUNGE. imap_deletemailbox (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Delete a mailbox int imap_deletemailbox (int imap_stream, string mbox) imap_deletemailbox() deletes the specified mailbox (see imap_open() for the format of mbox names). Returns true on success and false on error. See also imap_createmailbox(), imap_reanmemailbox(), and imap_open() for the format of mbox. imap_expunge (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Delete all messages marked for deletion 394 IMAP int imap_expunge (int imap_stream) imap_expunge() deletes all the messages marked for deletion by imap_delete(), imap_move_mail(), or imap_setflag_full(). Returns true. imap_fetchbody (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch a particular section of the body of the message string imap_fetchbody (int imap_stream, int msg_number, string part_number [, flags flags]) This function causes a fetch of a particular section of the body of the specified messages as a text string and returns that text string. The section specification is a string of integers delimited by period which index into a body part list as per the IMAP4 specification. Body parts are not decoded by this function. The options for imap_fetchbody() is a bitmask with one or more of the following: • • • FT_UID - The msg_number is a UID FT_PEEK - Do not set the \Seen flag if not already set FT_INTERNAL - The return string is in "internal" format, without any attempt to canonicalize CRLF. imap_fetchstructure (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Read the structure of a particular message object imap_fetchstructure flags]) (int imap_stream, int msg_number [, int This function fetches all the structured information for a given message. The optional flags parameter only has a single option, FT_UID, which tells the function to treat the msg_number argument as a UID. The returned object includes the envelope, internal date, size, flags and body structure along with a similar object for each mime attachement. The structure of the returned objects is as follows: 395 IMAP Table 1. Returned Objects for imap_fetchstructure() type encoding ifsubtype subtype ifdescription description ifid id lines bytes ifdisposition disposition ifdparameters dparameters ifparameters parameters parts Primary body type Body transfer encoding True if there is a subtype string MIME subtype True if there is a description string Content description string True if there is an identification string Identification string Number of lines Number of bytes True if there is a disposition string Disposition string True if the dparameters array exists Disposition parameter array True if the parameters array exists MIME parameters array Array of objects describing each message part 1. dparameters is an array of objects where each object has an "attribute" and a "value" property. 2. Parameter is an array of objects where each object has an "attributte" and a "value" property. 3. Parts is an array of objects identical in structure to the top-level object, with the limitation that it cannot contain further ’parts’ objects. Table 2. Primary body type 0 1 2 3 4 5 text multipart message application audio image 396 IMAP 6 7 video other Table 3. Transfer encodings 0 1 2 3 4 5 7BIT 8BIT BINARY BASE64 QUOTED-PRINTABLE OTHER imap_header (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Read the header of the message object imap_header (int imap_stream, int msg_number [, int fromlength [, int subjectlength [, string defaulthost]]]) This function returns an object of various header elements. remail, date, Date, subject, Subject, in_reply_to, message_id, newsgroups, followup_to, references message flags: Recent - ’R’ if recent and seen, ’N’ if recent and not seen, ’ ’ if not recent Unseen - ’U’ if not seen AND not recent, ’ ’ if seen OR not seen and recent Answered -’A’ if answered, ’ ’ if unanswered Deleted - ’D’ if deleted, ’ ’ if not deleted Draft - ’X’ if draft, ’ ’ if not draft 397 IMAP Flagged - ’F’ if flagged, ’ ’ if not flagged NOTE that the Recent/Unseen behavior is a little odd. If you want to know if a message is Unseen, you must check for Unseen == ’U’ || Recent == ’N’ toaddress (full to: line, up to 1024 characters) to[] (returns an array of objects from the To line, containing): personal adl mailbox host fromaddress (full from: line, up to 1024 characters) from[] (returns an array of objects from the From line, containing): personal adl mailbox host ccaddress (full cc: line, up to 1024 characters) cc[] (returns an array of objects from the Cc line, containing): personal adl mailbox host bccaddress (full bcc line, up to 1024 characters) bcc[] (returns an array of objects from the Bcc line, containing): personal adl mailbox host reply_toaddress (full reply_to: line, up to 1024 characters) reply_to[] (returns an array of objects from the Reply_to line, containing): personal adl mailbox 398 IMAP host senderaddress (full sender: line, up to 1024 characters) sender[] (returns an array of objects from the sender line, containing): personal adl mailbox host return_path (full return-path: line, up to 1024 characters) return_path[] (returns an array of objects from the return_path line, containing): personal adl mailbox host udate (mail message date in unix time) fetchfrom (from line formatted to fit fromlength characters) fetchsubject (subject line formatted to fit subjectlength characters) imap_rfc822_parse_headers (PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Parse mail headers from a string object imap_rfc822_parse_headers (string headers [, string defaulthost]) This function returns an object of various header elements, similar to imap_header(), except without the flags and other elements that come from the IMAP server. imap_headers (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Returns headers for all messages in a mailbox 399 IMAP array imap_headers (int imap_stream) Returns an array of string formatted with header info. One element per mail message. imap_listmailbox (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Read the list of mailboxes array imap_listmailbox (int imap_stream, string ref, string pattern) Returns an array containing the names of the mailboxes. See imap_getmailboxes() for a description of ref and pattern. Example 1. imap_getmailboxes() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 $mbox = imap_open("{your.imap.host}","username","password",OP_HALFOPEN) || die("can’t connect: ".imap_last_error()); $list = imap_listmailbox($mbox,"{your.imap.host}","*"); if(is_array($list)) { reset($list); while (list($key, $val) = each($list)) print imap_utf7_decode($val)."
\n"; } else print "imap_listmailbox failed: ".imap_last_error()."\n"; imap_close($mbox); imap_getmailboxes (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Read the list of mailboxes, returning detailed information on each one array imap_getmailboxes (int imap_stream, string ref, string pattern) Returns an array of objects containing mailbox information. Each object has the attributes name, specifying the full name of the mailbox; delimiter, which is the hierarchy delimiter for the part 400 IMAP of the hierarchy this mailbox is in; and attributes. Attributes is a bitmask that can be tested against: • • • • LATT_NOINFERIORS - This mailbox has no "children" (there are no mailboxes below this one). LATT_NOSELECT - This is only a container, not a mailbox - you cannot open it. LATT_MARKED - This mailbox is marked. Only used by UW-IMAPD. LATT_UNMARKED - This mailbox is not marked. Only used by UW-IMAPD. Mailbox names containing international Characters outside the printable ASCII range will be encoded and may be decoded by imap_utf7_decode(). ref should normally be just the server specification as described in imap_open(), and pattern specifies where in the mailbox hierarchy to start searching. If you want all mailboxes, pass ’*’ for pattern. There are two special characters you can pass as part of the pattern: ’*’ and ’%’. ’*’ means to return all mailboxes. If you pass pattern as ’*’, you will get a list of the entire mailbox hierarchy. ’%’ means to return the current level only. ’%’ as the pattern parameter will return only the top level mailboxes; ’~/mail/%’ on UW_IMAPD will return every mailbox in the ~/mail directory, but none in subfolders of that directory. Example 1. imap_getmailboxes() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 $mbox = imap_open("{your.imap.host}","username","password",OP_HALFOPEN) || die("can’t connect: ".imap_last_error()); $list = imap_getmailboxes($mbox,"{your.imap.host}","*"); if(is_array($list)) { reset($list); while (list($key, $val) = each($list)) { print "($key) "; print imap_utf7_decode($val->name).","; print "’".$val->delimiter."’,"; print $val->attributes."
\n"; } } else print "imap_getmailboxes failed: ".imap_last_error()."\n"; imap_close($mbox); 401 IMAP imap_listsubscribed (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List all the subscribed mailboxes array imap_listsubscribed (int imap_stream, string ref, string pattern) Returns an array of all the mailboxes that you have subscribed. This is almost identical to imap_listmailbox(), but will only return mailboxes the user you logged in as has subscribed. imap_getsubscribed (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) List all the subscribed mailboxes array imap_getsubscribed (int imap_stream, string ref, string pattern) This function is identical to imap_getmailboxes(), except that it only returns mailboxes that the user is subscribed to. imap_mail_copy (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Copy specified messages to a mailbox int imap_mail_copy (int imap_stream, string msglist, string mbox [, int flags]) Returns true on success and false on error. Copies mail messages specified by msglist to specified mailbox. msglist is a range not just message numbers (as described in RFC2060 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2060.html)). Flags is a bitmask of one or more of • • CP_UID - the sequence numbers contain UIDS CP_MOVE - Delete the messages from the current mailbox after copying 402 IMAP imap_mail_move (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Move specified messages to a mailbox int imap_mail_move (int imap_stream, string msglist, string mbox [, int flags]) Moves mail messages specified by msglist to specified mailbox. msglist is a range not just message numbers (as described in RFC2060 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2060.html)). Flags is a bitmask and may contain the single option • CP_UID - the sequence numbers contain UIDS Returns true on success and false on error. imap_num_msg (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Gives the number of messages in the current mailbox int imap_num_msg (int imap_stream) Return the number of messages in the current mailbox. imap_num_recent (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Gives the number of recent messages in current mailbox int imap_num_recent (int imap_stream) Returns the number of recent messages in the current mailbox. imap_open (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open an IMAP stream to a mailbox 403 IMAP int imap_open (string mailbox, string username, string password [, int flags]) Returns an IMAP stream on success and false on error. This function can also be used to open streams to POP3 and NNTP servers, but some functions and features are not available on IMAP servers. A mailbox name consists of a server part and a mailbox path on this server. The special name INBOX stands for the current users personal mailbox. The server part, which is enclosed in ’{’ and ’}’, consists of the servers name or ip address, a protocol secification (beginning with ’/’) and an optional port specifier beginnung with ’:’. The server part is mandatory in all mailbox parameters. Mailbos names that contain international characters besides those in the printable ASCII space have to be encoded with imap_utf7_encode(). The options are a bit mask with one or more of the following: • • • • OP_READONLY - Open mailbox read-only OP_ANONYMOUS - Dont use or update a .newsrc for news (NNTP only) OP_HALFOPEN - For IMAP and NNTP names, open a connection but dont open a mailbox CL_EXPUNGE - Expunge mailbox automatically upon mailbox close To connect to an IMAP server running on port 143 on the local machine, do the following: 1 2 $mbox = imap_open ("{localhost:143}INBOX", "user_id", "password"); 3 To connect to a POP3 server on port 110 on the local server, use: 1 2 $mbox = imap_open ("{localhost/pop3:110}INBOX", "user_id", "password"); 3 To connect to an NNTP server on port 119 on the local server, use: 1 2 $nntp = imap_open ("{localhost/nntp:119}comp.test", "", ""); 3 To connect to a remote server replace "localhost" with the name or the IP address of the server you want to connect to. 404 IMAP Example 1. imap_open() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 $mbox = imap_open ("{your.imap.host:143}", "username", "password"); echo "

Mailboxes

\n"; $folders = imap_listmailbox ($mbox, "{your.imap.host:143}", "*"); if ($folders == false) { echo "Call failed
\n"; } else { while (list ($key, $val) = each ($folders)) { echo $val."
\n"; } } echo "

Headers in INBOX

\n"; $headers = imap_headers ($mbox); if ($headers == false) { echo "Call failed
\n"; } else { while (list ($key,$val) = each ($headers)) { echo $val."
\n"; } } imap_close($mbox); imap_ping (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Check if the IMAP stream is still active int imap_ping (int imap_stream) Returns true if the stream is still alive, false otherwise. imap_ping() function pings the stream to see it is still active. It may discover new mail; this is the preferred method for a periodic "new mail check" as well as a "keep alive" for servers which have inactivity timeout. (As PHP scripts do not tend to run that long, i can hardly imagine that this function will be usefull to anyone.) 405 IMAP imap_renamemailbox (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Rename an old mailbox to new mailbox int imap_renamemailbox (int imap_stream, string old_mbox, string new_mbox) This function renames on old mailbox to new mailbox (see imap_open() for the format of mbox names). Returns true on success and false on error. See also imap_createmailbox(), imap_deletemailbox(), and imap_open() for the format of mbox. imap_reopen (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Reopen IMAP stream to new mailbox int imap_reopen (string imap_stream, string mailbox [, string flags]) This function reopens the specified stream to a new mailbox on an IMAP or NNTP server. The options are a bit mask with one or more of the following: • • • • OP_READONLY - Open mailbox read-only OP_ANONYMOUS - Dont use or update a .newsrc for news (NNTP only) OP_HALFOPEN - For IMAP and NNTP names, open a connection but dont open a mailbox. CL_EXPUNGE - Expunge mailbox automatically upon mailbox close (see also imap_delete() and imap_expunge()) Returns true on success and false on error. imap_subscribe (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Subscribe to a mailbox int imap_subscribe (int imap_stream, string mbox) Subscribe to a new mailbox. 406 IMAP Returns true on success and false on error. imap_undelete (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Unmark the message which is marked deleted int imap_undelete (int imap_stream, int msg_number) This function removes the deletion flag for a specified message, which is set by imap_delete() or imap_mail_move(). Returns true on success and false on error. imap_unsubscribe (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Unsubscribe from a mailbox int imap_unsubscribe (int imap_stream, string mbox) Unsubscribe from a specified mailbox. Returns true on success and false on error. imap_qprint (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Convert a quoted-printable string to an 8 bit string string imap_qprint (string string) Convert a quoted-printable string to an 8 bit string (according to RFC2045 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html), section 6.7). Returns an 8 bit (binary) string. See also imap_8bit(). 407 IMAP imap_8bit (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Convert an 8bit string to a quoted-printable string string imap_8bit (string string) Convert an 8bit string to a quoted-printable string (according to RFC2045 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html), section 6.7). Returns a quoted-printable string. See also imap_qprint(). imap_binary (PHP3 >= 3.0.2, PHP4 ) Convert an 8bit string to a base64 string string imap_binary (string string) Convert an 8bit string to a base64 string (according to RFC2045 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2045.html), Section 6.8). Returns a base64 string. See also imap_base64(). imap_scanmailbox (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Read the list of mailboxes, takes a string to search for in the text of the mailbox array imap_scanmailbox (int imap_stream, string content) Returns an array containing the names of the mailboxes that have string in the text of the mailbox. This function is simmilar to imap_listmailbox(), but it will additionally check for the presence of the string content inside the mailbox data. 408 IMAP imap_mailboxmsginfo (PHP3 >= 3.0.2, PHP4 ) Get information about the current mailbox object imap_mailboxmsginfo (int imap_stream) Returns information about the current mailbox. Returns FALSE on failure. The imap_mailboxmsginfo() function checks the current mailbox status on the server. It is similar to imap_status(), but will additionally sum up the size of all messages in the mailbox, which will take some additional time to execute. It returns the information in an object with following properties. Table 1. Mailbox properties Date Driver Mailbox Nmsgs Recent Unread Size date of last change driver name of the mailbox number of messages number of recent messages number of unread messages mailbox size imap_rfc822_write_address (PHP3 >= 3.0.2, PHP4 ) Returns a properly formatted email address given the mailbox, host, and personal info. string imap_rfc822_write_address personal) (string mailbox, string host, string Returns a properly formatted email address as defined in RFC822 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc822.html) given the mailbox, host, and personal info. Example 1. imap_rfc822_write_address() example 1 2 print imap_rfc822_write_address("hartmut","cvs.php.net","Hartmut Holzgraefe")."\n"; 3 409 IMAP imap_rfc822_parse_adrlist (PHP3 >= 3.0.2, PHP4 ) Parses an address string array imap_rfc822_parse_adrlist (string address, string default_host) This function parses the address string as defined in RFC822 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc822.html) and for each address, returns an array of objects. The objects properties are: mailbox - the mailbox name (username) host - the host name personal - the personal name adl - at domain source route • • • • Example 1. imap_rfc822_parse_adrlist() example 1 2 $address_string = "Hartmut Holzgraefe , postmas- ter@somedomain.net, root"; 3 $address_array = imap_rfc822_parse_adrlist($address_string,"somedomain.net"); 4 if(! is_array($address_array)) die("somethings wrong\n"); 5 6 reset($address_array); 7 while(list($key,$val)=each($address_array)){ 8 print "mailbox : ".$val->mailbox."
\n"; 9 print "host : ".$val->host."
\n"; 10 print "personal: ".$val->personal."
\n"; 11 print "adl : ".$val->adl."

\n"; 12 } 13 imap_setflag_full (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Sets flags on messages string imap_setflag_full (int stream, string sequence, string flag, string options) 410 IMAP This function causes a store to add the specified flag to the flags set for the messages in the specified sequence. The flags which you can set are "\\Seen", "\\Answered", "\\Flagged", "\\Deleted", "\\Draft", and "\\Recent" (as defined by RFC2060). The options are a bit mask with one or more of the following: ST_UID The sequence argument contains UIDs instead of sequence numbers Example 1. imap_setflag_full() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 $mbox = imap_open("{your.imap.host:143}","username","password") || die("can’t connect: ".imap_last_error()); $status = imap_setflag_full($mbox,"2,5","\\Seen \\Flagged"); print gettype($status)."\n"; print $status."\n"; imap_close($mbox); imap_clearflag_full (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Clears flags on messages string imap_clearflag_full string options) (int stream, string sequence, string flag, This function causes a store to delete the specified flag to the flags set for the messages in the specified sequence. The flags which you can unset are "\\Seen", "\\Answered", "\\Flagged", "\\Deleted", "\\Draft", and "\\Recent" (as defined by RFC2060). The options are a bit mask with one or more of the following: ST_UID The sequence argument contains UIDs instead of sequence numbers 411 IMAP imap_sort (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Sort an array of message headers string imap_sort (int stream, int criteria, int reverse, int options) Returns an array of message numbers sorted by the given parameters. Reverse is 1 for reverse-sorting. Criteria can be one (and only one) of the following: SORTDATE message Date SORTARRIVAL arrival date SORTFROM mailbox in first From address SORTSUBJECT message Subject SORTTO mailbox in first To address SORTCC mailbox in first cc address SORTSIZE size of message in octets The flags are a bitmask of one or more of the following: SE_UID Return UIDs instead of sequence numbers SE_NOPREFETCH Don’t prefetch searched messages. imap_fetchheader (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Returns header for a message string imap_fetchheader (int imap_stream, int msgno, int flags) This function causes a fetch of the complete, unfiltered RFC822 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc822.html) format header of the specified message as a text string and returns that text string. The options are: FT_UID The msgno argument is a UID FT_INTERNAL The return string is in "internal" format, 412 IMAP without any attempt to canonicalize to CRLF newlines FT_PREFETCHTEXT The RFC822.TEXT should be pre-fetched at the same time. This avoids an extra RTT on an IMAP connection if a full message text is desired (e.g. in a "save to local file" operation) imap_uid (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) This function returns the UID for the given message sequence number int imap_uid (int imap_stream, int msgno) This function returns the UID for the given message sequence number. An UID is an unique identifier that will not change over time while a message sequence number may change whenever the content of the mailbox changes. This function is the inverse of imap_msgno(). imap_msgno (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) This function returns the message sequence number for the given UID int imap_msgno (int imap_stream, int uid) This function returns the message sequence number for the given UID. It is the inverse of imap_uid(). imap_search (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) This function returns an array of messages matching the given search criteria array imap_search (int imap_stream, string criteria, int flags) 413 IMAP This function performs a search on the mailbox currently opened in the given imap stream. criteria is a string, delimited by spaces, in which the following keywords are allowed. Any multi-word arguments (eg. FROM "joey smith") must be quoted. • • • • • • • • ALL - return all messages matching the rest of the criteria ANSWERED - match messages with the \\ANSWERED flag set BCC "string" - match messages with "string" in the Bcc: field BEFORE "date" - match messages with Date: before "date" BODY "string" - match messages with "string" in the body of the message CC "string" - match messages with "string" in the Cc: field DELETED - match deleted messages FLAGGED - match messages with the \\FLAGGED (sometimes referred to as Important or Urgent) flag set FROM "string" - match messages with "string" in the From: field KEYWORD "string" - match messages with "string" as a keyword NEW - match new messages OLD - match old messages ON "date" - match messages with Date: matching "date" RECENT - match messages with the \\RECENT flag set SEEN - match messages that have been read (the \\SEEN flag is set) SINCE "date" - match messages with Date: after "date" SUBJECT "string" - match messages with "string" in the Subject: TEXT "string" - match messages with text "string" TO "string" - match messages with "string" in the To: UNANSWERED - match messages that have not been answered UNDELETED - match messages that are not deleted UNFLAGGED - match messages that are not flagged UNKEYWORD "string" - match messages that do not have the keyword "string" UNSEEN - match messages which have not been read yet • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • For example, to match all unanswered messages sent by Mom, you’d use: "UNANSWERED FROM mom". Searches appear to be case insensitive. This list of criteria is from a reading of the UW c-client source code and may be uncomplete or inaccurate (see also RFC2060, section 6.4.4). Valid values for flags are SE_UID, which causes the returned array to contain UIDs instead of messages sequence numbers. 414 IMAP imap_last_error (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) This function returns the last IMAP error (if any) that occurred during this page request string imap_last_error (void) This function returns the full text of the last IMAP error message that occurred on the current page. The error stack is untouched; calling imap_last_error() subsequently, with no intervening errors, will return the same error. imap_errors (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) This function returns all of the IMAP errors (if any) that have occurred during this page request or since the error stack was reset. array imap_errors (void) This function returns an array of all of the IMAP error messages generated since the last imap_errors() call, or the beginning of the page. When imap_errors() is called, the error stack is subsequently cleared. imap_alerts (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) This function returns all IMAP alert messages (if any) that have occurred during this page request or since the alert stack was reset array imap_alerts (void) This function returns an array of all of the IMAP alert messages generated since the last imap_alerts() call, or the beginning of the page. When imap_alerts() is called, the alert stack is subsequently cleared. The IMAP specification requires that these messages be passed to the user. imap_status (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) This function returns status information on a mailbox other than the current one 415 IMAP object imap_status (int imap_stream, string mailbox, int options) This function returns an object containing status information. Valid flags are: • • • • • SA_MESSAGES - set status->messages to the number of messages in the mailbox SA_RECENT - set status->recent to the number of recent messages in the mailbox SA_UNSEEN - set status->unseen to the number of unseen (new) messages in the mailbox SA_UIDNEXT - set status->uidnext to the next uid to be used in the mailbox SA_UIDVALIDITY - set status->uidvalidity to a constant that changes when uids for the mailbox may no longer be valid SA_ALL - set all of the above • status->flags is also set, which contains a bitmask which can be checked against any of the above constants. Example 1. imap_status() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 $mbox = imap_open("{your.imap.host}","username","password",OP_HALFOPEN) || die("can’t connect: ".imap_last_error()); $status = imap_status($mbox,"{your.imap.host}INBOX",SA_ALL); if($status) { print("Messages: ". $status->messages )."
\n"; print("Recent: ". $status->recent )."
\n"; print("Unseen: ". $status->unseen )."
\n"; print("UIDnext: ". $status->uidnext )."
\n"; print("UIDvalidity:". $status->uidvalidity)."
\n"; } else print "imap_status failed: ".imap_lasterror()."\n"; imap_close($mbox); imap_utf7_decode (PHP3 >= 3.0.15, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Decodes a modified UTF-7 encoded string. string imap_utf7_decode (string text) Decodes modified UTF-7 text into 8bit data. 416 IMAP Returns the decoded 8bit data, or false if the input string was not valid modified UTF-7. This function is needed to decode mailbox names that contain international characters outside of the printable ASCII range. The modified UTF-7 encoding is defined in RFC 2060 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2060.html), section 5.1.3 (original UTF-7 was defned in RFC1642 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1642.html)). imap_utf7_encode (PHP3 >= 3.0.15, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Converts 8bit data to modified UTF-7 text. string imap_utf7_encode (string data) Converts 8bit data to modified UTF-7 text. This is needed to encode mailbox names that contain international characters outside of the printable ASCII range. The modified UTF-7 encoding is defined in RFC 2060 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2060.html), section 5.1.3 (original UTF-7 was defned in RFC1642 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc1642.html)). Returns the modified UTF-7 text. imap_utf8 (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Converts text to UTF8 string imap_utf8 (string text) Converts the given text to UTF8 (as defined in RFC2044 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2044.html)). imap_fetch_overview (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Read an overview of the information in the headers of the given message array imap_fetch_overview (int imap_stream, string sequence [, int flags]) This function fetches mail headers for the given sequence and returns an overview of their contents. sequence will contain a sequence of message indices or UIDs, if flags contains FT_UID. The returned value is an array of objects describing one message header each: 417 IMAP • • • • • • • • • • • • • • subject - the messages subject from - who sent it date - when was it sent message_id - Message-ID references - is a reference to this message id size - size in bytes uid - UID the message has in the mailbox msgno - message sequence number in the maibox recent - this message is flagged as recent flagged - this message is flagged answered - this message is flagged as answered deleted - this message is flagged for deletion seen - this message is flagged as already read draft - this message is flagged as being a draft Example 1. imap_fetch_overview() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 $mbox = imap_open("{your.imap.host:143}","username","password") || die("can’t connect: ".imap_last_error()); $overview = imap_fetch_overview($mbox,"2,4:6",0); if(is_array($overview)) { reset($overview); while( list($key,$val) = each($overview)) { print $val->msgno . " - " . $val->date . " - " . $val->subject . "\n"; } } imap_close($mbox); 418 IMAP imap_mime_header_decode (PHP3 CVS only, PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Decode MIME header elements array imap_header_decode (string text) imap_mime_header_decode() function decodes MIME message header extensions that are non ASCII text (see RFC2047 (http://www.faqs.org/rfcs/rfc2047.html)) The decoded elements are returned in an array of objects, where each object has two properties, "charset" & "text". If the element hasn’t been encoded, and in other words is in plain US-ASCII,the "charset" property of that element is set to "default". Example 1. imap_mime_header_decode() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 $text="=?ISO-8859-1?Q?Keld_J=F8rn_Simonsen?= "; $elements=imap_mime_header_decode($text); for($i=0;$icharset}\n"; echo "Text: {$elements[$i]->text}\n\n"; } In the above example we would have two elements, whereas the first element had previously been encoded with ISO-8859-1, and the second element would be plain US-ASCII. imap_mail_compose (PHP3 >= 3.0.5, PHP4 ) Create a MIME message based on given envelope and body sections string imap_mail_compose (array envelope, array body) imap_mail (PHP3 >= 3.0.14, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Send an email message 419 IMAP string imap_mail (string to, string subject, string message [, string additional_headers [, string cc [, string bcc [, string rpath]]]]) This function is currently only available in PHP3. 420 XXIX. Informix functions The Informix driver for Informix (IDS) 7.x, SE 7.x, Universal Server (IUS) 9.x and IDS 2000 is implemented in "ifx.ec" and "php3_ifx.h" in the informix extension directory. IDS 7.x support is fairly complete, with full support for BYTE and TEXT columns. IUS 9.x support is partly finished: the new data types are there, but SLOB and CLOB support is still under construction. Configuration notes: You need a version of ESQL/C to compile the PHP Informix driver. ESQL/C versions from 7.2x on should be OK. ESQL/C is now part of the Informix Client SDK. Make sure that the "INFORMIXDIR" variable has been set, and that $INFORMIXDIR/bin is in your PATH before you run the "configure" script. The configure script will autodetect the libraries and include directories, if you run "configure --with_informix=yes". You can overide this detection by specifying "IFX_LIBDIR", "IFX_LIBS" and "IFX_INCDIR" in the environment. The configure script will also try to detect your Informix server version. It will set the "HAVE_IFX_IUS" conditional compilation variable if your Informix version >= 9.00. Runtime considerations: Make sure that the Informix environment variables INFORMIXDIR and INFORMIXSERVER are available to the PHP ifx driver, and that the INFORMIX bin directory is in the PATH. Check this by running a script that contains a call to phpinfo()() before you start testing. The phpinfo()() output should list these environment variables. This is true for both CGI php and Apache mod_php. You may have to set these environment variables in your Apache startup script. The Informix shared libraries should also be available to the loader (check LD_LINBRARY_PATH or ld.so.conf/ldconfig). Some notes on the use of BLOBs (TEXT and BYTE columns): BLOBs are normally addressed by BLOB identifiers. Select queries return a "blob id" for every BYTE and TEXT column. You can get at the contents with "string_var = ifx_get_blob($blob_id);" if you choose to get the BLOBs in memory (with : "ifx_blobinfile(0);"). If you prefer to receive the content of BLOB columns in a file, use "ifx_blobinfile(1);", and "ifx_get_blob($blob_id);" will get you the filename. Use normal file I/O to get at the blob contents. For insert/update queries you must create these "blob id’s" yourself with "ifx_create_blob();". You then plug the blob id’s into an array, and replace the blob columns with a question mark (?) in the query string. For updates/inserts, you are responsible for setting the blob contents with ifx_update_blob(). The behaviour of BLOB columns can be altered by configuration variables that also can be set at runtime : configuration variable : ifx.textasvarchar configuration variable : ifx.byteasvarchar runtime functions : ifx_textasvarchar(0) : use blob id’s for select queries with TEXT columns 421 IMAP ifx_byteasvarchar(0) : use blob id’s for select queries with BYTE columns ifx_textasvarchar(1) : return TEXT columns as if they were VARCHAR columns, so that you don’t need to use blob id’s for select queries. ifx_byteasvarchar(1) : return BYTE columns as if they were VARCHAR columns, so that you don’t need to use blob id’s for select queries. configuration variable : ifx.blobinfile runtime function : ifx_blobinfile_mode(0) : return BYTE columns in memory, the blob id lets you get at the contents. ifx_blobinfile_mode(1) : return BYTE columns in a file, the blob id lets you get at the file name. If you set ifx_text/byteasvarchar to 1, you can use TEXT and BYTE columns in select queries just like normal (but rather long) VARCHAR fields. Since all strings are "counted" in PHP, this remains "binary safe". It is up to you to handle this correctly. The returned data can contain anything, you are responsible for the contents. If you set ifx_blobinfile to 1, use the file name returned by ifx_get_blob(..) to get at the blob contents. Note that in this case YOU ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR DELETING THE TEMPORARY FILES CREATED BY INFORMIX when fetching the row. Every new row fetched will create new temporary files for every BYTE column. The location of the temporary files can be influenced by the environment variable "blobdir", default is "." (the current directory). Something like : putenv(blobdir=tmpblob"); will ease the cleaning up of temp files accidentally left behind (their names all start with "blb"). Automatically trimming "char" (SQLCHAR and SQLNCHAR) data: This can be set with the configuration variable ifx.charasvarchar : if set to 1 trailing spaces will be automatically trimmed, to save you some "chopping". NULL values: The configuration variable ifx.nullformat (and the runtime function ifx_nullformat()) when set to true will return NULL columns as the string "NULL", when set to false they return the empty string. This allows you to discriminate between NULL columns and empty columns. 422 ifx_connect (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Open Informix server connection int ifx_connect ([string database [, string userid [, string password]]]) Returns a connection identifier on success, or FALSE on error. ifx_connect() establishes a connection to an Informix server. All of the arguments are optional, and if they’re missing, defaults are taken from values supplied in configuration file (ifx.default_host for the host (Informix libraries will use INFORMIXSERVER environment value if not defined), ifx.default_user for user, ifx.default_password for the password (none if not defined). In case a second call is made to ifx_connect() with the same arguments, no new link will be established, but instead, the link identifier of the already opened link will be returned. The link to the server will be closed as soon as the execution of the script ends, unless it’s closed earlier by explicitly calling ifx_close(). See also ifx_pconnect(), and ifx_close(). Example 1. Connect to a Informix database 1 2 $conn_id = ifx_pconnect ("mydb@ol_srv1", "imyself", "mypassword"); 3 ifx_pconnect (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Open persistent Informix connection int ifx_pconnect ([string database [, string userid [, string password]]]) Returns: A positive Informix persistent link identifier on success, or false on error ifx_pconnect() acts very much like ifx_connect() with two major differences. This function behaves exactly like ifx_connect() when PHP is not running as an Apache module. First, when connecting, the function would first try to find a (persistent) link that’s already open with the same host, username and password. If one is found, an identifier for it will be returned instead of opening a new connection. 423 Informix Second, the connection to the SQL server will not be closed when the execution of the script ends. Instead, the link will remain open for future use (ifx_close() will not close links established by ifx_pconnect()). This type of links is therefore called ’persistent’. See also: ifx_connect(). ifx_close (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Close Informix connection int ifx_close ([int link_identifier]) Returns: always true. ifx_close() closes the link to an Informix database that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. Note that this isn’t usually necessary, as non-persistent open links are automatically closed at the end of the script’s execution. ifx_close() will not close persistent links generated by ifx_pconnect(). See also: ifx_connect(), and ifx_pconnect(). Example 1. Closing a Informix connection 1 2 $conn_id = ifx_connect ("mydb@ol_srv", "itsme", "mypassword"); 3 ... some queries and stuff ... 4 ifx_close($conn_id); 5 ifx_query (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Send Informix query int ifx_query (string query [, int link_identifier [, int cursor_type [, mixed blobidarray]]]) Returns: A positive Informix result identifier on success, or false on error. 424 Informix A "result_id" resource used by other functions to retrieve the query results. Sets "affected_rows" for retrieval by the ifx_affected_rows() function. ifx_query() sends a query to the currently active database on the server that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. If no link is open, the function tries to establish a link as if ifx_connect() was called, and use it. Executes query on connection conn_id. For "select-type" queries a cursor is declared and opened. The optional cursor_type parameter allows you to make this a "scroll" and/or "hold" cursor. It’s a bitmask and can be either IFX_SCROLL, IFX_HOLD, or both or’ed together. Non-select queries are "execute immediate". IFX_SCROLL and IFX_HOLD are symbolic constants and as such shouldn’t be between quotes. I you omit this parameter the cursor is a normal sequential cursor. For either query type the number of (estimated or real) affected rows is saved for retrieval by ifx_affected_rows(). If you have BLOB (BYTE or TEXT) columns in an update query, you can add a blobidarray parameter containing the corresponding "blob ids", and you should replace those columns with a "?" in the query text. If the contents of the TEXT (or BYTE) column allow it, you can also use "ifx_textasvarchar(1)" and "ifx_byteasvarchar(1)". This allows you to treat TEXT (or BYTE) columns just as if they were ordinary (but long) VARCHAR columns for select queries, and you don’t need to bother with blob id’s. With ifx_textasvarchar(0) or ifx_byteasvarchar(0) (the default situation), select queries will return BLOB columns as blob id’s (integer value). You can get the value of the blob as a string or file with the blob functions (see below). See also: ifx_connect(). Example 1. Show all rows of the "orders" table as a html table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 ifx_textasvarchar(1); // use "text mode" for blobs $res_id = ifx_query("select * from orders", $conn_id); if (! $res_id) { printf("Can’t select orders : %s\n
%s
\n", ifx_error()); ifx_errormsg(); die; } ifx_htmltbl_result($res_id, "border=\"1\""); ifx_free_result($res_id); Example 2. Insert some values into the "catalog" table 1 2 // create blob id’s for a byte and text column 425 Informix 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 $textid = ifx_create_blob(0, 0, "Text column in memory"); $byteid = ifx_create_blob(1, 0, "Byte column in memory"); // store blob id’s in a blobid array $blobidarray[] = $textid; $blobidarray[] = $byteid; // launch query $query = "insert into catalog (stock_num, manu_code, " . "cat_descr,cat_picture) values(1,’HRO’,?,?)"; $res_id = ifx_query($query, $conn_id, $blobidarray); if (! $res_id) { ... error ... } // free result id ifx_free_result($res_id); ifx_prepare (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Prepare an SQL-statement for execution int ifx_prepare (string query, int conn_id [, int cursor_def, mixed blobidarray]) Returns a integer result_id for use by ifx_do(). Sets affected_rows for retrieval by the ifx_affected_rows() function. Prepares query on connection conn_id. For "select-type" queries a cursor is declared and opened. The optional cursor_type parameter allows you to make this a "scroll" and/or "hold" cursor. It’s a bitmask and can be either IFX_SCROLL, IFX_HOLD, or both or’ed together. For either query type the estimated number of affected rows is saved for retrieval by ifx_affected_rows(). If you have BLOB (BYTE or TEXT) columns in the query, you can add a blobidarray parameter containing the corresponding "blob ids", and you should replace those columns with a "?" in the query text. If the contents of the TEXT (or BYTE) column allow it, you can also use "ifx_textasvarchar(1)" and "ifx_byteasvarchar(1)". This allows you to treat TEXT (or BYTE) columns just as if they were ordinary (but long) VARCHAR columns for select queries, and you don’t need to bother with blob id’s. With ifx_textasvarchar(0) or ifx_byteasvarchar(0) (the default situation), select queries will return BLOB columns as blob id’s (integer value). You can get the value of the blob as a string or file with the blob functions (see below). 426 Informix See also: ifx_do(). ifx_do (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Execute a previously prepared SQL-statement int ifx_do (int result_id) Returns TRUE on success, FALSE on error. Executes a previously prepared query or opens a cursor for it. Does NOT free result_id on error. Also sets the real number of ifx_affected_rows() for non-select statements for retrieval by ifx_affected_rows() See also: ifx_prepare(). There is a example. ifx_error (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Returns error code of last Informix call string ifx_error(void); The Informix error codes (SQLSTATE & SQLCODE) formatted as follows : x [SQLSTATE = aa bbb SQLCODE=cccc] where x = space : no error E : error N : no more data W : warning ? : undefined If the "x" character is anything other than space, SQLSTATE and SQLCODE describe the error in more detail. See the Informix manual for the description of SQLSTATE and SQLCODE Returns in a string one character describing the general results of a statement and both SQLSTATE and SQLCODE associated with the most recent SQL statement executed. The format of the string is 427 Informix "(char) [SQLSTATE=(two digits) (three digits) SQLCODE=(one digit)]". The first character can be ’ ’ (space) (success), ’W’ (the statement caused some warning), ’E’ (an error happened when executing the statement) or ’N’ (the statement didn’t return any data). See also: ifx_errormsg() ifx_errormsg (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Returns error message of last Informix call string ifx_errormsg ([int errorcode]) Returns the Informix error message associated with the most recent Informix error, or, when the optional "errorcode" param is present, the error message corresponding to "errorcode". See also: ifx_error() 1 2 printf("%s\n
", ifx_errormsg(-201)); 3 ifx_affected_rows (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Get number of rows affected by a query int ifx_affected_rows (int result_id) result_id is a valid result id returned by ifx_query() or ifx_prepare(). Returns the number of rows affected by a query associated with result_id. For inserts, updates and deletes the number is the real number (sqlerrd[2]) of affected rows. For selects it is an estimate (sqlerrd[0]). Don’t rely on it. The database server can never return the actual number of rows that will be returned by a SELECT because it has not even begun fetching them at this stage (just after the "PREPARE" when the optimizer has determined the query plan). Useful after ifx_prepare() to limit queries to reasonable result sets. See also: ifx_num_rows() 428 Informix Example 1. Informix affected rows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 $rid = ifx_prepare ("select * from emp where name like " . $name, $connid); if (! $rid) { ... error ... } $rowcount = ifx_affected_rows ($rid); if ($rowcount > 1000) { printf ("Too many rows in result set (%d)\n
", $rowcount); die ("Please restrict your query
\n"); } ifx_getsqlca (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Get the contents of sqlca.sqlerrd[0..5] after a query array ifx_getsqlca (int result_id) result_id is a valid result id returned by ifx_query() or ifx_prepare(). Returns a pseudo-row (assiociative array) with sqlca.sqlerrd[0] ... sqlca.sqlerrd[5] after the query associated with result_id. For inserts, updates and deletes the values returned are those as set by the server after executing the query. This gives access to the number of affected rows and the serial insert value. For SELECTs the values are those saved after the PREPARE statement. This gives access to the *estimated* number of affected rows. The use of this function saves the overhead of executing a "select dbinfo(’sqlca.sqlerrdx’)" query, as it retrieves the values that were saved by the ifx driver at the appropriate moment. Example 1. Retrieve Informix sqlca.sqlerrd[x] values 1 2 /* assume the first column of ’sometable’ is a serial */ 3 $qid = ifx_query("insert into sometable 4 values (0, ’2nd column’, ’another col- umn’ ", $connid); 5 if (! $qid) { 6 ... error ... 7 } 8 $sqlca = ifx_getsqlca ($qid); 9 $serial_value = $sqlca["sqlerrd1"]; 429 Informix 10 echo "The serial value of the inserted row is : " . $serial_value
\n"; 11 ifx_fetch_row (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Get row as enumerated array array ifx_fetch_row (int result_id [, mixed position]) Returns an associative array that corresponds to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. Blob columns are returned as integer blob id values for use in ifx_get_blob() unless you have used ifx_textasvarchar(1) or ifx_byteasvarchar(1), in which case blobs are returned as string values. Returns FALSE on error result_id is a valid resultid returned by ifx_query() or ifx_prepare() (select type queries only!). position is an optional parameter for a "fetch" operation on "scroll" cursors: "NEXT", "PREVIOUS", "CURRENT", "FIRST", "LAST" or a number. If you specify a number, an "absolute" row fetch is executed. This parameter is optional, and only valid for SCROLL cursors. ifx_fetch_row() fetches one row of data from the result associated with the specified result identifier. The row is returned as an array. Each result column is stored in an array offset, starting at offset 0, with the column name as key. Subsequent calls to ifx_fetch_row() would return the next row in the result set, or false if there are no more rows. Example 1. Informix fetch rows 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 $rid = ifx_prepare ("select * from emp where name like " . $name, $connid, IFX_SCROLL); if (! $rid) { ... error ... } $rowcount = ifx_affected_rows($rid); if ($rowcount > 1000) { printf ("Too many rows in result set (%d)\n
", $rowcount); die ("Please restrict your query
\n"); } if (! ifx_do ($rid)) { ... error ... } $row = ifx_fetch_row ($rid, "NEXT"); 430 Informix 16 while (is_array($row)) { 17 for(reset($row); $fieldname=key($row); next($row)) { 18 $fieldvalue = $row[$fieldname]; 19 printf ("%s = %s,", $fieldname, $fieldvalue); 20 } 21 printf("\n
"); 22 $row = ifx_fetch_row ($rid, "NEXT"); 23 } 24 ifx_free_result ($rid); 25 ifx_htmltbl_result (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Formats all rows of a query into a HTML table int ifx_htmltbl_result (int result_id [, string html_table_options]) Returns the number of rows fetched or FALSE on error. Formats all rows of the result_id query into a html table. The optional second argument is a string of

tag options Example 1. Informix results as HTML table 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 $rid = ifx_prepare ("select * from emp where name like " . $name, $connid, IFX_SCROLL); if (! $rid) { ... error ... } $rowcount = ifx_affected_rows ($rid); if ($rowcount > 1000) { printf ("Too many rows in result set (%d)\n
", $rowcount); die ("Please restrict your query
\n"); } if (! ifx_do($rid) { ... error ... } ifx_htmltbl_result ($rid, "border=\"2\""); ifx_free_result($rid); 431 Informix ifx_fieldtypes (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) List of Informix SQL fields array ifx_fieldtypes (int result_id) Returns an associative array with fieldnames as key and the SQL fieldtypes as data for query with result_id. Returns FALSE on error. Example 1. Fielnames and SQL fieldtypes 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 $types = ifx_fieldtypes ($resultid); if (! isset ($types)) { ... error ... } for ($i = 0; $i < count($types); $i++) { $fname = key($types); printf("%s :\t type = %s\n", $fname, $types[$fname]); next($types); } ifx_fieldproperties (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) List of SQL fieldproperties array ifx_fieldproperties (int result_id) Returns an associative array with fieldnames as key and the SQL fieldproperties as data for a query with result_id. Returns FALSE on error. Returns the Informix SQL fieldproperies of every field in the query as an associative array. Properties are encoded as: "SQLTYPE;length;precision;scale;ISNULLABLE" where SQLTYPE = the Informix type like "SQLVCHAR" etc. and ISNULLABLE = "Y" or "N". Example 1. Informix SQL fieldproperties 1 2 $properties = ifx_fieldtypes ($resultid); 3 if (! isset($properties)) { 4 ... error ... 432 Informix 5 } 6 for 7 8 9 10 } 11 ($i = 0; $i < count($properties); $i++) { $fname = key ($properties); printf ("%s:\t type = %s\n", $fname, $properties[$fname]); next ($properties); ifx_num_fields (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Returns the number of columns in the query int ifx_num_fields (int result_id) Returns the number of columns in query for result_id or FALSE on error After preparing or executing a query, this call gives you the number of columns in the query. ifx_num_rows (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Count the rows already fetched a query int ifx_num_rows (int result_id) Gives the number of rows fetched so far for a query with result_id after a ifx_query() or ifx_do() query. ifx_free_result (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 ) Releases resources for the query int ifx_free_result (int result_id) Releases resources for the query associated with result_id. Returns FALSE on error. 433 Informix ifx_create_char (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Creates an char object int ifx_create_char (string param) Creates an char object. param should be the char content. ifx_free_char (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Deletes the char object int ifx_free_char (int bid) Deletes the charobject for the given char object-id bid. Returns FALSE on error otherwise TRUE. ifx_update_char (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Updates the content of the char object int ifx_update_char (int bid, string content) Updates the content of the char object for the given char object bid. content is a string with new data. Returns FALSE on error otherwise TRUE. ifx_get_char (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Return the content of the char object int ifx_get_char (int bid) Returns the content of the char object for the given char object-id bid. 434 Informix ifx_create_blob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Creates an blob object int ifx_create_blob (int type, int mode, string param) Creates an blob object. type: 1 = TEXT, 0 = BYTE mode: 0 = blob-object holds the content in memory, 1 = blob-object holds the content in file. param: if mode = 0: pointer to the content, if mode = 1: pointer to the filestring. Return FALSE on error, otherwise the new blob object-id. ifx_copy_blob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Duplicates the given blob object int ifx_copy_blob (int bid) Duplicates the given blob object. bid is the ID of the blob object. Returns FALSE on error otherwise the new blob object-id. ifx_free_blob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Deletes the blob object int ifx_free_blob (int bid) Deletes the blobobject for the given blob object-id bid. Returns FALSE on error otherwise TRUE. ifx_get_blob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Return the content of a blob object 435 Informix int ifx_get_blob (int bid) Returns the content of the blob object for the given blob object-id bid. ifx_update_blob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Updates the content of the blob object ifx_update_blob (int bid, string content) Updates the content of the blob object for the given blob object bid. content is a string with new data. Returns FALSE on error otherwise TRUE. ifx_blobinfile_mode (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Set the default blob mode for all select queries void ifx_blobinfile_mode (int mode) Set the default blob mode for all select queries. Mode "0" means save Byte-Blobs in memory, and mode "1" means save Byte-Blobs in a file. ifx_textasvarchar (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Set the default text mode void ifx_textasvarchar (int mode) Sets the default text mode for all select-queries. Mode "0" will return a blob id, and mode "1" will return a varchar with text content. 436 Informix ifx_byteasvarchar (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Set the default byte mode void ifx_byteasvarchar (int mode) Sets the default byte mode for all select-queries. Mode "0" will return a blob id, and mode "1" will return a varchar with text content. ifx_nullformat (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Sets the default return value on a fetch row void ifx_nullformat (int mode) Sets the default return value of a NULL-value on a fetch row. Mode "0" returns "", and mode "1" returns "NULL". ifxus_create_slob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Creates an slob object and opens it int ifxus_create_slob (int mode) Creates an slob object and opens it. Modes: 1 = LO_RDONLY, 2 = LO_WRONLY, 4 = LO_APPEND, 8 = LO_RDWR, 16 = LO_BUFFER, 32 = LO_NOBUFFER -> or-mask. You can also use constants named IFX_LO_RDONLY, IFX_LO_WRONLY etc. Return FALSE on error otherwise the new slob object-id. ifx_free_slob (unknown) Deletes the slob object int ifxus_free_slob (int bid) 437 Informix Deletes the slob object. bid is the Id of the slob object. Returns FALSE on error otherwise TRUE. ifxus_close_slob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Deletes the slob object int ifxus_close_slob (int bid) Deletes the slob object on the given slob object-id bid. Return FALSE on error otherwise TRUE. ifxus_open_slob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Opens an slob object int ifxus_open_slob (long bid, int mode) Opens an slob object. bid should be an existing slob id. Modes: 1 = LO_RDONLY, 2 = LO_WRONLY, 4 = LO_APPEND, 8 = LO_RDWR, 16 = LO_BUFFER, 32 = LO_NOBUFFER -> or-mask. Returns FALSE on error otherwise the new slob object-id. ifxus_tell_slob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Returns the current file or seek position int ifxus_tell_slob (long bid) Returns the current file or seek position of an open slob object bid should be an existing slob id. Return FALSE on error otherwise the seek position. ifxus_seek_slob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Sets the current file or seek position 438 Informix int ifxus_seek_blob (long bid, int mode, long offset) Sets the current file or seek position of an open slob object. bid should be an existing slob id. Modes: 0 = LO_SEEK_SET, 1 = LO_SEEK_CUR, 2 = LO_SEEK_END and offset is an byte offset. Return FALSE on error otherwise the seek position. ifxus_read_slob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Reads nbytes of the slob object int ifxus_read_slob (long bid, long nbytes) Reads nbytes of the slob object. bid is a existing slob id and nbytes is the number of bytes zu read. Return FALSE on error otherwise the string. ifxus_write_slob (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Writes a string into the slob object int ifxus_write_slob (long bid, string content) Writes a string into the slob object. bid is a existing slob id and content the content to write. Return FALSE on error otherwise bytes written. 439 XXX. InterBase functions InterBase is a popular database put out by Borland/Inprise. More information about InterBase is available at http://www.interbase.com/. Oh, by the way, InterBase just joined the open source movement! Note: Full support for InterBase 6 was added in PHP 4.0. 440 ibase_connect (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Open a connection to an InterBase database int ibase_connect (string database [, string username [, string password [, string charset [, int buffers [, int dialect [, string role]]]]]]) Establishes a connection to an InterBase server. The database argument has to be a valid path to database file on the server it resides on. If the server is not local, it must be prefixed with either ’hostname:’ (TCP/IP), ’//hostname/’ (NetBEUI) or ’hostname@’ (IPX/SPX), depending on the connection protocol used. username and password can also be specified with PHP configuration directives ibase.default_user and ibase.default_password. charset is the default character set for a database. buffers is the number of database buffers to allocate for the server-side cache. If 0 or omitted, server chooses its own default. dialect selects the default SQL dialect for any statement executed within a connection, and it defaults to the highest one supported by client libraries. In case a second call is made to ibase_connect() with the same arguments, no new link will be established, but instead, the link identifier of the already opened link will be returned. The link to the server will be closed as soon as the execution of the script ends, unless it’s closed earlier by explicitly calling ibase_close(). Example 1. Ibase_connect() example 1 2 email . "\n"; 8 } 9 ibase_close ($dbh); 10 ?> 11 Note: buffers was added in PHP4-RC2. Note: dialect was added in PHP4-RC2. It is functional only with InterBase 6 and versions higher than that. Note: role was added in PHP4-RC2. It is functional only with InterBase 5 and versions higher than that. 441 InterBase See also: ibase_pconnect(). ibase_pconnect (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Creates an persistent connection to an InterBase database int ibase_connect (string database [, string username [, string password [, string charset [, string role]]]]) ibase_pconnect() acts very much like ibase_connect() with two major differences. First, when connecting, the function will first try to find a (persistent) link that’s already opened with the same parameters. If one is found, an identifier for it will be returned instead of opening a new connection. Second, the connection to the InterBase server will not be closed when the execution of the script ends. Instead, the link will remain open for future use (ibase_close() will not close links established by ibase_pconnect()). This type of link is therefore called ’persistent’. See also ibase_connect() for the meaning of parameters passed to this function. They are exactly the same. ibase_close (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Close a connection to an InterBase database int ibase_close ([int connection_id]) Closes the link to an InterBase database that’s associated with a connection id returned from ibase_connect(). If the connection id is omitted, the last opened link is assumed. Default transaction on link is committed, other transactions are rolled back. ibase_query (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Execute a query on an InterBase database int ibase_query ([int link_identifier, string query [, int bind_args]]) 442 InterBase Performs a query on an InterBase database, returning a result identifier for use with ibase_fetch_row(), ibase_fetch_object(), ibase_free_result() and ibase_free_query(). Note: Although this function supports variable binding to parameter placeholders, there is not very much meaning using this capability with it. For real life use and an example, see ibase_prepare() and ibase_execute(). ibase_fetch_row (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Fetch a row from an InterBase database array ibase_fetch_row (int result_identifier) Returns the next row specified by the result identifier obtained using the ibase_query(). ibase_fetch_object (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Get an object from a InterBase database object ibase_fetch_object (int result_id) Fetches a row as a pseudo-object from a result_id obtained either by ibase_query() or ibase_execute(). 1 2 email . "\n"; 8 } 9 ibase_close ($dbh); 10 ?> 11 See also ibase_fetch_row(). 443 InterBase ibase_free_result (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Free a result set int ibase_free_result (int result_identifier) Free’s a result set the has been created by ibase_query(). ibase_prepare (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Prepare a query for later binding of parameter placeholders and execution int ibase_prepare ([int link_identifier, string query]) Prepare a query for later binding of parameter placeholders and execution (via ibase_execute()). ibase_execute (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Execute a previously prepared query int ibase_execute (int query [, int bind_args]) Execute a query prepared by ibase_prepare(). This is a lot more effective than using ibase_query() if you are repeating a same kind of query several times with only some parameters changing. 1 2 ’Eric’, 5 5 => ’Filip’, 6 7 => ’Larry’ 7 ); 8 9 $query = ibase_prepare("UPDATE FOO SET BAR = ? WHERE BAZ = ?"); 10 11 while (list($baz, $bar) = each($updates)) { 12 ibase_execute($query, $bar, $baz); 13 } 14 ?> 444 InterBase 15 ibase_free_query (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Free memory allocated by a prepared query int ibase_free_query (int query) Free a query prepared by ibase_prepare(). ibase_timefmt (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Sets the format of timestamp, date and time type columns returned from queries int ibase_timefmt (string format [, int columntype]) Sets the format of timestamp, date or time type columns returned from queries. Internally, the columns are formatted by c-function strftime(), so refer to it’s documentation regarding to the format of the string. columntype is one of the constants IBASE_TIMESTAMP, IBASE_DATE and IBASE_TIME. If omitted, defaults to IBASE_TIMESTAMP for backwards compatibility. 1 2 7 You can also set defaults for these formats with PHP configuration directives ibase.timestampformat, ibase.dateformat and ibase.timeformat. Note: columntype was added in PHP 4.0. It has any meaning only with InterBase version 6 and higher. Note: A backwards incompatible change happened in PHP 4.0 when PHP configuration directive ibase.timeformat was renamed to ibase.timestampformat and directives ibase.dateformat and ibase.timeformat were added, so that the names would match better their functionality. 445 InterBase ibase_num_fields (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Get the number of fields in a result set int ibase_num_fields (int result_id) Returns an integer containing the number of fields in a result set. 1 2 0) { 8 while ($row = ibase_fetch_object ($sth)) { 9 print $row->email . "\n"; 10 } 11 } else { 12 die ("No Results were found for your query"); 13 } 14 15 ibase_close ($dbh); 16 ?> 17 See also: ibase_field_info(). Note: Ibase_num_fields() is currently not functional in PHP4. 446 XXXI. LDAP functions Introduction to LDAP LDAP is the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol, and is a protocol used to access "Directory Servers". The Directory is a special kind of database that holds information in a tree structure. The concept is similar to your hard disk directory structure, except that in this context, the root directory is "The world" and the first level subdirectories are "countries". Lower levels of the directory structure contain entries for companies, organisations or places, while yet lower still we find directory entries for people, and perhaps equipment or documents. To refer to a file in a subdirectory on your hard disk, you might use something like /usr/local/myapp/docs The forwards slash marks each division in the reference, and the sequence is read from left to right. The equivalent to the fully qualified file reference in LDAP is the "distinguished name", referred to simply as "dn". An example dn might be. cn=John Smith,ou=Accounts,o=My Company,c=US The comma marks each division in the reference, and the sequence is read from right to left. You would read this dn as .. country = US organization = My Company organizationalUnit = Accounts commonName = John Smith In the same way as there are no hard rules about how you organise the directory structure of a hard disk, a directory server manager can set up any structure that is meaningful for the purpose. However, there are some conventions that are used. The message is that you can not write code to access a directory server unless you know something about its structure, any more than you can use a database without some knowledge of what is available. Complete code example Retrieve information for all entries where the surname starts with "S" from a directory server, displaying an extract with name and email address. Example 1. LDAP search example 1 2 "; 23 24 echo "Getting entries ...

"; 25 $info = ldap_get_entries($ds, $sr); 26 echo "Data for ".$info["count"]." items returned:

"; 27 28 for ($i=0; $i<$info["count"]; $i++) { 29 echo "dn is: ". $info[$i]["dn"] ."
"; 30 echo "first cn entry is: ". $info[$i]["cn"][0] ."
"; 31 echo "first email entry is: ". $info[$i]["mail"][0] ."

"; 32 } 33 34 echo "Closing connection"; 35 ldap_close($ds); 36 37 } else { 38 echo "

Unable to connect to LDAP server

"; 39 } 40 ?> 41 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 // basic sequence with LDAP is connect, bind, search, interpret search // result, close connection echo "

LDAP query test

"; echo "Connecting ..."; $ds=ldap_connect("localhost"); // must be a valid LDAP server! echo "connect result is ".$ds."

"; if ($ds) { echo "Binding ..."; $r=ldap_bind($ds); // this is an "anonymous" bind, typically // read-only access echo "Bind result is echo "Bind result is ".$r."

"; echo "Searching for (sn=S*) ..."; // Search surname entry $sr=ldap_search($ds,"o=My Company, c=US", "sn=S*"); echo "Search result is ".$sr."

"; Using the PHP LDAP calls You will need to get and compile LDAP client libraries from either the University of Michigan ldap-3.3 package or the Netscape Directory SDK. You will also need to recompile PHP with LDAP support enabled before PHP’s LDAP calls will work. Before you can use the LDAP calls you will need to know .. 448 InterBase • • The name or address of the directory server you will use The "base dn" of the server (the part of the world directory that is held on this server, which could be "o=My Company,c=US") Whether you need a password to access the server (many servers will provide read access for an "anonymous bind" but require a password for anything else) • The typical sequence of LDAP calls you will make in an application will follow this pattern: ldap_connect() // establish connection to server | ldap_bind() // anonymous or authenticated "login" | do something like search or update the directory and display the results | ldap_close() // "logout" More Information Lots of information about LDAP can be found at • • • • Netscape (http://developer.netscape.com/tech/directory/) University of Michigan (http://www.umich.edu/~dirsvcs/ldap/index.html) OpenLDAP Project (http://www.openldap.com/) LDAP World (http://elvira.innosoft.com/ldapworld) The Netscape SDK contains a helpful Programmer’s Guide in .html format. 449 ldap_add (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Add entries to LDAP directory int ldap_add (int link_identifier, string dn, array entry) returns true on success and false on error. The ldap_add() function is used to add entries in the LDAP directory. The DN of the entry to be added is specified by dn. Array entry specifies the information about the entry. The values in the entries are indexed by individual attributes. In case of multiple values for an attribute, they are indexed using integers starting with 0. entry["attribute1"] = value entry["attribute2"][0] = value1 entry["attribute2"][1] = value2 Example 1. Complete example with authenticated bind 1 2 450 LDAP ldap_mod_add (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Add attribute values to current attributes int ldap_mod_add (int link_identifier, string dn, array entry) returns true on success and false on error. This function adds attribute(s) to the specified dn. It performs the modification at the attribute level as opposed to the object level. Object-level additions are done by the ldap_add() function. ldap_mod_del (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Delete attribute values from current attributes int ldap_mod_del (int link_identifier, string dn, array entry) returns true on success and false on error. This function removes attribute(s) from the specified dn. It performs the modification at the attribute level as opposed to the object level. Object-level deletions are done by the ldap_del() function. ldap_mod_replace (PHP3 >= 3.0.8, PHP4 ) Replace attribute values with new ones int ldap_mod_replace (int link_identifier, string dn, array entry) returns true on success and false on error. This function replaces attribute(s) from the specified dn. It performs the modification at the attribute level as opposed to the object level. Object-level modifications are done by the ldap_modify() function. ldap_bind (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Bind to LDAP directory 451 LDAP int ldap_bind (int link_identifier [, string bind_rdn [, string bind_password]]) Binds to the LDAP directory with specified RDN and password. Returns true on success and false on error. ldap_bind() does a bind operation on the directory. bind_rdn and bind_password are optional. If not specified, anonymous bind is attempted. ldap_close (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close link to LDAP server int ldap_close (int link_identifier) Returns true on success, false on error. ldap_close() closes the link to the LDAP server that’s associated with the specified link_identifier. This call is internally identical to ldap_unbind(). The LDAP API uses the call ldap_unbind(), so perhaps you should use this in preference to ldap_close(). ldap_connect (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Connect to an LDAP server int ldap_connect ([string hostname [, int port]]) Returns a positive LDAP link identifier on success, or false on error. ldap_connect() establishes a connection to a LDAP server on a specified hostname and port. Both the arguments are optional. If no arguments are specified then the link identifier of the already opened link will be returned. If only hostname is specified, then the port defaults to 389. ldap_count_entries (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Count the number of entries in a search 452 LDAP int ldap_count_entries (int link_identifier, int result_identifier) Returns number of entries in the result or false on error. ldap_count_entries() returns the number of entries stored in the result of previous search operations. result_identifier identifies the internal ldap result. ldap_delete (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Delete an entry from a directory int ldap_delete (int link_identifier, string dn) Returns true on success and false on error. ldap_delete() function delete a particular entry in LDAP directory specified by dn. ldap_dn2ufn (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Convert DN to User Friendly Naming format string ldap_dn2ufn (string dn) ldap_dn2ufn() function is used to turn a DN into a more user-friendly form, stripping off type names. ldap_explode_dn (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Splits DN into its component parts array ldap_explode_dn (string dn, int with_attrib) ldap_explode_dn() function is used to split the a DN returned by ldap_get_dn() and breaks it up into its component parts. Each part is known as Relative Distinguished Name, or RDN. ldap_explode_dn() returns an array of all those components. with_attrib is used to request if the RDNs are returned with only values or their attributes as well. To get RDNs with the attributes (i.e. in attribute=value format) set with_attrib to 0 and to get only values set it to 1. 453 LDAP ldap_first_attribute (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return first attribute string ldap_first_attribute (int link_identifier, int result_entry_identifier, int ber_identifier) Returns the first attribute in the entry on success and false on error. Similar to reading entries, attributes are also read one by one from a particular entry. ldap_first_attribute() returns the first attribute in the entry pointed by the entry identifier. Remaining attributes are retrieved by calling ldap_next_attribute() successively. ber_identifier is the identifier to internal memory location pointer. It is passed by reference. The same ber_identifier is passed to the ldap_next_attribute() function, which modifies that pointer. see also ldap_get_attributes() ldap_first_entry (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Return first result id int ldap_first_entry (int link_identifier, int result_identifier) Returns the result entry identifier for the first entry on success and false on error. Entries in the LDAP result are read sequentially using the ldap_first_entry() and ldap_next_entry() functions. ldap_first_entry() returns the entry identifier for first entry in the result. This entry identifier is then supplied to lap_next_entry() routine to get successive entries from the result. see also ldap_get_entries(). ldap_free_result (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Free result memory int ldap_free_result (int result_identifier) Returns true on success and false on error. 454 LDAP ldap_free_result() frees up the memory allocated internally to store the result and pointed by the result_identifier. All result memory will be automatically freed when the script terminates. Typically all the memory allocated for the ldap result gets freed at the end of the script. In case the script is making successive searches which return large result sets, ldap_free_result() could be called to keep the runtime memory usage by the script low. ldap_get_attributes (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get attributes from a search result entry array ldap_get_attributes (int link_identifier, int result_entry_identifier) Returns a complete entry information in a multi-dimensional array on success and false on error. ldap_get_attributes() function is used to simplify reading the attributes and values from an entry in the search result. The return value is a multi-dimensional array of attributes and values. Having located a specific entry in the directory, you can find out what information is held for that entry by using this call. You would use this call for an application which "browses" directory entries and/or where you do not know the structure of the directory entries. In many applications you will be searching for a specific attribute such as an email address or a surname, and won’t care what other data is held. return_value["count"] = number of attributes in the entry return_value[0] = first attribute return_value[n] = nth attribute return_value["attribute"]["count"] = number of values for attribute return_value["attribute"][0] = first value of the attribute return_value["attribute"][i] = ith value of the attribute Example 1. Show the list of attributes held for a particular directory entry 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 // $ds is the link identifier for the directory // $sr is a valid search result from a prior call to // one of the ldap directory search calls $entry = ldap_first_entry($ds, $sr); 455 LDAP 9 $attrs = ldap_get_attributes($ds, $entry); 10 11 echo $attrs["count"]." attributes held for this entry:

"; 12 13 for ($i=0; $i<$attrs["count"]; $i++) 14 echo $attrs[$i]."
"; 15 see also ldap_first_attribute() and ldap_next_attribute() ldap_get_dn (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the DN of a result entry string ldap_get_dn (int link_identifier, int result_entry_identifier) Returns the DN of the result entry and false on error. ldap_get_dn() function is used to find out the DN of an entry in the result. ldap_get_entries (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get all result entries array ldap_get_entries (int link_identifier, int result_identifier) Returns a complete result information in a multi-dimenasional array on success and false on error. ldap_get_entries() function is used to simplify reading multiple entries from the result and then reading the attributes and multiple values. The entire information is returned by one function call in a multi-dimensional array. The structure of the array is as follows. The attribute index is converted to lowercase. (Attributes are case-insensitive for directory servers, but not when used as array indices) return_value["count"] = number of entries in the result return_value[0] : refers to the details of first entry return_value[i]["dn"] = DN of the ith entry in the result return_value[i]["count"] = number of attributes in ith entry 456 LDAP return_value[i][j] = jth attribute in the ith entry in the result return_value[i]["attribute"]["count"] = number of values for attribute in ith entry return_value[i]["attribute"][j] = jth value of attribute in ith entry see also ldap_first_entry() and ldap_next_entry() ldap_get_values (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get all values from a result entry array ldap_get_values (int link_identifier, int result_entry_identifier, string attribute) Returns an array of values for the attribute on success and false on error. ldap_get_values() function is used to read all the values of the attribute in the entry in the result. entry is specified by the result_entry_identifier. The number of values can be found by indexing "count" in the resultant array. Individual values are accessed by integer index in the array. The first index is 0. This call needs a result_entry_identifier, so needs to be preceded by one of the ldap search calls and one of the calls to get an individual entry. You application will either be hard coded to look for certain attributes (such as "surname" or "mail") or you will have to use the ldap_get_attributes() call to work out what attributes exist for a given entry. LDAP allows more than one entry for an attribute, so it can, for example, store a number of email addresses for one person’s directory entry all labeled with the attribute "mail" return_value["count"] = number of values for attribute return_value[0] = first value of attribute return_value[i] = ith value of attribute Example 1. List all values of the "mail" attribute for a directory entry 1 2 // $ds is a valid link identifier for a directory server 3 4 // $sr is a valid search result from a prior call to 5 // one of the ldap directory search calls 6 457 LDAP 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 // $entry is a valid entry identifier from a prior call to // one of the calls that returns a directory entry $values = ldap_get_values($ds, $entry,"mail"); echo $values["count"]." email addresses for this entry.

"; for ($i=0; $i < $values["count"]; $i++) echo $values[$i]."
"; ldap_get_values_len (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Get all binary values from a result entry array ldap_get_values_len (int link_identifier, int result_entry_identifier, string attribute) Returns an array of values for the attribute on success and false on error. ldap_get_values_len() function is used to read all the values of the attribute in the entry in the result. entry is specified by the result_entry_identifier. The number of values can be found by indexing "count" in the resultant array. Individual values are accessed by integer index in the array. The first index is 0. This function is used exactly like ldap_get_values() except that it handles binary data and not string data. Note: This function was added in 4.0. ldap_list (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Single-level search int ldap_list (int link_identifier, string base_dn, string filter [, array attributes]) Returns a search result identifier or false on error. 458 LDAP ldap_list() performs the search for a specified filter on the directory with the scope LDAP_SCOPE_ONELEVEL. LDAP_SCOPE_ONELEVEL means that the search should only return information that is at the level immediately below the base dn given in the call. (Equivalent to typing "ls" and getting a list of files and folders in the current working directory.) This call takes an optional fourth parameter which is an array of the attributes required. See ldap_search() notes. Example 1. Produce a list of all organizational units of an organization 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 // $ds is a valid link identifier for a directory server $basedn = "o=My Company, c=US"; $justthese = array("ou"); $sr=ldap_list($ds, $basedn, "ou=*", $justthese); $info = ldap_get_entries($ds, $sr); for ($i=0; $i<$info["count"]; $i++) echo $info[$i]["ou"][0] ; ldap_modify (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Modify an LDAP entry int ldap_modify (int link_identifier, string dn, array entry) Returns true on success and false on error. ldap_modify() function is used to modify the existing entries in the LDAP directory. The structure of the entry is same as in ldap_add(). ldap_next_attribute (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the next attribute in result 459 LDAP string ldap_next_attribute (int link_identifier, int result_entry_identifier, int ber_identifier) Returns the next attribute in an entry on success and false on error. ldap_next_attribute() is called to retrieve the attributes in an entry. The internal state of the pointer is maintained by the ber_identifier. It is passed by reference to the function. The first call to ldap_next_attribute() is made with the result_entry_identifier returned from ldap_first_attribute(). see also ldap_get_attributes() ldap_next_entry (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get next result entry int ldap_next_entry (int link_identifier, int result_entry_identifier) Returns entry identifier for the next entry in the result whose entries are being read starting with ldap_first_entry(). If there are no more entries in the result then it returns false. ldap_next_entry() function is used to retrieve the entries stored in the result. Successive calls to the ldap_next_entry() return entries one by one till there are no more entries. The first call to ldap_next_entry() is made after the call to ldap_first_entry() with the result_identifier as returned from the ldap_first_entry(). see also ldap_get_entries() ldap_read (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Read an entry int ldap_read (int link_identifier, string base_dn, string filter [, array attributes]) Returns a search result identifier or false on error. ldap_read() performs the search for a specified filter on the directory with the scope LDAP_SCOPE_BASE. So it is equivalent to reading an entry from the directory. An empty filter is not allowed. If you want to retrieve absolutely all information for this entry, use a filter of "objectClass=*". If you know which entry types are used on the directory server, you might 460 LDAP use an appropriate filter such as "objectClass=inetOrgPerson". This call takes an optional fourth parameter which is an array of the attributes required. See ldap_search() notes. ldap_search (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Search LDAP tree int ldap_search (int link_identifier, string base_dn, string filter [, array attributes]) Returns a search result identifier or false on error. ldap_search() performs the search for a specified filter on the directory with the scope of LDAP_SCOPE_SUBTREE. This is equivalent to searching the entire directory. base_dn specifies the base DN for the directory. There is a optional fourth parameter, that can be added to restrict the attributes and values returned by the server to just those required. This is much more efficient than the default action (which is to return all attributes and their associated values). The use of the fourth parameter should therefore be considered good practice. The fourth parameter is a standard PHP string array of the required attributes, eg array("mail","sn","cn") Note that the "dn" is always returned irrespective of which attributes types are requested. Note too that some directory server hosts will be configured to return no more than a preset number of entries. If this occurs, the server will indicate that it has only returned a partial results set. The search filter can be simple or advanced, using boolean operators in the format described in the LDAP doumentation (see the Netscape Directory SDK (http://developer.netscape.com/tech/directory/) for full information on filters). The example below retrieves the organizational unit, surname, given name and email address for all people in "My Company" where the surname or given name contains the substring $person. This example uses a boolean filter to tell the server to look for information in more than one attribute. Example 1. LDAP search 1 2 // $ds is a valid link identifier for a directory server 3 4 // $person is all or part of a person’s name, eg "Jo" 5 6 $dn = "o=My Company, c=US"; 461 LDAP 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 $filter="(|(sn=$person*)(givenname=$person*))"; $justthese = array( "ou", "sn", "givenname", "mail"); $sr=ldap_search($ds, $dn, $filter, $justthese); $info = ldap_get_entries($ds, $sr); print $info["count"]." entries returned

"; ldap_unbind (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Unbind from LDAP directory int ldap_unbind (int link_identifier) Returns true on success and false on error. ldap_unbind() function unbinds from the LDAP directory. ldap_err2str (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Convert LDAP error number into string error message string ldap_err2str (int errno) returns string error message. This function returns the string error message explaining the error number errno. While LDAP errno numbers are standardized, different libraries return different or even localized textual error messages. Never check for a specific error message text, but always use an error number to check. See also ldap_errno() and ldap_error(). Example 1. Enumerating all LDAP error messages 1 2 \n", ldap_str2err($i)); 5 } 462 LDAP 6 ?> 7 ldap_errno (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Return the LDAP error number of the last LDAP command int ldap_errno (int link_id) return the LDAP error number of the last LDAP command for this link. This function returns the standardized error number returned by the last LDAP command for the given link identifier. This number can be converted into a textual error message using ldap_err2str(). Unless you lower your warning level in your php3.ini sufficiently or prefix your LDAP commands with @ (at) characters to suppress warning output, the errors generated will also show up in your HTML output. Example 1. Generating and catching an error 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 \n", ldap_errno($ld)); printf("LDAP-Error: %s
\n", ldap_error($ld)); die("Argh!
\n"); } $info = ldap_get_entries($ld, $res); printf("%d matching entries.
\n", $info["count"]); ?> see also ldap_err2str() and ldap_error(). 463 LDAP ldap_error (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0RC2) Return the LDAP error message of the last LDAP command string ldap_error (int link_id) returns string error message. This function returns the string error message explaining the error generated by the last LDAP command for the given link identifier. While LDAP errno numbers are standardized, different libraries return different or even localized textual error messages. Never check for a specific error message text, but always use an error number to check. Unless you lower your warning level in your php3.ini sufficiently or prefix your LDAP commands with @ (at) characters to suppress warning output, the errors generated will also show up in your HTML output. see also ldap_err2str() and ldap_errno(). 464 XXXII. Mail functions The mail() function allows you to send mail. 465 mail (PHP3 , PHP4 ) send mail bool mail (string to, string subject, string message [, string additional_headers]) Mail() automatically mails the message specified in message to the receiver specified in to. Multiple recipients can be specified by putting a comma between each address in to. Example 1. Sending mail. 1 2 mail("rasmus@lerdorf.on.ca", "My Subject", "Line 1\nLine 2\nLine 3"); 3 If a fourth string argument is passed, this string is inserted at the end of the header. This is typically used to add extra headers. Multiple extra headers are separated with a newline. Example 2. Sending mail with extra headers. 1 2 mail("nobody@aol.com", "the subject", $message, 3 "From: webmaster@$SERVER_NAME\nReply- To: webmaster@$SERVER_NAME\nX-Mailer: PHP/" . phpversion()); 4 466 XXXIII. Mathematical functions Introduction These math functions will only handle values within the range of the long and double types on your computer. If you need to handle bigger numbers, take a look at the arbitrary precision math functions. Math constants The following values are defined as constants in PHP by the math extension: Table 1. Math constants Constant M_PI M_E M_LOG2E M_LOG10E M_LN2 M_LN10 M_PI_2 M_PI_4 M_1_PI M_2_PI M_2_SQRTPI M_SQRT2 M_SQRT1_2 Value 3.14159265358979323846 2.7182818284590452354 1.4426950408889634074 0.43429448190325182765 0.69314718055994530942 2.30258509299404568402 1.57079632679489661923 0.78539816339744830962 0.31830988618379067154 0.63661977236758134308 1.12837916709551257390 1.41421356237309504880 0.70710678118654752440 Description Der Wert π (Pi) e log_2 e log_10 e log_e 2 log_e 10 pi/2 pi/4 1/pi 2/pi 2/sqrt(pi) sqrt(2) 1/sqrt(2) Only M_PI is available in PHP versions up to and including PHP4RC1. All other constants are available starting with PHP4.0. 467 Abs (unknown) absolute value mixed abs (mixed number) Returns the absolute value of number. If the argument number is float, return type is also float, otherwise it is int. Acos (unknown) arc cosine float acos (float arg) Returns the arc cosine of arg in radians. See also asin() and atan(). Asin (unknown) arc sine float asin (float arg) Returns the arc sine of arg in radians. See also acos() and atan(). Atan (unknown) arc tangent float atan (float arg) Returns the arc tangent of arg in radians. 468 Math. See also asin() and acos(). Atan2 (unknown) arc tangent of two variables float atan2 (float y, float x) This function calculates the arc tangent of the two variables x and y. It is similar to calculating the arc tangent of y / x, except that the signs of both arguments are used to determine the quadrant of the result. The function returns the result in radians, which is between -PI and PI (inclusive). See also acos() and atan(). base_convert (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) convert a number between arbitrary bases strin base_convert (string number, int frombase, int tobase) Returns a string containing number represented in base tobase. The base in which number is given is specified in frombase. Both frombase and tobase have to be between 2 and 36, inclusive. Digits in numbers with a base higher than 10 will be represented with the letters a-z, with a meaning 10, b meaning 11 and z meaning 36. Example 1. base_convert() 1 2 $binary = base_convert($hexadecimal, 16, 2); 3 BinDec (unknown) binary to decimal 469 Math. int bindec (string binary_string) Returns the decimal equivalent of the binary number represented by the binary_string argument. OctDec converts a binary number to a decimal number. The largest number that can be converted is 31 bits of 1’s or 2147483647 in decimal. See also the decbin() function. Ceil (unknown) round fractions up int ceil (float number) Returns the next highest integer value from number. Using ceil() on integers is absolutely a waste of time. NOTE: PHP/FI 2’s ceil() returned a float. Use: $new = (double)ceil($number); to get the old behaviour. See also floor() and round(). Cos (unknown) cosine float cos (float arg) Returns the cosine of arg in radians. See also sin() and tan(). DecBin (unknown) decimal to binary string decbin (int number) 470 Math. Returns a string containing a binary representation of the given number argument. The largest number that can be converted is 2147483647 in decimal resulting to a string of 31 1’s. See also the bindec() function. DecHex (unknown) decimal to hexadecimal string dechex (int number) Returns a string containing a hexadecimal representation of the given number argument. The largest number that can be converted is 2147483647 in decimal resulting to "7fffffff". See also the hexdec() function. DecOct (unknown) decimal to octal string decoct (int number) Returns a string containing an octal representation of the given number argument. The largest number that can be converted is 2147483647 in decimal resulting to "17777777777". See also octdec(). deg2rad (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Converts the number in degrees to the radian equivalent double deg2rad (double number) This function converts number from degrees to the radian equivalent. See also rad2deg(). 471 Math. Exp (unknown) e to the power of... float exp (float arg) Returns e raised to the power of arg. See also pow(). Floor (unknown) round fractions down int floor (float number) Returns the next lowest integer value from number. Using floor() on integers is absolutely a waste of time. NOTE: PHP/FI 2’s floor() returned a float. Use: $new = (double)floor($number); to get the old behaviour. See also ceil() and round(). getrandmax (PHP3 , PHP4 ) show largest possible random value int getrandmax (void) Returns the maximum value that can be returned by a call to rand(). See also rand(), srand() mt_rand(), mt_srand() and mt_getrandmax(). HexDec (unknown) hexadecimal to decimal 472 Math. int hexdec (string hex_string) Returns the decimal equivalent of the hexadecimal number represented by the hex_string argument. HexDec converts a hexadecimal string to a decimal number. The largest number that can be converted is 7fffffff or 2147483647 in decimal. See also the dechex() function. Log (unknown) natural logarithm float log (float arg) Returns the natural logarithm of arg. Log10 (unknown) base-10 logarithm float log10 (float arg) Returns the base-10 logarithm of arg. max (PHP3 , PHP4 ) find highest value mixed max (mixed arg1, mixed arg2, mixed argn) max() returns the numerically highest of the parameter values. If the first parameter is an array, max() returns the highest value in that array. If the first parameter is an integer, string or double, you need at least two parameters and max() returns the biggest of these values. You can compare an unlimited number of values. 473 Math. If one or more of the values is a double, all the values will be treated as doubles, and a double is returned. If none of the values is a double, all of them will be treated as integers, and an integer is returned. min (PHP3 , PHP4 ) find lowest value mixed min (mixed arg1, mixed arg2, mixed argn) min() returns the numerically lowest of the parameter values. If the first parameter is an array, min() returns the lowest value in that array. If the first parameter is an integer, string or double, you need at least two parameters and min() returns the lowest of these values. You can compare an unlimited number of values. If one or more of the values is a double, all the values will be treated as doubles, and a double is returned. If none of the values is a double, all of them will be treated as integers, and an integer is returned. mt_rand (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) generate a better random value int mt_rand ([int min [, int max]]) Many random number generators of older libcs have dubious or unknown characteristics and are slow. By default, PHP uses the libc random number generator with the rand() function. mt_rand() function is a drop-in replacement for this. It uses a random number generator with known characteristics, the Mersenne Twister, which will produce random numbers that should be suitable for cryptographic purposes and is four times faster than what the average libc provides. The Homepage of the Mersenne Twister can be found at http://www.math.keio.ac.jp/~matumoto/emt.html, and an optimized version of the MT source is available from http://www.scp.syr.edu/~marc/hawk/twister.html. If called without the optional min, max arguments mt_rand() returns a pseudo-random value between 0 and RAND_MAX. If you want a random number between 5 and 15 (inclusive), for example, use mt_rand (5, 15). Remember to seed the random number generator before use with mt_srand(). 474 Math. Note: In versions before 3.0.7 the meaning of max was range. To get the same results in these versions the short example should be mt_rand (5, 11) to get a random number between 5 und 15. See also mt_srand(), mt_getrandmax(), srand(), rand() and getrandmax(). mt_srand (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) seed the better random number generator void mt_srand (int seed) Seeds the random number generator with seed. 1 2 // seed with microseconds since last "whole" second 3 mt_srand((double)microtime()*1000000); 4 $randval = mt_rand(); 5 See also mt_rand(), mt_getrandmax(), srand(), rand() and getrandmax(). mt_getrandmax (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) show largest possible random value int mt_getrandmax (void) Returns the maximum value that can be returned by a call to mt_rand(). See also mt_rand(), mt_srand() rand(), srand() and getrandmax(). number_format (PHP3 , PHP4 ) format a number with grouped thousands 475 Math. string number_format (float number, int decimals, string dec_point, string thousands_sep) number_format() returns a formatted version of number. This function accepts either one, two or four parameters (not three): If only one parameter is given, number will be formatted without decimals, but with a comma (",") between every group of thousands. If two parameters are given, number will be formatted with decimals decimals with a dot (".") in front, and a comma (",") between every group of thousands. If all four parameters are given, number will be formatted with decimals decimals, dec_point instead of a dot (".") before the decimals and thousands_sep instead of a comma (",") between every group of thousands. OctDec (unknown) octal to decimal int octdec (string octal_string) Returns the decimal equivalent of the octal number represented by the octal_string argument. OctDec converts an octal string to a decimal number. The largest number that can be converted is 17777777777 or 2147483647 in decimal. See also decoct(). pi (PHP3 , PHP4 ) get value of pi double pi (void) Returns an approximation of pi. 476 Math. pow (PHP3 , PHP4 ) exponential expression float pow (float base, float exp) Returns base raised to the power of exp. See also exp(). rad2deg (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Converts the radian number to the equivalent number in degrees double rad2deg (double number) This function converts number from radian to degrees. See also deg2rad(). rand (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Generate a random value int rand ([int min [, int max]]) If called without the optional min, max arguments rand() returns a pseudo-random value between 0 and RAND_MAX. If you want a random number between 5 and 15 (inclusive), for example, use rand (5, 15). Remember to seed the random number generator before use with srand(). Note: In versions before 3.0.7 the meaning of max was range. To get the same results in these versions the short example should be rand (5, 11) to get a random number between 5 und 15. See also srand(), getrandmax(), mt_rand(), mt_srand() and mt_getrandmax(). 477 Math. round (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Rounds a float. double round (double val) Returns the rounded value of val. 1 2 $foo = round( 3.4 ); 3 $foo = round( 3.5 ); 4 $foo = round( 3.6 ); 5 // $foo == 3.0 // $foo == 4.0 // $foo == 4.0 See also ceil() and floor(). Sin (unknown) sine float sin (float arg) Returns the sine of arg in radians. See also cos() and tan(). Sqrt (unknown) square root float sqrt (float arg) Returns the square root of arg. 478 Math. srand (PHP3 , PHP4 ) seed the random number generator void srand (int seed) Seeds the random number generator with seed. 1 2 // seed with microseconds since last "whole" second 3 srand((double)microtime()*1000000); 4 $randval = rand(); 5 See also rand(), getrandmax(), mt_rand(), mt_srand() and mt_getrandmax(). Tan (unknown) tangent float tan (float arg) Returns the tangent of arg in radians. See also sin() and cos(). 479 XXXIV. MCAL functions MCAL stands for Modular Calendar Access Library. Libmcal is a C library for accessing calendars. It’s written to be very modular, with plugable drivers. MCAL is the calendar equivalent of the IMAP module for mailboxes. With mcal support, a calendar stream can be opened much like the mailbox stream with the IMAP support. Calendars can be local file stores, remote ICAP servers, or other formats that are supported by the mcal library. Calendar events can be pulled up, queried, and stored. There is also support for calendar triggers (alarms) and reoccuring events. With libmcal, central calendar servers can be accessed and used, removing the need for any specific database or local file programming. To get these functions to work, you have to compile PHP with --with-mcal. That requires the mcal library to be installed. Grab the latest version from http://mcal.chek.com/ and compile and install it. The following constants are defined when using the MCAL module: MCAL_SUNDAY, MCAL_MONDAY, MCAL_TUESDAY, MCAL_WEDNESDAY, MCAL_THURSDAY, MCAL_FRIDAY, MCAL_SATURDAY, MCAL_RECUR_NONE, MCAL_RECUR_DAILY, MCAL_RECUR_WEEKLY, MCAL_RECUR_MONTHLY_MDAY, MCAL_RECUR_MONTHLY_WDAY, MCAL_RECUR_YEARLY, MCAL_JANUARY, MCAL_FEBRUARY, MCAL_MARCH, MCAL_APRIL, MCAL_MAY, MCAL_JUNE, MCAL_JULY, MCAL_AUGUGT, MCAL_SEPTEMBER, MCAL_OCTOBER, MCAL_NOVEMBER, and MCAL_DECEMBER. Most of the functions use an internal event structure that is unique for each stream. This alleviates the need to pass around large objects between functions. There are convenience functions for setting, initializing, and retrieving the event structure values. 480 mcal_open (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Opens up an MCAL connection int mcal_open (string calendar, string username, string password, string options) Returns an MCAL stream on success, false on error. mcal_open() opens up an MCAL connection to the specified calendar store. If the optional options is specified, passes the options to that mailbox also. The streams internal event structure is also initialized upon connection. mcal_close (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Close an MCAL stream int mcal_close (int mcal_stream, int flags) Closes the given mcal stream. mcal_fetch_event (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Fetches an event from the calendar stream object mcal_fetch_event (int mcal_stream, int event_id [, int options]) mcal_fetch_event() fetches an event from the calendar stream specified by id. Returns an event object consisting of: • • • • • int id - ID of that event. int public - TRUE if the event if public, FALSE if it is private. string category - Category string of the event. string title - Title string of the event. string description - Description string of the event. 481 MCAL • • • • • • • int alarm - number of minutes before the event to send an alarm/reminder. object start - Object containing a datetime entry. object end - Object containing a datetime entry. int recur_type - recurrence type int recur_interval - recurrence interval datetime recur_enddate - recurrence end date int recur_data - recurrence data All datetime entries consist of an object that contains: • • • • • • • int year - year int month - month int mday - day of month int hour - hour int min - minutes int sec - seconds int alarm - minutes before event to send an alarm mcal_list_events (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Return a list of events between two given datetimes array mcal_list_events (int mcal_stream [, int begin_year [, int begin_month [, int begin_day [, int end_year [, int end_month [, int end_day]]]]]]) Returns an array of event ID’s that are between the start and end dates, or if just a stream is given, uses the start and end dates in the global event structure. mcal_list_events() function takes in an optional beginning date and an end date for a calendar stream. An array of event id’s that are between the given dates or the internal event dates are returned. mcal_append_event (PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Store a new event into an MCAL calendar 482 MCAL int mcal_append_event (int mcal_stream) mcal_append_event() Stores the global event into an MCAL calendar for the given stream. Returns the uid of the newly inserted event. mcal_store_event (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Modify an existing event in an MCAL calendar int mcal_store_event (int mcal_stream) mcal_store_event() Stores the modifications to the current global event for the given stream. Returns true on success and false on error. mcal_delete_event (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Delete an event from an MCAL calendar int mcal_delete_event (int uid) mcal_delete_event() deletes the calendar event specified by the uid. Returns true. mcal_snooze (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Turn off an alarm for an event int mcal_snooze (int uid) mcal_snooze() turns off an alarm for a calendar event specified by the uid. Returns true. 483 MCAL mcal_list_alarms (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Return a list of events that has an alarm triggered at the given datetime array mcal_list_events (int mcal_stream [, int begin_year [, int begin_month [, int begin_day [, int end_year [, int end_month [, int end_day]]]]]]) Returns an array of event ID’s that has an alarm going off between the start and end dates, or if just a stream is given, uses the start and end dates in the global event structure. mcal_list_events() function takes in an optional beginning date and an end date for a calendar stream. An array of event id’s that are between the given dates or the internal event dates are returned. mcal_event_init (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Initializes a streams global event structure int mcal_event_init (int stream) mcal_event_init() initializes a streams global event structure. this effectively sets all elements of the structure to 0, or the default settings. Returns true. mcal_event_set_category (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the category of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_category (int stream, string category) mcal_event_set_category() sets the streams global event structure’s category to the given string. Returns true. 484 MCAL mcal_event_set_title (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the title of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_title (int stream, string title) mcal_event_set_title() sets the streams global event structure’s title to the given string. Returns true. mcal_event_set_description (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the description of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_description (int stream, string description) mcal_event_set_description() sets the streams global event structure’s description to the given string. Returns true. mcal_event_set_start (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the start date and time of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_start (int stream, int year, int month [, int day [, int hour [, int min [, int sec]]]]) mcal_event_set_start() sets the streams global event structure’s start date and time to the given values. Returns true. mcal_event_set_end (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the end date and time of the streams global event structure 485 MCAL int mcal_event_set_end (int stream, int year, int month [, int day [, int hour [, int min [, int sec]]]]) mcal_event_set_end() sets the streams global event structure’s end date and time to the given values. Returns true. mcal_event_set_alarm (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the alarm of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_alarm (int stream, int alarm) mcal_event_set_alarm() sets the streams global event structure’s alarm to the given minutes before the event. Returns true. mcal_event_set_class (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the class of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_class (int stream, int class) mcal_event_set_class() sets the streams global event structure’s class to the given value. The class is either 1 for public, or 0 for private. Returns true. mcal_is_leap_year (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns if the given year is a leap year or not int mcal_is_leap_year (int year) mcal_is_leap_year() returns 1 if the given year is a leap year, 1 if not. 486 MCAL mcal_days_in_month (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the number of days in the given month int mcal_days_in_month (int month, int leap year) mcal_days_in_month() Returns the number of days in the given month, taking into account if the given year is a leap year or not. mcal_date_valid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns true if the given year, month, day is a valid date int mcal_date_valid (int year, int month, int day) mcal_date_valid() Returns true if the given year, month and day is a valid date, false if not. mcal_time_valid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns true if the given year, month, day is a valid time int mcal_time_valid (int hour, int minutes, int seconds) mcal_time_valid() Returns true if the given hour, minutes and seconds is a valid time, false if not. mcal_day_of_week (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the day of the week of the given date int mcal_ (int year, int month, int day) mcal_day_of_week() returns the day of the week of the given date 487 MCAL mcal_day_of_year (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the day of the year of the given date int mcal_ (int year, int month, int day) mcal_day_of_year() returns the day of the year of the given date mcal_date_compare (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Compares two dates int mcal_date_compare (int a_year, int a_month, int a_day, int b_year, int b_month, int b_day) mcal_date_compare() Compares the two given dates, returns <0, 0, >0 if ab respectively mcal_next_recurrence (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the next recurrence of the event int mcal_next_recurrence (int stream, int weekstart, array next) mcal_next_recurrence() returns an object filled with the next date the event occurs, on or after the supplied date. Returns empty date field if event does not occur or something is invalid. Uses weekstart to determine what day is considered the beginning of the week. mcal_event_set_recur_none (PHP3 >= 3.0.15, PHP4 >= 4.0RC1) Sets the recurrence of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_recur_none (int stream) 488 MCAL mcal_event_set_recur_none() sets the streams global event structure to not recur (event->recur_type is set to MCAL_RECUR_NONE). mcal_event_set_recur_daily (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the recurrence of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_recur_daily int interval) (int stream, int year, int month, int day, mcal_event_set_recur_daily() sets the streams global event structure’s recurrence to the given value to be reoccuring on a daily basis, ending at the given date. mcal_event_set_recur_weekly (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the recurrence of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_recur_weekly (int stream, int year, int month, int day, int interval, int weekdays) mcal_event_set_recur_weekly() sets the streams global event structure’s recurrence to the given value to be reoccuring on a weekly basis, ending at the given date. mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_mday (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the recurrence of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_mday int day, int interval) (int stream, int year, int month, mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_mday() sets the streams global event structure’s recurrence to the given value to be reoccuring on a monthly by month day basis, ending at the given date. 489 MCAL mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_wday (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the recurrence of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_wday int day, int interval) (int stream, int year, int month, mcal_event_set_recur_monthly_wday() sets the streams global event structure’s recurrence to the given value to be reoccuring on a monthly by week basis, ending at the given date. mcal_event_set_recur_yearly (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Sets the recurrence of the streams global event structure int mcal_event_set_recur_yearly day, int interval) (int stream, int year, int month, int mcal_event_set_recur_yearly() sets the streams global event structure’s recurrence to the given value to be reoccuring on a yearly basis,ending at the given date . mcal_fetch_current_stream_event (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns an object containing the current streams event structure int mcal_fetch_current_stream_event (int stream) mcal_event_fetch_current_stream_event() returns the current stream’s event structure as an object containing: • • • • • • • int id - ID of that event. int public - TRUE if the event if public, FALSE if it is private. string category - Category string of the event. string title - Title string of the event. string description - Description string of the event. int alarm - number of minutes before the event to send an alarm/reminder. object start - Object containing a datetime entry. 490 MCAL • • • • • object end - Object containing a datetime entry. int recur_type - recurrence type int recur_interval - recurrence interval datetime recur_enddate - recurrence end date int recur_data - recurrence data All datetime entries consist of an object that contains: • • • • • • • int year - year int month - month int mday - day of month int hour - hour int min - minutes int sec - seconds int alarm - minutes before event to send an alarm 491 XXXV. Microsoft SQL Server functions 492 mssql_close (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close MS SQL Server connection int mssql_close ([int link_identifier]) Returns: true on success, false on error. Mssql_close() closes the link to a MS SQL Server database that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. Note that this isn’t usually necessary, as non-persistent open links are automatically closed at the end of the script’s execution. Mssql_close() will not close persistent links generated by mssql_pconnect(). See also: mssql_connect(), mssql_pconnect(). mssql_connect (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open MS SQL server connection int mssql_connect ([string servername [, string username [, string password]]]) Returns: A positive MS SQL link identifier on success, or false on error. Mssql_connect() establishes a connection to a MS SQL server. The servername argument has to be a valid servername that is defined in the ’interfaces’ file. In case a second call is made to mssql_connect() with the same arguments, no new link will be established, but instead, the link identifier of the already opened link will be returned. The link to the server will be closed as soon as the execution of the script ends, unless it’s closed earlier by explicitly calling mssql_close(). See also mssql_pconnect(), mssql_close(). mssql_data_seek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Move internal row pointer 493 MS SQL Server int mssql_data_seek (int result_identifier, int row_number) Returns: true on success, false on failure. Mssql_data_seek() moves the internal row pointer of the MS SQL result associated with the specified result identifier to pointer to the specifyed row number. The next call to mssql_fetch_row() would return that row. See also: mssql_data_seek(). mssql_fetch_array (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch row as array int mssql_fetch_array (int result) Returns: An array that corresponds to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. Mssql_fetch_array() is an extended version of mssql_fetch_row(). In addition to storing the data in the numeric indices of the result array, it also stores the data in associative indices, using the field names as keys. An important thing to note is that using mssql_fetch_array() is NOT significantly slower than using mssql_fetch_row(), while it provides a significant added value. For further details, also see mssql_fetch_row(). mssql_fetch_field (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get field information object mssql_fetch_field (int result [, int field_offset]) Returns an object containing field information. Mssql_fetch_field() can be used in order to obtain information about fields in a certain query result. If the field offset isn’t specified, the next field that wasn’t yet retreived by mssql_fetch_field() is retreived. The properties of the object are: 494 MS SQL Server • name - column name. if the column is a result of a function, this property is set to computed#N, where #N is a serial number. column_source - the table from which the column was taken max_length - maximum length of the column numeric - 1 if the column is numeric • • • See also mssql_field_seek(). mssql_fetch_object (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch row as object int mssql_fetch_object (int result) Returns: An object with properties that correspond to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. Mssql_fetch_object() is similar to mssql_fetch_array(), with one difference - an object is returned, instead of an array. Indirectly, that means that you can only access the data by the field names, and not by their offsets (numbers are illegal property names). Speed-wise, the function is identical to mssql_fetch_array(), and almost as quick as mssql_fetch_row() (the difference is insignificant). See also: mssql_fetch-array() and mssql_fetch-row(). mssql_fetch_row (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get row as enumerated array array mssql_fetch_row (int result) Returns: An array that corresponds to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. Mssql_fetch_row() fetches one row of data from the result associated with the specified result identifier. The row is returned as an array. Each result column is stored in an array offset, starting at offset 0. Subsequent call to mssql_fetch_rows() would return the next row in the result set, or false if there are no more rows. 495 MS SQL Server See also: mssql_fetch_array(), mssql_fetch_object(), mssql_data_seek(), mssql_fetch_lengths(), and mssql_result(). mssql_field_length (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get the length of a field int mssql_field_length (int result [, int offset]) mssql_field_name (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get the name of a field int mssql_field_name (int result [, int offset]) mssql_field_seek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set field offset int mssql_field_seek (int result, int field_offset) Seeks to the specified field offset. If the next call to mssql_fetch_field() won’t include a field offset, this field would be returned. See also: mssql_fetch_field(). mssql_field_type (PHP3 >= 3.0.3, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get the type of a field string mssql_field_type (int result [, int offset]) 496 MS SQL Server mssql_free_result (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Free result memory int mssql_free_result (int result) mssql_free_result() only needs to be called if you are worried about using too much memory while your script is running. All result memory will automatically be freed when the script, you may call mssql_free_result() with the result identifier as an argument and the associated result memory will be freed. mssql_get_last_message (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Returns the last message from server (over min_message_severity?) string mssql_get_last_message (void ) mssql_min_error_severity (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Sets the lower error severity void mssql_min_error_severity (int severity) mssql_min_message_severity (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Sets the lower message severity void mssql_min_message_severity (int severity) 497 MS SQL Server mssql_num_fields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of fields in result int mssql_num_fields (int result) Mssql_num_fields() returns the number of fields in a result set. See also: mssql_db_query(), mssql_query(), mssql_fetch_field(), and mssql_num_rows(). mssql_num_rows (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of rows in result int mssql_num_rows (string result) Mssql_num_rows() returns the number of rows in a result set. See also: mssql_db_query(), mssql_query(), and mssql_fetch_row(). mssql_pconnect (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open persistent MS SQL connection int mssql_pconnect ([string servername [, string username [, string password]]]) Returns: A positive MS SQL persistent link identifier on success, or false on error. Mssql_pconnect() acts very much like mssql_connect() with two major differences. First, when connecting, the function would first try to find a (persistent) link that’s already open with the same host, username and password. If one is found, an identifier for it will be returned instead of opening a new connection. Second, the connection to the SQL server will not be closed when the execution of the script ends. Instead, the link will remain open for future use (mssql_close() will not close links established by mssql_pconnect()). This type of links is therefore called ’persistent’. 498 MS SQL Server mssql_query (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Send MS SQL query int mssql_query (string query [, int link_identifier]) Returns: A positive MS SQL result identifier on success, or false on error. Mssql_query() sends a query to the currently active database on the server that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. If no link is open, the function tries to establish a link as if mssql_connect() was called, and use it. See also: mssql_db_query(), mssql_select_db(), and mssql_connect(). mssql_result (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get result data int mssql_result (int result, int i, mixed field) Returns: The contents of the cell at the row and offset in the specified MS SQL result set. Mssql_result() returns the contents of one cell from a MS SQL result set. The field argument can be the field’s offset, or the field’s name, or the field’s table dot field’s name (fieldname.tablename). If the column name has been aliased (’select foo as bar from...’), use the alias instead of the column name. When working on large result sets, you should consider using one of the functions that fetch an entire row (specified below). As these functions return the contents of multiple cells in one function call, they’re MUCH quicker than mssql_result(). Also, note that specifying a numeric offset for the field argument is much quicker than specifying a fieldname or tablename.fieldname argument. Recommended high-performance alternatives: mssql_fetch_row(), mssql_fetch_array(), and mssql_fetch_object(). mssql_select_db (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Select MS SQL database int mssql_select_db (string database_name [, int link_identifier]) 499 MS SQL Server Returns: true on success, false on error Mssql_select_db() sets the current active database on the server that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If no link identifier is specified, the last opened link is assumed. If no link is open, the function will try to establish a link as if mssql_connect() was called, and use it. Every subsequent call to mssql_query() will be made on the active database. See also: mssql_connect(), mssql_pconnect(), and mssql_query() 500 XXXVI. Miscellaneous functions These functions were placed here because none of the other categories seemed to fit. 501 connection_aborted (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns true if client disconnected int connection_aborted (void ) Returns true if client disconnected. See the Connection Handling description in the Features chapter for a complete explanation. connection_status (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns connection status bitfield int connection_status (void ) Returns the connection status bitfield. See the Connection Handling description in the Features chapter for a complete explanation. connection_timeout (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Return true if script timed out int connection_timeout (void ) Returns true if script timed out. See the Connection Handling description in the Features chapter for a complete explanation. define (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Defines a named constant. int define (string name, mixed value [, int case_insensitive]) Defines a named constant, which is similar to a variable except: 502 Misc. • • • • Constants do not have a dollar sign ’$’ before them; Constants may be accessed anywhere without regard to variable scoping rules; Constants may not be redefined or undefined once they have been set; and Constants may only evaluate to scalar values. The name of the constant is given by name; the value is given by value. The optional third parameter case_insensitive is also available. If the value 1 is given, then the constant will be defined case-insensitive. The default behaviour is case-sensitive; i.e. CONSTANT and Constant represent different values. Example 1. Defining Constants 1 2 3 4 5 6 Define() returns TRUE on success and FALSE if an error occurs. See also defined() and the section on Constants. defined (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Checks whether a given named constant exists int defined (string name) Returns true if the named constant given by name has been defined, false otherwise. See also define() and the section on Constants. die (unknown) Output a message and terminate the current script void die (string message) 503 Misc. This language construct outputs a message and terminates parsing of the script. It does not return anything. Example 1. die example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 See also exit(). eval (unknown) Evaluate a string as PHP code void eval (string code_str) eval() evaluates the string given in code_str as PHP code. Among other things, this can be useful for storing code in a database text field for later execution. There are some factors to keep in mind when using eval(). Remember that the string passed must be valid PHP code, including things like terminating statements with a semicolon so the parser doesn’t die on the line after the eval(), and properly escaping things in code_str. Also remember that variables given values under eval() will retain these values in the main script afterwards. Example 1. Eval() example - simple text merge 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ’; echo $str; eval ("\$str = \"$str\";"); echo $str; ?> 504 Misc. The above example will show: 1 2 This is a $string with my $name in it. 3 This is a cup with my coffee in it. 4 exit (unknown) Terminate current script void exit(void); This language construct terminates parsing of the script. It does not return. See also die(). func_get_arg (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Return an item from the argument list int func_get_arg (int arg_num) Returns the argument which is at the arg_num’th offset into a user-defined function’s argument list. Function arguments are counted starting from zero. Func_get_arg() will generate a warning if called from outside of a function definition. If arg_num is greater than the number of arguments actually passed, a warning will be generated and func_get_arg() will return FALSE. 1 2 \n"; 6 if ($numargs >= 2) { 7 echo "Second argument is: " . func_get_arg (1) . "
\n"; 8 } 9 } 10 505 Misc. 11 foo (1, 2, 3); 12 ?> 13 Func_get_arg() may be used in conjunction with func_num_args() and func_get_args() to allow user-defined functions to accept variable-length argument lists. Note: This function was added in PHP 4. func_get_args (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns an array comprising a function’s argument list int func_get_args (void ) Returns an array in which each element is the corresponding member of the current user-defined function’s argument list. Func_get_args() will generate a warning if called from outside of a function definition. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 \n"; if ($numargs >= 2) { echo "Second argument is: " . func_get_arg (1) . "
\n"; } $arg_list = func_get_args(); for ($i = 0; $i < $numargs; $i++) { echo "Argument $i is: " . $arg_list[$i] . "
\n"; } } foo (1, 2, 3); ?> Func_get_args() may be used in conjunction with func_num_args() and func_get_arg() to allow user-defined functions to accept variable-length argument lists. Note: This function was added in PHP 4. 506 Misc. func_num_args (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns the number of arguments passed to the function int func_num_args (void ) Returns the number of arguments passed into the current user-defined function. Func_num_args() will generate a warning if called from outside of a function definition. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 // Prints ’Number of arguments: 3’ Func_num_args() may be used in conjunction with func_get_arg() and func_get_args() to allow user-defined functions to accept variable-length argument lists. Note: This function was added in PHP 4. function_exists (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Return true if the given function has been defined int function_exists (string function_name) Checks the list of defined functions for function_name. Returns true if the given function name was found, false otherwise. get_browser (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Tells what the user’s browser is capable of 507 Misc. object get_browser ([string user_agent]) get_browser() attempts to determine the capabilities of the user’s browser. This is done by looking up the browser’s information in the browscap.ini file. By default, the value of $HTTP_USER_AGENT is used; however, you can alter this (i.e., look up another browser’s info) by passing the optional user_agent parameter to get_browser(). The information is returned in an object, which will contain various data elements representing, for instance, the browser’s major and minor version numbers and ID string; true/false values for features such as frames, JavaScript, and cookies; and so forth. While browscap.ini contains information on many browsers, it relies on user updates to keep the database current. The format of the file is fairly self-explanatory. The following example shows how one might list all available information retrieved about the user’s browser. Example 1. Get_browser() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 $key: $value
\n"; } return $str; } echo "$HTTP_USER_AGENT

\n"; $browser = get_browser(); echo list_array ((array) $browser); ?> The output of the above script would look something like this: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 Mozilla/4.5 [en] (X11; U; Linux 2.2.9 i586)
browser_name_pattern: Mozilla/4\.5.*
parent: Netscape 4.0
platform: Unknown
majorver: 4
minorver: 5
browser: Netscape
version: 4
frames: 1
tables: 1
cookies: 1
backgroundsounds:
vbscript:
508 Misc. 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 javascript: 1
javaapplets: 1
activexcontrols:
beta:
crawler:
authenticodeupdate:
msn:
In order for this to work, your browscap configuration file setting must point to the correct location of the browscap.ini file. For more information (including locations from which you may obtain a browscap.ini file), check the PHP FAQ at http://www.php.net/FAQ.php. ignore_user_abort (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Set whether a client disconnect should abort script execution int ignore_user_abort ([int setting]) This function sets whether a client disconnect should cause a script to be aborted. It will return the previous setting and can be called without an argument to not change the current setting and only return the current setting. See the Connection Handling section in the Features chapter for a complete description of connection handling in PHP. iptcparse (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Parse a binary IPTC http://www.xe.net/iptc/ block into single tags. array iptcparse (string iptcblock) This function parses a binary IPTC block into its single tags. It returns an array using the tagmarker as an index and the value as the value. It returns false on error or if no IPTC data was found. See GetImageSize() for a sample. 509 Misc. leak (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Leak memory void leak (int bytes) Leak() leaks the specified amount of memory. This is useful when debugging the memory manager, which automatically cleans up "leaked" memory when each request is completed. pack (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Pack data into binary string. string pack (string format [, mixed args ...]) Pack given arguments into binary string according to format. Returns binary string containing data. The idea to this function was taken from Perl and all formatting codes work the same as there, however, there are some formatting codes that are missing such as Perl’s "u" format code. The format string consists of format codes followed by an optional repeater argument. The repeater argument can be either an integer value or * for repeating to the end of the input data. For a, A, h, H the repeat count specifies how many characters of one data argument are taken, for @ it is the absolute position where to put the next data, for everything else the repeat count specifies how many data arguments are consumed and packed into the resulting binary string. Currently implemented are • • • • • • • • • • a NUL-padded string A SPACE-padded string h Hex string, low nibble first H Hex string, high nibble first c signed char C unsigned char s signed short (always 16 bit, machine byte order) S unsigned short (always 16 bit, machine byte order) n unsigned short (always 16 bit, big endian byte order) v unsigned short (always 16 bit, little endian byte order) 510 Misc. • • • • • • • • • • • i signed integer (machine dependant size and byte order) I unsigned integer (machine dependant size and byte order) l signed long (always 32 bit, machine byte order) L unsigned long (always 32 bit, machine byte order) N unsigned long (always 32 bit, big endian byte order) V unsigned long (always 32 bit, little endian byte order) f float (machine dependent size and representation) d double (machine dependent size and representation) x NUL byte X Back up one byte @ NUL-fill to absolute position Example 1. Pack() format string 1 2 $binarydata = pack ("nvc*", 0x1234, 0x5678, 65, 66); 3 The resulting binary string will be 6 bytes long and contain the byte sequence 0x12, 0x34, 0x78, 0x56, 0x41, 0x42. Note that the distinction between signed and unsigned values only affects the function unpack(), where as function pack() gives the same result for signed and unsigned format codes. Also note that PHP internally stores integral values as signed values of a machine dependant size. If you give it an unsigned integral value too large to be stored that way it is converted to a double which often yields an undesired result. register_shutdown_function (PHP3 >= 3.0.4, PHP4 ) Register a function for execution on shutdown int register_shutdown_function (string func) Registers the function named by func to be executed when script processing is complete. Common Pitfalls: Since no output is allowed to the browser in this function, you will be unable to debug it using statements such as print or echo. 511 Misc. serialize (PHP3 >= 3.0.5, PHP4 ) Generates a storable representation of a value string serialize (mixed value) Serialize() returns a string containing a byte-stream representation of value that can be stored anywhere. This is useful for storing or passing PHP values around without losing their type and structure. To make the serialized string into a PHP value again, use unserialize(). Serialize() handles the types integer, double, string, array (multidimensional) and object (object properties will be serialized, but methods are lost). Example 1. Serialize() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 // $session_data contains a multi-dimensional array with session // information for the current user. We use serialize() to store // it in a database at the end of the request. $conn = odbc_connect ("webdb", "php", "chicken"); $stmt = odbc_prepare ($conn, "UPDATE sessions SET data = ? WHERE id = ?"); $sqldata = array (serialize($session_data), $PHP_AUTH_USER); if (!odbc_execute ($stmt, &$sqldata)) { $stmt = odbc_prepare($conn, "INSERT INTO sessions (id, data) VALUES(?, ?)"); 13 if (!odbc_execute($stmt, &$sqldata)) { 14 /* Something went wrong. Bitch, whine and moan. */ 15 } 16 } 17 sleep (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Delay execution void sleep (int seconds) 512 Misc. The sleep function delays program execution for the given number of seconds. See also usleep(). uniqid (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Generate a unique id int uniqid (string prefix [, boolean lcg]) Uniqid() returns a prefixed unique identifier based on the current time in microseconds. The prefix can be useful for instance if you generate identifiers simultaneously on several hosts that might happen to generate the identifier at the same microsecond. Prefix can be up to 114 characters long. If the optional lcg parameter is true, uniqid() will add additional "combined LCG" entropy at the end of the return value, which should make the results more unique. With an empty prefix, the returned string will be 13 characters long. If lcg is true, it will be 23 characters. Note: The lcg parameter is only available in PHP 4 and PHP 3.0.13 and later. If you need a unique identifier or token and you intend to give out that token to the user via the network (i.e. session cookies), it is recommended that you use something along the lines of 1 2 $token = md5 (uniqid ("")); // no random portion 3 $better_token = md5 (uniqid (rand())); // better, difficult to guess 4 This will create a 32 character identifier (a 128 bit hex number) that is extremely difficult to predict. unpack (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Unpack data from binary string array unpack (string format, string data) Unpack() from binary string into array according to format. Returns array containing unpacked elements of binary string. 513 Misc. Unpack() works slightly different from Perl as the unpacked data is stored in an associative array. To accomplish this you have to name the different format codes and separate them by a slash /. Example 1. Unpack() format string 1 2 $array = unpack ("c2chars/nint", $binarydata); 3 The resulting array will contain the entries "chars1", "chars2" and "int". For an explanation of the format codes see also: pack() Note that PHP internally stores integral values as signed. If you unpack a large unsigned long and it is of the same size as PHP internally stored values the result will be a negative number even though unsigned unpacking was specified. unserialize (PHP3 >= 3.0.5, PHP4 ) Creates a PHP value from a stored representation mixed unserialize (string str) unserialize() takes a single serialized variable (see serialize()) and converts it back into a PHP value. The converted value is returned, and can be an integer, double, string, array or object. If an object was serialized, its methods are not preserved in the returned value. Example 1. Unserialize() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 // Here, we use unserialize() to load session data from a database // into $session_data. This example complements the one described // with serialize(). $conn = odbc_connect ("webdb", "php", "chicken"); $stmt = odbc_prepare ($conn, "SELECT data FROM sessions WHERE id = ?"); $sqldata = array ($PHP_AUTH_USER); if (!odbc_execute ($stmt, &$sqldata) || !odbc_fetch_into ($stmt, &$tmp)) { 10 // if the execute or fetch fails, initialize to empty array 11 $session_data = array(); 12 } else { 13 // we should now have the serialized data in $tmp[0]. 14 $session_data = unserialize ($tmp[0]); 514 Misc. 15 16 17 18 19 } 20 if (!is_array ($session_data)) { // something went wrong, initialize to empty array $session_data = array(); } usleep (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Delay execution in microseconds void usleep (int micro_seconds) The sleep() function delays program execution for the given number of micro_seconds. See also sleep(). Note: This function does not work on Windows systems. 515 XXXVII. mSQL functions 516 msql (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Send mSQL query int msql (string database, string query, int link_identifier) Returns a positive mSQL query identifier to the query result, or false on error. msql() selects a database and executes a query on it. If the optional link identifier isn’t specified, the function will try to find an open link to the mSQL server and if no such link is found it’ll try to create one as if msql_connect() was called with no arguments (see msql_connect()). msql_affected_rows (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Returns number of affected rows int msql_affected_rows (int query_identifier) Returns number of affected ("touched") rows by a specific query (i.e. the number of rows returned by a SELECT, the number of rows modified by an update, or the number of rows removed by a delete). See also: msql_query(). msql_close (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close mSQL connection int msql_close (int link_identifier) Returns true on success, false on error. Msql_close() closes the link to a mSQL database that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. Note that this isn’t usually necessary, as non-persistent open links are automatically closed at the end of the script’s execution. msql_close() will not close persistent links generated by msql_pconnect(). See also: msql_connect() and msql_pconnect(). 517 mSQL msql_connect (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open mSQL connection int msql_connect (string hostname) Returns a positive mSQL link identifier on success, or false on error. Msql_connect() establishes a connection to a mSQL server. The hostname argument is optional, and if it’s missing, localhost is assumed. In case a second call is made to msql_connect() with the same arguments, no new link will be established, but instead, the link identifier of the already opened link will be returned. The link to the server will be closed as soon as the execution of the script ends, unless it’s closed earlier by explicitly calling msql_close(). See also msql_pconnect(), msql_close(). msql_create_db (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Create mSQL database int msql_create_db (string database name [, int link_identifier]) msql_create_db() attempts to create a new database on the server associated with the specified link identifier. See also: msql_drop_db(). msql_createdb (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Create mSQL database int msql_createdb (string database name [, int link_identifier]) Identical to msql_create_db(). 518 mSQL msql_data_seek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Move internal row pointer int msql_data_seek (int query_identifier, int row_number) Returns true on success, false on failure. Msql_data_seek() moves the internal row pointer of the mSQL result associated with the specified query identifier to pointer to the specifyed row number. The next call to msql_fetch_row() would return that row. See also: msql_fetch_row(). msql_dbname (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get current mSQL database name string msql_dbname (int query_identifier, int i) Msql_dbname() returns the database name stored in position i of the result pointer returned from the msql_listdbs() function. The msql_numrows() function can be used to determine how many database names are available. msql_drop_db (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Drop (delete) mSQL database int msql_drop_db (string database_name, int link_identifier) Returns true on success, false on failure. Msql_drop_db() attempts to drop (remove) an entire database from the server associated with the specified link identifier. See also: msql_create_db(). 519 mSQL msql_dropdb (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Drop (delete) mSQL database See msql_drop_db(). msql_error (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Returns error message of last msql call string msql_error () Errors coming back from the mSQL database backend no longer issue warnings. Instead, use these functions to retrieve the error string. msql_fetch_array (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch row as array int msql_fetch_array (int query_identifier [, int result_type]) Returns an array that corresponds to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. msql_fetch_array() is an extended version of msql_fetch_row(). In addition to storing the data in the numeric indices of the result array, it also stores the data in associative indices, using the field names as keys. The second optional argument result_type in msql_fetch_array() is a constant and can take the following values: MSQL_ASSOC, MSQL_NUM, and MYSQL_BOTH. Be careful if you are retrieving results from a query that may return a record that contains only one field that has a value of 0 (or an empty string, or NULL). An important thing to note is that using msql_fetch_array() is NOT significantly slower than using msql_fetch_row(), while it provides a significant added value. For further details, also see msql_fetch_row(). 520 mSQL msql_fetch_field (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get field information object msql_fetch_field (int query_identifier, int field_offset) Returns an object containing field information Msql_fetch_field() can be used in order to obtain information about fields in a certain query result. If the field offset isn’t specified, the next field that wasn’t yet retreived by msql_fetch_field() is retreived. The properties of the object are: • • • • • • name - column name table - name of the table the column belongs to not_null - 1 if the column cannot be null primary_key - 1 if the column is a primary key unique - 1 if the column is a unique key type - the type of the column See also msql_field_seek(). msql_fetch_object (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch row as object int msql_fetch_object (int query_identifier [, int result_type]) Returns an object with properties that correspond to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. msql_fetch_object() is similar to msql_fetch_array(), with one difference - an object is returned, instead of an array. Indirectly, that means that you can only access the data by the field names, and not by their offsets (numbers are illegal property names). The optional second argument result_type in msql_fetch_array() is a constant and can take the following values: MSQL_ASSOC, MSQL_NUM, and MSQL_BOTH. Speed-wise, the function is identical to msql_fetch_array(), and almost as quick as msql_fetch_row() (the difference is insignificant). 521 mSQL See also: msql_fetch_array() and msql_fetch_row(). msql_fetch_row (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get row as enumerated array array msql_fetch_row (int query_identifier) Returns an array that corresponds to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. Msql_fetch_row() fetches one row of data from the result associated with the specified query identifier. The row is returned as an array. Each result column is stored in an array offset, starting at offset 0. Subsequent call to msql_fetch_row() would return the next row in the result set, or false if there are no more rows. See also: msql_fetch_array(), msql_fetch_object(), msql_data_seek(), and msql_result(). msql_fieldname (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get field name string msql_fieldname (int query_identifier, int field) Msql_fieldname() returns the name of the specified field. query_identifier is the query identifier, and field is the field index. msql_fieldname($result, 2); will return the name of the second field in the result associated with the result identifier. msql_field_seek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set field offset int msql_field_seek (int query_identifier, int field_offset) Seeks to the specified field offset. If the next call to msql_fetch_field() won’t include a field offset, this field would be returned. 522 mSQL See also: msql_fetch_field(). msql_fieldtable (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get table name for field int msql_fieldtable (int query_identifier, int field) Returns the name of the table field was fetched from. msql_fieldtype (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get field type string msql_fieldtype (int query_identifier, int i) Msql_fieldtype() is similar to the msql_fieldname() function. The arguments are identical, but the field type is returned. This will be one of "int", "string" or "real". msql_fieldflags (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get field flags string msql_fieldflags (int query_identifier, int i) msql_fieldflags() returns the field flags of the specified field. Currently this is either, "not null", "primary key", a combination of the two or "" (an empty string). msql_fieldlen (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get field length int msql_fieldlen (int query_identifier, int i) 523 mSQL Msql_fieldlen() returns the length of the specified field. msql_free_result (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Free result memory int msql_free_result (int query_identifier) Msql_free_result() frees the memory associated with query_identifier. When PHP completes a request, this memory is freed automatically, so you only need to call this function when you want to make sure you don’t use too much memory while the script is running. msql_freeresult (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Free result memory See msql_free_result() msql_list_fields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List result fields int msql_list_fields (string database, string tablename) Msql_list_fields() retrieves information about the given tablename. Arguments are the database name and the table name. A result pointer is returned which can be used with msql_fieldflags(), msql_fieldlen(), msql_fieldname(), and msql_fieldtype(). A query identifier is a positive integer. The function returns -1 if a error occurs. A string describing the error will be placed in $phperrmsg, and unless the function was called as @msql_list_fields() then this error string will also be printed out. See also msql_error(). 524 mSQL msql_listfields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List result fields See msql_list_fields(). msql_list_dbs (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List mSQL databases on server int msql_list_dbs(void); msql_list_dbs() will return a result pointer containing the databases available from the current msql daemon. Use the msql_dbname() function to traverse this result pointer. msql_listdbs (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List mSQL databases on server See msql_list_dbs(). msql_list_tables (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List tables in an mSQL database int msql_list_tables (string database) Msql_list_tables() takes a database name and result pointer much like the msql() function. The msql_tablename() function should be used to extract the actual table names from the result pointer. msql_listtables (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List tables in an mSQL database 525 mSQL See msql_list_tables(). msql_num_fields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of fields in result int msql_num_fields (int query_identifier) Msql_num_fields() returns the number of fields in a result set. See also: msql(), msql_query(), msql_fetch_field(), and msql_num_rows(). msql_num_rows (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of rows in result int msql_num_rows (int query_identifier) Msql_num_rows() returns the number of rows in a result set. See also: msql(), msql_query(), and msql_fetch_row(). msql_numfields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of fields in result int msql_numfields (int query_identifier) Identical to msql_num_fields(). msql_numrows (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of rows in result 526 mSQL int msql_numrows(void); Identical to msql_num_rows(). msql_pconnect (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open persistent mSQL connection int msql_pconnect (string hostname) Returns a positive mSQL persistent link identifier on success, or false on error. Msql_pconnect() acts very much like msql_connect() with two major differences. First, when connecting, the function would first try to find a (persistent) link that’s already open with the same host. If one is found, an identifier for it will be returned instead of opening a new connection. Second, the connection to the SQL server will not be closed when the execution of the script ends. Instead, the link will remain open for future use (msql_close() will not close links established by msql_pconnect()). This type of links is therefore called ’persistent’. msql_query (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Send mSQL query int msql_query (string query, int link_identifier) Msql_query() sends a query to the currently active database on the server that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. If no link is open, the function tries to establish a link as if msql_connect() was called, and use it. Returns a positive mSQL query identifier on success, or false on error. See also: msql(), msql_select_db(), and msql_connect(). 527 mSQL msql_regcase (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Make regular expression for case insensitive match See sql_regcase(). msql_result (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get result data int msql_result (int query_identifier, int i, mixed field) Returns the contents of the cell at the row and offset in the specified mSQL result set. Msql_result() returns the contents of one cell from a mSQL result set. The field argument can be the field’s offset, or the field’s name, or the field’s table dot field’s name (fieldname.tablename). If the column name has been aliased (’select foo as bar from ...’), use the alias instead of the column name. When working on large result sets, you should consider using one of the functions that fetch an entire row (specified below). As these functions return the contents of multiple cells in one function call, they’re MUCH quicker than msql_result(). Also, note that specifying a numeric offset for the field argument is much quicker than specifying a fieldname or tablename.fieldname argument. Recommended high-performance alternatives: msql_fetch_row(), msql_fetch_array(), and msql_fetch_object(). msql_select_db (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Select mSQL database int msql_select_db (string database_name, int link_identifier) Returns true on success, false on error. Msql_select_db() sets the current active database on the server that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If no link identifier is specified, the last opened link is assumed. If no link is open, the function will try to establish a link as if msql_connect() was called, and use it. Every subsequent call to msql_query() will be made on the active database. See also: msql_connect(), msql_pconnect(), and msql_query(). 528 mSQL msql_selectdb (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Select mSQL database See msql_select_db(). msql_tablename (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get table name of field string msql_tablename (int query_identifier, int field) Msql_tablename() takes a result pointer returned by the msql_list_tables() function as well as an integer index and returns the name of a table. The msql_numrows() function may be used to determine the number of tables in the result pointer. Example 1. Msql_tablename() example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 "; $i++; } ?> 529 XXXVIII. MySQL functions These functions allow you to access MySQL database servers. More information about MySQL can be found at http://www.mysql.com/. 530 mysql_affected_rows (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of affected rows in previous MySQL operation int mysql_affected_rows ([int link_identifier]) mysql_affected_rows() returns the number of rows affected by the last INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE query on the server associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. If the last query was a DELETE query with no WHERE clause, all of the records will have been deleted from the table but this function will return zero. This command is not effective for SELECT statements, only on statements which modify records. To retrieve the number of rows returned from a SELECT, use mysql_num_rows(). mysql_change_user (PHP3 >= 3.0.13) Change logged in user on active connection int mysql_change_user (string user, string password [, string database [, int link_identifier]]) mysql_change_user() changes the logged in user on the current active connection, or, if specified on the connection given by the link identifier. If a database is specified, this will default or current database after the user has been changed. If the new user/password combination fails to be authorized the current connected user stays active. Note: This function was introduced in PHP 3.0.13 and requires MySQL 3.23.3 or higher. mysql_close (PHP3 , PHP4 ) close MySQL connection int mysql_close ([int link_identifier]) Returns: true on success, false on error. 531 MySQL mysql_close() closes the link to a MySQL database that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If the link identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. Note: This isn’t usually necessary, as non-persistent open links are automatically closed at the end of the script’s execution. mysql_close() will not close persistent links generated by mysql_pconnect(). Example 1. MySQL close example 1 2 9 See also: mysql_connect(), and mysql_pconnect(). mysql_connect (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open a connection to a MySQL Server int mysql_connect ([string hostname [:port] [:/path/to/socket] [, string username [, string password]]]) Returns: A positive MySQL link identifier on success, or an error message on failure. mysql_connect() establishes a connection to a MySQL server. All of the arguments are optional, and if they’re missing, defaults are assumed (’localhost’, user name of the user that owns the server process, empty password). The hostname string can also include a port number. eg. "hostname:port" or a path to a socket eg. ":/path/to/socket" for the localhost. Note: Support for ":port" was added in PHP 3.0B4. Support for the ":/path/to/socket" was added in PHP 3.0.10. You can suppress the error message on failure by prepending ’@’ to the function name. 532 MySQL In case a second call is made to mysql_connect() with the same arguments, no new link will be established, but instead, the link identifier of the already opened link will be returned. The link to the server will be closed as soon as the execution of the script ends, unless it’s closed earlier by explicitly calling mysql_close(). Example 1. MySQL connect example 1 2 9 See also mysql_pconnect(), and mysql_close(). mysql_create_db (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Create a MySQL database int mysql_create_db (string database name [, int link_identifier]) mysql_create_db() attempts to create a new database on the server associated with the specified link identifier. Example 1. MySQL create database example 1 2 12 For downwards compatibility mysql_createdb() can also be used. 533 MySQL See also: mysql_drop_db(). mysql_data_seek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Move internal result pointer int mysql_data_seek (int result_identifier, int row_number) Returns: true on success, false on failure. mysql_data_seek() moves the internal row pointer of the MySQL result associated with the specified result identifier to point to the specified row number. The next call to mysql_fetch_row() would return that row. Row_number starts at 0. Example 1. MySQL data seek example 1 2 =0; $i--) { 19 if (!mysql_data_seek ($result, $i)) { 20 printf ("Cannot seek to row %d\n", $i); 21 continue; 22 } 23 24 if(!($row = mysql_fetch_object ($result))) 25 continue; 26 27 printf ("%s %s
\n", $row->last_name, $row->first_name); 534 MySQL 28 29 30 31 ?> 32 } mysql_free_result ($result); mysql_db_query (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Send an MySQL query to MySQL int mysql_db_query (string database, string query [, int link_identifier]) Returns: A positive MySQL result identifier to the query result, or false on error. mysql_db_query() selects a database and executes a query on it. If the optional link identifier isn’t specified, the function will try to find an open link to the MySQL server and if no such link is found it’ll try to create one as if mysql_connect() was called with no arguments See also mysql_connect(). For downwards compatibility mysql() can also be used. mysql_drop_db (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Drop (delete) a MySQL database int mysql_drop_db (string database_name [, int link_identifier]) Returns: true on success, false on failure. mysql_drop_db() attempts to drop (remove) an entire database from the server associated with the specified link identifier. See also: mysql_create_db(). For downward compatibility mysql_dropdb() can also be used. mysql_errno (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Returns the number of the error message from previous MySQL operation 535 MySQL int mysql_errno ([int link_identifier]) Errors coming back from the mySQL database backend no longer issue warnings. Instead, use these functions to retrieve the error number. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 "; mysql_select_db("nonexistentdb"); echo mysql_errno().": ".mysql_error()."
"; $conn = mysql_query("SELECT * FROM nonexistenttable"); echo mysql_errno().": ".mysql_error()."
"; ?> See also: mysql_error() mysql_error (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Returns the text of the error message from previous MySQL operation string mysql_error ([int link_identifier]) Errors coming back from the mySQL database backend no longer issue warnings. Instead, use these functions to retrieve the error string. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 "; mysql_select_db("nonexistentdb"); echo mysql_errno().": ".mysql_error()."
"; $conn = mysql_query("SELECT * FROM nonexistenttable"); echo mysql_errno().": ".mysql_error()."
"; ?> See also: mysql_errno() 536 MySQL mysql_fetch_array (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch a result row as an associative array array mysql_fetch_array (int result [, int result_type]) Returns an array that corresponds to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. mysql_fetch_array() is an extended version of mysql_fetch_row(). In addition to storing the data in the numeric indices of the result array, it also stores the data in associative indices, using the field names as keys. If two or more columns of the result have the same field names, the last column will take precedence. To access the other column(s) of the same name, you must the numeric index of the column or make an alias for the column. 1 2 select t1.f1 as foo t2.f1 as bar from t1, t2 3 An important thing to note is that using mysql_fetch_array() is NOT significantly slower than using mysql_fetch_row(), while it provides a significant added value. The optional second argument result_type in mysql_fetch_array() is a constant and can take the following values: MYSQL_ASSOC, MYSQL_NUM, and MYSQL_BOTH. (This feature was added in PHP 3.0.7) For further details, see also mysql_fetch_row(). Example 1. Mysql_fetch_array() 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 537 MySQL mysql_fetch_field (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get column information from a result and return as an object object mysql_fetch_field (int result [, int field_offset]) Returns an object containing field information. mysql_fetch_field() can be used in order to obtain information about fields in a certain query result. If the field offset isn’t specified, the next field that wasn’t yet retrieved by mysql_fetch_field() is retrieved. The properties of the object are: • • • • • • • • • • • • name - column name table - name of the table the column belongs to max_length - maximum length of the column not_null - 1 if the column cannot be null primary_key - 1 if the column is a primary key unique_key - 1 if the column is a unique key multiple_key - 1 if the column is a non-unique key numeric - 1 if the column is numeric blob - 1 if the column is a BLOB type - the type of the column unsigned - 1 if the column is unsigned zerofill - 1 if the column is zero-filled Example 1. Mysql_fetch_field() 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 \n"; $meta = mysql_fetch_field ($result); if (!$meta) { 538 MySQL 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 echo "No information available
\n"; } echo "
 blob: $meta -> blob max_length: $meta -> max_length multiple_key: $meta -> multiple_key name: $meta -> name not_null: $meta -> not_null numeric: $meta -> numeric primary_key: $meta -> primary_key table: $meta -> table type: $meta -> type unique_key: $meta -> unique_key unsigned: $meta -> unsigned zerofill: $meta -> zerofill
"; $i++; } mysql_free_result ($result); ?> See also mysql_field_seek(). mysql_fetch_lengths (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the length of each output in a result array mysql_fetch_lengths (int result) Returns: An array that corresponds to the lengths of each field in the last row fetched by mysql_fetch_row(), or false on error. mysql_fetch_lengths() stores the lengths of each result column in the last row returned by mysql_fetch_row(), mysql_fetch_array(), and mysql_fetch_object() in an array, starting at offset 0. See also: mysql_fetch_row(). mysql_fetch_object (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Fetch a result row as an object 539 MySQL object mysql_fetch_object (int result [, int result_typ]) Returns an object with properties that correspond to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. mysql_fetch_object() is similar to mysql_fetch_array(), with one difference - an object is returned, instead of an array. Indirectly, that means that you can only access the data by the field names, and not by their offsets (numbers are illegal property names). The optional argument result_typ is a constant and can take the following values: MYSQL_ASSOC, MYSQL_NUM, and MYSQL_BOTH. Speed-wise, the function is identical to mysql_fetch_array(), and almost as quick as mysql_fetch_row() (the difference is insignificant). Example 1. mysql fetch object 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 user_id; echo $row->fullname; } mysql_free_result($result); ?> See also: mysql_fetch_array() and mysql_fetch_row(). mysql_fetch_row (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get a result row as an enumerated array array mysql_fetch_row (int result) Returns: An array that corresponds to the fetched row, or false if there are no more rows. mysql_fetch_row() fetches one row of data from the result associated with the specified result identifier. The row is returned as an array. Each result column is stored in an array offset, starting at offset 0. Subsequent call to mysql_fetch_row() would return the next row in the result set, or false if there are no more rows. 540 MySQL See also: mysql_fetch_array(), mysql_fetch_object(), mysql_data_seek(), mysql_fetch_lengths(), and mysql_result(). mysql_field_name (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the name of the specified field in a result string mysql_field_name (int result, int field_index) mysql_field_name() returns the name of the specified field. Arguments to the function is the result identifier and the field index, ie. mysql_field_name($result,2); Will return the name of the second field in the result associated with the result identifier. For downwards compatibility mysql_fieldname() can also be used. mysql_field_seek (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set result pointer to a specified field offset int mysql_field_seek (int result, int field_offset) Seeks to the specified field offset. If the next call to mysql_fetch_field() won’t include a field offset, this field would be returned. See also: mysql_fetch_field(). mysql_field_table (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get name of the table the specified field is in string mysql_field_table (int result, int field_offset) Get the table name for field. For downward compatibility mysql_fieldtable() can also be used. 541 MySQL mysql_field_type (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the type of the specified field in a result string mysql_field_type (int result, int field_offset) mysql_field_type() is similar to the mysql_field_name() function. The arguments are identical, but the field type is returned. This will be one of "int", "real", "string", "blob", or others as detailed in the MySQL documentation. Example 1. mysql field types 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ble 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 "; echo "The table has the following fields
"; while ($i < $fields) { $type = mysql_field_type ($result, $i); $name = mysql_field_name ($result, $i); $len = mysql_field_len ($result, $i); $flags = mysql_field_flags ($result, $i); echo $type." ".$name." ".$len." ".$flags."
"; $i++; } mysql_close(); ?> For downward compatibility mysql_fieldtype() can also be used. mysql_field_flags (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the flags associated with the specified field in a result string mysql_field_flags (int result, int field_offset) 542 MySQL mysql_field_flags() returns the field flags of the specified field. The flags are reported as a single word per flag separated by a single space, so that you can split the returned value using explode(). The following flags are reported, if your version of MySQL is current enough to support them: "not_null", "primary_key", "unique_key", "multiple_key", "blob", "unsigned", "zerofill", "binary", "enum", "auto_increment", "timestamp". For downward compatibility mysql_fieldflags() can also be used. mysql_field_len (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Returns the length of the specified field int mysql_field_len (int result, int field_offset) mysql_field_len() returns the length of the specified field. For downward compatibility mysql_fieldlen() can also be used. mysql_free_result (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Free result memory int mysql_free_result (int result) mysql_free_result() only needs to be called if you are worried about using too much memory while your script is running. All associated result memory for the specified result identifier will automatically be freed. For downward compatibility mysql_freeresult() can also be used. mysql_insert_id (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the id generated from the previous INSERT operation int mysql_insert_id ([int link_identifier]) 543 MySQL mysql_insert_id() returns the ID generated for an AUTO_INCREMENTED field. It will return the auto-generated ID returned by the last INSERT query performed using the given link_identifier. If link_identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. mysql_list_fields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List MySQL result fields int mysql_list_fields (string database_name, string table_name [, int link_identifier]) mysql_list_fields() retrieves information about the given tablename. Arguments are the database name and the table name. A result pointer is returned which can be used with mysql_field_flags(), mysql_field_len(), mysql_field_name(), and mysql_field_type(). A result identifier is a positive integer. The function returns -1 if a error occurs. A string describing the error will be placed in $phperrmsg, and unless the function was called as @mysql() then this error string will also be printed out. For downward compatibility mysql_listfields() can also be used. mysql_list_dbs (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List databases available on on MySQL server int mysql_list_dbs ([int link_identifier]) mysql_list_dbs() will return a result pointer containing the databases available from the current mysql daemon. Use the mysql_tablename() function to traverse this result pointer. For downward compatibility mysql_listdbs() can also be used. mysql_list_tables (PHP3 , PHP4 ) List tables in a MySQL database int mysql_list_tables (string database [, int link_identifier]) 544 MySQL mysql_list_tables() takes a database name and returns a result pointer much like the mysql_db_query() function. The mysql_tablename() function should be used to extract the actual table names from the result pointer. For downward compatibility mysql_listtables() can also be used. mysql_num_fields (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of fields in result int mysql_num_fields (int result) mysql_num_fields() returns the number of fields in a result set. See also: mysql_db_query(), mysql_query(), mysql_fetch_field(), mysql_num_rows(). For downward compatibility mysql_numfields() can also be used. mysql_num_rows (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get number of rows in result int mysql_num_rows (int result) mysql_num_rows() returns the number of rows in a result set. This command is only valid for SELECT statements. To retrieve the number of rows returned from a INSERT, UPDATE or DELETE, use mysql_affected_rows(). See also: mysql_db_query(), mysql_query() and, mysql_fetch_row(). For downward compatibility mysql_numrows() can also be used. mysql_pconnect (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open a persistent connection to a MySQL Server int mysql_pconnect ([string hostname [:port] [:/path/to/socket] [, string username [, string password]]]) 545 MySQL Returns: A positive MySQL persistent link identifier on success, or false on error. mysql_pconnect() establishes a connection to a MySQL server. All of the arguments are optional, and if they’re missing, defaults are assumed (’localhost’, user name of the user that owns the server process, empty password). The hostname string can also include a port number. eg. "hostname:port" or a path to a socket eg. ":/path/to/socket" for the localhost. Note: Support for ":port" wass added in 3.0B4. Support for the ":/path/to/socket" was added in 3.0.10. mysql_pconnect() acts very much like mysql_connect() with two major differences. First, when connecting, the function would first try to find a (persistent) link that’s already open with the same host, username and password. If one is found, an identifier for it will be returned instead of opening a new connection. Second, the connection to the SQL server will not be closed when the execution of the script ends. Instead, the link will remain open for future use (mysql_close() will not close links established by mysql_pconnect()). This type of links is therefore called ’persistent’. mysql_query (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Send an SQL query to MySQL int mysql_query (string query [, int link_identifier]) mysql_query() sends a query to the currently active database on the server that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If link_identifier isn’t specified, the last opened link is assumed. If no link is open, the function tries to establish a link as if mysql_connect() was called with no arguments, and use it. The query string should not end with a semicolon. mysql_query() returns TRUE (non-zero) or FALSE to indicate whether or not the query succeeded. A return value of TRUE means that the query was legal and could be executed by the server. It does not indicate anything about the number of rows affected or returned. It is perfectly possible for a query to succeed but affect no rows or return no rows. The following query is syntactically invalid, so mysql_query() fails and returns FALSE: 546 MySQL Example 1. mysql_query() 1 2 6 The following query is semantically invalid if my_col is not a column in the table my_tbl, so mysql_query() fails and returns FALSE: Example 2. mysql_query() 1 2 6 mysql_query() will also fail and return FALSE if you don’t have permission to access the table(s) referenced by the query. Assuming the query succeeds, you can call mysql_affected_rows() to find out how many rows were affected (for DELETE, INSERT, REPLACE, or UPDATE statements). For SELECT statements, mysql_query() returns a new result identifier that you can pass to mysql_result(). When you are done with the result set, you can free the resources associated with it by calling mysql_free_result(). See also: mysql_affected_rows(), mysql_db_query(), mysql_free_result(), mysql_result(), mysql_select_db(), and mysql_connect(). mysql_result (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get result data int mysql_result (int result, int row [, mixed field]) mysql_result() returns the contents of one cell from a MySQL result set. The field argument can be the field’s offset, or the field’s name, or the field’s table dot field’s name (fieldname.tablename). If the column name has been aliased (’select foo as bar from...’), use the alias instead of the column name. When working on large result sets, you should consider using one of the functions that fetch an entire row (specified below). As these functions return the contents of multiple cells in one function 547 MySQL call, they’re MUCH quicker than mysql_result(). Also, note that specifying a numeric offset for the field argument is much quicker than specifying a fieldname or tablename.fieldname argument. Calls mysql_result() should not be mixed with calls to other functions that deal with the result set. Recommended high-performance alternatives: mysql_fetch_row(), mysql_fetch_array(), and mysql_fetch_object(). mysql_select_db (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Select a MySQL database int mysql_select_db (string database_name [, int link_identifier]) Returns: true on success, false on error. mysql_select_db() sets the current active database on the server that’s associated with the specified link identifier. If no link identifier is specified, the last opened link is assumed. If no link is open, the function will try to establish a link as if mysql_connect() was called, and use it. Every subsequent call to mysql_query() will be made on the active database. See also: mysql_connect(), mysql_pconnect(), and mysql_query(). For downward compatibility mysql_selectdb() can also be used. mysql_tablename (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get table name of field string mysql_tablename (int result, int i) mysql_tablename() takes a result pointer returned by the mysql_list_tables() function as well as an integer index and returns the name of a table. The mysql_num_rows() function may be used to determine the number of tables in the result pointer. Example 1. Mysql_tablename() Example 1 2 3 4 5 "; 9 $i++; 10 } 11 ?> 12 549 XXXIX. Network Functions 550 checkdnsrr (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Check DNS records corresponding to a given Internet host name or IP address int checkdnsrr (string host [, string type]) Searches DNS for records of type type corresponding to host. Returns true if any records are found; returns false if no records were found or if an error occurred. type may be any one of: A, MX, NS, SOA, PTR, CNAME, or ANY. The default is MX. Host may either be the IP address in dotted-quad notation or the host name. See also getmxrr(), gethostbyaddr(), gethostbyname(), gethostbynamel(), and the named(8) manual page. closelog (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Close connection to system logger int closelog(void); Closelog() closes the descriptor being used to write to the system logger. The use of closelog() is optional. debugger_off (PHP3 ) Disable internal PHP debugger int debugger_off(void); Disables the internal PHP debugger. The debugger is still under development. debugger_on (PHP3 ) Enable internal PHP debugger 551 Network int debugger_on (string address) Enables the internal PHP debugger, connecting it to address. The debugger is still under development. fsockopen (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open Internet or Unix domain socket connection int fsockopen (string hostname, int port [, int errno [, string errstr [, double timeout]]]) Initiates a stream connection in the Internet (AF_INET) or Unix (AF_UNIX) domain. For the Internet domain, it will open a TCP socket connection to hostname on port port. For the Unix domain, hostname will be used as the path to the socket, port must be set to 0 in this case. The optional timeout can be used to set a timeout in seconds for the connect system call. Fsockopen() returns a file pointer which may be used together with the other file functions (such as fgets(), fgetss(), fputs(), fclose(), and feof()). If the call fails, it will return false and if the optional errno and errstr arguments are present they will be set to indicate the actual system level error that occurred on the system-level connect() call. If the returned errno is 0 and the function returned false, it is an indication that the error occurred before the connect() call. This is most likely due to a problem initializing the socket. Note that the errno and errstr arguments must be passed by reference. Depending on the environment, the Unix domain or the optional connect timeout may not be available. The socket will by default be opened in blocking mode. You can switch it to non-blocking mode by using Set_socket_blocking()(). Example 1. Fsockopen() Example 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 $fp = fsockopen ("www.php.net", 80, &$errno, &$errstr, 30); if (!$fp) { echo "$errstr ($errno)
\n"; } else { fputs ($fp, "GET / HTTP/1.0\n\n"); while (!feof($fp)) { echo fgets ($fp,128); } fclose ($fp); } 552 Network 12 See also: pfsockopen() gethostbyaddr (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the Internet host name corresponding to a given IP address string gethostbyaddr (string ip_address) Returns the host name of the Internet host specified by ip_address. If an error occurs, returns ip_address. See also gethostbyname(). gethostbyname (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get the IP address corresponding to a given Internet host name string gethostbyname (string hostname) Returns the IP address of the Internet host specified by hostname. See also gethostbyaddr(). gethostbynamel (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get a list of IP addresses corresponding to a given Internet host name array gethostbynamel (string hostname) Returns a list of IP addresses to which the Internet host specified by hostname resolves. See also gethostbyname(), gethostbyaddr(), checkdnsrr(), getmxrr(), and the named(8) manual page. 553 Network getmxrr (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Get MX records corresponding to a given Internet host name int getmxrr (string hostname, array mxhosts [, array weight]) Searches DNS for MX records corresponding to hostname. Returns true if any records are found; returns false if no records were found or if an error occurred. A list of the MX records found is placed into the array mxhosts. If the weight array is given, it will be filled with the weight information gathered. See also checkdnsrr(), gethostbyname(), gethostbynamel(), gethostbyaddr(), and the named(8) manual page. getprotobyname (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get protocol number associated with protocol name int getprotobyname (string name) Getprotobyname() returns the protocol number associated with the protocol name as per /etc/protocols. See also: getprotobynumber(). getprotobynumber (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get protocol name associated with protocol number string getprotobynumber (int number) Getprotobynumber() returns the protocol name associated with protocol number as per /etc/protocols. See also: getprotobyname(). 554 Network getservbyname (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get port number associated with an Internet service and protocol int getservbyname (string service, string protocol) Getservbyname() returns the Internet port which corresponds to service for the specified protocol as per /etc/services. protocol is either TCP or UDP. See also: getservbyport(). getservbyport (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get Internet service which corresponds to port and protocol string getservbyport (int port, string protocol) Getservbyport() returns the Internet service associated with port for the specified protocol as per /etc/services. protocol is either TCP or UDP. See also: getservbyname(). openlog (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Open connection to system logger int openlog (string ident, int option, int facility) Openlog() opens a connection to the system logger for a program. The string ident is added to each message. Values for option and facility are given in the next section. The use of openlog() is optional; It will automatically be called by syslog() if necessary, in which case ident will default to false. See also syslog() and closelog(). 555 Network pfsockopen (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Open persistent Internet or Unix domain socket connection int pfsockopen (string hostname, int port [, int errno [, string errstr [, int timeout]]]) This function behaves exactly as fsockopen() with the difference that the connection is not closed after the script finishes. It is the persistent version of fsockopen(). set_socket_blocking (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Set blocking/non-blocking mode on a socket int set_socket_blocking (int socket descriptor, int mode) If mode is false, the given socket descriptor will be switched to non-blocking mode, and if true, it will be switched to blocking mode. This affects calls like fgets() that read from the socket. In non-blocking mode an fgets() call will always return right away while in blocking mode it will wait for data to become available on the socket. syslog (PHP3 , PHP4 ) Generate a system log message int syslog (int priority, string message) Syslog() generates a log message that will be distributed by the system logger. priority is a combination of the facility and the level, values for which are given in the next section. The remaining argument is the message to send, except that the two characters %m will be replaced by the error message string (strerror) corresponding to the present value of errno. More information on the syslog facilities can be found in the man pages for syslog on Unix machines. On Windows NT, the syslog service is emulated using the Event Log. 556 XL. NIS functions NIS (formerly called Yellow Pages) allows network management of important administrative files (e.g. the password file). For more information refer to the NIS manpage and Introduction to YP/NIS (http://www.desy.de/~sieversm/ypdoku/ypdoku/ypdoku.html). There is also a book called Managing NFS and NIS (http://www.oreilly.com/catalog/nfs/noframes.html) by Hal Stern. To get these functions to work, you have to configure PHP with --with-yp. 557 yp_get_default_domain (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Fetches the machine’s default NIS domain. int yp_get_default_domain (void ) yp_get_default_domain() returns the default domain of the node or FALSE. Can be used as the domain parameter for successive NIS calls. A NIS domain can be described a group of NIS maps. Every host that needs to look up information binds itself to a certain domain. Refer to the documents mentioned at the beginning for more detailed information. Example 1. Example for the default domain 1 2 6 yp_order (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Returns the order number for a map. int yp_order (string domain, string map) yp_order() returns the order number for a map or FALSE. Example 1. Example for the NIS order 1 2 6 See also yp-get-default-domain(). 558 NIS yp_master (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Returns the machine name of the master NIS server for a map. string yp_master (string domain, string map) yp_master() returns the machine name of the master NIS server for a map. Example 1. Example for the NIS master 1 2 6 See also yp-get-default-domain(). yp_match (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Returns the matched line. string yp_match (string domain, string map, string key) yp_match() returns the value associated with the passed key out of the specified map or FALSE. This key must be exact. Example 1. Example for NIS match 1 2 6 In this case this could be: joe:##joe:11111:100:Joe User:/home/j/joe:/usr/local/bin/bash See also yp-get-default-domain() 559 NIS yp_first (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Returns the first key-value pair from the named map. string[] yp_first (string domain, string map) yp_first() returns the first key-value pair from the named map in the named domain, otherwise FALSE. Example 1. Example for the NIS first 1 2 8 See also yp-get-default-domain() yp_next (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 ) Returns the next key-value pair in the named map. string[] yp_next (string domain, string map, string key) yp_next() returns the next key-value pair in the named map after the specified key or FALSE. Example 1. Example for NIS next 1 2 14 echo "The next entry after joe has key " . $key . " and value " . $entry[$key]; See also yp-get-default-domain(). 561 XLI. ODBC functions 562 odbc_autocommit (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Toggle autocommit behaviour int odbc_autocommit (int connection_id [, int OnOff]) Without the OnOff parameter, this function returns auto-commit status for connection_id. True is returned if auto-commit is on, false if it is off or an error occurs. If OnOff is true, auto-commit is enabled, if it is false auto-commit is disabled. Returns true on success, false on failure. By default, auto-commit is on for a connection. Disabling auto-commit is equivalent with starting a transaction. See also odbc_commit() and odbc_rollback(). odbc_binmode (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) handling of binary column data int odbc_binmode (int result_id, int mode) (ODBC SQL types affected: BINARY, VARBINARY, LONGVARBINARY) • • • ODBC_BINMODE_PASSTHRU: Passthru BINARY data ODBC_BINMODE_RETURN: Return as is ODBC_BINMODE_CONVERT: Convert to char and return When binary SQL data is converted to character C data, each byte (8 bits) of source data is represented as two ASCII characters. These characters are the ASCII character representation of the number in its hexadecimal form. For example, a binary 00000001 is converted to "01" and a binary 11111111 is converted to "FF". Table 1. LONGVARBINARY handling binmode ODBC_BINMODE_PASSTHRU ODBC_BINMODE_RETURN 0 passthru longreadlen 0 result passthru 563 ODBC binmode longreadlen result passthru passthru ODBC_BINMODE_CONVERT 0 0 ODBC_BINMODE_PASSTHRU >0 ODBC_BINMODE_PASSTHRU ODBC_BINMODE_RETURN >0 passthru return as is return as char ODBC_BINMODE_CONVERT >0 If odbc_fetch_into() is used, passthru means that an empty string is returned for these columns. If result_id is 0, the settings apply as default for new results. Note: Default for longreadlen is 4096 and binmode defaults to ODBC_BINMODE_RETURN. Handling of binary long columns is also affected by odbc_longreadlen() odbc_close (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Close an ODBC connection void odbc_close (int connection_id) odbc_close() will close down the connection to the database server associated with the given connection identifier. Note: This function will fail if there are open transactions on this connection. The connection will remain open in this case. odbc_close_all (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Close all ODBC connections void odbc_close_all(void); 564 ODBC odbc_close_all() will close down all connections to database server(s). Note: This function will fail if there are open transactions on a connection. This connection will remain open in this case. odbc_commit (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Commit an ODBC transaction int odbc_commit (int connection_id) Returns: true on success, false on failure. All pending transactions on connection_id are committed. odbc_connect (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Connect to a datasource int odbc_connect (string dsn, string user, string password [, int cursor_type]) Returns an ODBC connection id or 0 (false) on error. The connection id returned by this functions is needed by other ODBC functions. You can have multiple connections open at once. The optional fourth parameter sets the type of cursor to be used for this connection. This parameter is not normally needed, but can be useful for working around problems with some ODBC drivers. With some ODBC drivers, executing a complex stored procedure may fail with an error similar to: "Cannot open a cursor on a stored procedure that has anything other than a single select statement in it". Using SQL_CUR_USE_ODBC may avoid that error. Also, some drivers don’t support the optional row_number parameter in odbc_fetch_row(). SQL_CUR_USE_ODBC might help in that case, too. The following constants are defined for cursortype: SQL_CUR_USE_IF_NEEDED SQL_CUR_USE_ODBC • • 565 ODBC • • SQL_CUR_USE_DRIVER SQL_CUR_DEFAULT For persistent connections see odbc_pconnect(). odbc_cursor (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get cursorname string odbc_cursor (int result_id) odbc_cursor will return a cursorname for the given result_id. odbc_do (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Synonym for odbc_exec() string odbc_do (int conn_id, string query) Odbc_do() will execute a query on the given connection. odbc_exec (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Prepare and execute a SQL statement int odbc_exec (int connection_id, string query_string) Returns false on error. Returns an ODBC result identifier if the SQL command was executed successfully. odbc_exec() will send an SQL statement to the database server specified by connection_id. This parameter must be a valid identifier returned by odbc_connect() or odbc_pconnect(). See also: odbc_prepare() and odbc_execute() for multiple execution of SQL statements. 566 ODBC odbc_execute (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Execute a prepared statement int odbc_execute (int result_id [, array parameters_array]) Executes a statement prepared with odbc_prepare(). Returns true on successful execution, false otherwise. The array arameters_array only needs to be given if you really have parameters in your statement. odbc_fetch_into (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Fetch one result row into array int odbc_fetch_into (int result_id [, int rownumber, array result_array]) Returns the number of columns in the result; false on error. result_array must be passed by reference, but it can be of any type since it will be converted to type array. The array will contain the column values starting at array index 0. odbc_fetch_row (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Fetch a row int odbc_fetch_row (int result_id [, int row_number]) If odbc_fetch_row() was succesful (there was a row), true is returned. If there are no more rows, false is returned. odbc_fetch_row() fetches a row of the data that was returned by odbc_do() / odbc_exec(). After odbc_fetch_row() is called, the fields of that row can be accessed with odbc_result(). If row_number is not specified, odbc_fetch_row() will try to fetch the next row in the result set. Calls to odbc_fetch_row() with and without row_number can be mixed. To step through the result more than once, you can call odbc_fetch_row() with row_number 1, and then continue doing odbc_fetch_row() without row_number to review the result. If a driver doesn’t support fetching rows by number, the row_number parameter is ignored. 567 ODBC odbc_field_name (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get the columnname string odbc_fieldname (int result_id, int field_number) odbc_field_name() will return the name of the field occupying the given column number in the given ODBC result identifier. Field numbering starts at 1. false is returned on error. odbc_field_num (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Return column number int odbc_field_num (int result_id, string field_name) odbc_field_num() will return the number of the column slot that corresponds to the named field in the given ODBC result identifier. Field numbering starts at 1. false is returned on error. odbc_field_type (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Datatype of a field string odbc_field_type (int result_id, int field_number) odbc_field_type() will return the SQL type of the field referecend by number in the given ODBC result identifier. Field numbering starts at 1. odbc_field_len (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get the length (precision) of a field int odbc_field_len (int result_id, int field_number) 568 ODBC odbc_field_len() will return the length of the field referecend by number in the given ODBC result identifier. Field numbering starts at 1. See also: odbc_field_scale() to get the scale of a floating point number. odbc_field_precision (PHP4 >= 4.0.0) Synonym for odbc_field_len() string odbc_field_precision (int result_id, int field_number) odbc_field_precision() will return the precision of the field referecend by number in the given ODBC result identifier. See also: odbc_field_scale() to get the scale of a floating point number. odbc_field_scale (PHP4 >= 4.0.0) Get the scale of a field string odbc_field_scale (int result_id, int field_number) odbc_field_precision() will return the scale of the field referecend by number in the given ODBC result identifier. odbc_free_result (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Free resources associated with a result int odbc_free_result (int result_id) Always returns true. odbc_free_result() only needs to be called if you are worried about using too much memory while your script is running. All result memory will automatically be freed when the script is finished. But, if you are sure you are not going to need the result data anymore in a script, you may call odbc_free_result(), and the memory associated with result_id will be freed. 569 ODBC Note: If auto-commit is disabled (see odbc_autocommit()) and you call odbc_free_result() before commiting, all pending transactions are rolled back. odbc_longreadlen (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Handling of LONG columns int odbc_longreadlen (int result_id, int length) (ODBC SQL types affected: LONG, LONGVARBINARY) The number of bytes returned to PHP is controled by the parameter length. If it is set to 0, Long column data is passed thru to the client. Note: Handling of LONGVARBINARY columns is also affected by odbc_binmode(). odbc_num_fields (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Number of columns in a result int odbc_num_fields (int result_id) Odbc_num_fields() will return the number of fields (columns) in an ODBC result. This function will return -1 on error. The argument is a valid result identifier returned by odbc_exec(). odbc_pconnect (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Open a persistent database connection int odbc_pconnect (string dsn, string user, string password [, int cursor_type]) Returns an ODBC connection id or 0 (false) on error. This function is much like odbc_connect(), except that the connection is not really closed when the script has finished. Future requests for a connection with the same dsn, user, password combination (via odbc_connect() and odbc_pconnect()) can reuse the persistent connection. 570 ODBC Note: Persistent connections have no effect if PHP is used as a CGI program. For information about the optional cursor_type parameter see the odbc_connect() function. For more information on persistent connections, refer to the PHP FAQ. odbc_prepare (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Prepares a statement for execution int odbc_prepare (int connection_id, string query_string) Returns false on error. Returns an ODBC result identifier if the SQL command was prepared successfully. The result identifier can be used later to execute the statement with odbc_execute(). odbc_num_rows (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Number of rows in a result int odbc_num_rows (int result_id) odbc_num_rows() will return the number of rows in an ODBC result. This function will return -1 on error. For INSERT, UPDATE and DELETE statements odbc_num_rows() returns the number of rows affected. For a SELECT clause this can be the number of rows available. Note: Using odbc_num_rows() to determine the number of rows available after a SELECT will return -1 with many drivers. odbc_result (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Get result data string odbc_result (int result_id, mixed field) Returns the contents of the field. 571 ODBC field can either be an integer containing the column number of the field you want; or it can be a string containing the name of the field. For example: 1 2 $item_3 = odbc_result ($Query_ID, 3); 3 $item_val = odbc_result ($Query_ID, "val"); 4 The first call to odbc_result() returns the value of the third field in the current record of the query result. The second function call to odbc_result() returns the value of the field whose field name is "val" in the current record of the query result. An error occurs if a column number parameter for a field is less than one or exceeds the number of columns (or fields) in the current record. Similarly, an error occurs if a field with a name that is not one of the fieldnames of the table(s) that is(are) being queried. Field indices start from 1. Regarding the way binary or long column data is returned refer to odbc_binmode () and odbc_longreadlen(). odbc_result_all (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Print result as HTML table int odbc_result_all (int result_id [, string format]) Returns the number of rows in the result or false on error. Odbc_result_all() will print all rows from a result identifier produced by odbc_exec(). The result is printed in HTML table format. With the optional string argument format, additional overall table formatting can be done. odbc_rollback (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Rollback a transaction int odbc_rollback (int connection_id) Rolls back all pending statements on connection_id. Returns true on success, false on failure. 572 ODBC odbc_setoption (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 ) Adjust ODBC settings. Returns false if an error occurs, otherwise true. int odbc_setoption (int id, int function, int option, int param) This function allows fiddling with the ODBC options for a particular connection or query result. It was written to help find work arounds to problems in quirky ODBC drivers. You should probably only use this function if you are an ODBC programmer and understand the effects the various options will have. You will certainly need a good ODBC reference to explain all the different options and values that can be used. Different driver versions support different options. Because the effects may vary depending on the ODBC driver, use of this function in scripts to be made publicly available is strongly discouraged. Also, some ODBC options are not available to this function because they must be set before the connection is established or the query is prepared. However, if on a particular job it can make PHP work so your boss doesn’t tell you to use a commercial product, that’s all that really matters. ID is a connection id or result id on which to change the settings.For SQLSetConnectOption(), this is a connection id. For SQLSetStmtOption(), this is a result id. Function is the ODBC function to use. The value should be 1 for SQLSetConnectOption() and 2 for SQLSetStmtOption(). Parameter option is the option to set. Parameter param is the value for the given option. Example 1. ODBC Setoption Examples 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 // 1. Option 102 of SQLSetConnectOption() is SQL_AUTOCOMMIT. // Value 1 of SQL_AUTOCOMMIT is SQL_AUTOCOMMIT_ON. // This example has the same effect as // odbc_autocommit($conn, true); odbc_setoption ($conn, 1, 102, 1); // 2. Option 0 of SQLSetStmtOption() is SQL_QUERY_TIMEOUT. // This example sets the query to timeout after 30 seconds. $result = odbc_prepare ($conn, $sql); odbc_setoption ($result, 2, 0, 30); odbc_execute ($result); 573 ODBC odbc_tables (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get the list of table names stored in a specific data source. Returns a result identifier containing the information. int odbc_tables (int connection_id [, string qualifier [, string owner [, string name [, string types]]]]) Lists all tables in the requested range. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • TABLE_QUALIFIER TABLE_OWNER TABLE_NAME TABLE_TYPE REMARKS The result set is ordered by TABLE_TYPE, TABLE_QUALIFIER, TABLE_OWNER and TABLE_NAME. The owner and name arguments accept search patterns (’%’ to match zero or more characters and ’_’ to match a single character). To support enumeration of qualifiers, owners, and table types, the following special semantics for the qualifier, owner, name, and table_type are available: • If qualifier is a single percent character (%) and owner and name are empty strings, then the result set contains a list of valid qualifiers for the data source. (All columns except the TABLE_QUALIFIER column contain NULLs.) If owner is a single percent character (%) and qualifier and name are empty strings, then the result set contains a list of valid owners for the data source. (All columns except the TABLE_OWNER column contain NULLs.) If table_type is a single percent character (%) and qualifier, owner and name are empty strings, then the result set contains a list of valid table types for the data source. (All columns except the TABLE_TYPE column contain NULLs.) • • If table_type is not an empty string, it must contain a list of comma-separated values for the types of interest; each value may be enclosed in single quotes (’) or unquoted. For example, "’TABLE’,’VIEW’" or "TABLE, VIEW". If the data source does not support a specified table type, odbc_tables() does not return any results for that type. See also odbc_tableprivileges() to retrieve associated privileges. 574 ODBC odbc_tableprivileges (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Lists tables and the privileges associated with each table int odbc_tableprivileges (int connection_id [, string qualifier [, string owner [, string name]]]) Lists tables in the requested range and the privileges associated with each table. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • • • TABLE_QUALIFIER TABLE_OWNER TABLE_NAME GRANTOR GRANTEE PRIVILEGE IS_GRANTABLE The result set is ordered by TABLE_QUALIFIER, TABLE_OWNER and TABLE_NAME. The owner and name arguments accept search patterns (’%’ to match zero or more characters and ’_’ to match a single character). odbc_columns (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Lists the column names in specified tables. Returns a result identifier containing the information. int odbc_columns (int connection_id [, string qualifier [, string owner [, string table_name [, string column_name]]]]) Lists all columns in the requested range. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • TABLE_QUALIFIER TABLE_OWNER TABLE_NAME 575 ODBC • • • • • • • • • COLUMN_NAME DATA_TYPE TYPE_NAME PRECISION LENGTH SCALE RADIX NULLABLE REMARKS The result set is ordered by TABLE_QUALIFIER, TABLE_OWNER and TABLE_NAME. The owner, table_name and column_name arguments accept search patterns (’%’ to match zero or more characters and ’_’ to match a single character). See also odbc_columnprivileges() to retrieve associated privileges. odbc_columnprivileges (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns a result identifier that can be used to fetch a list of columns and associated privileges int odbc_columnprivileges (int connection_id [, string qualifier [, string owner [, string table_name [, string column_name]]]]) Lists columns and associated privileges for the given table. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • • • TABLE_QUALIFIER TABLE_OWNER TABLE_NAME GRANTOR GRANTEE PRIVILEGE IS_GRANTABLE The result set is ordered by TABLE_QUALIFIER, TABLE_OWNER and TABLE_NAME. 576 ODBC The column_name argument accepts search patterns (’%’ to match zero or more characters and ’_’ to match a single character). odbc_gettypeinfo (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns a result identifier containing information about data types supported by the data source. int odbc_gettypeinfo (int connection_id [, int data_type]) Retrieves information about data types supported by the data source. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The optional argument data_type can be used to restrict the information to a single data type. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • TYPE_NAME DATA_TYPE PRECISION LITERAL_PREFIX LITERAL_SUFFIX CREATE_PARAMS NULLABLE CASE_SENSITIVE SEARCHABLE UNSIGNED_ATTRIBUTE MONEY AUTO_INCREMENT LOCAL_TYPE_NAME MINIMUM_SCALE MAXIMUM_SCALE The result set is ordered by DATA_TYPE and TYPE_NAME. 577 ODBC odbc_primarykeys (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns a result identifier that can be used to fetch the column names that comprise the primary key for a table int odbc_primarykeys (int connection_id, string qualifier, string owner, string table) Returns the column names that comprise the primary key for a table. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • • TABLE_QUALIFIER TABLE_OWNER TABLE_NAME COLUMN_NAME KEY_SEQ PK_NAME odbc_foreignkeys (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns a list of foreign keys in the specified table or a list of foreign keys in other tables that refer to the primary key in the specified table int odbc_foreignkeys (int connection_id, string pk_qualifier, string pk_owner, string pk_table, string fk_qualifier, string fk_owner, string fk_table) Odbc_foreignkeys() retrieves information about foreign keys. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • PKTABLE_QUALIFIER PKTABLE_OWNER PKTABLE_NAME PKCOLUMN_NAME 578 ODBC • • • • • • • • • FKTABLE_QUALIFIER FKTABLE_OWNER FKTABLE_NAME FKCOLUMN_NAME KEY_SEQ UPDATE_RULE DELETE_RULE FK_NAME PK_NAME If pk_table contains a table name, odbc_foreignkeys() returns a result set containing the primary key of the specified table and all of the foreign keys that refer to it. If fk_table contains a table name, odbc_foreignkeys() returns a result set containing all of the foreign keys in the specified table and the primary keys (in other tables) to which they refer. If both pk_table and fk_table contain table names, odbc_foreignkeys() returns the foreign keys in the table specified in fk_table that refer to the primary key of the table specified in pk_table. This should be one key at most. odbc_procedures (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Get the list of procedures stored in a specific data source. Returns a result identifier containing the information. int odbc_procedures (int connection_id [, string qualifier [, string owner [, string name]]]) Lists all procedures in the requested range. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • • PROCEDURE_QUALIFIER PROCEDURE_OWNER PROCEDURE_NAME NUM_INPUT_PARAMS NUM_OUTPUT_PARAMS NUM_RESULT_SETS 579 ODBC • • REMARKS PROCEDURE_TYPE The owner and name arguments accept search patterns (’%’ to match zero or more characters and ’_’ to match a single character). odbc_procedurecolumns (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Retrieve information about parameters to procedures int odbc_procedurecolumns (int connection_id [, string qualifier [, string owner [, string proc [, string column]]]]) Returns the list of input and output parameters, as well as the columns that make up the result set for the specified procedures. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • • • • • • • • • PROCEDURE_QUALIFIER PROCEDURE_OWNER PROCEDURE_NAME COLUMN_NAME COLUMN_TYPE DATA_TYPE TYPE_NAME PRECISION LENGTH SCALE RADIX NULLABLE REMARKS The result set is ordered by PROCEDURE_QUALIFIER, PROCEDURE_OWNER, PROCEDURE_NAME and COLUMN_TYPE. The owner, proc and column arguments accept search patterns (’%’ to match zero or more characters and ’_’ to match a single character). 580 ODBC odbc_specialcolumns (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Returns either the optimal set of columns that uniquely identifies a row in the table or columns that are automatically updated when any value in the row is updated by a transaction int odbc_specialcolumns (int connection_id, int type, string qualifier, string owner, string table, int scope, int nullable) When the type argument is SQL_BEST_ROWID, odbc_specialcolumns() returns the column or columns that uniquely identify each row in the table. When the type argument is SQL_ROWVER, odbc_specialcolumns() returns the optimal column or set of columns that, by retrieving values from the column or columns, allows any row in the specified table to be uniquely identified. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: • • • • • • • • SCOPE COLUMN_NAME DATA_TYPE TYPE_NAME PRECISION LENGTH SCALE PSEUDO_COLUMN The result set is ordered by SCOPE. odbc_statistics (PHP4 >= 4.0b4) Retrieve statistics about a table int odbc_statistics (int connection_id, string qualifier, string owner, string table_name, int unique, int accuracy) Get statistics about a table and it’s indexes. Returns an ODBC result identifier or false on failure. The result set has the following columns: 581 ODBC • • • • • • • • • • • • • TABLE_QUALIFIER TABLE_OWNER TABLE_NAME NON_UNIQUE INDEX_QUALIFIER INDEX_NAME TYPE SEQ_IN_INDEX COLUMN_NAME COLLATION CARDINALITY PAGES FILTER_CONDITION The result set is ordered by NON_UNIQUE, TYPE, INDEX_QUALIFIER, INDEX_NAME and SEQ_IN_INDEX. 582 XLII. Oracle functions 583 Ora_Bind (unknown) bind a PHP variable to an Oracle parameter int ora_bind (int cursor, string PHP variable name, string SQL parameter name, int length [, int type]) Returns true if the bind succeeds, otherwise false. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. This function binds the named PHP variable with a SQL parameter. The SQL parameter must be in the form ":name". With the optional type parameter, you can define whether the SQL parameter is an in/out (0, default), in (1) or out (2) parameter. As of PHP 3.0.1, you can use the constants ORA_BIND_INOUT, ORA_BIND_IN and ORA_BIND_OUT instead of the numbers. ora_bind must be called after ora_parse() and before ora_exec(). Input values can be given by assignment to the bound PHP variables, after calling ora_exec() the bound PHP variables contain the output values if available. 1 2 Out: $output
In: $input"; 10 ?> 11 Ora_Close (unknown) close an Oracle cursor int ora_close (int cursor) Returns true if the close succeeds, otherwise false. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. This function closes a data cursor opened with ora_open(). 584 Oracle Ora_ColumnName (unknown) get name of Oracle result column string Ora_ColumnName (int cursor, int column) Returns the name of the field/column column on the cursor cursor. The returned name is in all uppercase letters. Ora_ColumnType (unknown) get type of Oracle result column string Ora_ColumnType (int cursor, int column) Returns the Oracle data type name of the field/column column on the cursor cursor. The returned type will be one of the following: "VARCHAR2" "VARCHAR" "CHAR" "NUMBER" "LONG" "LONG RAW" "ROWID" "DATE" "CURSOR" Ora_Commit (unknown) commit an Oracle transaction int ora_commit (int conn) 585 Oracle Returns true on success, false on error. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. This function commits an Oracle transaction. A transaction is defined as all the changes on a given connection since the last commit/rollback, autocommit was turned off or when the connection was established. Ora_CommitOff (unknown) disable automatic commit int ora_commitoff (int conn) Returns true on success, false on error. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. This function turns off automatic commit after each ora_exec(). Ora_CommitOn (unknown) enable automatic commit int ora_commiton (int conn) This function turns on automatic commit after each ora_exec() on the given connection. Returns true on success, false on error. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. Ora_Error (unknown) get Oracle error message string Ora_Error (int cursor_or_connection) Returns an error message of the form XXX-NNNNN where XXX is where the error comes from and NNNNN identifies the error message. Note: Support for connection ids was added in 3.0.4. 586 Oracle On UNIX versions of Oracle, you can find details about an error message like this: $ oerr ora 00001 00001, 00000, "unique constraint (%s.%s) violated" // *Cause: An update or insert statement attempted to insert a duplicate key // For Trusted ORACLE configured in DBMS MAC mode, you may see // this message if a duplicate entry exists at a different level. // *Action: Either remove the unique restriction or do not insert the key Ora_ErrorCode (unknown) get Oracle error code int Ora_ErrorCode (int cursor_or_connection) Returns the numeric error code of the last executed statement on the specified cursor or connection. * FIXME: should possible values be listed? Note: Support for connection ids was added in 3.0.4. Ora_Exec (unknown) execute parsed statement on an Oracle cursor int ora_exec (int cursor) Returns true on success, false on error. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. Ora_Fetch (unknown) fetch a row of data from a cursor int ora_fetch (int cursor) 587 Oracle Returns true (a row was fetched) or false (no more rows, or an error occured). If an error occured, details can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. If there was no error, ora_errorcode() will return 0. Retrieves a row of data from the specified cursor. Ora_GetColumn (unknown) get data from a fetched row mixed ora_getcolumn (int cursor, mixed column) Returns the column data. If an error occurs, False is returned and ora_errorcode() will return a non-zero value. Note, however, that a test for False on the results from this function may be true in cases where there is not error as well (NULL result, empty string, the number 0, the string "0"). Fetches the data for a column or function result. Ora_Logoff (unknown) close an Oracle connection int ora_logoff (int connection) Returns true on success, False on error. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. Logs out the user and disconnects from the server. Ora_Logon (unknown) open an Oracle connection int ora_logon (string user, string password) Establishes a connection between PHP and an Oracle database with the given username and password. Connections can be made using SQL*Net by supplying the TNS name to user like this: 1 588 Oracle 2 $conn = Ora_Logon("user@TNSNAME", "pass"); 3 If you have character data with non-ASCII characters, you should make sure that NLS_LANG is set in your environment. For server modules, you should set it in the server’s environment before starting the server. Returns a connection index on success, or false on failure. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. Ora_Open (unknown) open an Oracle cursor int ora_open (int connection) Opens an Oracle cursor associated with connection. Returns a cursor index or False on failure. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. Ora_Parse (unknown) parse an SQL statement int ora_parse (int cursor_ind, string sql_statement, int defer) This function parses an SQL statement or a PL/SQL block and associates it with the given cursor. Returns 0 on success or -1 on error. Ora_Rollback (unknown) roll back transaction int ora_rollback (int connection) This function undoes an Oracle transaction. (See ora_commit() for the definition of a transaction.) 589 Oracle Returns true on success, false on error. Details about the error can be retrieved using the ora_error() and ora_errorcode() functions. 590 XLIII. Oracle 8 functions These functions allow you to access Oracle8 and Oracle7 databases. It uses the Oracle8 Call-Interface (OCI8). You will need the Oracle8 client libraries to use this extension. This extension is more flexible than the standard Oracle extension. It supports binding of global and local PHP variables to Oracle placeholders, has full LOB, FILE and ROWID support and allows you to use user-supplied define variables. 591 OCIDefineByName (unknown) Use a PHP variable for the define-step during a SELECT int OCIDefineByName (int stmt, string Column-Name, mixed &variable [, int type]) OCIDefineByName() uses fetches SQL-Columns into user-defined PHP-Variables. Be careful that Oracle user ALL-UPPERCASE column-names, whereby in your select you can also write lower-case. OCIDefineByName() expects the Column-Name to be in uppercase. If you define a variable that doesn’t exists in you select statement, no error will be given! If you need to define an abstract Datatype (LOB/ROWID/BFILE) you need to allocate it first using OCINewDescriptor() function. See also the OCIBindByName() function. Example 1. OCIDefineByName 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 592 OCI8 OCIBindByName (unknown) Bind a PHP variable to an Oracle Placeholder int OCIBindByName (int stmt, string ph_name, mixed &variable, intlength [, int type]) OCIBindByName() binds the PHP variable variable to the Oracle placeholder ph_name. Whether it will be used for input or output will be determined run-time, and the necessary storage space will be allocated. The length paramter sets the maximum length for the bind. If you set length to -1 OCIBindByName() will use the current length of variable to set the maximum length. If you need to bind an abstract Datatype (LOB/ROWID/BFILE) you need to allocate it first using OCINewDescriptor() function. The length is not used for abstract Datatypes and should be set to -1. The type variable tells oracle, what kind of descriptor we want to use. Possible values are: OCI_B_FILE (Binary-File), OCI_B_CFILE (Character-File), OCI_B_CLOB (Character-LOB), OCI_B_BLOB (Binary-LOB) and OCI_B_ROWID (ROWID). Example 1. OCIDefineByName 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 "Larry", 2222 => "Bill", 3333 => "Jim"); $rowid = OCINewDescriptor($conn,OCI_D_ROWID); OCIBindByName($stmt,":empno",&$empno,32); OCIBindByName($stmt,":ename",&$ename,32); OCIBindByName($stmt,":rid",&$rowid,-1,OCI_B_ROWID); $update = OCIParse($conn,"update emp set sal = :sal where ROWID = :rid"); 24 OCIBindByName($update,":rid",&$rowid,-1,OCI_B_ROWID); 593 OCI8 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"select * from emp where empno in (1111,2222,3333)"); 40 OCIExecute($stmt); 41 while (OCIFetchInto($stmt,&$arr,OCI_ASSOC)) { 42 var_dump($arr); 43 } 44 OCIFreeStatement($stmt); 45 46 /* delete our "junk" from the emp table.... */ 47 $stmt = OCI- 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 OCIBindByName($update,":sal",&$sal,32); $sal = 10000; while (list($empno,$ename) = each($data)) { OCIExecute($stmt); OCIExecute($update); } $rowid->free(); OCIFreeStatement($update); OCIFreeStatement($stmt); Parse($conn,"delete from emp where empno in (1111,2222,3333)"); 48 OCIExecute($stmt); 49 OCIFreeStatement($stmt); 50 51 OCILogoff($conn); 52 ?> OCILogon (unknown) Establishes a connection to Oracle int OCILogon (string username, string password [, string db]) OCILogon() returns an connection identifier needed for most other OCI calls. The optional third parameter can either contain the name of the local Oracle instance or the name of the entry in tnsnames.ora to which you want to connect. If the optional third parameter is not specified, PHP uses the environment variables ORACLE_SID (Oracle instance) or TWO_TASK (tnsnames.ora) to determine which database to connect to. 594 OCI8 Connections are shared at the page level when using OCILogon(). This means that commits and rollbacks apply to all open transactions in the page, even if you have created multiple connections. This example demonstrates how the connections are shared. Example 1. OCILogon 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 
"; $db = ""; $c1 = ocilogon("scott","tiger",$db); $c2 = ocilogon("scott","tiger",$db); function create_table($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"create table scott.hallo (test varchar2(64))"); ociexecute($stmt); echo $conn." created table\n\n"; } function drop_table($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"drop table scott.hallo"); ociexecute($stmt); echo $conn." dropped table\n\n"; }

function insert_data($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"insert into scott.hallo values(’$conn’ || ’ ’ || to_char(sysdate,’DD-MON-YY HH24:MI:SS’))"); 24 ociexecute($stmt,OCI_DEFAULT); 25 echo $conn." inserted hallo\n\n"; 26 }
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41

function delete_data($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"delete from scott.hallo"); ociexecute($stmt,OCI_DEFAULT); echo $conn." deleted hallo\n\n"; } function commit($conn) { ocicommit($conn); echo $conn." commited\n\n"; } function rollback($conn) { ocirollback($conn); echo $conn." rollback\n\n";

595

OCI8

42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81

} function select_data($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"select * from scott.hallo"); ociexecute($stmt,OCI_DEFAULT); echo $conn."----selecting\n\n"; while (ocifetch($stmt)) echo $conn." <".ociresult($stmt,"TEST").">\n\n"; echo $conn."----done\n\n"; } create_table($c1); insert_data($c1); insert_data($c2); select_data($c1); select_data($c2); rollback($c1); select_data($c1); select_data($c2); insert_data($c2); commit($c2); select_data($c1); delete_data($c1); select_data($c1); select_data($c2); commit($c1); select_data($c1); select_data($c2);

// Insert a row using c1 // Insert a row using c2 // Results of both inserts are returned

// Rollback using c1 // Both inserts have been rolled back

// Insert a row using c2 // commit using c2 // result of c2 insert is returned // // // // delete all rows in table using c1 no rows returned no rows returned commit using c1

// no rows returned // no rows returned

drop_table($c1); print "
"; ?> See also OCIPLogon() and OCINLogon(). OCIPLogon (unknown) Connect to an Oracle database and log on using a persistant connection. Returns a new session. 596 OCI8 int OCIPLogon (string username, string password [, string db]) OCIPLogon() creates a persistent connection to an Oracle 8 database and logs on. The optional third parameter can either contain the name of the local Oracle instance or the name of the entry in tnsnames.ora to which you want to connect. If the optional third parameter is not specified, PHP uses the environment variables ORACLE_SID (Oracle instance) or TWO_TASK (tnsnames.ora) to determine which database to connect to. See also OCILogon() and OCINLogon(). OCINLogon (unknown) Connect to an Oracle database and log on using a new connection. Returns a new session. int OCINLogon (string username, string password [, string db]) OCINLogon() creates a new connection to an Oracle 8 database and logs on. The optional third parameter can either contain the name of the local Oracle instance or the name of the entry in tnsnames.ora to which you want to connect. If the optional third parameter is not specified, PHP uses the environment variables ORACLE_SID (Oracle instance) or TWO_TASK (tnsnames.ora) to determine which database to connect to. OCINLogon() forces a new connection. This should be used if you need to isolate a set of transactions. By default, connections are shared at the page level if using OCILogon() or at the web server process level if using OCIPLogon(). If you have multiple connections open using OCINLogon(), all commits and rollbacks apply to the specified connection only. This example demonstrates how the connections are separated. Example 1. OCINLogon 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 
"; $db = ""; $c1 = ocilogon("scott","tiger",$db); $c2 = ocinlogon("scott","tiger",$db); function create_table($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"create table scott.hallo (test varchar2(64))"); ociexecute($stmt); echo $conn." created table\n\n";

597

OCI8

function insert_data($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"insert into scott.hallo values(’$conn’ || ’ ’ || to_char(sysdate,’DD-MON-YY HH24:MI:SS’))"); 24 ociexecute($stmt,OCI_DEFAULT); 25 echo $conn." inserted hallo\n\n"; 26 }
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

} function drop_table($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"drop table scott.hallo"); ociexecute($stmt); echo $conn." dropped table\n\n"; }

function delete_data($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"delete from scott.hallo"); ociexecute($stmt,OCI_DEFAULT); echo $conn." deleted hallo\n\n"; } function commit($conn) { ocicommit($conn); echo $conn." commited\n\n"; } function rollback($conn) { ocirollback($conn); echo $conn." rollback\n\n"; } function select_data($conn) { $stmt = ociparse($conn,"select * from scott.hallo"); ociexecute($stmt,OCI_DEFAULT); echo $conn."----selecting\n\n"; while (ocifetch($stmt)) echo $conn." <".ociresult($stmt,"TEST").">\n\n"; echo $conn."----done\n\n"; } create_table($c1); insert_data($c1); select_data($c1); select_data($c2); rollback($c1); select_data($c1);

598

OCI8

62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80

select_data($c2); insert_data($c2); commit($c2); select_data($c1); delete_data($c1); select_data($c1); select_data($c2); commit($c1); select_data($c1); select_data($c2);

drop_table($c1); print "
"; ?> See also OCILogon() and OCIPLogon(). OCILogOff (unknown) Disconnects from Oracle int OCILogOff (int connection) OCILogOff() closes an Oracle connection. OCIExecute (unknown) Execute a statement int OCIExecute (int statement [, int mode]) OCIExecute() executes a previously parsed statement. (see OCIParse()). The optional mode allows you to specify the execution-mode (default is OCI_COMMIT_ON_SUCCESS). If you don’t want statements to be commited automaticly specify OCI_DEFAULT as your mode. 599 OCI8 OCICommit (unknown) Commits outstanding transactions int OCICommit (int connection) OCICommit() commits all outstanding statements for Oracle connection connection. OCIRollback (unknown) Rolls back outstanding transactions int OCIRollback (int connection) OCIRollback() rolls back all outstanding statements for Oracle connection connection. OCINewDescriptor (unknown) Initialize a new empty descriptor LOB/FILE (LOB is default) string OCINewDescriptor (int connection [, int type]) OCINewDescriptor() Allocates storage to hold descriptors or LOB locators. Valid values for the valid type are OCI_D_FILE, OCI_D_LOB, OCI_D_ROWID. For LOB desriptors, the methods load, save, and savefile are associated with the descriptor, for BFILE only the load method exists. See the second example usage hints. Example 1. OCINewDescriptor 1 2 tion="upload.php3" method="post" enctype="multipart/form-data"> 6 * 7 * ... 8 */ 9 if(!isset($lob_upload) || $lob_upload == ’none’){ 10 ?> 11
12 Upload file:
13 - 14 15 savefile($lob_upload)){ 24 OCICommit($conn); 25 echo "Blob successfully uploaded\n"; 601 OCI8 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 } 33 ?> 34 }else{ echo "Couldn’t upload Blob\n"; } OCIFreeDescriptor($lob); OCIFreeStatement($stmt); OCILogoff($conn); OCIRowCount (unknown) Gets the number of affected rows int OCIRowCount (int statement) OCIRowCounts() returns the number of rows affected for eg update-statements. This funtions will not tell you the number of rows that a select will return! Example 1. OCIRowCount 1 2 
"; 4 $conn = OCILogon("scott","tiger"); 5 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"create table emp2 as select * from emp"); 6 OCIExecute($stmt); 7 print OCIRowCount($stmt) . " rows inserted.
"; 8 OCIFreeStatement($stmt); 9 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"delete from emp2"); 10 OCIExecute($stmt); 11 print OCIRowCount($stmt) . " rows deleted.
"; 12 OCICommit($conn); 13 OCIFreeStatement($stmt); 14 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"drop table emp2"); 15 OCIExecute($stmt); 16 OCIFreeStatement($stmt); 17 OCILogOff($conn); 18 print "
"; 19 ?> 602 OCI8 OCINumCols (unknown) Return the number of result columns in a statement int OCINumCols (int stmt) OCINumCols() returns the number of columns in a statement Example 1. OCINumCols 1 2 
\n"; 4 $conn = OCILogon("scott", "tiger"); 5 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"select * from emp"); 6 OCIExecute($stmt); 7 while ( OCIFetch($stmt) ) { 8 print "\n"; 9 $ncols = OCINumCols($stmt); 10 for ( $i = 1; $i <= $ncols; $i++ ) { 11 $column_name = OCIColumnName($stmt,$i); 12 $column_value = OCIResult($stmt,$i); 13 print $column_name . ’: ’ . $column_value . "\n"; 14 } 15 print "\n"; 16 } 17 OCIFreeStatement($stmt); 18 OCILogoff($conn); 19 print "
"; 20 print "\n"; 21 ?> OCIResult (unknown) Returns coulumn value for fetched row mixed OCIResult (int statement, mixed column) OCIResult() returns the data for column column in the current row (see OCIFetch()).OCIResult() will return everything as strings except for abstract types (ROWIDs, LOBs and FILEs). 603 OCI8 OCIFetch (unknown) Fetches the next row into result-buffer int OCIFetch (int statement) OCIFetch() fetches the next row (for SELECT statements) into the internal result-buffer. OCIFetchInto (unknown) Fetches the next row into result-array int OCIFetchInto (int stmt, array &result [, int mode]) OCIFetchInto() fetches the next row (for SELECT statements) into the result array. OCIFetchInto() will overwrite the previous content of result. By default result will contain a one-based array of all columns that are not NULL. The mode parameter allows you to change the default behaviour. You can specify more than one flag by simply addig them up (eg OCI_ASSOC+OCI_RETURN_NULLS). The known flags are: OCI_ASSOC Return an associative array. OCI_NUM Return an numbered array starting with one. (DEFAULT) OCI_RETURN_NULLS Return empty columns. OCI_RETURN_LOBS Return the value of a LOB instead of the desxriptor. OCIFetchStatement (unknown) Fetch all rows of result data into an array. int OCIFetchStatement (int stmt, array &variable) OCIFetchStatement() fetches all the rows from a result into a user-defined array. OCIFetchStatement() returns the number of rows fetched. 604 OCI8 Example 1. OCIFetchStatement 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 0 ) { print "
\n"; print "\n"; while ( list( $key, $val ) = each( $results ) ) { print "\n"; } print "\n"; for ( $i = 0; $i < $nrows; $i++ ) { reset($results); print "\n"; while ( $column = each($results) ) { $data = $column[’value’]; print "\n"; } print "\n"; } print "
$key
$data[$i]
\n"; } else { echo "No data found
\n"; } print "$nrows Records Selected
\n"; OCIFreeStatement($stmt); OCILogoff($conn); ?> OCIColumnIsNULL (unknown) test whether a result column is NULL 605 OCI8 int OCIColumnIsNULL (int stmt, mixed column) OCIColumnIsNULL() returns true if the returned column col in the result from the statement stmt is NULL. You can either use the column-number (1-Based) or the column-name for the col parameter. OCIColumnSize (unknown) return result column size int OCIColumnSize (int stmt, mixed column) OCIColumnSize() returns the size of the column as given by Oracle. You can either use the column-number (1-Based) or the column-name for the col parameter. Example 1. OCIColumnSize 1 2 
\n"; 4 $conn = OCILogon("scott", "tiger"); 5 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"select * from emp"); 6 OCIExecute($stmt); 7 print ""; 8 print ""; 9 print ""; 10 print ""; 11 print ""; 12 print ""; 13 $ncols = OCINumCols($stmt); 14 for ( $i = 1; $i <= $ncols; $i++ ) { 15 $column_name = OCIColumnName($stmt,$i); 16 $column_type = OCIColumnType($stmt,$i); 17 $column_size = OCIColumnSize($stmt,$i); 18 print ""; 19 print ""; 20 print ""; 21 print ""; 22 print ""; 23 } 24 print "
NameTypeLength
$column_name$column_type$column_size
"; 25 OCIFreeStatement($stmt); 26 OCILogoff($conn); 27 print "
"; 606 OCI8 28 29 ?> print "\n"; See also OCINumCols(), OCIColumnName(), and OCIColumnSize(). OCIServerVersion (unknown) Return a string containing server version information. string OCIServerVersion (int conn) Example 1. OCIServerVersion 1 2 OCIStatementType (unknown) Return the type of an OCI statement. string OCIStatementType (int stmt) OCIStatementType() returns on of the following values: 1. "SELECT" 2. "UPDATE" 3. "DELETE" 4. "INSERT" 5. "CREATE" 6. "DROP" 7. "ALTER" 8. "BEGIN" 607 OCI8 9. "DECLARE" 10. "UNKNOWN" Example 1. Code examples 1 2 
"; 4 $conn = OCILogon("scott","tiger"); 5 $sql = "delete from emp where deptno = 10"; 6 7 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,$sql); 8 if ( OCIStatementType($stmt) == "DELETE" ) { 9 die "You are not allowed to delete from this table
"; 10 } 11 12 OCILogoff($conn); 13 print "
"; 14 ?> 15 OCINewCursor (unknown) return a new cursor (Statement-Handle) - use this to bind ref-cursors! int OCINewCursor (int conn) OCINewCursor() allocates a new statement handle on the specified connection. Example 1. Using a REF CURSOR from a stored procedure 1 2 Example 2. Using a REF CURSOR in a select statement 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 "; $conn = OCILogon("scott","tiger"); $count_cursor = "CURSOR(select count(empno) num_emps from emp " . "where emp.deptno = dept.deptno) as EMPCNT from dept"; $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"select deptno,dname,$count_cursor"); ociexecute($stmt); print ""; print ""; print ""; print ""; print ""; print ""; while (OCIFetchInto($stmt,&$data,OCI_ASSOC)) { print ""; $dname = $data["DNAME"]; $deptno = $data["DEPTNO"]; print ""; print ""; ociexecute($data[ "EMPCNT" ]); while (OCIFetchInto($data[ "EMPCNT" ],&$subdata,OCI_ASSOC)) { $num_emps = $subdata["NUM_EMPS"]; print ""; } print ""; } print "
DEPT NAMEDEPT ## EMPLOYEES
$dname$deptno$num_emps
"; print ""; OCIFreeStatement($stmt); OCILogoff($conn); ?> 609 OCI8 OCIFreeStatement (unknown) Free all resources associated with a statement. int OCIFreeStatement (int stmt) OCIFreeStatement() returns true if successful, or false if unsuccessful. OCIFreeCursor (unknown) Free all resources associated with a cursor. int OCIFreeCursor (int stmt) OCIFreeCursor() returns true if successful, or false if unsuccessful. OCIColumnName (unknown) Returns the name of a column. string OCIColumnName (int stmt, int col) OCIColumnName() returns the name of the column corresponding to the column number (1-based) that is passed in. Example 1. OCIColumnName 1 2 
\n"; 4 $conn = OCILogon("scott", "tiger"); 5 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"select * from emp"); 6 OCIExecute($stmt); 7 print ""; 8 print ""; 9 print ""; 10 print ""; 11 print "";

610

OCI8

12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ?>

print ""; $ncols = OCINumCols($stmt); for ( $i = 1; $i <= $ncols; $i++ ) { $column_name = OCIColumnName($stmt,$i); $column_type = OCIColumnType($stmt,$i); $column_size = OCIColumnSize($stmt,$i); print ""; print ""; print ""; print ""; print ""; } OCIFreeStatement($stmt); OCILogoff($conn); print ""; print "\n";

See also OCINumCols(), OCIColumnType(), and OCIColumnSize().

OCIColumnType (unknown)
Returns the data type of a column.
mixed OCIColumnName (int stmt, int col)

OCIColumnType() returns the data type of the column corresponding to the column number (1-based) that is passed in. Example 1. OCIColumnType
1 2 
\n"; 4 $conn = OCILogon("scott", "tiger"); 5 $stmt = OCIParse($conn,"select * from emp"); 6 OCIExecute($stmt); 7 print "
NameTypeLength
$column_name$column_type$column_size
"; 8 print ""; 9 print ""; 10 print ""; 11 print ""; 12 print ""; 13 $ncols = OCINumCols($stmt);

611

OCI8

14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 ?>

for ( $i = 1; $i <= $ncols; $i++ ) { $column_name = OCIColumnName($stmt,$i); $column_type = OCIColumnType($stmt,$i); $column_size = OCIColumnSize($stmt,$i); print ""; print ""; print ""; print ""; print ""; } OCIFreeStatement($stmt); OCILogoff($conn); print ""; print "\n";

See also OCINumCols(), OCIColumnName(), and OCIColumnSize().

OCIParse (unknown)
Parse a query and return a statement
int OCIParse (int conn, strint query)

OCIParse() parses the query using conn. It returns true if the query is valid, false if not. The query can be any valid SQL statement.

OCIError (unknown)
Return the last error of stmt|conn|global. If no error happened returns false.
int OCIError ([int stmt|conn])

OCIError() returns the last error found. If the optional stmt|conn is not provided, the last error encountered is returned. If no error is found, OCIError() returns false. OCIError() returns the error as an associative array. In this array, code consists the oracle error code and message the oracle errorstring.

612

OCI8

OCIInternalDebug (unknown)
Enables or disables internal debug output. By default it is disabled
void OCIInternalDebug (int onoff)

OCIInternalDebug() enables internal debug output. Set onoff to 0 to turn debug output off, 1 to turn it on.

613

XLIV. PDF functions
You can use the PDF functions in PHP to create PDF files if you have the PDF library by Thomas Merz (available at http://www.pdflib.com/pdflib/index.html; you will also need the JPEG library (ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/) and the TIFF library (http://www.libtiff.org/) to compile this. These two libs also quite often make problems when configuring php. Follow the messages of configure to fix possible problems. If you use pdflib 2.01 check how the lib was installed. There should be file or link libpdf.so. Version 2.01 just creates a lib with the name libpdf2.01.so which cannot be found when linking the test programm in configure. You will have to create a symbolic link from libpdf.so to libpdf2.01.so.). Version 2.20 of pdflib has introduced more changes to its API and support for chinese and japanese fonts. This unfortunately causes some changes of the pdf module of php4 (not php3). If you use pdflib 2.20 handle the in memory generation of PDF documents with care. Until pdflib 3.0 is released it might be unstable. The encoding parameter of pdf_set_font() has changed to a string. This means that instead of e.g. 4 you have to use ’winansi’. If you use pdflib 2.30 the pdf_set_text_matrix() will have gone. It is not supported any more. In general it is a good advise to consult the release notes of the used version of pdflib for possible changes. Any version of PHP4 after March, 9th 2000 do not support versions of pdflib older than 3.0. PHP3 on the other hand should not be used with version newer than 2.01. Please consult the excellent documentation for pdflib shipped with the source distribution of pdflib. It provides a very good overview of what pdflib capable of doing. Most of the functions in pdflib and the PHP module have the same name. The parameters are also identical. You should also understand some of the concepts of PDF or Postscript to efficiently use this module. All lengths and coordinates are measured in Postscript points. There are generally 72 PostScript points to an inch, but this depends on the output resolution. There is another PHP module for pdf document creation based on FastIO’s (http://www.fastio.com). ClibPDF. It has a slightly different API. Check the ClibPDF functions section for details. Currently all versions of pdflib are supported. It is recommended that you use the newest version since it has more features and fixes some problems which required a patch for the old version. Unfortunately, the changes of the pdflib API in 2.x compared to 0.6 have been so severe that even some PHP functions had to be altered. Here is a list of changes:
•

The Info structure does not exist anymore. Therefore the function pdf_get_info() is obsolete and the functions pdf_set_info_creator(), pdf_set_info_title(), pdf_set_info_author(), pdf_set_info_subject() and pdf_set_info_keywords() do not take the info structure as the first parameter but the pdf document. This also means that the pdf document must be opened before these functions can be called. The above functions can and should also be replaced by pdf_set_info() The way a new document is opened has changed. The function pdf_open() takes only one parameter which is the file handle of a file opened with fopen().

•

614

OCI8

There were some more changes with the release 2.01 of pdflib which should be covered by PHP. Some functions are not required anymore (e.g. pdf_put_image()). You will get a warning so don’t be shocked. The pdf module introduces two new types of variables (if pdflib 2.x is used it is only one new type). They are called pdfdoc and pdfinfo (pdfinfo is not existent if pdflib 2.x is used. pdfdoc is a pointer to a pdf document and almost all functions need it as its first parameter. pdfinfo contains meta data about the PDF document. It has to be set before pdf_open() is called.
Note: The following is only true for pdflib 0.6. Read the pdflib manual for newer version

In order to output text into a PDF document you will need to provide the afm file for each font. Afm files contain font metrics for a Postscript font. By default these afm files are searched for in a directory named ’fonts’ relative to the directory where the PHP script is located. (Again, this was true for pdflib 0.6, newer versions do not not neccessarily need the afm files.) Most of the functions are fairly easy to use. The most difficult part is probably to create a very simple pdf document at all. The following example should help to get started. It uses the PHP functions for pdflib 0.6. It creates the file test.pdf with one page. The page contains the text "Times-Roman" in an outlined 30pt font. The text is also underlined. Example 1. Creating a PDF document with pdflib 0.6
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

finished"; ?>

615

OCI8

The PHP script getpdf.php3 just outputs the pdf document.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8



Doing the same with pdflib 2.x looks like the following: Example 2. Creating a PDF document with pdflib 2.x
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

finished"; ?>

The PHP script getpdf.php3 is the same as above. The pdflib distribution contains a more complex example which creates a serious of pages with an analog clock. This example converted into PHP using pdflib 2.x looks as the following (you can see the same example in the documentation for the clibpdf module):

616

OCI8

Example 3. pdfclock example from pdflib 2.x distribution
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

 0) { pdf_begin_page($pdf, 2 * ($radius + $margin), 2 * ($radius + $margin)); pdf_set_transition($pdf, 4); pdf_set_duration($pdf, 0.5); /* wipe */

pdf_translate($pdf, $radius + $margin, $radius + $margin); pdf_save($pdf); pdf_setrgbcolor($pdf, 0.0, 0.0, 1.0); /* minute strokes */ pdf_setlinewidth($pdf, 2.0); for ($alpha = 0; $alpha < 360; $alpha += 6) { pdf_rotate($pdf, 6.0); pdf_moveto($pdf, $radius, 0.0); pdf_lineto($pdf, $radius-$margin/3, 0.0); pdf_stroke($pdf); } pdf_restore($pdf); pdf_save($pdf); /* 5 minute strokes */ pdf_setlinewidth($pdf, 3.0); for ($alpha = 0; $alpha < 360; $alpha += 30) { pdf_rotate($pdf, 30.0); pdf_moveto($pdf, $radius, 0.0); pdf_lineto($pdf, $radius-$margin, 0.0); pdf_stroke($pdf); } $ltime = getdate();

617

OCI8

/* draw hour hand */ pdf_save($pdf); pdf_rotate($pdf,-(($ltime[’minutes’]/60.0)+$ltime[’hours’]3.0)*30.0); 50 pdf_moveto($pdf, -$radius/10, -$radius/20); 51 pdf_lineto($pdf, $radius/2, 0.0); 52 pdf_lineto($pdf, -$radius/10, $radius/20); 53 pdf_closepath($pdf); 54 pdf_fill($pdf); 55 pdf_restore($pdf);
47 48 49

/* draw minute hand */ pdf_save($pdf); pdf_rotate($pdf,-(($ltime[’seconds’]/60.0)+$ltime[’minutes’]15.0)*6.0); 60 pdf_moveto($pdf, -$radius/10, -$radius/20); 61 pdf_lineto($pdf, $radius * 0.8, 0.0); 62 pdf_lineto($pdf, -$radius/10, $radius/20); 63 pdf_closepath($pdf); 64 pdf_fill($pdf); 65 pdf_restore($pdf);
66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90

56 57 58 59

/* draw second hand */ pdf_setrgbcolor($pdf, 1.0, 0.0, 0.0); pdf_setlinewidth($pdf, 2); pdf_save($pdf); pdf_rotate($pdf, -(($ltime[’seconds’] - 15.0) * 6.0)); pdf_moveto($pdf, -$radius/5, 0.0); pdf_lineto($pdf, $radius, 0.0); pdf_stroke($pdf); pdf_restore($pdf); /* draw little circle at center */ pdf_circle($pdf, 0, 0, $radius/30); pdf_fill($pdf); pdf_restore($pdf); pdf_end_page($pdf); } $pdf = pdf_close($pdf); fclose($fp); echo "finished"; ?>

The PHP script getpdf.php3 just outputs the pdf document.
1

618

OCI8

2 3 4 5 6 7 8



619

PDF_get_info (unknown)
Returns an empty info structure for a pdf document
info pdf_get_info (string filename)

The PDF_get_info() function returns an empty info structure for the pdf document. It should be filled with appropriate information like the author, subject etc. of the document.
Note: This functions is not available if pdflib 2.x support is activated.

See also PDF_set_info_creator(), PDF_set_info_author(), PDF_set_info_keywords(), PDF_set_info_title(), PDF_set_info_subject().

PDF_set_info (unknown)
Fills a field of the document information
void pdf_set_info (int pdf document, string fieldname, string value)

The PDF_set_info() function sets an information field of a pdf document. Possible values for the fieldname are ’Subject’, ’Title’, ’Creator’, ’Author’, ’Keywords’ and one user-defined name. It can be called before beginning a page. Example 1. Setting document information
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15



620

PDF

Note: This function replaces PDF_set_info_keywords(), PDF_set_info_title(), PDF_set_info_subject(), PDF_set_info_creator(), PDF_set_info_sybject().

PDF_open (unknown)
Opens a new pdf document
int pdf_open (int file, int info)

The PDF_open() function opens a new pdf document. The corresponding file has to be opened with fopen() and the file descriptor passed as argument file. info is the info structure that has to be created with pdf_get_info(). The info structure will be deleted within this function.
Note: The return value is needed as the first parameter in all other functions writing to the pdf document.

Note: This function does not allow the second parameter if pdflib 2.0 support is activated.

See also fopen(), PDF_get_info(), PDF_close().

PDF_close (unknown)
Closes a pdf document
void pdf_close (int pdf document)

The PDF_close() function closes the pdf document.
Note: Due to an unclean implementation of the pdflib 0.6 the internal closing of the document also closes the file. This should not be done because pdflib did not open the file, but expects an already open file when PDF_open() is called. Consequently it shouldn’t close the file. In order to fix this just take out line 190 of the file p_basic.c in the pdflib 0.6 source distribution until the next release of pdflib will fix this.

Note: This function works properly without any patches to pdflib if pdflib 2.0 support is activated.

621

PDF

See also PDF_open(), fclose().

PDF_begin_page (unknown)
Starts new page
void pdf_begin_page (int pdf document, double width, double height)

The PDF_begin_page() function starts a new page with height height and width width. In order to create a valid document you must call this function and PDF_end_page(). See also PDF_end_page().

PDF_end_page (unknown)
Ends a page
void pdf_end_page (int pdf document)

The PDF_end_page() function ends a page. Once a page is ended it cannot be modified anymore. See also PDF_begin_page().

PDF_show (unknown)
Output text at current position
void pdf_show (int pdf document, string text)

The PDF_show() function outputs the string text at the current position using the current font. See also PDF_show_xy(), PDF_set_text_pos(), PDF_set_font().

622

PDF

PDF_show_boxed (unknown)
Output text in a box
int pdf_show_boxed (int pdf document, string text, double x-coor, double y-coor, double width, double height, string mode)

The PDF_show_boxed() function outputs the string text in a box with its lower left position at (x-coor, y-coor). The boxes dimension is height by width. The parameter mode determines how the text is type set. If width and height are zero, the mode can be "left", "right" or "center". If width or height is unequal zero it can also be "justify" and "fulljustify". Returns the number of characters that could not be processed because they did not fit into the box. See also PDF_show(), PDF_show_xy().

PDF_show_xy (unknown)
Output text at given position
void pdf_show_xy (int pdf document, string text, double x-coor, double y-coor)

The PDF_show_xy() function outputs the string text at position (x-coor, y-coor). See also PDF_show().

PDF_set_font (unknown)
Selects a font face and size
void pdf_set_font (int pdf document, string font name, double size, string encoding [, int embed])

The PDF_set_font() function sets the current font face, font size and encoding. If you use pdflib 0.6 you will need to provide the Adobe Font Metrics (afm-files) for the font in the font path (default is ./fonts). If you use php3 or a version of pdflib older than 2.20 the fourth parameter encoding can take the following values: 0 = builtin, 1 = pdfdoc, 2 = macroman, 3 = macexpert, 4 = winansi. An encoding greater than 4 and less than 0 will default to winansi. winansi is often a good choice. If you

623

PDF

use php4 and a version of pdflib >= 2.20 the encoding parameter has changed to a string. Use ’winansi’, ’builtin’, ’host’, ’macroman’ etc. instead. If the last parameter is set to 1 the font is embedded into the pdf document otherwise it is not. To embed a font is usually a good idea if the font is not widely spread and you cannot ensure that the person watching your document has access on fonts in the document. I font is only embedded once even if you call PDF_set_font() several times.
Note: This function has to be called after PDF_begin_page() in order to create a valid pdf document.

Note: If you reference a font in a .upr file make sure the name in the afm file and the font name are the same. Otherwise, the font will be embedded several times (Thanks to Paul Haddon for finding this.)

PDF_set_leading (unknown)
Sets distance between text lines
void pdf_set_leading (int pdf document, double distance)

The PDF_set_leading() function sets the distance between text lines. This will be used if text is output by PDF_continue_text(). See also PDF_continue_text().

PDF_set_parameter (unknown)
Sets certain parameters
void pdf_set_parameter (int pdf document, string name, string value)

The PDF_set_parameter() function sets several parameters of pdflib which are of the type string. See also PDF_get_value(), PDF_set_value(), PDF_get_parameter().

624

PDF

PDF_get_parameter (unknown)
Gets certain parameters
string pdf_get_parameter (int pdf document, string name, double modifier)

The PDF_get_parameter() function gets several parameters of pdflib which are of the type string. The function parameter modifier characterizes the parameter to get. If the modifier is not needed it has to be 0. See also PDF_get_value(), PDF_set_value(), PDF_set_parameter().

PDF_set_value (unknown)
Sets certain numerical value
void pdf_set_value (int pdf document, string name, double value)

The PDF_set_value() function sets several numerical parameters of pdflib. See also PDF_get_value(), PDF_get_parameter(), PDF_set_parameter().

PDF_get_value (unknown)
Gets certain numerical value
double pdf_get_value (int pdf document, string name, double modifier)

The PDF_get_value() function gets several numerical parameters of pdflib. The function parameter modifier characterizes the parameter to get. If the modifier is not needed it has to be 0. See also PDF_set_value(), PDF_get_parameter(), PDF_set_parameter().

PDF_set_text_rendering (unknown)
Determines how text is rendered

625

PDF

void pdf_set_text_rendering (int pdf document, int mode)

The PDF_set_text_rendering() function determines how text is rendered. The possible values for mode are 0=fill text, 1=stroke text, 2=fill and stroke text, 3=invisible, 4=fill text and add it to cliping path, 5=stroke text and add it to clipping path, 6=fill and stroke text and add it to cliping path, 7=add it to clipping path.

PDF_set_horiz_scaling (unknown)
Sets horizontal scaling of text
void pdf_set_horiz_scaling (int pdf document, double scale)

The PDF_set_horiz_scaling() function sets the horizontal scaling to scale percent.

PDF_set_text_rise (unknown)
Sets the text rise
void pdf_set_text_rise (int pdf document, double rise)

The PDF_set_text_rise() function sets the text rising to rise points.

PDF_set_text_matrix (unknown)
Sets the text matrix
void pdf_set_text_matrix (int pdf document, array matrix)

The PDF_set_text_matrix() function sets a matrix which describes a transformation applied on the current text font. The matrix has to passed as an array with six elements.

626

PDF

PDF_set_text_pos (unknown)
Sets text position
void pdf_set_text_pos (int pdf document, double x-coor, double y-coor)

The PDF_set_text_pos() function sets the position of text for the next pdf_show() function call. See also PDF_show(), PDF_show_xy().

PDF_set_char_spacing (unknown)
Sets character spacing
void pdf_set_char_spacing (int pdf document, double space)

The PDF_set_char_spacing() function sets the spacing between characters. See also PDF_set_word_spacing(), PDF_set_leading().

PDF_set_word_spacing (unknown)
Sets spacing between words
void pdf_set_word_spacing (int pdf document, double space)

The PDF_set_word_spacing() function sets the spacing between words. See also PDF_set_char_spacing(), PDF_set_leading().

PDF_skew (unknown)
Skews the coordinate system
void pdf_skew (int pdf document, double alpha, double beta)

627

PDF

The PDF_skew() function skew the coordinate system by alpha (x) and beta (y) degrees. alpha and beta may not be 90 or 270 degrees.

PDF_continue_text (unknown)
Outputs text in next line
void pdf_continue_text (int pdf document, string text)

The PDF_continue_text() function outputs the string in text in the next line. The distance between the lines can be set with PDF_set_leading(). See also PDF_show_xy(), PDF_set_leading(), PDF_set_text_pos().

PDF_stringwidth (unknown)
Returns width of text using current font
double pdf_stringwidth (int pdf document, string text)

The PDF_stringwidth() function returns the width of the string in text by using the current font. It requires a font to be set before with PDF_set_font(). See also PDF_set_font().

PDF_save (unknown)
Saves the current environment
void pdf_save (int pdf document)

The PDF_save() function saves the current environment. It works like the postscript command gsave. Very useful if you want to translate or rotate an object without effecting other objects. PDF_save() should always be followed by PDF_restore() to restore the environment before PDF_save(). See also PDF_restore().

628

PDF

PDF_restore (unknown)
Restores formerly saved environment
void pdf_restore (int pdf document)

The PDF_restore() function restores the environment saved with PDF_save(). It works like the postscript command grestore. Example 1. Save and Restore
1 2  5

See also PDF_save().

PDF_translate (unknown)
Sets origin of coordinate system
void pdf_translate (int pdf document, double x-coor, double y-coor)

The PDF_translate() function sets the origin of coordinate system to the point (x-coor, y-coor) relativ the current origin. The following example draws a line from (0, 0) to (200, 200) relative to the initial coordinate system. You have to set the current point after PDF_translate() and before you start drawing more objects. Example 1. Translation
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10



629

PDF

PDF_scale (unknown)
Sets scaling
void pdf_scale (int pdf document, double x-scale, double y-scale)

The PDF_scale() function sets the scaling factor in both directions. The following example scales x and y direction by 72. The following line will therefore be drawn one inch in both directions. Example 1. Scaling
1 2 3 4 5 6



PDF_rotate (unknown)
Sets rotation
void pdf_rotate (int pdf document, double angle)

The PDF_rotate() function sets the rotation in degress to angle.

PDF_setflat (unknown)
Sets flatness
void pdf_setflat (int pdf document, double value)

The PDF_setflat() function sets the flatness to a value between 0 and 100.

630

PDF

PDF_setlinejoin (unknown)
Sets linejoin parameter
void pdf_setlinejoin (int pdf document, long value)

The PDF_setlinejoin() function sets the linejoin parameter between a value of 0 and 2.

PDF_setlinecap (unknown)
Sets linecap parameter
void pdf_setlinecap (int pdf document, int value)

The PDF_setlinecap() function sets the linecap parameter between a value of 0 and 2.

PDF_setmiterlimit (unknown)
Sets miter limit
void pdf_setmiterlimit (int pdf document, double value)

The PDF_setmiterlimit() function sets the miter limit to a value greater of equal than 1.

PDF_setlinewidth (unknown)
Sets line width
void pdf_setlinewidth (int pdf document, double width)

The PDF_setlinewidth() function sets the line width to width.

631

PDF

PDF_setdash (unknown)
Sets dash pattern
void pdf_setdash (int pdf document, double white, double black)

The PDF_setdash() function sets the dash pattern white white points and black black points. If both are 0 a solid line is set.

PDF_moveto (unknown)
Sets current point
void pdf_moveto (int pdf document, double x-coor, double y-coor)

The PDF_moveto() function sets the current point to the coordinates x-coor and y-coor.

PDF_curveto (unknown)
Draws a curve
void pdf_curveto (int pdf document, double x1, double y1, double x2, double y2, double x3, double y3)

The PDF_curveto() function draws a Bezier curve from the current point to the point (x3, y3) using (x1, y1) and (x2, y2) as control points. See also PDF_moveto(), PDF_lineto(), PDF_stroke().

PDF_lineto (unknown)
Draws a line
void pdf_lineto (int pdf document, double x-coor, double y-coor)

632

PDF

The PDF_lineto() function draws a line from the current point to the point with coordinates (x-coor, y-coor). See also PDF_moveto(), PDF_curveto(), PDF_stroke().

PDF_circle (unknown)
Draws a circle
void pdf_circle (int pdf document, double x-coor, double y-coor, double radius)

The PDF_circle() function draws a circle with center at point (x-coor, y-coor) and radius radius. See also PDF_arc(), PDF_stroke().

PDF_arc (unknown)
Draws an arc
void pdf_arc (int pdf document, double x-coor, double y-coor, double radius, double start, double end)

The PDF_arc() function draws an arc with center at point (x-coor, y-coor) and radius radius, starting at angle start and ending at angle end. See also PDF_circle(), PDF_stroke().

PDF_rect (unknown)
Draws a rectangle
void pdf_rect (int pdf document, double x-coor, double y-coor, double width, double height)

The PDF_rect() function draws a rectangle with its lower left corner at point (x-coor, y-coor). This width is set to widgth. This height is set to height.

633

PDF

See also PDF_stroke().

PDF_closepath (unknown)
Closes path
void pdf_closepath (int pdf document)

The PDF_closepath() function closes the current path. This means, it draws a line from current point to the point where the first line was started. Many functions like PDF_moveto(), PDF_circle() and PDF_rect() start a new path.

PDF_stroke (unknown)
Draws line along path
void pdf_stroke (int pdf document)

The PDF_stroke() function draws a line along current path. The current path is the sum of all line drawing. Without this function the line would not be drawn. See also PDF_closepath(), PDF_closepath_stroke().

PDF_closepath_stroke (unknown)
Closes path and draws line along path
void pdf_closepath_stroke (int pdf document)

The PDF_closepath_stroke() function is a combination of PDF_closepath() and PDF_stroke(). It also clears the path. See also PDF_closepath(), PDF_stroke().

634

PDF

PDF_fill (unknown)
Fills current path
void pdf_fill (int pdf document)

The PDF_fill() function fills the interior of the current path with the current fill color. See also PDF_closepath(), PDF_stroke(), PDF_setgray_fill(), PDF_setgray(), PDF_setrgbcolor_fill(), PDF_setrgbcolor().

PDF_fill_stroke (unknown)
Fills and strokes current path
void pdf_fill_stroke (int pdf document)

The PDF_fill_stroke() function fills the interior of the current path with the current fill color and draws current path. See also PDF_closepath(), PDF_stroke(), PDF_fill(), PDF_setgray_fill(), PDF_setgray(), PDF_setrgbcolor_fill(), PDF_setrgbcolor().

PDF_closepath_fill_stroke (unknown)
Closes, fills and strokes current path
void pdf_closepath_fill_stroke (int pdf document)

The PDF_closepath_fill_stroke() function closes, fills the interior of the current path with the current fill color and draws current path. See also PDF_closepath(), PDF_stroke(), PDF_fill(), PDF_setgray_fill(), PDF_setgray(), PDF_setrgbcolor_fill(), PDF_setrgbcolor().

635

PDF

PDF_endpath (unknown)
Ends current path
void pdf_endpath (int pdf document)

The PDF_endpath() function ends the current path but does not close it. See also PDF_closepath().

PDF_clip (unknown)
Clips to current path
void pdf_clip (int pdf document)

The PDF_clip() function clips all drawing to the current path.

PDF_setgray_fill (unknown)
Sets filling color to gray value
void pdf_setgray_fill (int pdf document, double gray value)

The PDF_setgray_fill() function sets the current gray value to fill a path. See also PDF_setrgbcolor_fill().

PDF_setgray_stroke (unknown)
Sets drawing color to gray value
void pdf_setgray_stroke (int pdf document, double gray value)

The PDF_setgray_stroke() function sets the current drawing color to the given gray value.

636

PDF

See also PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke().

PDF_setgray (unknown)
Sets drawing and filling color to gray value
void pdf_setgray (int pdf document, double gray value)

The PDF_setgray() function sets the current drawing and filling color to the given gray value. See also PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke(), PDF_setrgbcolor_fill().

PDF_setrgbcolor_fill (unknown)
Sets filling color to rgb color value
void pdf_setrgbcolor_fill (int pdf document, double red value, double green value, double blue value)

The PDF_setrgbcolor_fill() function sets the current rgb color value to fill a path. See also PDF_setrgbcolor_fill().

PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke (unknown)
Sets drawing color to rgb color value
void pdf_setrgbcolor_stroke (int pdf document, double red value, double green value, double blue value)

The PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke() function sets the current drawing color to the given rgb color value. See also PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke().

637

PDF

PDF_setrgbcolor (unknown)
Sets drawing and filling color to rgb color value
void pdf_setrgbcolor (int pdf document, double red value, double green value, double blue value)

The PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke() function sets the current drawing and filling color to the given rgb color value. See also PDF_setrgbcolor_stroke(), PDF_setrgbcolor_fill().

PDF_add_outline (unknown)
Adds bookmark for current page
int pdf_add_outline (int pdf document, string text [, int parent [, int open]])

The PDF_add_outline() function adds a bookmark with text text that points to the current page. The bookmark is inserted as a child of parent and is by default open if open is not 0. The return value is an identifier for the bookmark which can be used as a parent for other bookmarks. Therefore you can build up hierarchies of bookmarks. Unfortunately pdflib does not make a copy of the string, which forces PHP to allocate the memory. Currently this piece of memory is not been freed by any PDF function but it will be taken care of by the PHP memory manager.

PDF_set_transition (unknown)
Sets transition between pages
void pdf_set_transition (int pdf document, int transition)

The PDF_set_transition() function set the transition between following pages. The value of transition can be 0 for none,

638

PDF

1 for two lines sweeping across the screen reveal the page, 2 for multiple lines sweeping across the screen reveal the page, 3 for a box reveals the page, 4 for a single line sweeping across the screen reveals the page, 5 for the old page dissolves to reveal the page, 6 for the dissolve effect moves from one screen edge to another, 7 for the old page is simply replaced by the new page (default) See also PDF_set_duration().

PDF_set_duration (unknown)
Sets duration between pages
void pdf_set_duration (int pdf document, double duration)

The PDF_set_duration() function set the duration between following pages in seconds. See also PDF_set_transition().

PDF_open_gif (unknown)
Opens a GIF image
int pdf_open_gif (int pdf document, string filename)

The PDF_open_gif() function opens an image stored in the file with the name filename. The format of the image has to be gif. The function returns a pdf image identifier. Example 1. Including a gif image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7



639

PDF

See also PDF_close_image(), PDF_open_jpeg(), PDF_open_memory_image(), PDF_execute_image(), PDF_place_image(), PDF_put_image().

PDF_open_png (unknown)
Opens a PNG image
int pdf_open_png (int pdf, string png_file)

The PDF_open_png() function opens an image stored in the file with the name filename. The format of the image has to be png. The function returns a pdf image identifier. Example 1. Including a PNG image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7



See also PDF_close_image(), PDF_open_jpeg(), PDF_open_gif(), PDF_open_memory_image(), PDF_execute_image(), PDF_place_image(), PDF_put_image().

PDF_open_memory_image (unknown)
Opens an image created with PHP’s image functions
int pdf_open_memory_image (int pdf document, int image)

The PDF_open_memory_image() function takes an image created with the PHP’s image functions and makes it available for the pdf document. The function returns a pdf image identifier. Example 1. Including a memory image
1 2 

See also PDF_close_image(), PDF_open_jpeg(), PDF_open_gif(), PDF_open_png() PDF_execute_image(), PDF_place_image(), PDF_put_image().

PDF_open_jpeg (unknown)
Opens a JPEG image
int pdf_open_jpeg (int pdf document, string filename)

The PDF_open_jpeg() function opens an image stored in the file with the name filename. The format of the image has to be jpeg. The function returns a pdf image identifier. See also PDF_close_image(), PDF_open_gif(), PDF_open_png(), PDF_open_memory_image(), PDF_execute_image(), PDF_place_image(), PDF_put_image().

PDF_close_image (unknown)
Closes an image
void pdf_close_image (int image)

The PDF_close_image() function closes an image which has been opened with any of the PDF_open_xxx() functions. See also PDF_open_jpeg(), PDF_open_gif(), PDF_open_memory_image().

PDF_place_image (unknown)
Places an image on the page

641

PDF

void pdf_place_image (int pdf document, int image, double x-coor, double y-coor, double scale)

The PDF_place_image() function places an image on the page at postion (x-coor, x-coor). The image can be scaled at the same time. See also PDF_put_image().

PDF_put_image (unknown)
Stores an image in the PDF for later use
void pdf_put_image (int pdf document, int image)

The PDF_put_image() function places an image in the PDF file without showing it. The stored image can be displayed with the PDF_execute_image() function as many times as needed. This is useful when using the same image multiple times in order to keep the file size small. Using PDF_put_image() and PDF_execute_image() is highly recommended for larger images (several kb) if they show up more than once in the document.
Note: This function has become meaningless with version 2.01 of pdflib. It will just output a warning.

See also PDF_put_image(), PDF_place_image(), PDF_execute_image().

PDF_execute_image (unknown)
Places a stored image on the page
void pdf_execute_image (int pdf document, int image, double x-coor, double y-coor, double scale)

The PDF_execute_image() function displays an image that has been put in the PDF file with the PDF_put_image() function on the current page at the given coordinates. The image can be scaled while displaying it. A scale of 1.0 will show the image in the original size.
Note: This function has become meaningless with version 2.01 of pdflib. It will just output a warning.

642

PDF

Example 1. Multiple show of an image
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12



pdf_add_annotation (PHP3 >= 3.0.12, PHP4 >= 4.0b2)
Adds annotation
void pdf_add_annotation (int pdf document, double llx, double lly, double urx, double ury, string title, string content)

The pdf_add_annotation() adds a note with the lower left corner at (llx, lly) and the upper right corner at (urx, ury).

PDF_set_border_style (unknown)
Sets style of border around links and annotations
void pdf_set_border_style (int pdf document, string style, double width)

The PDF_set_border_style() function sets the style and width of the suroundig box of links and annotations. The parameter style can be ’solid’ or ’dashed’. See also PDF_set_border_color(), PDF_set_border_dash().

643

PDF

PDF_set_border_color (unknown)
Sets color of border around links and annotations
void pdf_set_border_color (int pdf document, double red, double green, double blue)

The PDF_set_border_color() function sets the color of the suroundig box of links and annotations. The three color components have to have a value between 0.0 and 1.0. See also PDF_set_border_style(), PDF_set_border_dash().

PDF_set_border_dash (unknown)
Sets dash style of border around links and annotations
void pdf_set_border_dash (int pdf document, double black, double white)

The PDF_set_border_dash() function sets the lenght of black and white areas of a dashed line of the suroundig box of links and annotations. See also PDF_set_border_style(), PDF_set_border_color().

644

XLV. Perl-compatible Regular Expression functions
The syntax for patterns used in these functions closely resembles Perl. The expression should be enclosed in the delimiters, a forward slash (/), for example. Any character can be used for delimiter as long as it’s not alphanumeric or backslash (\). If the delimiter character has to be used in the expression itself, it needs to be escaped by backslash. The ending delimiter may be followed by various modifiers that affect the matching. See Pattern Modifiers. Example 1. Examples of valid patterns /<\/\w+>/ |(\d{3})-\d+|Sm /^(?i)php[34]/

• • •

Example 2. Examples of invalid patterns /href=’(.*)’ - missing ending delimiter /\w+\s*\w+/J - unknown modifier ’J’ 1-\d3-\d3-\d4| - missing starting delimiter

• • •

Note: The Perl-compatible regular expression functions are available in PHP 4 and in PHP 3.0.9 and up.

645

preg_match (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 )
Perform a regular expression match
int preg_match (string pattern, string subject [, array matches])

Searches subject for a match to the regular expression given in pattern. If matches is provided, then it is filled with the results of search. $matches[0] will contain the text that match the full pattern, $matches[1] will have the text that matched the first captured parenthesized subpattern, and so on. Returns true if a match for pattern was found in the subject string, or false if not match was found or an error occurred. Example 1. Getting the page number out of a string
1 2 if (preg_match("/page\s+#(\d+)/i", "Go to page #9.", $parts)) 3 print "Next page is $parts[1]"; 4 else 5 print "Page not found."; 6

See also preg_match_all(), preg_replace(), and preg_split().

preg_match_all (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 )
Perform a global regular expression match
int preg_match_all (string pattern, string subject, array matches [, int order])

Searches subject for all matches to the regular expression given in pattern and puts them in matches in the order specified by order. After the first match is found, the subsequent searches are continued on from end of the last match. order can be one of two things:

646

PCRE

PREG_PATTERN_ORDER Orders results so that $matches[0] is an array of full pattern matches, $matches[1] is an array of strings matched by the first parenthesized subpattern, and so on.

1 2 preg_match_all("|<[^>]+>(.*)]+>|U", "example: 
a test< 3 print $out[0][0].", ".$out[0][1]."\n"; 4 print $out[1][0].", ".$out[1][1]."\n" 5

This example will produce:
1 2 example: , 
this is a test
 3 example: , this is a test 4

So, $out[0] contains array of strings that matched full pattern, and $out[1] contains array of strings enclosed by tags. PREG_SET_ORDER Orders results so that $matches[0] is an array of first set of matches, $matches[1] is an array of second set of matches, and so on.

1 2 preg_match_all("|<[^>]+>(.*)]+>|U", "example: 
a test< 3 print $out[0][0].", ".$out[0][1]."\n"; 4 print $out[1][0].", ".$out[1][1]."\n" 5

This example will produce:
1 2 example: , example: 3 
this is a test
, this is a test 4

In this case, $matches[0] is the first set of matches, and $matches[0][0] has text matched by full pattern, $matches[0][1] has text matched by first subpattern and so on. Similarly, $matches[1] is the second set of matches, etc. If order is not specified, it is assumed to be PREG_PATTERN_ORDER. Returns the number of full pattern matches, or false if no match is found or an error occurred.

647

PCRE

Example 1. Getting all phone numbers out of some text.
1 2 preg_match_all("/\(? (\d{3})? \)? (?(1) [\-\s] ) \d{3}-\d{4}/x", 3 "Call 555-1212 or 1-800-555-1212", $phones); 4

See also preg_match(), preg_replace(), and preg_split().

preg_replace (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 )
Perform a regular expression search and replace
mixed preg_replace (mixed pattern, mixed replacement, mixed subject)

Searches subject for matches to pattern and replaces them with replacement . replacement may contain references of the form \\n. Every such reference will be replaced by the text captured by the n’th parenthesized pattern. n can be from 0 to 99, and \\0 refers to the text matched by the whole pattern. Opening parentheses are counted from left to right (starting from 1) to obtain the number of the capturing subpattern. If no matches are found in subject, then it will be returned unchanged. Every parameter to preg_replace() can be an array. If subject is an array, then the search and replace is performed on every entry of subject, and the return value is an array as well. If pattern and replacement are arrays, then preg_replace() takes a value from each array and uses them to do search and replace on subject. If replacement has fewer values than pattern, then empty string is used for the rest of replacement values. If pattern is an array and replacement is a string; then this replacement string is used for every value of pattern. The converse would not make sense, though.
/e modifier makes preg_replace() treat the replacement parameter as PHP code after the appropriate references substitution is done. Tip: make sure that replacement constitutes a valid PHP code string, otherwise PHP will complain about a parse error at the line containing preg_replace(). Note: This modifier was added in PHP 4.0.

648

PCRE

Example 1. Replacing several values
1 2 $patterns = array("/(19|20\d{2})-(\d{1,2})-

(\d{1,2})/", "/^\s*{(\w+)}\s*=/"); 3 $replace = array("\\3/\\4/\\1", "$\\1 ="); 4 print preg_replace($patterns, $replace, "{startDate} = 1999-5-27");
5

This example will produce:
1 2 3

$startDate = 5/27/1999

Example 2. Using /e modifier
1 2 preg_replace("/(<\/?)(\w+)([^>]*>)/e", "’\\1’.strtoup-

per(’\\2’).’\\3’", $html_body);
3

This would capitalize all HTML tags in the input text. See also preg_match(), preg_match_all(), and preg_split().

preg_split (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 )
Split string by a regular expression
array preg_split (string pattern, string subject [, int limit [, int flags]])

Note: Parameter flags was added in PHP Beta 3.

Returns an array containing substrings of subject split along boundaries matched by pattern. If limit is specified, then only substrings up to limit are returned. If flags is PREG_SPLIT_NO_EMPTY then only non-empty pieces will be by preg_split().

649

PCRE

Example 1. Getting parts of search string
1 2 $keywords = preg_split("/[\s,]+/", "hypertext language, programming"); 3

See also preg_match(), preg_match_all(), and preg_replace().

preg_quote (PHP3 >= 3.0.9, PHP4 )
Quote regular expression characters
string preg_quote (string str)

preg_quote() takes str and puts a backslash in front of every character that is part of the regular expression syntax. This is useful if you have a run-time string that you need to match in some text and the string may contain special regex characters. The special regular expression characters are:
. \\ + * ? [ ^ ] $ ( ) { } = ! < > | :

Note: This function was added in PHP 3.0.9.

preg_grep (PHP4 )
Return array entries that match the pattern
array preg_grep (string pattern, array input)

preg_grep() returns the array consisting of the elements of the input array that match the given pattern. Example 1. preg_grep() example
1 2 preg_grep("/^(\d+)?\.\d+$/", $array); // find all floating point num-

bers in the array
3

650

PCRE

Note: This function was added in PHP 4.0.

Pattern Modifiers (unknown)
describes possible modifiers in regex patterns The current possible PCRE modifiers are listed below. The names in parentheses refer to internal PCRE names for these modifiers.

i (PCRE_CASELESS) If this modifier is set, letters in the pattern match both upper and lower case letters. m (PCRE_MULTILINE) By default, PCRE treats the subject string as consisting of a single "line" of characters (even if it actually contains several newlines). The "start of line" metacharacter (^) matches only at the start of the string, while the "end of line" metacharacter ($) matches only at the end of the string, or before a terminating newline (unless E modifier is set). This is the same as Perl. When this modifier is set, the "start of line" and "end of line" constructs match immediately following or immediately before any newline in the subject string, respectively, as well as at the very start and end. This is equivalent to Perl’s /m modifier. If there are no "\n" characters in a subject string, or no occurrences of ^ or $ in a pattern, setting this modifier has no effect. s (PCRE_DOTALL) If this modifier is set, a dot metacharater in the pattern matches all characters, including newlines. Without it, newlines are excluded. This modifier is equivalent to Perl’s /s modifier. A negative class such as [^a] always matches a newline character, independent of the setting of this modifier. x (PCRE_EXTENDED) If this modifier is set, whitespace data characters in the pattern are totally ignored except when escaped or inside a character class, and characters between an unescaped # outside a character class and the next newline character, inclusive, are also ignored. This is equivalent to Perl’s /x modifier, and makes it possible to include comments inside complicated patterns. Note, however, that this applies only to data characters. Whitespace characters may never appear within special character sequences in a pattern, for example within the sequence (?( which introduces a conditional subpattern. e If this modifier is set, preg_replace() does normal substitution of \\ references in the replacement string, evaluates it as PHP code, and uses the result for replacing the search string. Only preg_replace() uses this modifier; it is ignored by other PCRE functions.

651

PCRE

Note: This modifier was added in PHP 4.0.

A (PCRE_ANCHORED) If this modifier is set, the pattern is forced to be "anchored", that is, it is constrained to match only at the start of the string which is being searched (the "subject string"). This effect can also be achieved by appropriate constructs in the pattern itself, which is the only way to do it in Perl. E (PCRE_DOLLAR_ENDONLY) If this modifier is set, a dollar metacharacter in the pattern matches only at the end of the subject string. Without this modifier, a dollar also matches immediately before the final character if it is a newline (but not before any other newlines). This modifier is ignored if m modifier is set. There is no equivalent to this modifier in Perl. S When a pattern is going to be used several times, it is worth spending more time analyzing it in order to speed up the time taken for matching. If this modifier is set, then this extra analysis is performed. At present, studying a pattern is useful only for non-anchored patterns that do not have a single fixed starting character. U (PCRE_UNGREEDY) This modifier inverts the "greediness" of the quantifiers so that they are not greedy by default, but become greedy if followed by "?". It is not compatible with Perl. It can also be set by a (?U) modifier setting within the pattern. X (PCRE_EXTRA) This modifier turns on additional functionality of PCRE that is incompatible with Perl. Any backslash in a pattern that is followed by a letter that has no special meaning causes an error, thus reserving these combinations for future expansion. By default, as in Perl, a backslash followed by a letter with no special meaning is treated as a literal. There are at present no other features controlled by this modifier.

Pattern Syntax (unknown)
describes PCRE regex syntax The PCRE library is a set of functions that implement regular expression pattern matching using the same syntax and semantics as Perl 5, with just a few differences (see below). The current implementation corresponds to Perl 5.005.

652

PCRE

The differences described here are with respect to Perl 5.005. 1. By default, a whitespace character is any character that the C library function isspace() recognizes, though it is possible to compile PCRE with alternative character type tables. Normally isspace() matches space, formfeed, newline, carriage return, horizontal tab, and vertical tab. Perl 5 no longer includes vertical tab in its set of whitespace characters. The \v escape that was in the Perl documentation for a long time was never in fact recognized. However, the character itself was treated as whitespace at least up to 5.002. In 5.004 and 5.005 it does not match \s. 2. PCRE does not allow repeat quantifiers on lookahead assertions. Perl permits them, but they do not mean what you might think. For example, (?!a){3} does not assert that the next three characters are not "a". It just asserts that the next character is not "a" three times. 3. Capturing subpatterns that occur inside negative lookahead assertions are counted, but their entries in the offsets vector are never set. Perl sets its numerical variables from any such patterns that are matched before the assertion fails to match something (thereby succeeding), but only if the negative lookahead assertion contains just one branch. 4. Though binary zero characters are supported in the subject string, they are not allowed in a pattern string because it is passed as a normal C string, terminated by zero. The escape sequence "\0" can be used in the pattern to represent a binary zero. 5. The following Perl escape sequences are not supported: \l, \u, \L, \U, \E, \Q. In fact these are implemented by Perl’s general string-handling and are not part of its pattern matching engine. 6. The Perl \G assertion is not supported as it is not relevant to single pattern matches. 7. Fairly obviously, PCRE does not support the (?{code}) construction.

653

PCRE

8. There are at the time of writing some oddities in Perl 5.005_02 concerned with the settings of captured strings when part of a pattern is repeated. For example, matching "aba" against the pattern /^(a(b)?)+$/ sets $2 to the value "b", but matching "aabbaa" against /^(aa(bb)?)+$/ leaves $2 unset. However, if the pattern is changed to /^(aa(b(b))?)+$/ then $2 (and $3) get set. In Perl 5.004 $2 is set in both cases, and that is also true of PCRE. If in the future Perl changes to a consistent state that is different, PCRE may change to follow. 9. Another as yet unresolved discrepancy is that in Perl 5.005_02 the pattern /^(a)?(?(1)a|b)+$/ matches the string "a", whereas in PCRE it does not. However, in both Perl and PCRE /^(a)?a/ matched against "a" leaves $1 unset. 10. PCRE provides some extensions to the Perl regular expression facilities: (a) Although lookbehind assertions must match fixed length strings, each alternative branch of a lookbehind assertion can match a different length of string. Perl 5.005 requires them all to have the same length. (b) If PCRE_DOLLAR_ENDONLY is set and PCRE_MULTILINE is not set, the $ meta- character matches only at the very end of the string. (c) If PCRE_EXTRA is set, a backslash followed by a letter with no special meaning is faulted. (d) If PCRE_UNGREEDY is set, the greediness of the repetition quantifiers is inverted, that is, by default they are not greedy, but if followed by a question mark they are.

The syntax and semantics of the regular expressions supported by PCRE are described below. Regular expressions are also described in the Perl documentation and in a number of other books, some of which have copious examples. Jeffrey Friedl’s "Mastering Regular Expressions", published by

654

PCRE

O’Reilly (ISBN 1-56592-257-3), covers them in great detail. The description here is intended as reference documentation. A regular expression is a pattern that is matched against a subject string from left to right. Most characters stand for themselves in a pattern, and match the corresponding characters in the subject. As a trivial example, the pattern The quick brown fox matches a portion of a subject string that is identical to itself. The power of regular expressions comes from the ability to include alternatives and repetitions in the pattern. These are encoded in the pattern by the use of metacharacters, which do not stand for themselves but instead are interpreted in some special way. There are two different sets of meta-characters: those that are recognized anywhere in the pattern except within square brackets, and those that are recognized in square brackets. Outside square brackets, the meta-characters are as follows: \ general escape character with several uses ^ assert start of subject (or line, in multiline mode) $ assert end of subject (or line, in multiline mode) . match any character except newline (by default) [ start character class definition | start of alternative branch ( start subpattern ) end subpattern ? extends the meaning of ( also 0 or 1 quantifier also quantifier minimizer * 0 or more quantifier + 1 or more quantifier { start min/max quantifier Part of a pattern that is in square brackets is called a "character class". In a character class the only metacharacters are: \ ^ general escape character negate the class, but only if the first character

655

PCRE

]

indicates character range terminates the character class

The following sections describe the use of each of the meta-characters. BACKSLASH The backslash character has several uses. Firstly, if it is followed by a non-alphameric character, it takes away any special meaning that character may have. This use of backslash as an escape character applies both inside and outside character classes. For example, if you want to match a "*" character, you write "\*" in the pattern. This applies whether or not the following character would otherwise be interpreted as a metacharacter, so it is always safe to precede a non-alphameric with "\" to specify that it stands for itself. In particular, if you want to match a backslash, you write "\\". If a pattern is compiled with the PCRE_EXTENDED option, whitespace in the pattern (other than in a character class) and characters between a "#" outside a character class and the next newline character are ignored. An escaping backslash can be used to include a whitespace or "#" character as part of the pattern. A second use of backslash provides a way of encoding nonprinting characters in patterns in a visible manner. There is no restriction on the appearance of non-printing characters, apart from the binary zero that terminates a pattern, but when a pattern is being prepared by text editing, it is usually easier to use one of the following escape sequences than the binary character it represents: \a alarm, that is, the BEL character (hex 07) \cx "control-x", where x is any character \e escape (hex 1B) \f formfeed (hex 0C) \n newline (hex 0A) \r carriage return (hex 0D) \t tab (hex 09) \xhh character with hex code hh \ddd character with octal code ddd, or backreference

656

PCRE

The precise effect of "\cx" is as follows: if "x" is a lower case letter, it is converted to upper case. Then bit 6 of the character (hex 40) is inverted. Thus "\cz" becomes hex 1A, but "\c{" becomes hex 3B, while "\c;" becomes hex 7B. After "\x", up to two hexadecimal digits are read (letters can be in upper or lower case). After "\0" up to two further octal digits are read. In both cases, if there are fewer than two digits, just those that are present are used. Thus the sequence "\0\x\07" specifies two binary zeros followed by a BEL character. Make sure you supply two digits after the initial zero if the character that follows is itself an octal digit. The handling of a backslash followed by a digit other than 0 is complicated. Outside a character class, PCRE reads it and any following digits as a decimal number. If the number is less than 10, or if there have been at least that many previous capturing left parentheses in the expression, the entire sequence is taken as a back reference. A description of how this works is given later, following the discussion of parenthesized subpatterns. Inside a character class, or if the decimal number is greater than 9 and there have not been that many capturing subpatterns, PCRE re-reads up to three octal digits following the backslash, and generates a single byte from the least significant 8 bits of the value. Any subsequent digits stand for themselves. For example: \040 is another way of writing a space \40 is the same, provided there are fewer than 40 previous capturing subpatterns \7 is always a back reference \11 might be a back reference, or another way of writing a tab \011 is always a tab \0113 is a tab followed by the character "3" \113 is the character with octal code 113 (since there can be no more than 99 back references) \377 is a byte consisting entirely of 1 bits \81 is either a back reference, or a binary zero

657

PCRE

followed by the two characters "8" and "1" Note that octal values of 100 or greater must not be introduced by a leading zero, because no more than three octal digits are ever read. All the sequences that define a single byte value can be used both inside and outside character classes. In addition, inside a character class, the sequence "\b" is interpreted as the backspace character (hex 08). Outside a character class it has a different meaning (see below). The third use of backslash is for specifying generic character types: \d any decimal digit \D any character that is not a decimal digit \s any whitespace character \S any character that is not a whitespace character \w any "word" character \W any "non-word" character Each pair of escape sequences partitions the complete set of characters into two disjoint sets. Any given character matches one, and only one, of each pair. A "word" character is any letter or digit or the underscore character, that is, any character which can be part of a Perl "word". The definition of letters and digits is controlled by PCRE’s character tables, and may vary if localespecific matching is taking place (see "Locale support" above). For example, in the "fr" (French) locale, some character codes greater than 128 are used for accented letters, and these are matched by \w. These character type sequences can appear both inside and outside character classes. They each match one character of the appropriate type. If the current matching point is at the end of the subject string, all of them fail, since there is no character to match. The fourth use of backslash is for certain simple assertions. An assertion specifies a condition that has to be met at a particular point in a match, without consuming any

658

PCRE

characters from the subject string. The use of subpatterns for more complicated assertions is described below. The backslashed assertions are \b word boundary \B not a word boundary \A start of subject (independent of multiline mode) \Z end of subject or newline at end (independent of multiline mode) \z end of subject (independent of multiline mode) These assertions may not appear in character classes (but note that "\b" has a different meaning, namely the backspace character, inside a character class). A word boundary is a position in the subject string where the current character and the previous character do not both match \w or \W (i.e. one matches \w and the other matches \W), or the start or end of the string if the first or last character matches \w, respectively. The \A, \Z, and \z assertions differ from the traditional circumflex and dollar (described below) in that they only ever match at the very start and end of the subject string, whatever options are set. They are not affected by the PCRE_NOTBOL or PCRE_NOTEOL options. The difference between \Z and \z is that \Z matches before a newline that is the last character of the string as well as at the end of the string, whereas \z matches only at the end. CIRCUMFLEX AND DOLLAR Outside a character class, in the default matching mode, the circumflex character is an assertion which is true only if the current matching point is at the start of the subject string. Inside a character class, circumflex has an entirely different meaning (see below). Circumflex need not be the first character of the pattern if a number of alternatives are involved, but it should be the first thing in each alternative in which it appears if the pattern is ever to match that branch. If all possible alternatives start with a circumflex, that is, if the pattern is constrained to match only at the start of the subject, it is said to be an "anchored" pattern. (There are also other con-

659

PCRE

structs that can cause a pattern to be anchored.) A dollar character is an assertion which is true only if the current matching point is at the end of the subject string, or immediately before a newline character that is the last character in the string (by default). Dollar need not be the last character of the pattern if a number of alternatives are involved, but it should be the last item in any branch in which it appears. Dollar has no special meaning in a character class. The meaning of dollar can be changed so that it matches only at the very end of the string, by setting the PCRE_DOLLAR_ENDONLY option at compile or matching time. This does not affect the \Z assertion. The meanings of the circumflex and dollar characters are changed if the PCRE_MULTILINE option is set. When this is the case, they match immediately after and immediately before an internal "\n" character, respectively, in addition to matching at the start and end of the subject string. For example, the pattern /^abc$/ matches the subject string "def\nabc" in multiline mode, but not otherwise. Consequently, patterns that are anchored in single line mode because all branches start with "^" are not anchored in multiline mode. The PCRE_DOLLAR_ENDONLY option is ignored if PCRE_MULTILINE is set. Note that the sequences \A, \Z, and \z can be used to match the start and end of the subject in both modes, and if all branches of a pattern start with \A is it always anchored, whether PCRE_MULTILINE is set or not.

FULL STOP (PERIOD, DOT) Outside a character class, a dot in the pattern matches any one character in the subject, including a non-printing character, but not (by default) newline. If the PCRE_DOTALL option is set, then dots match newlines as well. The handling of dot is entirely independent of the handling of circumflex and dollar, the only relationship being that they both involve newline characters. Dot has no special meaning in a character class.

660

PCRE

SQUARE BRACKETS An opening square bracket introduces a character class, terminated by a closing square bracket. A closing square bracket on its own is not special. If a closing square bracket is required as a member of the class, it should be the first data character in the class (after an initial circumflex, if present) or escaped with a backslash. A character class matches a single character in the subject; the character must be in the set of characters defined by the class, unless the first character in the class is a circumflex, in which case the subject character must not be in the set defined by the class. If a circumflex is actually required as a member of the class, ensure it is not the first character, or escape it with a backslash. For example, the character class [aeiou] matches any lower case vowel, while [^aeiou] matches any character that is not a lower case vowel. Note that a circumflex is just a convenient notation for specifying the characters which are in the class by enumerating those that are not. It is not an assertion: it still consumes a character from the subject string, and fails if the current pointer is at the end of the string. When caseless matching is set, any letters in a class represent both their upper case and lower case versions, so for example, a caseless [aeiou] matches "A" as well as "a", and a caseless [^aeiou] does not match "A", whereas a caseful version would. The newline character is never treated in any special way in character classes, whatever the setting of the PCRE_DOTALL or PCRE_MULTILINE options is. A class such as [^a] will always match a newline. The minus (hyphen) character can be used to specify a range of characters in a character class. For example, [d-m] matches any letter between d and m, inclusive. If a minus character is required in a class, it must be escaped with a backslash or appear in a position where it cannot be inter-

661

PCRE

preted as indicating a range, typically as the first or last character in the class. It is not possible to have the literal character "]" as the end character of a range. A pattern such as [W-]46] is interpreted as a class of two characters ("W" and "-") followed by a literal string "46]", so it would match "W46]" or "-46]". However, if the "]" is escaped with a backslash it is interpreted as the end of range, so [W-\]46] is interpreted as a single class containing a range followed by two separate characters. The octal or hexadecimal representation of "]" can also be used to end a range. Ranges operate in ASCII collating sequence. They can also be used for characters specified numerically, for example [\000-\037]. If a range that includes letters is used when caseless matching is set, it matches the letters in either case. For example, [W-c] is equivalent to [][\^_‘wxyzabc], matched caselessly, and if character tables for the "fr" locale are in use, [\xc8-\xcb] matches accented E characters in both cases. The character types \d, \D, \s, \S, \w, and \W may also appear in a character class, and add the characters that they match to the class. For example, [\dABCDEF] matches any hexadecimal digit. A circumflex can conveniently be used with the upper case character types to specify a more restricted set of characters than the matching lower case type. For example, the class [^\W_] matches any letter or digit, but not underscore. All non-alphameric characters other than \, -, ^ (at the start) and the terminating ] are non-special in character classes, but it does no harm if they are escaped.

VERTICAL BAR Vertical bar characters are used to separate alternative patterns. For example, the pattern gilbert|sullivan matches either "gilbert" or "sullivan". Any number of alternatives may appear, and an empty alternative is permitted

662

PCRE

(matching the empty string). The matching process tries each alternative in turn, from left to right, and the first one that succeeds is used. If the alternatives are within a subpattern (defined below), "succeeds" means matching the rest of the main pattern as well as the alternative in the subpattern.

INTERNAL OPTION SETTING The settings of PCRE_CASELESS, PCRE_MULTILINE, PCRE_DOTALL, and PCRE_EXTENDED can be changed from within the pattern by a sequence of Perl option letters enclosed between "(?" and ")". The option letters are i for PCRE_CASELESS m for PCRE_MULTILINE s for PCRE_DOTALL x for PCRE_EXTENDED For example, (?im) sets caseless, multiline matching. It is also possible to unset these options by preceding the letter with a hyphen, and a combined setting and unsetting such as (?im-sx), which sets PCRE_CASELESS and PCRE_MULTILINE while unsetting PCRE_DOTALL and PCRE_EXTENDED, is also permitted. If a letter appears both before and after the hyphen, the option is unset. The scope of these option changes depends on where in the pattern the setting occurs. For settings that are outside any subpattern (defined below), the effect is the same as if the options were set or unset at the start of matching. The following patterns all behave in exactly the same way: (?i)abc a(?i)bc ab(?i)c abc(?i) which in turn is the same as compiling the pattern abc with PCRE_CASELESS set. In other words, such "top level" settings apply to the whole pattern (unless there are other changes inside subpatterns). If there is more than one set-

663

PCRE

ting of the same option at top level, the rightmost setting is used. If an option change occurs inside a subpattern, the effect is different. This is a change of behaviour in Perl 5.005. An option change inside a subpattern affects only that part of the subpattern that follows it, so (a(?i)b)c matches abc and aBc and no other strings (assuming PCRE_CASELESS is not used). By this means, options can be made to have different settings in different parts of the pattern. Any changes made in one alternative do carry on into subsequent branches within the same subpattern. For example, (a(?i)b|c) matches "ab", "aB", "c", and "C", even though when matching "C" the first branch is abandoned before the option setting. This is because the effects of option settings happen at compile time. There would be some very weird behaviour otherwise. The PCRE-specific options PCRE_UNGREEDY and PCRE_EXTRA can be changed in the same way as the Perl-compatible options by using the characters U and X respectively. The (?X) flag setting is special in that it must always occur earlier in the pattern than any of the additional features it turns on, even when it is at top level. It is best put at the start.

SUBPATTERNS Subpatterns are delimited by parentheses (round brackets), which can be nested. Marking part of a pattern as a subpattern does two things: 1. It localizes a set of alternatives. For example, the pattern cat(aract|erpillar|)

664

PCRE

matches one of the words "cat", "cataract", or "caterpillar". Without the parentheses, it would match "cataract", "erpillar" or the empty string. 2. It sets up the subpattern as a capturing subpattern (as defined above). When the whole pattern matches, that portion of the subject string that matched the subpattern is passed back to the caller via the ovector argument of pcre_exec(). Opening parentheses are counted from left to right (starting from 1) to obtain the numbers of the capturing subpatterns. For example, if the string "the red king" is matched against the pattern the ((red|white) (king|queen)) the captured substrings are "red king", "red", and "king", and are numbered 1, 2, and 3. The fact that plain parentheses fulfil two functions is not always helpful. There are often times when a grouping subpattern is required without a capturing requirement. If an opening parenthesis is followed by "?:", the subpattern does not do any capturing, and is not counted when computing the number of any subsequent capturing subpatterns. For example, if the string "the white queen" is matched against the pattern the ((?:red|white) (king|queen)) the captured substrings are "white queen" and "queen", and are numbered 1 and 2. The maximum number of captured substrings is 99, and the maximum number of all subpatterns, both capturing and non-capturing, is 200. As a convenient shorthand, if any option settings are required at the start of a non-capturing subpattern, the option letters may appear between the "?" and the ":". Thus the two patterns (?i:saturday|sunday) (?:(?i)saturday|sunday)

665

PCRE

match exactly the same set of strings. Because alternative branches are tried from left to right, and options are not reset until the end of the subpattern is reached, an option setting in one branch does affect subsequent branches, so the above patterns match "SUNDAY" as well as "Saturday".

REPETITION Repetition is specified by quantifiers, which can follow any of the following items: a single character, possibly escaped the . metacharacter a character class a back reference (see next section) a parenthesized subpattern (unless it is an assertion see below) The general repetition quantifier specifies a minimum and maximum number of permitted matches, by giving the two numbers in curly brackets (braces), separated by a comma. The numbers must be less than 65536, and the first must be less than or equal to the second. For example: z{2,4} matches "zz", "zzz", or "zzzz". A closing brace on its own is not a special character. If the second number is omitted, but the comma is present, there is no upper limit; if the second number and the comma are both omitted, the quantifier specifies an exact number of required matches. Thus [aeiou]{3,} matches at least 3 successive vowels, but may match many more, while \d{8} matches exactly 8 digits. An opening curly bracket that appears in a position where a quantifier is not allowed, or one that does not match the syntax of a quantifier, is taken as a literal character. For example, {,6} is not a quantif-

666

PCRE

ier, but a literal string of four characters. The quantifier {0} is permitted, causing the expression to behave as if the previous item and the quantifier were not present. For convenience (and historical compatibility) the three most common quantifiers have single-character abbreviations: * is equivalent to {0,} + is equivalent to {1,} ? is equivalent to {0,1} It is possible to construct infinite loops by following a subpattern that can match no characters with a quantifier that has no upper limit, for example: (a?)* Earlier versions of Perl and PCRE used to give an error at compile time for such patterns. However, because there are cases where this can be useful, such patterns are now accepted, but if any repetition of the subpattern does in fact match no characters, the loop is forcibly broken. By default, the quantifiers are "greedy", that is, they match as much as possible (up to the maximum number of permitted times), without causing the rest of the pattern to fail. The classic example of where this gives problems is in trying to match comments in C programs. These appear between the sequences /* and */ and within the sequence, individual * and / characters may appear. An attempt to match C comments by applying the pattern /\*.*\*/ to the string /* first command */ not comment /* second comment */ fails, because it matches the entire string due to the greediness of the .* item. However, if a quantifier is followed by a question mark,

667

PCRE

then it ceases to be greedy, and instead matches the minimum number of times possible, so the pattern /\*.*?\*/ does the right thing with the C comments. The meaning of the various quantifiers is not otherwise changed, just the preferred number of matches. Do not confuse this use of question mark with its use as a quantifier in its own right. Because it has two uses, it can sometimes appear doubled, as in \d??\d which matches one digit by preference, but can match two if that is the only way the rest of the pattern matches. If the PCRE_UNGREEDY option is set (an option which is not available in Perl) then the quantifiers are not greedy by default, but individual ones can be made greedy by following them with a question mark. In other words, it inverts the default behaviour. When a parenthesized subpattern is quantified with a minimum repeat count that is greater than 1 or with a limited maximum, more store is required for the compiled pattern, in proportion to the size of the minimum or maximum. If a pattern starts with .* or .{0,} and the PCRE_DOTALL option (equivalent to Perl’s /s) is set, thus allowing the . to match newlines, then the pattern is implicitly anchored, because whatever follows will be tried against every character position in the subject string, so there is no point in retrying the overall match at any position after the first. PCRE treats such a pattern as though it were preceded by \A. In cases where it is known that the subject string contains no newlines, it is worth setting PCRE_DOTALL when the pattern begins with .* in order to obtain this optimization, or alternatively using ^ to indicate anchoring explicitly. When a capturing subpattern is repeated, the value captured is the substring that matched the final iteration. For example, after

668

PCRE

(tweedle[dume]{3}\s*)+ has matched "tweedledum tweedledee" the value of the captured substring is "tweedledee". However, if there are nested capturing subpatterns, the corresponding captured values may have been set in previous iterations. For example, after /(a|(b))+/ matches "aba" the value of the second captured substring is "b".

BACK REFERENCES Outside a character class, a backslash followed by a digit greater than 0 (and possibly further digits) is a back reference to a capturing subpattern earlier (i.e. to its left) in the pattern, provided there have been that many previous capturing left parentheses. However, if the decimal number following the backslash is less than 10, it is always taken as a back reference, and causes an error only if there are not that many capturing left parentheses in the entire pattern. In other words, the parentheses that are referenced need not be to the left of the reference for numbers less than 10. See the section entitled "Backslash" above for further details of the handling of digits following a backslash. A back reference matches whatever actually matched the capturing subpattern in the current subject string, rather than anything matching the subpattern itself. So the pattern (sens|respons)e and \1ibility matches "sense and sensibility" and "response and responsibility", but not "sense and responsibility". If caseful matching is in force at the time of the back reference, then the case of letters is relevant. For example, ((?i)rah)\s+\1 matches "rah rah" and "RAH RAH", but not "RAH rah", even

669

PCRE

though the original capturing subpattern is matched caselessly. There may be more than one back reference to the same subpattern. If a subpattern has not actually been used in a particular match, then any back references to it always fail. For example, the pattern (a|(bc))\2 always fails if it starts to match "a" rather than "bc". Because there may be up to 99 back references, all digits following the backslash are taken as part of a potential back reference number. If the pattern continues with a digit character, then some delimiter must be used to terminate the back reference. If the PCRE_EXTENDED option is set, this can be whitespace. Otherwise an empty comment can be used. A back reference that occurs inside the parentheses to which it refers fails when the subpattern is first used, so, for example, (a\1) never matches. However, such references can be useful inside repeated subpatterns. For example, the pattern (a|b\1)+ matches any number of "a"s and also "aba", "ababaa" etc. At each iteration of the subpattern, the back reference matches the character string corresponding to the previous iteration. In order for this to work, the pattern must be such that the first iteration does not need to match the back reference. This can be done using alternation, as in the example above, or by a quantifier with a minimum of zero.

ASSERTIONS An assertion is a test on the characters following or preceding the current matching point that does not actually consume any characters. The simple assertions coded as \b, \B, \A, \Z, \z, ^ and $ are described above. More complicated assertions are coded as subpatterns. There are two kinds: those that look ahead of the current position in the subject string, and those that look behind it.

670

PCRE

An assertion subpattern is matched in the normal way, except that it does not cause the current matching position to be changed. Lookahead assertions start with (?= for positive assertions and (?! for negative assertions. For example, \w+(?=;) matches a word followed by a semicolon, but does not include the semicolon in the match, and foo(?!bar) matches any occurrence of "foo" that is not followed by "bar". Note that the apparently similar pattern (?!foo)bar does not find an occurrence of "bar" that is preceded by something other than "foo"; it finds any occurrence of "bar" whatsoever, because the assertion (?!foo) is always true when the next three characters are "bar". A lookbehind assertion is needed to achieve this effect. Lookbehind assertions start with (?<= for positive assertions and (? as in this example: (?>\d+)bar This kind of parenthesis "locks up" the part of the pattern it contains once it has matched, and a failure further into the pattern is prevented from backtracking into it. Backtracking past it to previous items, however, works as normal. An alternative description is that a subpattern of this type matches the string of characters that an identical standalone pattern would match, if anchored at the current point in the subject string. Once-only subpatterns are not capturing subpatterns. Simple cases such as the above example can be thought of as a maximizing repeat that must swallow everything it can. So,

673

PCRE

while both \d+ and \d+? are prepared to adjust the number of digits they match in order to make the rest of the pattern match, (?>\d+) can only match an entire sequence of digits. This construction can of course contain arbitrarily complicated subpatterns, and it can be nested. Once-only subpatterns can be used in conjunction with lookbehind assertions to specify efficient matching at the end of the subject string. Consider a simple pattern such as abcd$ when applied to a long string which does not match it. Because matching proceeds from left to right, PCRE will look for each "a" in the subject and then see if what follows matches the rest of the pattern. If the pattern is specified as ^.*abcd$ then the initial .* matches the entire string at first, but when this fails, it backtracks to match all but the last character, then all but the last two characters, and so on. Once again the search for "a" covers the entire string, from right to left, so we are no better off. However, if the pattern is written as ^(?>.*)(?<=abcd) then there can be no backtracking for the .* item; it can match only the entire string. The subsequent lookbehind assertion does a single test on the last four characters. If it fails, the match fails immediately. For long strings, this approach makes a significant difference to the processing time.

CONDITIONAL SUBPATTERNS It is possible to cause the matching process to obey a subpattern conditionally or to choose between two alternative subpatterns, depending on the result of an assertion, or whether a previous capturing subpattern matched or not. The

674

PCRE

two possible forms of conditional subpattern are (?(condition)yes-pattern) (?(condition)yes-pattern|no-pattern) If the condition is satisfied, the yes-pattern is used; otherwise the no-pattern (if present) is used. If there are more than two alternatives in the subpattern, a compile-time error occurs. There are two kinds of condition. If the text between the parentheses consists of a sequence of digits, then the condition is satisfied if the capturing subpattern of that number has previously matched. Consider the following pattern, which contains non-significant white space to make it more readable (assume the PCRE_EXTENDED option) and to divide it into three parts for ease of discussion: ( \( )? [^()]+ (?(1) \) )

The first part matches an optional opening parenthesis, and if that character is present, sets it as the first captured substring. The second part matches one or more characters that are not parentheses. The third part is a conditional subpattern that tests whether the first set of parentheses matched or not. If they did, that is, if subject started with an opening parenthesis, the condition is true, and so the yes-pattern is executed and a closing parenthesis is required. Otherwise, since no-pattern is not present, the subpattern matches nothing. In other words, this pattern matches a sequence of non-parentheses, optionally enclosed in parentheses. If the condition is not a sequence of digits, it must be an assertion. This may be a positive or negative lookahead or lookbehind assertion. Consider this pattern, again containing non-significant white space, and with the two alternatives on the second line: (?(?=[^a-z]*[a-z]) \d{2}[a-z]{3}-\d{2} | \d{2}-\d{2}-\d{2} ) The condition is a positive lookahead assertion that matches an optional sequence of non-letters followed by a letter. In

675

PCRE

other words, it tests for the presence of at least one letter in the subject. If a letter is found, the subject is matched against the first alternative; otherwise it is matched against the second. This pattern matches strings in one of the two forms dd-aaa-dd or dd-dd-dd, where aaa are letters and dd are digits.

COMMENTS The sequence (?# marks the start of a comment which continues up to the next closing parenthesis. Nested parentheses are not permitted. The characters that make up a comment play no part in the pattern matching at all. If the PCRE_EXTENDED option is set, an unescaped # character outside a character class introduces a comment that continues up to the next newline character in the pattern.

PERFORMANCE Certain items that may appear in patterns are more efficient than others. It is more efficient to use a character class like [aeiou] than a set of alternatives such as (a|e|i|o|u). In general, the simplest construction that provides the required behaviour is usually the most efficient. Jeffrey Friedl’s book contains a lot of discussion about optimizing regular expressions for efficient performance. When a pattern begins with .* and the PCRE_DOTALL option is set, the pattern is implicitly anchored by PCRE, since it can match only at the start of a subject string. However, if PCRE_DOTALL is not set, PCRE cannot make this optimization, because the . metacharacter does not then match a newline, and if the subject string contains newlines, the pattern may match from the character immediately following one of them instead of from the very start. For example, the pattern (.*) second matches the subject "first\nand second" (where \n stands for a newline character) with the first captured substring being "and". In order to do this, PCRE has to retry the match

676

PCRE

starting after every newline in the subject. If you are using such a pattern with subject strings that do not contain newlines, the best performance is obtained by setting PCRE_DOTALL, or starting the pattern with ^.* to indicate explicit anchoring. That saves PCRE from having to scan along the subject looking for a newline to restart at.

677

XLVI. PHP options & information

678

error_log (PHP3 , PHP4 )
send an error message somewhere
int error_log (string message, int message_type [, string destination [, string extra_headers]])

Sends an error message to the web server’s error log, a TCP port or to a file. The first parameter, message, is the error message that should be logged. The second parameter, message_type says where the message should go: Table 1. error_log() log types 0 message is sent to PHP’s system logger, using the Operating System’s system logging mechanism or a file, depending on what the error_log configuration directive is set to. message is sent by email to the address in the destination parameter. This is the only message type where the fourth parameter, extra_headers is used. This message type uses the same internal function as Mail() does. message is sent through the PHP debugging connection. This option is only available if remote debugging has been enabled. In this case, the destination parameter specifies the host name or IP address and optionally, port number, of the socket receiving the debug information. message is appended to the file destination.

1

2

3

679

PHP options/info

Example 1. error_log() examples
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18

// Send notification through the server log if we can not // connect to the database. if (!Ora_Logon($username, $password)) { error_log("Oracle database not available!", 0); } // Notify administrator by email if we run out of FOO if (!($foo = allocate_new_foo()) { error_log("Big trouble, we’re all out of FOOs!", 1, "operator@mydomain.com"); } // other ways of calling error_log(): error_log("You messed up!", 2, "127.0.0.1:7000"); error_log("You messed up!", 2, "loghost"); error_log("You messed up!", 3, "/var/tmp/my-errors.log");

error_reporting (PHP3 , PHP4 )
set which PHP errors are reported
int error_reporting ([int level])

Sets PHP’s error reporting level and returns the old level. The error reporting level is a bitmask of the following values (follow the links for the internal values to get their meanings): Table 1. error_reporting() bit values value 1 2 4 8 16 32 internal name E_ERROR E_WARNING E_PARSE E_NOTICE E_CORE_ERROR E_CORE_WARNING

680

PHP options/info

extension_loaded (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
find out whether an extension is loaded
bool extension_loaded (string name)

Returns true if the extension identified by name is loaded. You can see the names of various extensions by using phpinfo(). See also phpinfo().
Note: This function was added in 3.0.10.

getenv (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get the value of an environment variable
string getenv (string varname)

Returns the value of the environment variable varname, or false on an error.
1 2 $ip = getenv("REMOTE_ADDR"); // get the ip number of the user 3

You can see a list of all the environmental variables by using phpinfo(). You can find out what many of them mean by taking a look at the CGI specification (http://hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu/cgi/), specifically the page on environmental variables (http://hoohoo.ncsa.uiuc.edu/cgi/env.html).

get_cfg_var (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get the value of a PHP configuration option.
string get_cfg_var (string varname)

Returns the current value of the PHP configuration variable specified by varname, or false if an error occurs.

681

PHP options/info

It will not return configuration information set when the PHP was compiled, or read from an Apache configuration file (using the php3_configuration_option directives). To check whether the system is using a configuration file, try retrieving the value of the cfg_file_path configuration setting. If this is available, a configuration file is being used.

get_current_user (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get the name of the owner of the current PHP script.
string get_current_user (void)

Returns the name of the owner of the current PHP script. See also getmyuid(), getmypid(), getmyinode(), and getlastmod().

get_magic_quotes_gpc (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 )
Get the current active configuration setting of magic quotes gpc.
long get_magic_quotes_gpc (void)

Returns the current active configuration setting of magic_quotes_gpc. (0 for off, 1 for on). See also get_magic_quotes_runtime(), set_magic_quotes_runtime().

get_magic_quotes_runtime (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 )
Get the current active configuration setting of magic_quotes_runtime.
long get_magic_quotes_runtime (void)

Returns the current active configuration setting of magic_quotes_runtime. (0 for off, 1 for on). See also get_magic_quotes_gpc(), set_magic_quotes_runtime().

682

PHP options/info

getlastmod (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get time of last page modification.
int getlastmod (void)

Returns the time of the last modification of the current page. The value returned is a Unix timestamp, suitable for feeding to date(). Returns false on error. Example 1. getlastmod() example
1 2 // outputs e.g. ’Last modified: March 04 1998 20:43:59.’ 3 echo "Last modified: ".date( "F d Y H:i:s.", getlastmod() ); 4

See alse date(), getmyuid(), get_current_user(), getmyinode(), and getmypid().

getmyinode (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get the inode of the current script.
int getmyinode (void)

Returns the current script’s inode, or false on error. See also getmyuid(), get_current_user(), getmypid(), and getlastmod().
Note: This function is not supported on Windows systems.

getmypid (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get PHP’s process ID.
int getmypid (void)

Returns the current PHP process ID, or false on error.

683

PHP options/info

Note that when running as a server module, separate invocations of the script are not guaranteed to have distinct pids. See also getmyuid(), get_current_user(), getmyinode(), and getlastmod().

getmyuid (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get PHP script owner’s UID.
int getmyuid (void)

Returns the user ID of the current script, or false on error. See also getmypid(), get_current_user(), getmyinode(), and getlastmod().

getrusage (PHP3 >= 3.0.7, PHP4 >= 4.0b2)
Get the current resource usages.
array getrusage ([int who])

This is an interface to getrusage(2). It returns an associative array containing the data returned from the system call. If who is 1, getrusage will be called with RUSAGE_CHILDREN. All entries are accessible by using their documented field names. Example 1. Getrusage Example
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

$dat echo echo echo echo

= getrusage(); $dat["ru_nswap"]; $dat["ru_majflt"]; $dat["ru_utime.tv_sec"]; $dat["ru_utime.tv_usec"];

# # # #

number of number of user time user time

swaps page faults used (seconds) used (microseconds)

See your system’s man page for more details.

684

PHP options/info

phpinfo (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Output lots of PHP information.
int phpinfo (void)

Outputs a large amount of information about the current state of PHP. This includes information about PHP compilation options and extensions, the PHP version, server information and environment (if compiled as a module), the PHP environment, OS version information, paths, master and local values of configuration options, HTTP headers, and the GNU Public License. See also phpversion().

phpversion (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Get the current PHP version.
string phpversion (void)

Returns a string containing the version of the currently running PHP parser. Example 1. phpversion() example
1 2 // prints e.g. ’Current PHP version: 3.0rel-dev’ 3 echo "Current PHP version: ".phpversion(); 4

See also phpinfo().

php_logo_guid (PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Get the logo guid
string php_logo_guid (void)

Note: This funcionality was added in PHP4 Beta 4.

685

PHP options/info

putenv (PHP3 , PHP4 )
Set the value of an environment variable.
void putenv (string setting)

Adds setting to the environment. Example 1. Setting an Environment Variable
1 2 putenv("UNIQID=$uniqid"); 3

set_magic_quotes_runtime (PHP3 >= 3.0.6, PHP4 )
Set the current active configuration setting of magic_quotes_runtime.
long set_magic_quotes_runtime (int new_setting)

Set the current active configuration setting of magic_quotes_runtime. (0 for off, 1 for on) See also get_magic_quotes_gpc(), get_magic_quotes_runtime().

set_time_limit (PHP3 , PHP4 )
limit the maximum execution time
void set_time_limit (int seconds)

Set the number of seconds a script is allowed to run. If this is reached, the script returns a fatal error. The default limit is 30 seconds or, if it exists, the max_execution_time value defined in the configuration file. If seconds is set to zero, no time limit is imposed. When called, set_time_limit() restarts the timeout counter from zero. In other words, if the timeout is the default 30 seconds, and 25 seconds into script execution a call such as set_time_limit(20) is made, the script will run for a total of 45 seconds before timing out.

686

PHP options/info

Note that set_time_limit() has no effect when PHP is running in safe mode. There is no workaround other than turning off safe mode or changing the time limit in the configuration file.

zend_logo_guid (PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Get the zend guid
string zend_logo_guid (void)

Note: This funcionality was added in PHP4 Beta 4.

687

XLVII. POSIX functions
This module contains an interface to those functions defined in the IEEE 1003.1 (POSIX.1) standards document which are not accessible through other means. POSIX.1 for example defined the open(), read(), write() and close() functions, too, which traditionally have been part of PHP3 for a long time. Some more system specific functions have not been available before, though, and this module tries to remedy this by providing easy access to these functions.

688

posix_kill (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Send a signal to a process
bool posix_kill (int pid, int sig)

Send the signal sig to the process with the process identifier pid. Returns FALSE, if unable to send the signal, TRUE otherwise. See also the kill(2) manual page of your POSIX system, which contains additional information about negative process identifiers, the special pid 0, the special pid -1, and the signal number 0.

posix_getpid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the current process identifier
int posix_getpid (void )

Return the process identifier of the current process.

posix_getppid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the parent process identifier
int posix_getppid (void )

Return the process identifier of the parent process of the current process.

posix_getuid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the real user ID of the current process
int posix_getuid (void )

689

POSIX

Return the numeric real user ID of the current process. See also posix_getpwuid() for information on how to convert this into a useable username.

posix_geteuid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the effective user ID of the current process
int posix_geteuid (void )

Return the numeric effective user ID of the current process. See also posix_getpwuid() for information on how to convert this into a useable username.

posix_getgid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the real group ID of the current process
int posix_getgid (void )

Return the numeric real group ID of the current process. See also posix_getgrgid() for information on how to convert this into a useable group name.

posix_getegid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the effective group ID of the current process
int posix_getegid (void )

Return the numeric effective group ID of the current process. See also posix_getgrgid() for information on how to convert this into a useable group name.

posix_setuid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Set the effective UID of the current process

690

POSIX

bool posix_setuid (int uid)

Set the real user ID of the current process. This is a privileged function and you need appropriate privileges (usually root) on your system to be able to perform this function. Returns TRUE on success, FALSE otherwise. See also posix_setgid().

posix_setgid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Set the effective GID of the current process
bool posix_setgid (int gid)

Set the real group ID of the current process. This is a privileged function and you need appropriate privileges (usually root) on your system to be able to perform this function. The appropriate order of function calls is posix_setgid() first, posix_setuid() last. Returns TRUE on success, FALSE otherwise.

posix_getgroups (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the group set of the current process
array posix_getgroups (void )

Returns an array of integers containing the numeric group ids of the group set of the current process. See also posix_getgrgid() for information on how to convert this into useable group names.

posix_getlogin (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return login name
string posix_getlogin (void )

Returns the login name of the user owning the current process. See posix_getpwnam() for information how to get more information about this user.

691

POSIX

posix_getpgrp (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return the current process group identifier
int posix_getpgrp (void )

Return the process group identifier of the current process. See POSIX.1 and the getpgrp(2) manual page on your POSIX system for more information on process groups.

posix_setsid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Make the current process a session leader
int posix_setsid (void )

Make the current process a session leader. See POSIX.1 and the setsid(2) manual page on your POSIX system for more informations on process groups and job control. Returns the session id.

posix_setpgid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
set process group id for job control
int posix_setpgid (int pid, int pgid)

Let the process pid join the process group pgid. See POSIX.1 and the setsid(2) manual page on your POSIX system for more informations on process groups and job control. Returns TRUE on success, FALSE otherwise.

posix_getpgid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Get process group id for job control
int posix_getpgid (int pid)

692

POSIX

Returns the process group identifier of the process pid. This is not a POSIX function, but is common on BSD and System V systems. If your system does not support this function at system level, this PHP function will always return FALSE.

posix_getsid (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Get the current sid of the process
int posix_getsid (int pid)

Return the sid of the process pid. If pid is 0, the sid of the current process is returned. This is not a POSIX function, but is common on System V systems. If your system does not support this function at system level, this PHP function will always return FALSE.

posix_uname (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Get system name
array posix_uname (void )

Returns a hash of strings with information about the system. The indices of the hash are
• • • • •

sysname - operating system name (e.g. Linux) nodename - system name (e.g. valiant) release - operating system release (e.g. 2.2.10) version - operating system version (e.g. #4 Tue Jul 20 17:01:36 MEST 1999) machine - system architecture (e.g. i586)

Posix requires that you must not make any assumptions about the format of the values, e.g. you cannot rely on three digit version numbers or anything else returned by this function.

posix_times (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Get process times

693

POSIX

array posix_times (void )

Returns a hash of strings with information about the current process CPU usage. The indices of the hash are
• • • • •

ticks - the number of clock ticks that have elapsed since reboot. utime - user time used by the current process. stime - system time used by the current process. cutime - user time used by current process and children. cstime - system time used by current process and children.

posix_ctermid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Get path name of controlling terminal
string posix_ctermid (void )

Needs to be written.

posix_ttyname (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Determine terminal device name
string posix_ttyname (int fd)

Needs to be written.

posix_isatty (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Determine if a file descriptor is an interactive terminal
bool posix_isatty (int fd)

Needs to be written.

694

POSIX

posix_getcwd (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Pathname of current directory
string posix_getcwd (void )

Needs to be written ASAP.

posix_mkfifo (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Create a fifo special file (a named pipe)
bool posix_getcwd (string pathname, int mode)

Needs to be written ASAP..

posix_getgrnam (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return info about a group by name
array posix_getgrnam (string name)

Needs to be written.

posix_getgrgid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return info about a group by group id
array posix_getgrgid (int gid)

Needs to be written.

695

POSIX

posix_getpwnam (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return info about a user by username
array posix_getpwnam (string username)

Returns an associative array containing information about a user referenced by an alphanumeric username, passed in the username parameter. The array elements returned are: Table 1. The user information array Element name Description The name element contains the username of the user. This is a short, usually less than 16 character "handle" of the user, not her real, full name. This should be the same as the username parameter used when calling the function, and hence redundant. The passwd element contains the user’s password in an encrypted format. Often, for example on a system employing "shadow" passwords, an asterisk is returned instead. User ID of the user in numeric form. The group ID of the user. Use the function posix_getgrgid() to resolve the group name and a list of its members. GECOS is an obsolete term that refers to the finger information field on a Honeywell batch processing system. The field, however, lives on, and its contents have been formalized by POSIX. The field contains a comma separated list containing the user’s full name, office phone, office number, and home phone number. On most systems, only the user’s full name is available. This element contains the absolute path to the home directory of the user. The shell element contains the absolute path to the executable of the user’s default shell.

passwd

uid gid

gecos

dir shell

696

POSIX

posix_getpwuid (PHP3 >= 3.0.13, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return info about a user by user id
array posix_getpwuid (int uid)

Returns an associative array containing information about a user referenced by a numeric user ID, passed in the uid parameter. The array elements returned are: Table 1. The user information array Element name Description The name element contains the username of the user. This is a short, usually less than 16 character "handle" of the user, not her real, full name. The passwd element contains the user’s password in an encrypted format. Often, for example on a system employing "shadow" passwords, an asterisk is returned instead. User ID, should be the same as the uid parameter used when calling the function, and hence redundant. The group ID of the user. Use the function posix_getgrgid() to resolve the group name and a list of its members. GECOS is an obsolete term that refers to the finger information field on a Honeywell batch processing system. The field, however, lives on, and its contents have been formalized by POSIX. The field contains a comma separated list containing the user’s full name, office phone, office number, and home phone number. On most systems, only the user’s full name is available. This element contains the absolute path to the home directory of the user. The shell element contains the absolute path to the executable of the user’s default shell.

passwd

uid

gid

gecos

dir shell

697

POSIX

posix_getrlimit (PHP3 >= 3.0.10, PHP4 >= 4.0b4)
Return info about system ressource limits
array posix_getrlimit (void )

Needs to be written ASAP.

698

XLVIII. PostgreSQL functions
Postgres, developed originally in the UC Berkeley Computer Science Department, pioneered many of the object-relational concepts now becoming available in some commercial databases. It provides SQL92/SQL3 language support, transaction integrity, and type extensibility. PostgreSQL is a public-domain, open source descendant of this original Berkeley code. PostgreSQL is available without cost. The current version is available at www.PostgreSQL.org (http://www.postgresql.org/). Since version 6.3 (03/02/1998) PostgreSQL uses unix domain sockets. A table is shown below describing these new connection possibilities. This socket will be found in /tmp/.s.PGSQL.5432. This option can be enabled with the ’-i’ flag to postmaster and it’s meaning is: "listen on TCP/IP sockets as well as Unix domain sockets". Table 1. Postmaster and PHP Postmaster postmaster & postmaster -i & postmaster & PHP Status

pg_connect("", "", "", "", OK "dbname"); pg_connect("", "", "", "", OK "dbname"); pg_connect("localhost", "", "", Unable to connect to "", "dbname"); PostgreSQL server: connectDB() failed: Is the postmaster running and accepting TCP/IP (with -i) connection at ’localhost’ on port ’5432’? in /path/to/file.php3 on line 20. pg_
NameTypeLength
$column_name$column_type$column_size